Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit M12-159 - CITY OF TUKWILA - POOL
CITY OF TUKWILA POOL 4414 S 144 ST M12 -159 City oftukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Inspection Request Line: 206 - 431 -2451 Web site: http: / /www.TukwilaWA.gov MECHANICAL PERMIT Parcel No.: 1523049106 Address: 4414 S 144 ST TUKW Project Name: CITY OF TQKWILA - POOL Permit Number: M12 -159 Issue Date: 12/06/2012 Permit Expires On: 06/04/2013 Owner: Name: TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT Address: 4640 144TH ST , SEATTLE WA 98168 Contact Person: Name: DAVE ROBINAUGH Address: 5005 THIRD AV S , SEATTLE WA 98134 Email: DAVERO @MCKINSTRY.COM Contractor: Name: MCKINSTRY CO LLC Address: PO BOX 24567 , SEATTLE WA 98124 Contractor License No: MCKINCL942DW Phone: 206 - 832 -8352 Phone: 206 762 -3311 Expiration Date: 03/16/2014 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: REPLACE POOL CIRCULATION PUMP, HEATING PUMP AND CHEMICAL TREATMENT SYSTEM AND ASSOCIATED VALVES AND PIPING. PROVIDE NEW WATER METERS ON FILL AND DRAIN LINES. REPLACE POOL DRAINS AND INLETS AND ASSOCIATED PIPING. REPLACE BOILER BURNER AND PROVIDE COMBUSTION AIR DUCTING. REPLACE LOCKER ROOM FAN MOTORS. REPLACE HHW PUMP, AIR SEP AND EXPANSION TANK. REPAIR EXISTING AHU. UPGRADE DDC CONTROLS. Value of Mechanical: 195,760.00 Type of Fire Protection: UNKNOWN Electrical Service Provided by: Permit Center Authorized Signature: A ) Fees Collected: $2,293.56 International Mechanical Code Edition: 2009 Date: I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this mechanical permit and agree to the conditions on the back of this permit. Signature AAA-A -- 1 Date: 1'L lie / li-- Print Name: 1t vc— z O $t N AU G% id This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. Ann. IM(: -4 /1n M17 -1551 Printm- 17- nR -7n17 PERMIT CONDITIONS Permit No. M12 -159 1: ** *BUILDING DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * ** 2: No changes shall be made to the approved plans unless approved by the design professional in responsible charge and the Building Official. 3: All permits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be at the job site and available to the inspectors prior to start of any construction. These documents shall be maintained and made available until final inspection approval is granted. 4: All construction shall be done in conformance with the approved plans and the requirements of the International Building Code or International Residential Code, International Mechanical Code, Washington State Energy Code. 5: Manufacturers installation instructions shall be available on the job site at the time of inspection. 6: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206- 431 - 3670). 7: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206- 431 - 3670). 8: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. or. IMC -4/1 n M12 -15,54 Printprl 17 -nR -2017 CITY OF TUK A Community Development Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http: / /www.Tukwi IaW A. gov Mechanical Permit No. f'i. (, >--(5---- Project No. d ( )"-' ( S Date Application Accepted: f ' (O- L Date Application Expires: 1--k ( V (For office use only) MECHANICAL PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. * *please print ** SITE LOCATION Site Address: Tenant Name: 4414 South 144th City of Tukwila King Co Assessor's Tax No.: 1523049106 Suite Number: New Tenant: PROPERTY OWNER Name: Dave Robinaugh Name: City of Tukwila _ Address: 4414 South 144th Email: davero @mckinstry.com City: Tukwila State: WA Zip: 98168 CONTACT PERSON - person receiving all project communication Name: Dave Robinaugh Address: 5005 3rd Ave S City: Seattle State: WA Zip: 98134 Phone: (206) 832 -8352 Fax: Email: davero @mckinstry.com Floor: ❑ Yes MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Phone: Fax: Contr Reg No.: Exp Date: Tukwila Business License No.: Valuation of project (contractor's bid price): $ 195,760 Describe the scope of work in detail: Rplce pool circ pump, heating pump and chemical treatment system and associated valves and piping. Provide new water meters on fill and drain lines. Rplce pool drains and inlets and associated piping. Rplce boiler burner and provide combustion air ducting. Rplce locker room fan motors. Rplce HHW pump, air sep, and exp tank.- Repair existing AHU. Upgrade DDC controls. Use: Residential: New ❑ Commercial: New Fuel Type: Electric ❑ Gas Replacement Replacement Other: H:41pplications\Forms- Applications On Line \2011 Applications\Mechanical Permit Application Revised 8- 9- 11.docx Revised: August 2011 bh Page 1 of 2 Indicate type of mechanical work being installed and the quantity below: Unit Type Qty Furnace <100k btu Furnace >100k btu Floor furnace 7 Suspended/wall/floor mounted heater 1 Appliance vent Repair or addition to heat/refrig/cooling system 1 Air handling unit <10,000 cfm Unit Type Qty Air handling unit >10,000 cfm Evaporator cooler 7 Ventilation fan connected to single duct 1 Ventilation system Hood and duct Incinerator — domestic Incinerator — comm/industrial Unit Type Qty Fire damper Diffuser Thermostat 7 Wood/gas stove Emergency generator Other mechanical equipment 2 Boiler /Compressor Qty 0 -3 hp /100,000 btu 3 -15 hp /500,000 btu 15 -30 hp /1,000,000 btu 30 -50 hp /1,750,000 btu 50+ hp /1,750,000 btu PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES - Value of construction — in all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the permit center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of plan review — applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The building official may grant one extension of time for additional periods not to exceed 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING_OWNER OR TH,ORIZED AGENT: Signature: Date: 10/10/2012 Print Name: Dave Robinaugh Day Telephone: (206) 832 -8352 Mailing Address: 5005 3rd Ave S H:Wpplications\Forms- Applications On Line 12011 Applications 'Mechanical Permit Application Revised 8- 9- 11.docx Revised: August 2011 bh Seattle WA 98134 City State Zip Page 2 of 2 f 40 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.TukwilaWA.gov Parcel No.: 1523049106 Address: 4414 S 144 ST TUKW Suite No: Applicant: CITY OF TUKWILA - POOL RECEIPT Permit Number: M12 -159 Status: PENDING Applied Date: 10/10/2012 Issue Date: Receipt No.: R12 -03091 Payment Amount: $1,834.85 Initials: JEM Payment Date: 11/13/2012 09:24 AM User ID: 1165 Balance: $0.00 Payee: PARKS ACCT NO. 11263001.1000.107 TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount Payment Other Authorization No. ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description 1,834.85 Account Code Current Pmts MECHANICAL - NONRES 000.322.102.00.00 1,834.85 Total: $1,834.85 rinr: Rarpint_f1R Printpri. 11 -13 -2n 12 • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.TukwilaWA.gov Parcel No.: 1523049106 Address: 4414 S 144 ST TUKW Suite No: Applicant: CITY OF TUKWILA - POOL RECEIPT Permit Number: M12 -159 Status: PENDING Applied Date: 10/10/2012 Issue Date: Receipt No.: R12 -02827 Payment Amount: $458.71 Initials: WER Payment Date: 10/10/2012 02:45 PM User ID: 1655 Balance: $1,834.85 Payee: ANDREW GRAY TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount Payment Credit Crd MC Authorization No. 02848P ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description 458.71 Account Code Current Pmts PLAN CHECK - NONRES 000.345.830 458.71 Total: $458.71 doc: Receipt -06 Printed: 10 -10 -2012 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit (I 2- INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 r (206) 431 -3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 Project: 0-1-7 (I fit- ;110,01Cn Type of Inspection: FIN) Ai, i 1 J f trte►�'1� C'6'u1, tFi/� �-a ti r1 / Address: 14`1 II-1 S t LN Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted:.. — 3 -7...-- t 3 . --1' Requester: Phone No: a-0(0 -9 3b k Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: ) hrdllck -►N - 0-#f. 06 i 1 J f trte►�'1� C'6'u1, tFi/� �-a ti r1 / , . i Inspector: 1 AA/ Nev.-. 1.4)., e....ja... 0 1 FEE REQUIRED. jrior to next inspection, fee must be pa at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., S ite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date: Z-22-I OTTO ROSEN bl & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical EngineegreONstrOV Inspection & Materials Testing STRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT Report Number: 84448 Project: Costco Tukwila Optical Address: 441 Costco Drive, Tukwila Client: Skyline Maintenance Services, Inc. dba Coil T Permit Number: M12-059 Job Number: 12 -0320 3808 North Sullivan Road 5 -N Spokane, WA 99216 Client Address: Inspections Performed Steel Decking Structural Steel Fabrication Structural Steel Erection x Other (specify): Other (specify): Inspector and Date- Remarks — — - Rick Hardy 08/10/2012 Performed visual inspection of structural steel erection on the following: • Roof level truss joist • Crimped web reinforcing • Addition of 3/16" plate, one (1) each on each side of truss top chords • Top plate is 1/e' fillet by 3" length and the bottom of plate is a 3/16" fillet by 3" length As per details 2 and 3 of partial roof framing plan and E2 by Henry Pao at Engineers Northwest, Inc. P.S. Above welds conform to AWS D1.1 -2010. WABO welders: James T. Davidson, ID #W149597, expires 10/2012. CONFORMS Copies to: Client x Engineer Owner x Contractor Architect x Building Dept. Others Technical Responsibility: Jeff Rabe, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 — Phone (206) 725 -4600 or 1- 888 - OTTO -4 -US — Fax (206) 723 -2221 Form No.: ADMIN -63 -05 (Rev 10/10) FILE COPY BURNER FUEL INPUT AIR REQUIRED Max Friction loss Eq Rectangle Round duct 90° Elbow 45° Elbow Max length size MBtu /hr CFM "w.c. duct (LxW) inch 0 inch Eq. length Eq. length RS 28 617 787 128.2 163.5 0.44 5 x 6 6 10 feet 5 feet 100 feet 787 1,232 163.5 256.0 0.44 6 x 6 RS 38 880 1,371 182.8 284.8 0.44 6 x 6 7 10 feet '' 5 feet 100 feet I 1,371 1,665 I 284.8 345.9 0.44 7 x 7 RS 50 1 '°99 - 1,904 228.3 395.6 - , 0.38 7 x 7 8 10 feet 5feet 100 feet 1,904 2,201 395.6 457.3 0.38 8 x 8 9 RS 70 1,761 8 x 8 10 feet 5 feet 100 feet I 4112 = 3,084 I 501.1 640.7 0.45 9 x 9 0 RS 100 2,644 3,047 549.3 633.0 0.50 9 x 9 10 10 feet 5 feet 100 feet I 3,047 4,405 I 633.0 915.2 0.50 10 x 11 12 RS 130 0.38 10 feet 5 feet 100 feet I _ 4,571 5,545 I 949.7 1152 0 0.38 12 x 12 14 Reference HHV = 1010btu /ft3 Reference temperature : 60 °F Reference excess air : 25% Air required at 25% exess air (3,6% 02) and 60°F = 12,59 Ft3 /Ft3 'REVIEWED FOR E COMPLIANCE APPROVED yak° City of Tukwila WILDING DIVISION NOV 2 8 2012 RECEIVED CITY OF TUK WILA NOV 13 2012 PERMIT CENTER CORRECTION LTR# -1 MV 1G FILE COPY • 11 I1 Instruction Manual Rim a■ ■■■■ Ashar►d i N -37f�t ' II. GAS -FIRED C ®L US ASME CRN LISTED ANSI / NSF 5 W WARNING: If the information in these instructions is not followed exactly, a fire or explosion may result causing property damage, personal injury or death. — Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in vicinity of this or any other applian — WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS: MODELS BTH- 300A /400A /500A SERIES 100 & 101 INSTALLATION - OPERATION - SERVICE - MAINTENANCE - LIMITED WARRANTY EFFICIENCY RATING CERTIFIED ama eR • Do not try to light any appliance. • Do not touch any electrical switch not use any phone in your building • Immediately call your gas sup from a neighbor's phone. Follow gas supplier's instructions. • If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department. IEWED FOR COMPLIANCE PPROVED OV 2 8 2012 ity of Tukwila DING DIVISION — Installation and service must be performed by a qualified installer, service agency or the gas supplier. Thank you for buying this energy efficient water heater. We appreciate your confidence in our products. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1( 1 1 1 • A..O.Smith CYt1111)0 REt;i:lvsj . r.IN OF TUKW' LA NUV 132012 PERMIT CENTER Read and understand this instruction manual and the safety messages herein before installing, operating or servicing this water heater. Failure to follow these instructions and safety messages could result in death or serious injury. This manual must remain with the water heater. PLACE THESE INSTRUCTIONS ADJACENT TO HEATER AND NOTIFY OWNER TO KEEP FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. PRINTED IN THE U.S.A. 1109 CORRECTION LTR #, i TABLE OF CONTENTS SAFE INSTALLATION, USE AND SERVICE 3 Supply Gas Line Installation GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION 4 Supply Gas Regulator Installation Precautions 4 Electrical Wiring INTRODUCTION 6 Power Supply Connections Qualifications 6 Enable /Disable Circuit.. COMM TM & BACnet Compatible 6 Water Line Connections Preparing For The Installation 6 T &P Valve Discharge Pipe FEATURES AND COMPONENTS 7 TEMPERATURE REGULATION Basic Operation 7 High Temperature Limit Control (ECO) Top View 8 Thermostat Control Side Views 9 CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS 10 Control System Navigation Rough In Dimensions 10 The Desktop Screen ..................... . Recovery Capacities 10 Status Icons. . Locating The Water Heater 11 User Settings & Control System Menus Clearance To Combustible Materials 11 Temperatures Menu Service Clearance 11 Heater Status Menu Insulation Blankets 12 Display Settings INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 13 Heater Information Gas Pressure Requirements 13 Current Fault Fault History Supply Gas Line 13 Fault Occurrence Supply Gas Regulator 13 Restore Factory Defaults Power Supply 13 Service Contact Information Mixing Valves 14 START UP Dishwashing Machines 14 Initial Start Up Closed Water Systems 14 Supply Gas Pressure Adjustment. Thermal Expansion - .14 . Manifold Gas Pressure Adjustment . Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve A{511t •,Cliecking The Firing Rate 5 r :z, Condensate Drain 16+ High Altitude Installations Air Requirements ;17,. ; L' IGHTING THE WATER HEATER Commonwealth of Massachusetts 20 Lighting & Operation Label 37 38 39 39 39 40 40 41 41 41 42 42 42 43 45 45 46 47 47 48 48 48 48 49 50 50 51 51 52 52 53 53 54 54 54 55 56 . 56 56 VENTING INSTALLATION ors 21,^1 tTROUBLESHOOTING 21 Installation Checklist 21 Sequence Of Operation • .t.. • 1�,� =_ ;� •••• {•••• ... 21, Sequence Of Operation Flow Chart • '`I;' . ��, `i1E Operational Problems - Rough Starting, Rough Operation ....... Momentary Ignition. Not Enough Or No Hot Water Fault And Alert Conditions 57 Fault Conditions 57 Alert Conditions 57 Resetting Control System Lock Outs . 57 Diagnostic Checks 57 Fault And Alert Messages 58 MAINTENANCE 60 Maintenance Schedule 60 DIAGRAMS 63 CCB - Central Control Board Layout 63 BTH 300 Wiring Diagram 64 BTH 400, 500 Wiring Diagram 65 35 Circulation Pump Wiring Diagrams 66 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION 36 Water Piping Diagrams 67 Iternate Condensate Line 36 .LIMITED WARRANTY 75 rM 1� General Venting Information Category IV Appliance.. Power Vent Configuration Direct Vent Configuration General Venting Instructions Venting Requirements 22 Maximum Equivalent Lengths :.... 22 Minimum Equivalent Lengths 22 Maximum Number Of Elbows.... 22 Venting Installation Sequence 23 Power Vent Installation 23 Direct Vent Installation 23 Vertical Termination Installation 24 Sidewall Termination Installation 26 Concentric Termination Installation 27 Multiple Concentric Termination Clearances 30 Multiple Concentric Termination Arrangements.. 31 Venting Arrangements 32 Termination Clearances Sidewall Power Vent 34 Termination Clearances Sidewall Direct Vent •I4LYf� SAFE INSTALLATION, USE AND SERVICE The proper installation, use and servicing of this water heater is extremely important to your safety and the safety of others. Many safety- related messages and instructions have been provided in this manual and on your own water heater to warn you and others of a potential injury hazard. Read and obey all safety messages and instructions throughout this manual. It is very important that the meaning of each safety message is understood by you and others who install, use, or service this water heater. This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death. A DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in injury or death. AWARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in injury or death. ACAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. CAUTION CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in property damage. All safety messages will generally tell you about the type of hazard, what can happen if you do not follow the safety message, and how to avoid the risk of injury. The California Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act requires the Governor of California to publish a list of substances known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or other reproductive harm, and requires businesses to warn of potential exposure to such substances. This product contains a chemical known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or other reproductive harm. This appliance can cause low level exposure to some of the substances listed in the Act. APPROVALS ASME CRN ANSI / NSF 5 3 GAS -FIRED C LISTED US GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION PRECAUTIONS DO NOT USE THIS APPLIANCE IF ANY PART HAS BEEN UNDER WATER. Immediately call a qualified service agency to inspect the appliance and to make a determination on what steps should be taken next. If the unit is exposed to the following, do not operate heater until all corrective steps have been made by a qualified service agency. 1. External fire. 2. Damage. 3. Firing without water. GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS This water heater must be grounded in accordance with the National Electrical Code and /or local codes. These must be followed in all cases. Failure to ground this water heater properly may also cause erratic control system operation. This water heater must be connected to a grounded metal, permanent wiring system; or an equipment grounding conductor must be run with the circuit conductors and connected to the equipment grounding terminal or lead on the water heater. HYDROGEN GAS FLAMMABLE AWARNING Explosion Hazard • Flammable hydrogen gases may be present. • Keep all ignition sources away from faucet when turning on hot water. Hydrogen gas can be produced in a hot water system served by this appliance that has not been used for a long period of time (generally two weeks or more). Hydrogen gas is extremely flammable. To reduce the risk of injury under these conditions, it is recommended that a hot water faucet served by this appliance be opened for several minutes before using any electrical appliance connected to the hot water system. If hydrogen is present there will probably be an unusual sound such as air escaping through the pipe as the water begins to flow. THERE SHOULD BE NO SMOKING OR OPEN FLAME NEAR THE FAUCET AT THE TIME IT IS OPEN. Verify the power to the water heater is turned off before performing any service procedures. Read and understand this instruction manual and the safety messages herein before installing, operating or servicing this water heater. Failure to follow these instructions and safety messages could result in death or serious injury. This manual must remain with the water heater. ADANGER Water temperature over 125 °F (52 °C) can cause severe burns instantly resulting in severe injury or death. Children, the elderly and the physically or mentally disabled are at highest risk for scald injury. Feel water before bathing or showering. Temperature limiting devices such as mixing valves must be installed when required by codes and to ensure safe temperatures at fixtures. 4 AWARNING Explosion Hazard • Overheated water can cause water tank explosion. • Properly sized temperature and pressure relief valve must be installed in the opening provided. CAUTION Improper installation, use and service may result in property damage. • Do not operate water heater if flood damaged: • Inspect and anode rods regularly, replace if damaged. • Install in location with drainage. • Fill tank with water before operation. • Properly sized thermal expansion tanks are required on all closed water systems. Refer to this manual for installation and service. GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION AWARNING Fire or Explosion Hazard • Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. • Avoid all ignition sources if you smell gas. • Do not expose water heater controls to excessive gas pressure. • Use only the gas shown on the water heater rating label. • Maintain required clearances to combustibles. • Keep ignition sources away from faucets after extended periods of non -use. Read instruction manual before installing, using or servicing water heater. AWARNING Breathing Hazard - Carbon Monoxide Gas :ei;: �•:. 'D`••' •Y`'~='3'' •Vii; , •� ? .s. 6 �: • • Do not obstruct water heater air intake with insulating blanket. • Gas and carbon monoxide detectors are available. • Install water heater in accordance with the instruction manual. Breathing carbon monoxide can cause brain damage or death. Always read and understand instruction manual. Property Damage Hazard • All water heaters eventually leak. • Do not install without adequate drainage. AWARNING Electrical Shock Hazard • Turn off power to the water heater before performing any service. • Label all wires prior to disconnecting when performing service. Wiring errors can cause improper and dangerous operation. • Verify proper operation after servicing. • Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. 5 Fire Hazard For continued protection against risk of fire: • Do not install water heater on carpeted floor. • Do not operate water heater if flood damaged. Fire and Explosion Hazard • Do not use water heater with any gas other than the gas shown on the rating label. • Excessive gas pressure to gas valve can cause serious injury or death. • Turn off gas lines during installation. • Contact a qualified installer or service agency for installation and service. BWARNING Jumping out control circuits or components can result in property damage, personal injury or death. • Service should only be performed by a qualified service agent using proper test equipment. • Altering the water heater controls and /or wiring in any way could result in permanent damage to the controls or water heater and is not covered under the limited warranty. • Altering the water heater controls and /or wiring in any way . could result in altering the ignition sequence allowing gas to flow to the main burner before the hot surface igniter is at ignition temperature causing delayed ignition which can cause a fire or explosion. Any bypass or alteration of the water heater controls and /or wiring will result in voiding the appliance warranty. AWARNING Fire and Explosion Hazard • Use joint compound or Teflon tape compatible with propane gas. • Leak test before placing the water heater in operation. • Disconnect gas piping and main gas shutoff valve before leak testing. _ • Install sediment trap in accordance with NFPA 54. Fire and Explosion Hazard • Do not use water heater with any gas other than the gas shown on the rating label. • Excessive gas pressure to gas valve can cause serious injury or death. • Turn off gas lines during installation. • Contact a qualified installer or service agency for installation and service. BWARNING Jumping out control circuits or components can result in property damage, personal injury or death. • Service should only be performed by a qualified service agent using proper test equipment. • Altering the water heater controls and /or wiring in any way could result in permanent damage to the controls or water heater and is not covered under the limited warranty. • Altering the water heater controls and /or wiring in any way . could result in altering the ignition sequence allowing gas to flow to the main burner before the hot surface igniter is at ignition temperature causing delayed ignition which can cause a fire or explosion. Any bypass or alteration of the water heater controls and /or wiring will result in voiding the appliance warranty. INTRODUCTION Thank You for purchasing this water heater. Properly installed and maintained, it should give you years of trouble free service. ABBREVIATIONS USED Abbreviations found in this Instruction Manual include : • ANSI - American National Standards Institute • ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers • GAMA - Gas Appliance Manufacturer's Association • NEC - National Electrical Code • NFPA - National Fire Protection Association • UL - Underwriters Laboratory • CSA - Canadian Standards Association QUALIFICATIONS QUALIFIED INSTALLER OR SERVICE AGENCY Installation and service of this water heater requires ability equivalent to that of a Qualified Agency (as defined by ANSI below) in the field involved. Installation skills such as plumbing, air supply, venting, gas supply and electrical supply are required in addition to electrical testing skills when performing service. ANSI Z223.1 2006 Sec. 3.3.83: "Qualified Agency" - "Any individual, firm, corporation or company that either in person or through a representative is engaged in and is responsible for (a) the installation, testing or replacement of gas piping or (b) the connection, installation, testing, repair or servicing of appliances and equipment; that is experienced in such work; that is familiar with all precautions required; and that has complied with all the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction." If you are not qualified (as defined by ANSI above) and licensed or certified as required by the authority having jurisdiction to perform a given task do not attempt to perform any of the procedures described in this manual. If you do not understand the instructions given in this manual do not attempt to perform any procedures outlined in this manual. ICOMMTm & BACNET COMPATIBLE This water heater is compatible with the 'COMMTm remote monitoring system. The ICOMMTm system hardware and monitoring service is purchased separately. It allows users to monitor critical operational, diagnostic and energy usage data from a secure web site. The ICOMMTM system can automatically notify selected personnel via email and /or cellular phone text messages if operational problems or user defined Alert Conditions occur. iCOMM TM system hardware is compatible with BACnet compliant supervisory controls and building management systems. For more information call 888 928 -3702. PREPARING FOR THE INSTALLATION 1. Read the entire manual before attempting to install or operate the water heater. Pay close attention to the General Safety Information on page 4 and 5. If you don't follow the safety rules, the water heater may not operate safely. It could cause property damage, injury and /or death. This manual contains instructions for the installation, operation, and maintenance of the water heater. It also contains warnings throughout the manual that you must read and be aware of. All warnings and all instructions are essential to the proper operation of the water heater and your safety. 6 Detailed installation diagrams are also found in this manual. These diagrams will serve to provide the installer with a reference. It is essential that all venting, water piping, gas piping and wiring be installed as shown. Particular attention should be given to the installation of thermometers at the locations indicated in the piping diagrams as these are necessary for checking the operation of the water heater. The principal components of the water heater are identified in Features And Components on page 7 in this manual. Use this reference to locate and identify various components on the water heater. See the Installation Checklist and Troubleshooting on page 54. By using this checklist the user may be able to make minor operational adjustments and avoid unnecessary service calls. However, service and diagnostic procedures should only be performed by a Qualified Service Agency. NOTE: Costs to correct installation errors are not covered under the limited warranty. 2. Be sure to turn off power when working on or near the electrical system of the water heater. Never touch electrical components with wet hands or when standing in water. 3. The installation must conform to all instructions contained in this manual and the local code authority having jurisdiction. These shall be carefully followed in all cases. Authorities having jurisdiction should be consulted before installation begins if there are any questions regarding compliance with local, state or national codes. In the absence of local codes, the installation must comply with the current editions of the National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1/NFPA54 and the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 or CAN/CSA-B149.1, the Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code and CSA C22.1, the Canadian Electrical Code. All documents are available from the Canadian Standards Association, 8501 East Pleasant Valley Road, Cleveland, OH 44131. NFPA documents are also available from the National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269. 4. If after reading this manual you have any questions or do not understand any portion of the instructions, call the toll free number on the back cover of this manual for technical assistance. In order to expedite your request, please have the full Model, Serial and Series number of the water heater you are working with available for the technician. This information is located on the water heater's rating label. 5. Carefully plan the placement of the water heater. Examine the location to ensure that it complies with the requirements in Locating The Water Heater on page 11 and the Rough In Dimensions on page 10. 6. For installation in California this water heater must be braced or anchored to avoid falling or moving during an earthquake. See instructions for correct installation procedures. Instructions may be obtained from California Office of the State Architect, 1102 Q Street, Suite 5100, Sacramento, CA 95811. 7. Massachusetts Code requires this water heater to be installed in accordance with Massachusetts 248 -CMR 2.00: State Plumbing Code and 248 -CMR 5. See Commonwealth of Massachusetts on page 20. FEATURES AND COMPONENTS BASIC OPERATION The water heaters covered in this manual have a helical coil shaped heat exchanger that is submerged in the storage tank. The water heater's Main Burner is a radial design burner, it is mounted on the top and fires downward through the heat exchanger. This is a forced draft burner; hot burning gases are forced through the heat exchanger under pressure and exit through the exhaust/vent connection located at the bottom of the water heater. See Figure 1 and Figure 2. BLOWER BURNER ASSEMBLY INTAKE AIR (combustion air) CONNECTION 4 INCH PVC MAIN BURNER (radial design) HEAT EXCHANGER HELICAL COIL VENT (exhaust) OUTLET Figure 1 7 BLOWER/BURNER ASSEMBLY DETAIL INTAKE AIR (combustion air) CONNECTION .4 INCH PVC COMBUSTION BLOWER BLOWER FLANGE FLAME SENSOR MAIN BURNER (radial design) HOT SURFACE IGNITER Figure 2 Hot Surface Igniter The control system energizes the Hot Surface Igniter with 120 VAC during the igniter warm up period. When the igniter is energized it produces sufficient heat, >1800 °F ( >982 °C), to ignite the Main Burner. NOTE: Care must be taken when handling the igniter to prevent breakage. During the igniter warm up period prior to ignition the control system monitors the igniter current and must sense a minimum of 2.0 AC amps for BTH 300 & 400 models and 2.7 AC amps for BTH 500 models. See the Sequence Of Operation on page 54. Flame Sensor The control system also monitors the flame sensor to confirm a flame is present at the Main Burner. If a flame is not verified during the ignition trial period (3 -5 seconds) the control system will immediately de- energize the 24 VAC Gas Valve. See the Sequence Of Operation Flow Chart on page 55. TOP VIEW Figure 3 TOP VIEW COMPONENTS 1. Water Heater's 120 VAC on /off switch. 2. Powered anode rods. The water heater's covered in this manual are equipped with two powered (non sacrificial) anode rods. Protective current is fed by the control system to the titanium electrodes at the end of each anode rod. This current flows through the water to the conductive surfaces inside the storage tank which diminishes the corrosive effect (rusting) of water when it comes in contact with steel. 3. Central Control Board (CCB) enclosure. This enclosure houses the control system's main circuit board. The CCB regulates water temperature and controls all water heater functions, see Control System Operation on page 42. 4. 120 VAC junction box. Incoming power supply and ground connections are made here. See Power Supply on page 13. 5. Intake air connection - 4 inch PVC. 6. Blocked Intake Air switch. Normally closed contacts that open on fall in pressure. This switch is used to insure intake (combustion) air to the water heater is not restricted. The control system monitors this switch and will disable heating operation if its contacts are open during a heating cycle. 7. Water heater's 24 VAC Gas Valve. 8. Supply gas line connection. See the requirements for the Supply Gas Line on page 13. 9. Low Gas Pressure switch. Normally open contacts that close on a rise in pressure. This switch is used to insure supply gas pressure is above minimum requirements. The control system monitors this switch and will disable heating operation if its contacts are open during a heating cycle. See Table 4 and the Gas Pressure Requirements on page 13. 10. Blower Prover switch. Normally open contacts that close on a rise in pressure. This switch is used to insure the Combustion 8 Blower is operating properly. The control system monitors this switch and will disable heating operation if its contacts are closed before the Combustion Blower is energized or open any time during a heating cycle. See Sequence Of Operation on page 54. 11. Vent connection (exhaust elbow) - 4 inch PVC. 12. Combustion Blower. 13. Blocked Exhaust (vent) switch. Normally closed contacts that open on a rise in pressure. This switch is used to insure the Exhaust (vent) piping connected to the water heater is not restricted. The control system monitors this switch and will disable heating operation if its contacts are open during a heating cycle. 14. VFD (variable frequency drive) blower motor drive. Used on BTH 400 and BTH 500 models only. 15. Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve. See Temperature - Pressure Relief Valve on page 15. 16. Upper Temperature Probe, 1 of 2 temperature probes. The water heater's control system monitors this probe to detect water temperature in the upper portion of the storage tank. The Upper Temperature Probe also houses the ECO (energy cut out) switch. This is a non adjustable high temperature limit switch. The ECO switch contacts are normally closed and will open on a temperature rise. See High Temperature Limit Control (ECO) on page 41. 17. Water outlet connection 1 1/2" NPT. 18. UIM (user interface module). The UIM includes the display circuit board, the control system's LCD display and operational buttons. Used to adjust various user settings and view operational information. See Control System Operation on page 42. } SIDE VIEWS 1. Cleanout access panel, covers water heater cleanout opening. 2. CCB enclosure - see Figure 3 on page 8 for description. 3. 120 VAC junction box. Incoming power supply and ground connections are made here - see requirements for Power Supply on page 13. 4. Intake air connection - 4 inch PVC. 5. Supply gas line connection. See Supply Gas Line on page 13. 6. Low Gas Pressure switch, see description under Figure 3 on page 8. See Table 4 and the Gas Pressure Requirements on page 13. 7. Water heater 24 VAC Gas Valve. 8. Water outlet pipe - 1 1/2" NPT connection. • 9. VFD (variable frequency drive) blower motor drive - - see Figure 3 on page 8 for description. 10. UIM (user interface module). The UIM includes the display circuit board, the control system's LCD display and 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. operational buttons. Used to adjust various user settings and view operational information. See Control System Operation on page 42. Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve. See Temperature - Pressure Relief Valve on page 15. Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve discharge pipe - see T &P Valve Discharge Pipe Requirements: on page 15. Lower Temperature Probe, 1 of 2 temperature probes. The water heater's control system monitors this probe to detect water temperature in the lower portion of the storage tank. Water inlet pipe -1 1/2" NPT connection. Water heater drain valve. Combustion Blower. Vent connection (exhaust elbow) - 4 inch PVC. Condensate drain connection 1/2" PVC Tee with barbed hose fitting. See Figure 9 on page 16 and Alternate Condensate Line on page 36. Figure 4 9 Figure 5 INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS ROUGH IN DIMENSIONS 1 1/4' SUPPLY GAS CONNECTION 4' PVC INTAKE AIR CONNECTION 69' (175 3 cm) 69' (175.3 cm) WATER OUTLET HEIGHT 63 INCHES (160 cm) 12' (30.5 cm) Center line of water outlet on top of the water heater is 7 inches from the front edge of the water heater. Figure 6 These designs comply with the current edition of the American National Standard for Gas Water Heaters, Volume III, ANSI Z21.10.3 / CSA 4.3 as an automatic circulating tank water heater, and automatic storage water heaters. GAS LINE CONNECTION SIZE TABLE 1 MODEL SERIES NATURAL GAS PROPANE GAS BTH 300 100/101 1 1/4" NPT 1 1/4" NPT BTH 400 100/101 1 1/4" NPT 1 1/4" NPT pil t BTH 500 100/101 1 1/4" NPT 1 1/4" NPT t This table shows connections sizes only. BTH 500 natural gas models require a 1 1/2° minimum supply gas line - see Table 5 on page 13 for minimum required supply gas line sizes. Depending on the installed equivalent length, and /or the number of appliances connected, the supply gas line size may have to be increased beyond the minimum required sizes - see Gas Line Sizing on page 37. RECOVERY CAPACITIES TABLE 3 STORAGE CAPACITIES TABLE 2 MODEL U. S. GALLONS LITERS BTH 300 130 492 BTH 400 130 492 BTH 500 130 492 Recovery capacities are based on 96% thermal efficiency for BTH 300, BTH 400 and 950/ thermal efficiency for BTH 500. 10 U. S. GALLONS /HR & LITERS /HR AT TEMPERATURE RISE INDICATED Model Type of Gas Input °F 20 °F 30 °F 40 °F 50 °F 60 °F 70 °F 80 °F 90 °F 100 °F 110 °F 120 °F 130 °F 140 °F Btu /hr kW °C 11 °C 17°C 22 °C 28 °C 33 °C 39 °C 44 °C 50 °C 56 °C 61 °C 67 °C 72 °C 78°C BTH 300 Natural 300,000 88 GPH 1746 1164 873 699 582 499 436 388 349 318 291 269 250 Propane LPH 6610 4406 3304 2644 2203 1888 1652 1469 1322 1201 1102 1017 945 BTH 400 Natural 399,900 117 GPH 2328 1552 1164 931 776 665 582 517 466 423 388 359 332 Propane LPH 8813 5875 4406 3525 2938 2518 2203 1958 1763 1602 1469 1356 1259 Natural 146 GPH 2878 1919 1439 1151 959 822 720 640 576 523 480 443 411 BTH 500 Propane 499,900 LPH 10894 7263 5447 4358 3631 3113 2724 2421 2179 1981 1816 1676 1556 Recovery capacities are based on 96% thermal efficiency for BTH 300, BTH 400 and 950/ thermal efficiency for BTH 500. 10 LOCATING THE WATER HEATER Carefully choose a location for the new water heater. The placement is a very important consideration for the safety of the occupants in the building and for the most economical use of the appliance. CAUTION Property Damage Hazard • All water heaters eventually leak. • Do not install without adequate drainage. Whether replacing an existing water heater or installing the water heater in a new location observe the following critical points: 1. The water heater must be located indoors. 2. The water heater must not be located in an area where it will be subject to freezing temperatures. 3. Locate the water heater so it is protected and not subject to physical damage by a moving vehicle. 4. Locate the water heater on a level surface. 5. Locate the water heater near a floor drain. The water heater should be located in an area where leakage of the tank or connections will not result in damage to the area adjacent to the water heater or to lower floors of the structure. When such locations cannot be avoided, it is recommended that a metal drain pan, adequately drained, be installed under the appliance. 6. Locate the water heater close to the point of major hot water usage. 7. Locate the water heater close to a 120 VAC power supply. See Power Supply on page 13 for requirements. 8. Locate the water heater where an adequate supply of fresh air for combustion and ventilation can be obtained. See Air Requirements on page 17. 9. Locate the water heater where the vent and intake air piping, when installed, will remain within the maximum equivalent lengths allowed. See Venting Requirements on page 22. 10. Do not locate the water heater where noise (such as the Combustion Blower) during normal operation will be objectionable in adjacent areas. 11. Do not locate the water heater where the subsequent installation of the vent (exhaust) or intake air terminations would be objectionable due to noise at the termination(s). This includes locations close to or across from windows and doors. See Venting Installation on page 21. 11 AWARNING Fire or Explosion Hazard • Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. • Avoid all ignition sources if you smell gas. • Do not expose water heater controls to excessive gas pressure. • Use only the gas shown on the water heater rating label. • Maintain required clearances to combustibles. • Keep ignition sources away from faucets after extended periods of non -use. Read instruction manual before installing, using or servicing water heater. �1 There is a risk in using fuel burning appliances such as gas wate heaters in rooms, garages or other areas where gasoline, other flammable liquids or engine driven equipment or vehicles are stored, operated or repaired. Flammable vapors are heavy and travel along the floor and may be ignited by the water heater's igniter or Main Burner flames causing fire or explosion. Flammable items, pressurized containers or any other potential fire hazardous articles must never be placed on or adjacent to the water heater. CLEARANCE TO COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS The water heaters covered in this manual are approved for installation on combustible flooring. The clearance to combustible and non combustible construction materials is 0 inches on the back and sides of the water heater. These water heaters are also approved for installation in an alcove. NOTE: Adequate clearance for servicing should be maintained on all installations. See Service Clearance below. ALCOVE TOP COVER WATER HEATER FRONT FRONT VIEW CLEARANCES TO COMBUSTIBLE AND NON COMBUSTIBLE CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS TOP VIEW Figure 7 SERVICE CLEARANCE A service clearance of 24 inches (61 cm) should be maintained from 'serviceable parts such as the T &P valve, control system components, gas valve, clean out opening, drain valve, the vent connection (exhaust elbow) and the condensate drain. Leave as much room as possible above the water heater and near the exhaust elbow for this reason. See Figure 9 on page 16. INTAKE AIR AND VENT PIPE CLEARANCES The minimum clearance from combustible materials for the vent (exhaust) and intake air piping shall be 0 inches. Vent or intake air piping passing through a combustible wall or ceiling must be a continuous run (no joints). EXTENDED VENT TERMINATIONS The water heaters covered by this manual can be installed using 4 inch pipe for the intake air and /or vent•piping up to a maximum of 70 equivalent feet (21.3 m). The intake air and /or vent piping can be extended up to 120 equivalent feet (36.5 m) by installing 6 inch pipe. See the Venting Requirements on page 22. The water heater ships from the factory with two (2) 4 inch terminations that are 45° PVC elbows with a debris screen installed. When 6 inch intake air or vent pipe is installed, factory supplied 6 inch terminations must be used. Contact your local distributor or call the parts department phone number listed on the back cover of this manual to order 6 inch termination(s). OPTIONAL CONCENTRIC TERMINATIONS The water heaters covered by this manual can be installed in a Direct Vent configuration using optional concentric terminations. BTH 300 models require 4" concentric terminations. BTH 400 and 500 models require 6" concentric terminations. Concentric terminations must be ordered separately. Contact your local distributor or call the parts department phone number listed on the back cover of this manual to order. Concentric Vent Termination Part Numbers: • 4" Concentric Termination # 9006328005 • 6" Concentric Termination # 9006144005 HARD WATER Where hard water conditions exist, water softening or the threshold type of water treatment is recommended. This will protect the dishwashers, coffee urns, water heaters, water piping and other equipment. See Maintenance on page 60 for sediment and lime scale removal procedures. CIRCULATION PUMPS A circulating pump is used when a system requires a circulating loop or there is a storage tank used in conjunction with the water heater. See the Water Piping Diagrams beginning on page 67 for installation location of circulating pumps. See Circulation Pump Wiring Diagrams on page 66 for electrical hookup information. Install in accordance with the current edition of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 or the Canadian Electrical Code, CSA C22.1. All- bronze circulators are recommended for used with commercial water heaters. Some circulating pumps are manufactured with sealed bearings and do not require further lubrication. Some circulating pumps must be periodically oiled. Refer to the pump manufacturer's instructions for lubrication requirements. 12 INSULATION BLANKETS::: £WARNING Breathing Hazard - Carbon Monoxide Gas :::;::::b.::;• ::•' +•• : : :,: •, :;;:; •�_• '•';::' i. • Do not obstruct water heater air intake with insulating blanket. • Gas and carbon monoxide detectors are available. • Install water heater in accordance with the instruction manual. Breathing carbon monoxide can cause brain damage or death. Always read and understand instruction manual. Insulation blankets are available to the general public for external use on gas water heaters but are not necessary with these products. The purpose of an insulation blanket is to reduce the standby heat loss encountered with storage tank heaters. The water heaters covered by this manual meet or exceed the Energy Policy Act standards with respect to insulation and standby heat Toss requirements, making an insulation blanket unnecessary. Should you choose to apply an insulation blanket to this heater, you should follow these instructions. See the Features and Components section of this manual for identification of components mentioned below. Failure to follow these instructions can restrict the air flow required for proper combustion, potentially resulting in fire, asphyxiation, serious personal injury or death. • DO NOT apply insulation to the top of the water heater, as this will interfere with safe operation of the blower assembly. • DO NOT cover the control system LCD on top of the water heater. • DO NOT cover the Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve. • DO NOT cover the instruction manual. Keep it on the side of the water heater or nearby for future reference. • DO obtain new warning and instruction labels from the manufacturer for placement on the blanket directly over the existing labels. • DO inspect the insulation blanket frequently to make certain it does not sag, thereby obstructing combustion air flow. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS GAS PRESSURE REQUIREMENTS TABLE 4 use without modification for altitudes up to 10,000 feet. For elevations above 10,000 feet (3,048 meters) see High Altitude Installations on page 52. t Minimum supply gas pressure; readings are taken while gas is not flowing (static pressure) AND while gas is flowing dynamic pressure). Supply pressure must never fall below the minimum values. Supply gas pressures should be measured with all gas fired appliances connected to a common main firing at full capacity. If supply pressure drops more than 1.5" W. C. as gas begins to flow the supply gas system (gas line /regulator) may be restricted or undersized. See Table 5 and the Supply Gas Regulator requirements below. See Supply Gas Line Installation on page 37 and Supply Gas Regulator Installation on page 38 for sizing and installation instructions also. # Maximum supply gas pressure; reading are taken while gas is not flowing (static pressure) AND while gas is flowing (dynamic pressure). Supply pressure must never exceed this maximum value. SUPPLY GAS LINE The high efficiency water heaters covered in this manual require an adequate volume of fuel gas for proper operation. A lack of fuel gas volume can lead to ignition failure, rough starting and rough operation. Increasing the supply gas pressure DOES NOT necessarily increase the volume of gas supplied to the water heater and must remain below the maximum supply gas pressures shown in Table 4. The minimum supply gas line sizes shown in Table 5 must be observed on all installations to help insure an adequate volume of fuel gas is provided. DO NOT use flexible gas piping. Supply gas lines serving more than one appliance may require larger sizes than what is shown in Table 5. See Gas Line Sizing on page 37. MINIMUM SUPPLY GAS LINE SIZE TABLE 5 MODEL MODEL *MANIFOLD PRESSURE tMINIMUM SUPPLY PRESSURE MAXIMUM SUPPLY PRESSURE NATURAL GAS PROPANE GAS NATURAL GAS PROPANE GAS NATURAL GAS PROPANE GAS BTH 300 4° W. C. (1.0 kPa) 10° W. C. (2.49 kPa) 5.2" W. C. (1.29 kPa) 11" W. C. (2.74 kPa) 10" W. C. (2.49 kPa) 12" W. C. (2.99 kPa) RTH 400 4° W C (1 0 kPal 10" W C. (2 49 kPal 5 2" W C (1 29 kPal 11" W C (2.74 kPal 10" W C. (2 49 kPal 12" W. C. (2.99 kPa) LBTH 500 4" W. C. (1.0 kPa) 10° W. C. (2.49 kPa) 5.2" W. C. (1.29 kPa) 11" W. C. (2.74 kPa) 10" W. C. (2.49 kPa) 12" W. C. (2.99 kPa) * Manifold aas pressure: reading can only be to en while aas is flowing Reading taken should ze ± 0.3" W. C. of ilie lisrted value. These water eaters are certified for use without modification for altitudes up to 10,000 feet. For elevations above 10,000 feet (3,048 meters) see High Altitude Installations on page 52. t Minimum supply gas pressure; readings are taken while gas is not flowing (static pressure) AND while gas is flowing dynamic pressure). Supply pressure must never fall below the minimum values. Supply gas pressures should be measured with all gas fired appliances connected to a common main firing at full capacity. If supply pressure drops more than 1.5" W. C. as gas begins to flow the supply gas system (gas line /regulator) may be restricted or undersized. See Table 5 and the Supply Gas Regulator requirements below. See Supply Gas Line Installation on page 37 and Supply Gas Regulator Installation on page 38 for sizing and installation instructions also. # Maximum supply gas pressure; reading are taken while gas is not flowing (static pressure) AND while gas is flowing (dynamic pressure). Supply pressure must never exceed this maximum value. SUPPLY GAS LINE The high efficiency water heaters covered in this manual require an adequate volume of fuel gas for proper operation. A lack of fuel gas volume can lead to ignition failure, rough starting and rough operation. Increasing the supply gas pressure DOES NOT necessarily increase the volume of gas supplied to the water heater and must remain below the maximum supply gas pressures shown in Table 4. The minimum supply gas line sizes shown in Table 5 must be observed on all installations to help insure an adequate volume of fuel gas is provided. DO NOT use flexible gas piping. Supply gas lines serving more than one appliance may require larger sizes than what is shown in Table 5. See Gas Line Sizing on page 37. MINIMUM SUPPLY GAS LINE SIZE TABLE 5 MODEL *NATURAL GAS PROPANE GAS BTH 300 1 1/4" NPT 1 1/4" NPT BTH 400 1 1/4" NPT 1 1/4" NPT It BTH 500 1 1/2" NPT 11 1/4" NPT t Note that BTH 500 natu al gas models require a 1 1/2" minimum supply gas line size. Depending on the installed equivalent length, and /or the number of appliances connected, the supply gas line size may have to be increased beyond the minimum required sizes shown in this table - see Gas Line Sizing on page 37. SUPPLY GAS REGULATOR The high efficiency water heaters covered by this manual require a supply gas regulator to be installed in the supply gas line serving the water heater for proper operation. Supply gas regulators are required on high and low pressure gas supply systems. NOTE: On multiple water heater installations each water heater shall have its own dedicated supply gas regulator installed in the supply gas line serving the water heater. Supply gas regulators must be rated at or above the input Btu/ hr rating of the water heater they supply. Supply gas regulators shall have inlet and outlet connections not less than the minimum supply gas line size for the water heater they serve as shown in Table 5. The Maxitrol 325 -7L or equivalent is recommended. See Supply Gas Regulator Installation on page 38. I POWER SUPPLY I 13 The water heaters covered in this manual require a 120 VAC, 10 (single phase), 60Hz, 15 amp power supply and must also be electrically grounded in accordance with local codes or, in the absence of local codes, with the National Electrical Code, ANSI/ NFPA 70 or the Canadian Electrical Code, CSA C22.1. POWER FLUCTUATIONS AND ELECTRICAL NOISE The water heater's control system requires a source of stable clean electricity for proper operation. Connecting the water heater to a branch circuit that is subject to fluctuations in voltage level or electrical line noise such as EMI (electro magnetic interference) or RFI (radio frequency interference) may cause erratic control system operation and malfunction. A high quality power supply filter /suppressor such as the Kleen Line model SELF/T -10 Series SC -L or equivalent must be installed if the above conditions exist. Call the technical support phone number listed on the back cover of this manual for more information. NOTE: Malfunctions caused by the power supply and the costs to install power supply filters are not covered under the limited warranty. DEDICATED POWER WIRING AND BREAKERS Dedicated power supply wires, ground wiring and dedicated circuit breakers often prevent electrical line noise and should be considered when installing the water heater. POLARITY SENSITIVE The control system on the water heaters covered in this manual is polarity sensitive; electronic flame sensing requires correct polarity. The control system is programmed to monitor the incoming power supply. If the Hot and Neutral wires in the 120 VAC power supply are reversed, the control system will declare a Fault condition and lock out, heating operation will be disabled until the power supply is correctly wired. The control system will display the "AC Reversed" Fault message on the LCD. See Electrical Wiring on page 39 for installation instructions. MIXING VALVES ADANGER Water temperature over 125 °F (52 °C) can cause severe burns instantly resulting in severe injury or death. Children, the elderly and the physically or mentally disabled are at highest risk for scald injury. Feel water before bathing or showering. Temperature limiting devices such as mixing valves must be installed when required by codes and to ensure safe temperatures at fixtures. Water heated to a temperature which will satisfy clothes washing, dish washing, and other sanitizing needs can scald and cause permanent injury upon contact. Short repeated heating cycles caused by small hot water uses can cause temperatures at the point of use to exceed the water heater's temperature setting by up to 20 °F (11 °C). Some people are more likely to be permanently injured by hot water than others. These include the elderly, children, the infirm and the physically /mentally disabled. Table 6 shows the approximate time -to -burn relationship for normal adult skin. If anyone using hot water provided by the water heater being installed fits into one of these groups or if there is a local code or state law requiring a certain water temperature at the point of use, then special precautions must be taken. In addition to using the lowest possible temperature setting that satisfies the demand of the application a Mixing Valve can be installed at the water heater (see Figure 8) or at the hot water taps to further reduce system water temperature. Mixing valves are available at plumbing supply stores. Consult a Qualified Installer or Service Agency. Follow mixing valve manufacturer's instructions for installation of the valves. TABLE 6 Water Temperature 180 °F (82 °C) Time to Produce 2nd & 3rd Degree Burns on Adult Skin Nearly instantaneous 170 °F (77 °C) Nearly instantaneous 160 °F (71 °C) About 1/2 second 150 °F (66 °C) About 1 -1/2 seconds 140 °F (60 °C) Less than 5 seconds 130 °F (54 °C) About 30 seconds 120 °F (49 °C) More than 5 minutes DISHWASHING MACHINES All dishwashing machines meeting the National Sanitation Foundation requirements are designed to operate with water flow pressures between 15 and 25 pounds per square inch (103 kPa and 173 kPa). Flow pressures above 25 pounds per square inch (173 kPa), or below 15 pounds per square inch (103 kPa), will result in improperly sanitized dishes. Where pressures are high, a water pressure reducing or flow regulating control valve should be used in the 180 °F (82 °C) line to the dishwashing machine and should be adjusted to deliver water pressure between these limits. HOT WATER OUTLET TEMPERED WATER OUTLET COLD WATER INLET 12• TO 15 (30-38 cm) CHECK VALVE CHECK MIXING VALVE VALVE TO TANK INLET Figure 8 The National Sanitation Foundation also recommends circulation of 180 °F (82 °C) water. Where this is done, the circulation should be very gentle so that it does not cause any unnecessary turbulence inside the water heater. The circulation should be just enough to provide 180 °F (82 °C) water at the point of take -off to the dishwashing machine. Adjust flow by throttling a full port ball valve installed in the circulating line on the outlet side of the pump. Never throttle flow on the suction side of a pump. See the Water Piping Diagrams beginning on page 67. NOTE: To comply with NSF Standard 5 installation requirements the bottom of the water heater must be sealed to the floor with a silicone based sealant or elevated 6 inches above the floor. CLOSED WATER SYSTEMS Water supply systems may, because of code requirements or such conditions as high line pressure, among others, have installed devices such as pressure reducing valves, check valves, and back flow preventers. Devices such as these cause the water system to be a closed system. THERMAL EXPANSION 14 As water is heated, it expands (thermal expansion). In a closed system the volume of water will grow when it is heated. As the volume of water grows there will be a corresponding increase in water pressure due to thermal expansion. Thermal expansion can cause premature tank failure (leakage). This type of failure is not covered under the limited warranty. Thermal expansion can also cause intermittent Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve operation: water discharged from the valve due to excessive pressure build up. This condition is not covered under the limited warranty. The Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve is not intended for the constant relief of thermal expansion. A properly sized thermal expansion tank must be installed on all closed systems to control the harmful effects of thermal expansion. Contact a local plumbing service agency to have a thermal expansion tank installed. See Water Line Connections on page 40 and the Water Piping Diagrams beginning on page 67. TEMPERATURE- PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE AWARNING Explosion Hazard • Temperature - pressure relief valve must comply with ANSI Z21.22- CSA4.4 andASME code. • Properly sized temperature - pressure relief valve must be installed in opening provided. •- Can result in overheating and excessive tank pressure. • Can cause serious injury or death. This water heater is provided with a properly rated /sized and certified combination Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve (T &P valve) by the manufacturer. The valve is certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory that maintains periodic inspection of production of listed equipment of materials as meeting the requirements for Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems, ANSI Z21.22 • CSA4.4, and the code requirements ofASME. If replaced, the new T &P valve must meet the requirements of local codes, but not less than a combination Temperature - Pressure Relief Valve rated /sized and certified as indicated in the above paragraph. The new valve must be marked with a maximum set pressure not to exceed the marked hydrostatic working pressure of the water heater (150 psi = 1,035 kPa) and a discharge capacity not less than the water heater Btu /hr or kW input rate as shown on the water heater's model rating label. NOTE: In addition to the factory installed Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve on the water heater, each remote storage tank that may be installed and piped to a water heating appliance must also have its own properly sized, rated and approved Temperature - Pressure Relief Valve installed. Call the toll free technical support phone number listed on the back cover of this manual for technical assistance in sizing a Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve for remote storage tanks. For safe operation of the water heater, the Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve must not be removed from its designated opening nor plugged. The Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve must be installed directly into the fitting of the water heater designed for the relief valve. Install discharge piping so that any discharge will exit only within 6 inches (15.2 cm) above, or at any distance below the structural floor. Be certain that no contact is made with any live electrical part. The discharge opening must not be blocked or reduced in size under any circumstances. Excessive length, over 30 feet (9.14 m), or use of more than four elbows can cause restriction and reduce the discharge capacity of the valve. No valve or other obstruction is to be placed between the Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve and the tank. Do not connect discharge piping directly to the drain unless a 6" (15.2 cm) air gap is provided. To prevent bodily injury, hazard to life, or property damage, the relief valve must be allowed to discharge water in adequate quantities should circumstances demand. If the discharge pipe is not connected to a drain or other suitable means, the water flow may cause property damage. 15 CAUTION Water Damage Hazard • Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve discharge pipe must terminate at adequate drain. T &P Valve Discharge Pipe Requirements: • Shall not be smaller in size than the outlet pipe size of the valve, or have any reducing couplings or other restrictions. • Shall not be plugged or blocked. • Shall not be exposed to freezing temperatures. • Shall be of material listed for hot water distribution. • Shall be installed so as to allow complete drainage of both the Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve and the discharge pipe. • Must terminate a maximum of six inches above a floor drain or external to the building. In cold climates, it is recommended that the discharge pipe be terminated at an adequate drain inside the building. • Shall not have any valve or other obstruction between the relief valve and the drain. ADANGER • Burn hazard • Hot water discharge. • Keep clear of Temperature Pressure Relief Valve discharge outlet. The Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve must be manually operated at least twice a year. Caution should be taken to ensure that (1) no one is in front of or around the outlet of the Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve discharge line, and (2) the water manually discharged will not cause any bodily injury or property damage because the water may be extremely hot. If after manually operating the valve, it fails to completely reset and continues to release water, immediately close the cold water inlet to the water heater, follow the draining instructions in this manual, and replace the Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve with a properly rated /sized new one. NOTE: The purpose of a Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve is to prevent excessive temperatures and pressures in the storage tank. The T &P valve is not intended for the constant relief of thermal expansion. A properly sized thermal expansion tank must be installed on all closed systems to control thermal expansion, see Closed Water Systems and Thermal Expansion on page 14. If you do not understand these instructions or have any questions regarding the Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve call the toll free number listed on the back cover of this manual for technical assistance. CONDENSATE DRAIN The water heaters covered in this manual are condensing appliances and require a drain to be located in close proximity to allow the condensate to drain safely. The condensate drains from the water heater at the exhaust elbow located at the bottom. The condensate hose must not be elevated above the exhaust elbow, see Figure 9. If the condensate does not drain properly it will build up in the vent (exhaust) outlet, this will restrict flow and cause the Blocked Exhaust pressure switch to open its contacts. The control system monitors all pressure switches, if the Blocked Exhaust Switch contacts are open the control system will lock out and disable heating operation. The "Blocked Exhaust" Fault message will be displayed on the control system's LCD. NOTE: If the "Blocked Exhaust " Fault message is ever displayed on the control system LCD, check the condensate hose (drain) first and ensure it is not blocked. HOSE BRACKET EXHAUST ELBOW CONDENSATE HOSE WITH WATER TRAP NOTE: THE CONDENSATE HOSE MUST BE BELOW THE EXHAUST ELBOW Figure 9 CONDENSATE DRAIN WATER TRAP Ensure there is a water trap formed when connecting the condensate hose to the exhaust elbow as shown in Figure 9. The water heater's vent pipe is under a slight positive pressure. The water trap prevents flue gases from escaping into the installed space. See the Alternate Condensate Line on page 36. CONDENSATE PH LEVEL The condensate drains from the water heater's covered in this manual have PH levels between 4.3 and 5.0. Install a commercially available neutralizing kit if required by local codes. NOTE: Lower PH levels are acidic. Do not connect a metal drain line to the water heater for this reason. The water heater is equipped from the factory with a plastic condensate drain hose. An alternate PVC drain line may be installed - see Alternate Condensate Line on page 36. Use one of these two methods only to connect a condensate drain line to the water heater. COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL STORAGE AWARNING Fire or Explosion Hazard • Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. • Avoid all ignition sources if you smell gas. • Do not expose water heater controls to excessive gas pressure. • Use only the gas shown on the water heater rating label. • Maintain required clearances to combustibles. • Keep ignition sources away from faucets after extended periods of non -use. Read instruction manual before installing, using or servicing water heater. Keep appliance area clear and free of combustible materials, gasoline and other flammable vapors and liquids. CONTAMINATED AIR 16 WARNING Breathing Hazard - Carbon Monoxide Gas £WARNING Breathing Hazard - Carbon Monoxide Gas i •; :: :;: :. -`.tit ' ''• or;: •' it • Ensure a functioning water trap is installed in the condensate drain. • Gas and carbon monoxide detectors are available. • Install water heater in accordance with the instruction manual. Breathing carbon monoxide can cause brain damage or death. Always read and understand instruction manual. Ensure there is a water trap formed when connecting the condensate hose to the exhaust elbow as shown in Figure 9. The water heater's vent pipe is under a slight positive pressure. The water trap prevents flue gases from escaping into the installed space. See the Alternate Condensate Line on page 36. CONDENSATE PH LEVEL The condensate drains from the water heater's covered in this manual have PH levels between 4.3 and 5.0. Install a commercially available neutralizing kit if required by local codes. NOTE: Lower PH levels are acidic. Do not connect a metal drain line to the water heater for this reason. The water heater is equipped from the factory with a plastic condensate drain hose. An alternate PVC drain line may be installed - see Alternate Condensate Line on page 36. Use one of these two methods only to connect a condensate drain line to the water heater. COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL STORAGE AWARNING Fire or Explosion Hazard • Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. • Avoid all ignition sources if you smell gas. • Do not expose water heater controls to excessive gas pressure. • Use only the gas shown on the water heater rating label. • Maintain required clearances to combustibles. • Keep ignition sources away from faucets after extended periods of non -use. Read instruction manual before installing, using or servicing water heater. Keep appliance area clear and free of combustible materials, gasoline and other flammable vapors and liquids. CONTAMINATED AIR 16 WARNING Breathing Hazard - Carbon Monoxide Gas lit. y:'',•:r.., ti:;� �r+t:; +•., 'x :r�r ' •. . •`• s;'. • Install water heater in accordance with the Instruction Manual and NFPA 54 or CAN /CSA- B149.1. • To avoid injury, combustion and ventilation air must be taken from outdoors. • Do not place chemical vapor emitting products near water heater. Breathing carbon monoxide can cause brain damage or death. Always read and understand instruction manual. Corrosion of the flue ways and vent system may occur if air for combustion contains certain chemical vapors. Such corrosion may result in failure and risk of asphyxiation. Combustion air that is contaminated can greatly diminish the life span of the water heater and water heater components such as hot surface igniters and burners. Propellants of aerosol sprays, beauty shop supplies, water softener chemicals and chemicals used in dry cleaning processes that are present in the combustion, ventilation or ambient air can cause such damage. Do not store products of this sort near the water heater. Air which is brought in contact with the water heater should not contain any of these chemicals. If necessary, uncontaminated air should be obtained from remote or outdoor sources. The limited warranty is voided when failure of water heater is due to a corrosive atmosphere. (See limited warranty for complete terms and conditions). If the water heater will be used in beauty shops, barber shops, cleaning establishments, or self - service laundries with dry cleaning equipment, it is imperative that the water heater(s) be installed in a Direct Vent configuration so that all air for combustion is derived directly from the outdoor atmosphere through a sealed intake air pipe. See Venting Installation on page 21. • AIR REQUIREMENTS WARNING Breathing Hazard - Carbon Monoxide Gas .. v : :u;? =: ,::v7;::..:;4 • 7 : +: ::• ,:::.• i' • "'f ' •• ;•. • L••' • Install water heater in accordance with the Instruction Manual and NFPA 54 or CAN /CSA- B149.1. • To avoid injury, combustion and ventilation air must be taken from outdoors. • Do not place chemical vapor emitting products near water heater. Breathing carbon monoxide can cause brain damage or death. Always read and understand instruction manual. For safe operation an adequate supply of fresh uncontaminated air for combustion and ventilation must be provided. An insufficient supply of air can cause recirculation of combustion products resulting in contamination that may be hazardous to life. Such a condition often will result in a yellow, luminous burner flame, causing sooting of the combustion chamber, burners and flue tubes and creates a risk of asphyxiation. Do not install the water heater in a confined space unless an adequate supply of air for combustion and ventilation is brought in to that space using the methods described in the Confined Space section that follows. Never obstruct the flow of ventilation air. If you have any doubts or questions at all, call your gas supplier. Failure to provide the proper amount of combustion air can result in a fire or explosion and cause property damage, serious bodily injury or death. UNCONFINED SPACE An Unconfined Space is one whose volume IS NOT LESS THAN 50 cubic feet per 1,000 Btu /hr (4.8 cubic meters per kW) of the total input rating of all appliances installed in the space. Rooms communicating directly with the space, in which the appliances are installed, through openings not furnished with doors, are considered a part of the unconfined space. Makeup air requirements for the operation of exhaust fans, kitchen ventilation systems, clothes dryers and fireplaces shall also be considered in determining the adequacy of a space to provide combustion, ventilation and dilution air. 17 UNUSUALLY TIGHT CONSTRUCTION In unconfined spaces in buildings, infiltration may be adequate to provide air for combustion, ventilation and dilution of flue gases. However, in buildings of unusually tight construction (for example, weather stripping, heavily insulated, caulked, vapor barrier, etc.) additional air must be provided using the methods described in the Confined Space section that follows. CONFINED SPACE A Confined Space is one whose volume IS LESS THAN 50 cubic feet per 1,000 Btu /hr (4.8 cm per kW) of the total input rating of all appliances installed in the space. Openings must be installed to provide fresh air for combustion, ventilation and dilution in confined spaces. The required size for the openings is dependent on the method used to provide fresh air to the confined space AND the total Btu /hr input rating of all appliances installed in the space. DIRECT VENT APPLIANCES Appliances installed in a Direct Vent configuration that derive all air for combustion from the outdoor atmosphere through sealed intake air piping are not factored in the total appliance input Btu/ hr calculations used to determine the size of openings providing fresh air into confined spaces. EXHAUST FANS Where exhaust fans are installed, additional air shall be provided to replace the exhausted air. When an exhaust fan is installed in the same space with a water heater, sufficient openings to provide fresh air must be provided that accommodate the requirements for all appliances in the room and the exhaust fan. Undersized openings will cause air to be drawn into the room through the water heater's vent system causing poor combustion. Sooting, serious damage to the water heater and the risk of fire or explosion may result. It can also create a risk of asphyxiation. LOUVERS AND GRILLES The free areas of the fresh air openings in the instructions that follow do not take in to account the presence of louvers, grilles or screens in the openings. The required size of openings for combustion, ventilation and dilution air shall be based on the "net free area" of each opening. Where the free area through a design of louver or grille or screen is known, it shall be used in calculating the size of opening required to provide the free area specified. Where the louver and grille design and free area are not known, it shall be assumed that wood louvers will have 25% free area and metal louvers and grilles will have 75% free area. Non motorized louvers and grilles shall be fixed in the open position. FRESH AIR OPENINGS FOR CONFINED SPACES The following instructions shall be used to calculate the size, number and placement of openings providing fresh air for combustion, ventilation and dilution in confined spaces. The illustrations shown in this section of the manual are a reference for the openings that provide fresh air into confined spaces only. DO NOT refer to these illustrations for the purpose of vent installation. See Venting Installation on page 21 for complete venting installation instructions. OUTDOOR AIR THROUGH TWO OPENINGS Figure 10 The confined space shall be provided with two permanent openings, one commencing within 12 inches (300 mm) of the top and one commencing within 12 inches (300 mm) of the bottom of the enclosure. The openings shall communicate directly with the outdoors. See Figure 10. Each opening shall have a minimum free area of 1 square inch per 4,000 Btu /hr (550 mm2 per kW) of the aggregate input rating of all appliances installed in the enclosure. Each opening shall not be less than 100 square inches (645 cm2). OUTDOOR AIR THROUGH ONE OPENING Figure 11 Alternatively a single permanent opening, commencing within 12 inches (300 mm) of the top of the enclosure, shall be provided. See Figure 11. The water heater shall have clearances of at least 1 inch (25 mm) from the sides and back and 6 inches (150 mm) from the front of the appliance. The opening shall directly communicate with the outdoors or shall communicate through a vertical or horizontal duct to the outdoors or spaces that freely communicate with the outdoors and shall have a minimum free area of the following: 1. 1 square inch per 3000 Btu /hr (700 mm2 per kW) of the total input rating of all appliances located in the enclosure, and 2. Not less than the sum of the areas of all vent connectors in the space. OUTDOOR AIR THROUGH TWO HORIZONTAL DUCTS 18 Figure 12 The confined space shall be provided with two permanent horizontal ducts, one commencing within 12 inches (300 mm) of the top and one commencing within 12 inches (300 mm) of the bottom of the enclosure. The horizontal ducts shall communicate directly with the outdoors. See Figure 12. Each duct opening shall have a minimum free area of 1 square inch per 2,000 Btu /hr (1100 mm2 per kW) of the aggregate input rating of all appliances installed in the enclosure. When ducts are used, they shall be of the same cross sectional area as the free area of the openings to which they connect. The minimum dimension of rectangular air ducts shall be not less than 3 inches. OUTDOOR AIR THROUGH TWO VERTICAL DUCTS The illustrations shown in this section of the manual are a reference for the openings that provide fresh air into confined spaces only. DO NOT refer to these illustrations for the purpose of vent installation. See Venting Installation on page 21 for complete venting installation instructions. Figure 13 The confined space shall be provided with two permanent vertical ducts, one commencing within 12 inches (300 mm) of the top and one commencing within 12 inches (300 mm) of the bottom of the enclosure. The vertical ducts shall communicate directly with the outdoors. See Figure 13. Each duct opening shall have a minimum free area of 1 square . inch per 4,000 Btu /hr (550 mm2 per kW) of the aggregate input rating of all appliances installed in the enclosure. When ducts are used, they shall be of the same cross sectional area as the free area of the openings to which they connect. The minimum dimension of rectangular air ducts shall be not less than 3 inches. AIR FROM OTHER INDOOR SPACES 19 Figure 14 The confined space shall be provided with two permanent openings, one commencing within 12 inches (300 mm) of the top and one commencing within 12 inches (300 mm) of the bottom of the enclosure. See Figure 14. Each opening shall communicate directly with an additional room(s) of sufficient volume so that the combined volume of all spaces meets the criteria for an Unconfined Space. Each opening shall have a minimum free area of 1 square inch per 1,000 Btu /hr (1100 mm2 per kW) of the aggregate input rating of all appliances installed in the enclosure. Each opening shall not be less than 100 square inches (645 cm2). INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS - COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS For all side wall terminated, horizontally vented power vent, direct vent, and power direct vent gas fueled water heaters installed in every dwelling, building or structure used in whole or in part for residential purposes, including those owned or operated by the Commonwealth and where the side wall exhaust vent termination is less than seven (7) feet above finished grade in the area of the venting, including but not limited to decks and porches, the following requirements shall be satisfied: INSTALLATION OF CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS At the time of installation of the side wall horizontal vented gas fueled equipment, the installing plumber or gasfitter shall observe that a hard wired carbon monoxide detector with an alarm and battery back -up is installed on the floor level where the gas equipment is to be installed. In addition, the installing plumber or gasfitter shall observe that a battery operated or hard wired carbon monoxide detector with an alarm is installed on each additional level of the dwelling, building or structure served by the sidewall horizontal vented gas fueled equipment. It shall be the responsibility of the property owner to secure the services of qualified licensed professionals for the installation of hard wired carbon monoxide detectors. In the event that the side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment is installed in a crawl space or an attic, the hard wired carbon monoxide detector with alarm and battery back -up may be installed on the next adjacent floor level. In the event that the requirements of this subdivision can not be met at the time of completion of installation, the owner shall have a period of thirty (30) days to comply with the above requirements provided that during said thirty (30) day period, a battery operated carbon monoxide detector with an alarm shall be installed. APPROVED CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS Each carbon monoxide detector as required in accordance with the above provisions shall comply with NFPA'720 and be ANSI/ UL 2034 listed and CSA certified. SIGNAGE A metal or plastic identification plate shall be permanently mounted to the exterior of the building at a minimum height of eight (8) feet above grade directly in line with the exhaust vent terminal for the horizontally vented gas fueled heating appliance or equipment. The sign shall read, in print size no less than one - half (1/2) inch in size, "GAS VENT DIRECTLY BELOW. KEEP CLEAR OF ALL OBSTRUCTIONS." INSPECTION The state or local gas inspector of the side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment shall not approve the installation unless, upon inspection, the inspector observes carbon monoxide detectors and signage installed in accordance with the provisions of 248 CMR 5.08(2)(a) 1 through 4. EXEMPTIONS The following equipment is exempt from 248 CMR 5.08(2)(a)1 through 4: 1. The equipment listed in Chapter 10 entitled "Equipment Not Required To Be Vented" in the most current edition of NFPA 54 as adopted by the Board; and 2. Product Approved side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment installed in a room or structure separate from the dwelling, building, or structure used in whole or in part for residential purposes. MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS - GAS EQUIPMENT VENTING SYSTEM PROVIDED When the manufacturer of Product Approved side wall horizontally vented gas equipment provides a venting system design or venting system components with the equipment, the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installation of the equipment and the venting system shall include: 1. Detailed instructions for the installation of the venting system design or the venting system components; and 2. A complete parts list for the venting System design or venting system. MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS - GAS EQUIPMENT VENTING SYSTEM NOT PROVIDED When the manufacturer of a Product Approved side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment does not provide the parts for venting the flue gases, but identifies "special venting systems," the following requirements shall be satisfied by the manufacturer: 1. The referenced "special venting system" instructions shall be included with the appliance or equipment installation instructions; and 2. The "special venting systems" shall be Product Approved by the Board, and the instructions for that system shall include a parts list and detailed installation instructions. A copy of all installation instructions for all Product Approved side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment, all venting instructions, all parts lists for venting instructions, and /or all venting design instructions shall remain with the appliance or equipment at the completion of the installation. 20 VENTING INSTALLATION WARNING Breathing Hazard - Carbon Monoxide Gas • Install vent system in accordance with codes. • Do not operate water heater if flood damaged. • Special consideration must be taken with installations above 10,000 feet (3,048 m) refer to high altitude .:i$ section of this manual. 1,43,..:x; i. :ti • Do not operate if soot buildup. Yi;Y:• • Do not obstruct water heater air intake with insulating 'si . •i' ;1•••• jacket or blanket. • Do not place chemical vapor emitting products near • •'�• water heater. • Gas and carbon monoxide detectors are available. • Never operate the heater unless it is vented to the outdoors and has adequate air supply to avoid risks of improper operation, fire, explosion or asphyxiation. • Analyze the entire vent system to make sure that condensate will not become trapped in a section of vent pipe and therefore reduce the open cross sectional area of the vent. Breathing carbon monoxide can cause brain damage or death. Always read and understand the instruction manual. Never operate the water heater unless it is vented to the outdoors. The instructions in this section of the manual must be followed to avoid choked combustion or recirculation of flue gases. Such conditions cause sooting of the combustion chamber, burners and flue tubes and creates a risk of asphyxiation. GENERAL VENTING INFORMATION The water heaters covered in this manual are operationally equivalent to Category IV appliances and may be installed in either a Power Vent or Direct Vent configuration. CATEGORY IV APPLIANCE Category IV appliances operate with a positive vent (exhaust) static pressure and with vent gas temperatures low enough to produce condensate in the vent piping. POWER VENT CONFIGURATION Power Vent configurations derive all combustion air from the room where they are installed and discharge all flue gases to the outdoor atmosphere through a sealed vent (exhaust) pipe. Power vent configurations have one vent pipe connected to the water heater which can be terminated in a vertical or horizontal arrangement. See Figure 39 and Figure 40 on page 32. DIRECT VENT CONFIGURATION Direct Vent configurations derive all combustion air directly from the outdoor atmosphere through a sealed intake air pipe and discharge all flue gases to the outdoor atmosphere through a sealed vent (exhaust) pipe. Direct Vent configurations have two pipes connected to the water heater, one vent pipe and one intake air pipe. Direct Vent configurations can be terminated in one of six different arrangements. See Figure 41 on page 32 through Figure 46 on page 33. GENERAL VENTING INSTRUCTIONS These instructions must be followed on all installations. 1. DO NOT install the water heater in a Power Vent configuration unless there is adequate supply of fresh air, see Air Requirements on page 17. If the installation space does not 21 provide an adequate supply of fresh air the water heater must be installed in a Direct Vent configuration. 2. If the water heater is to be installed in a beauty shop, barber shop, cleaning establishment, a laundry with dry cleaning equipment or any space with contaminated air it is imperative that the water heater(s) be installed in a Direct Vent configuration so that all air for combustion is derived from the outdoor atmosphere. 3. The vent and intake air piping must terminate outdoors. 4. The minimum clearance from combustible materials for the vent (exhaust) and intake air piping shall be 0 inches. Vent piping passing through a combustible wall or ceiling must be a continuous run (no joints). 5. The water heater must be protected from freezing downdrafts during shutdown periods. 6. The vent (exhaust) pipe must not be combined or connected to any other appliance's vent system or chimney. 7. The intake air pipe must not be combined or connected to any other appliance's intake air piping. 8. Locate the water heater where the vent (exhaust) and intake air piping will remain within the maximum equivalent lengths allowed. See Venting Requirements on page 22. 9. Do not install the vent or intake air piping in a manner that will allow water to be trapped in the piping. 10. Vent pipes must be pitched a minimum of a 1/4 inch per foot back to the water heater (to allow drainage of condensate). 11. Do not anchor the vent or intake air pipe directly to framed walls, floors or ceilings unless rubber isolation pipe hangers are used to prevent vibration noise from being transmitted. 12. Use only approved vent/intake air pipe sizes and materials. See Venting Requirements on page 22. 13. Use only factory supplied vent and intake air or concentric terminations. See the Venting Requirements on page 22. 14. Do not locate the vent (exhaust) or intake air terminations where they would be objectionable due to noise at the termination(s). This includes locations close to or across from windows and doors. 15. Direct venting into dead air spaces such as alleys, atriums, and inside corners can cause recirculation of flue gases. Recirculation of flue gases will cause sooting, premature failure of the heat exchanger and icing of the combustion air intake during severe cold weather. To prevent the recirculation of flue gases, maintain as much distance as possible between the intake air and vent terminations. 16. Do not locate the vent termination over a public area where condensate or vapor can cause a nuisance or ice hazard. 17. Ensure the screens in the factory supplied terminations are securely installed to prevent blockage in the vent system. 18. Stress levels in pipe /fittings can be significantly increased by improper installation. If rigid pipe clamps are used to hold the pipe in place, or if the pipe cannot move freely through a wall penetration, the pipe may be stressed, or high thermal stresses may be formed when the pipe heats up and expands. Install accordingly to minimize such stresses. 19. Carefully read the Venting Requirements on page 22 and then proceed to the Venting Installation Sequence on page 23. VENTING REQUIREMENTS APPROVED MATERIALS Approved vent and intake air pipe materials that may be used in the United States: • PVC Schedule 40 (ASTM D 2241 / CSA B181.2, ASTM D 1785 / CSA 8137.3 • CPVC Schedule 40 (ASTM F-411 / CSA B137.6) • ABS (ASTM D -2661) Approved vent and intake air pipe materials that must be used in Canada: • ULC S636 PVC / CPVC FIELD SUPPLIED FITTINGS Field supplied fittings should be equivalent to the piping material being installed. Field installed /supplied fittings will add equivalent feet to the vent or intake air piping as indicated below. All field supplied /installed fittings and piping must be factored into the equivalent feet calculations. • 90° elbows (short or long radius) are equivalent to 5 linear feet (152 cm) of pipe. • 45° elbows (short or long radius) are equivalent to 2.5 linear feet (76 cm) of pipe. PRIMER AND CEMENT Tetrahydrofuran (THF) primer should be used to prepare the surfaces of pipe and fittings for solvent welding. If CPVC or ABS pipe and fittings are used, then the proper cement must be used for all joints, including joining the pipe to the factory provided terminations (PVC material). PVC Materials should use ASTM D -2564 Grade Cement; CPVC Materials should use ASTM F-493 Grade Cement and ABS Materials should use ASTM D -2235 Grade Cement. PIPE SIZE REQUIREMENTS The water heaters covered in this manual are certified for the use of 4 and 6 inch pipe for the vent (exhaust) and intake air piping. If the installed equivalent length for the intake air or vent piping will be 70 feet (21.3 m) or less, 4 inch pipe must be used! If the installed equivalent length will be more than 70 feet (21.3 m), 6 inch pipe must be used. NOTE: Install the pipe size required for the installed equivalent length of each pipe independently. IE: If the intake air pipe will be 70 equivalent feet or less and the vent pipe will more than 70 equivalent feet; the intake air pipe must be installed using 4 inch pipe and the vent must be installed using 6 inch pipe. MAXIMUM EQUIVALENT LENGTHS Four Inch Pipe The water heaters covered in this manual are certified to a maximum length of 4 inch pipe for the exhaust venting arrangement of 70 equivalent feet (21.3 m). The certified maximum length of 4 inch pipe for intake air piping is also 70 equivalent feet (21.3 m). IE: On Direct Vent installations both pipes can be up to 70 equivalent feet (21.3 m). Six Inch Pipe The water heaters covered in this manual are certified to a maximum length of 6 inch pipe forthe exhaust venting arrangement of 120 equivalent feet (36.5 m). The certified maximum length of 6 inch pipe for intake air piping is 120 equivalent feet (36.5 m). IE: On Direct Vent installations both pipes can be upto 120 equivalent feet (36.5 m). INTAKE AIR AND VENT PIPE CLEARANCES The minimum clearance from combustible materials for the vent 22 (exhaust) and intake air piping shall be 0 inches. Vent or intake air piping passing through a combustible wall or ceiling must be a continuous run (no joints). MINIMUM EQUIVALENT LENGTHS Four Inch Pipe The water heaters covered in this manual are certified to a minimum length of 4 inch pipe for the vent (exhaust) of 15 equivalent feet (4.6 m). There is no minimum equivalent feet requirement for the intake air pipe. Six Inch Pipe The water heaters covered in this manual are certified to a minimum length of 6 inch pipe for the vent (exhaust) of 70 equivalent feet (21.3 m). There is no minimum equivalent feet requirement for the intake air pipe. MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ELBOWS The vent pipe may have a maximum of six 90° elbows installed. The intake air pipe may have a maximum of six 90° elbows installed. IE: in a Direct Vent configuration each pipe can have up to six (6) 90° elbows installed. Two (2) 45° elbows equal one (1) 90° elbow. Each 90° elbow is equivalent to 5 feet (1.5 m) of linear pipe, 45° elbows are equivalent to 2.5 feet (0.75 m) of linear pipe. FACTORY SUPPLIED FITTINGS The water heater ships with two (2) factory supplied 4 inch terminations (PVC 45° elbows with debris screen). Factory supplied vent and intake air terminations or concentric terminations must be used. Factory supplied terminations and installed fittings (exhaust elbow and intake air connection) add zero equivalent feet to the vent and intake air piping. NOTE: 3 inch intake air and /or vent terminations previously installed on older BTH 300/400 model installations must be replaced with factory supplied 4 inch or 6 inch terminations depending on the installed length. TABLE 7 Number of 90° Elbows Installed 4 Inch Pipe 6 Inch Pipe Maximum Feet (Meters) Maximum Feet (Meters) One (1) 65 feet (19.8 meters) 115 feet (35.0 meters) Two (2) 60 feet (18.2 meters) 110 feet (33.5 meters) Three (3) 55 feet (16.8 meters) 105 feet (32.0 meters) Four (4) 50 feet (15.2 meters) 100 feet (30.5 meters) Five (5) 45 feet (13.7 meters) 95 feet (29.0 meters) Six (6) 40 feet (12.2 meters) 90 feet (27.4 meters) 6 INCH EXTENDED VENT TERMINATIONS When 6 inch intake air or vent pipe is installed, factory supplied 6 inch terminations must be used. Contact your local distributor or call the parts department (phone number listed on the back cover of this manual) to order 6 inch termination(s). OPTIONAL CONCENTRIC TERMINATIONS The water heaters covered by this manual may be installed in a Direct Vent configuration using optional concentric terminations. BTH 300 models require 4" concentric terminations. BTH 400 and BTH 500 models require 6" concentric terminations. Concentric terminations must be ordered separately. Contact your local distributor or call the parts department phone number listed on the back cover of this manual to order. Concentric Vent Termination Part Numbers: • 4" Concentric Termination # 9006328005 • 6" Concentric Termination # 9006144005 VENTING INSTALLATION SEQUENCE 1. Read the General Venting Instructions on page 21 and Venting Requirements on page 22 before proceeding. These instructions and requirements must be followed on all installations. 2. Determine whether the water heater will be installed in a Power Vent or Direct Vent configuration and which vent system arrangement will be used for the installation. See the various venting arrangements on 32 and 33. 3. Proceed to the applicable instructions: • Power Vent Installation on page 23. • Direct Vent Installation on page 23. POWER VENT INSTALLATION 1. Read the General Venting Instructions on page 21 and Venting Requirements on page 22 before proceeding. These instructions and requirements must be followed in addition to the instructions below that are specific for Power Vent configurations. 2. Determine which Power Vent arrangement will be used for the installation; vertical or horizontal termination. See Figure 39 and Figure 40 on page 32. 3. Determine the vent pipe size for the installation, see Venting Requirements on page 22. 4. Plan the layout of the vent piping backwards from the termination point outdoors to the water heater. Layout the vent piping to use a minimum of pipe and elbows. 5. Install the termination first. If the vent piping will terminate vertically, through a roof, see Vertical Termination Installation on page 24. If the vent piping will terminate horizontally, through a sidewall, see Sidewall Termination Installation on page 26. 6. When installation of the termination is complete install necessary piping and fittings to route the vent piping back to the water heater. 7. The vent pipe must be supported properly to avoid bending or failure. The water heater manufacturer recommends that the vent pipe be supported every 5 feet (152 cm) of vertical run and every 3 feet (91 cm) of horizontal run. 8. Do not install the vent piping in a manner that will allow water to be trapped in the piping. 9. All vent (exhaust) pipes must be pitched a minimum of a 1/4 inch per foot back to the water heater (to allow drainage of condensate). 10. If installing 4 inch vent pipe connect the vent pipe to the exhaust elbow on the water heater. 11. If installing 6 inch pipe transition to 4 inch pipe at the exhaust elbow on the water heater as shown in Figure 15. The field installed 4" pipe between the exhaust elbow and the 6" x 4" reducer coupling should be 18 inches (45 cm) or less in length. 23 6" PIPE FIELD SUPPLIED 6" x 4" REDUCER FIELD SUPPLIED 4" PIPE FIELD SUPPLIED EXHAUST ELBOW - VENT CONNECTION FACTORY INSTALLED VENT (EXHAUST) CONNECTION Figure 15 DIRECT VENT INSTALLATION 1. Read the General Venting Instructions on page 21 and Venting Requirements on page 22 before proceeding. These instructions and requirements must be followed in addition to the instructions below that are specific for Direct Vent configurations. 2. Determine which Direct Vent arrangement will be used for the installation. There are six (6) Direct Vent arrangement options. See Figure 41 & Figure 42 on page 32 and Figure 43 through Figure 46 on page 33. 3. Determine vent and intake air pipe size to be used for the installation; see Venting Requirements on page 22. 4. Plan the layout of the vent and intake air piping backwards from the termination point outdoors to the water heater. Layout the vent and intake air piping to use a minimum of pipe and elbows. 5. Install the terminations first. If standard terminations are being used and the intake air or vent piping will terminate vertically, through a roof, see Vertical Termination Installation on page 24. If standard terminations are being used and the intake air or vent piping will terminate horizontally, through a sidewall, see Sidewall Termination Installation on page 26. If a concentric termination(s) will be used see Concentric Termination Installation on page 27. 6. When installation of the termination(s) is complete Install necessary piping and fittings to route the intake air and vent piping back to the water heater. 7. The intake air and vent piping must be supported properly to avoid bending or failure. The water heater manufacturer recommends that the vent and intake air piping be supported every 5 feet (152 cm) of vertical run and every 3 feet (91 cm) of horizontal run. 8. Do not install the vent or intake air piping in a manner that will allow water to be trapped in the piping. 9. All vent (exhaust) pipes must be pitched a minimum of a 1/4 inch per foot back to the water heater (to allow drainage of condensate). 10. If installing 4 inch vent pipe connect the vent pipe to the exhaust elbow on the water heater. 11. If installing 6 inch vent pipe transition to 4 inch pipe at the exhaust elbow on the water heater as shown in Figure 15 on page 23. The field installed 4" pipe between the exhaust elbow and the 6" x 4" reducer coupling should be 18 inches (45 cm) or less in length. 12. Ensure the Balance Plate and Intake Air Screen on the Intake Air Connection to the water heater are both removed before connecting the intake air pipe to the water heater. See Figure 16. £WARNING Breathing Hazard - Carbon Monoxide Gas • i;: at iA : • Do not obstruct water heater air intake. • Gas and carbon monoxide detectors are available. • Install water heater in accordance with the instruction manual. Breathing carbon monoxide can cause brain damage or death. Always read and understand instruction manual. NOTE: Do not leave the screen inside the Intake Air connection in Direct Vent installations. Once the intake air pipe is installed the screen will be hidden from view and may become clogged with debris over time. This will cause improper combustion. 13. BTH 500 NATURAL GAS MODELS ONLY: install the balance plate (removed in the previous step) on the Intake Air Termination if the installed equivalent length of the intake air pipe will be 50 feet or less. Discard the balance plate for all other models or if the installed equivalent length of the intake air pipe will be more than 50 feet. See Figure 16. 14. If installing 4 inch intake air pipe connect the intake air pipe to the intake air connection on the water heater. 15. If installing 6" intake air pipe transition to 4" pipe at the intake air connection on the water heater as shown in Figure 17. The field installed 4" pipe between the intake air connection and the 6" x 4" reducer coupling should be 18 inches (45 cm) or less in length. INTAKE AIR SCREEN BALANCE PLATE (remove for Direct Vent) (remove for Direct Vent) (reinstall on the Intake Air Termination of 500,000 Btu /hr natural gas models with 50 equivalent feet or less of intake air pipe) 4" x 3" REDUCER COUPLING - FACTORY INSTALLED INTAKE AIR CONNECTION DETAIL Figure 16 6" PIPE FIELD 4" PIPE FIELD 3" PIPE FACTORY SUPPLIED SUPPLIED INSTALLED INTAKE AIR 6" x 4" REDUCER FIELD SUPPLIED 4" x 3" REDUCER CO BLLOOWWER ER FACTORY INSTALLED INTAKE AIR CONNECTION INTAKE AIR CONNECTION Figure 17 VERTICAL TERMINATION INSTALLATION 24 1. Determine the location for the termination(s). 2. If installing only the vent (exhaust) piping in a Power Vent configuration vertically through the roof; ensure that all exterior vertical clearance requirements shown in Figure 18 and Figure 19 on page 25 are being maintained. These clearances and those cited by local and national codes must be maintained. NOTE: On flat roof installations the vent termination must be a minimum of 24 inches (60 cm) above any parapet, vertical wall or structure within 10 feet (3 m) horizontally. See Figure 19 on page 25. 3. If installing both intake air and vent piping in a Direct Vent configuration vertically through the roof; ensure that all exterior vertical clearance requirements shown in Figure 18 and Figure 19 on page 25 are being maintained. These clearances and those cited by local and national codes must be maintained. NOTE: On flat roof installations the intake air and the vent terminations must be a minimum of 24 inches (60 cm) above any parapet, vertical wall or structure within 10 feet (3 m) horizontally. See Figure 19 on page 25. 4. If installing only vent piping in a Power Vent configuration vertically through the roof the following instructions must be followed: The vent termination must be oriented facing downward as shown in Figure 18 and Figure 19 on page 25. The bottom edge of the vent termination must be a minimum of 12 inches (30 cm), 18 inches (45 cm) in Canada, above the average or expected snow level as shown in Figure 18 on page 25. 5. If installing both intake air and vent piping in a Direct Vent configuration vertically through the roof the following instructions must be followed: The intake air and vent pipes must penetrate the same side of the roof as shown in Figure 20 on page 25. The intake air and vent terminations must be oriented facing downward and in the same direction as shown in Figure 20 on page 25. The intake air and vent terminations must have a minimum separation of 24" (61 cm) measured on center line as shown in Figure 20 on page 25. In colder climates this separation should be increased to at least 48 inches (122 cm). The bottom edge of the intake air and vent terminations must be a minimum of 12 inches (30 cm), 18 inches (45 cm) r • in Canada, above the average or expected snow level as shown in Figure 18 and Figure 20.on page 25. 6. When the intake air and /or vent piping from multiple water heaters will terminate in the same location the vent terminations can be grouped together in close proximity 0 inches /touching. Intake air terminations can also be grouped together in close proximity 0 inches /touching. The distance between the closest vent and intake air terminations must be a minimum of 24 inches (61 cm) as shown in Figure 20. In colder climates this separation should be increased to at least 48 inches (122 cm). 7. Cut a 5 inch (13 cm) diameter hole for 4 inch pipe or 7 inch (18 cm) diameter hole for 6 inch pipe where the pipe(s) will pass through the roof. NOTE: Beware of concealed wiring and piping when cutting through the roof. 8. Suspend the pipe(s) through center of hole using field supplied metal strapping or equivalent support materials as shown in Figure 18. 2" (5 cm) MAXIMUM ` FACTORY SUPPLIED l+ STANDARD TERMINATION POINTED DOWN TOWARDS THE GROUND FIELD SUPPLIED 90° ELBOW FIELD SUPPLIED PLUMBING ROOF BOOT OR FLASHING FIELD SUPPLIED STRAP /SUPPORT 1 00 00 00 MAINTAIN 12" (30 cm) 18" (45 cm) FOR CANADA MINIMUM CLEARANCE ABOVE HIGHEST ANTICIPATED SNOW LEVEL. VERTICAL TERMINATION(S) INSTALLATION INTAKE AIR AND /OR VENT (EXHAUST) Figure 18 9. Slide a roof boot or equivalent flashing over the pipe and secure roof boot or equivalent flashing to roof (see Figure 18) and seal around the flashing. 10. Install the factory supplied intake air and /or vent termination(s) using field supplied pipe and one field supplied 90° elbow as shown in Figure 18. The short section of pipe that connects between the field supplied 90° elbow and the factory supplied termination must not be excessive in length. The exposed portion of this pipe shall be no more than 2 inches (5 cm), see Figure 18. 25 IF LESS THAN 10 FEET (3 m) t 24 INCHES (60 cm) MINIMUM HEIGHT ABOVE INTAKE AIR AND /OR VENT TERMINATION(S) MUST BE A MINIMUM OF 24 INCES (60 cm) ABOVE ANY PARAPET, VERTICAL WALL OR STRUCTURE WITHIN 10 FEET (3 m) HORIZONTALLY. 100000001 VERTICAL TERMINATION(S) FLAT ROOF CLEARANCE INTAKE AIR AND /OR VENT (EXHAUST) Figure 19 11. Return to Power Vent Installation on page 23 or Direct Vent Installation on page 23 to complete the installation of the intake air and /or vent piping between the termination(s) and the water heater. 24 INCHES (61 cm) MINIMUM 48 INCHES (122 cm) IN COLDER CLIMATES FIELD SUPPLIED 90° ELBOW VENT (EXHAUST) TERMINATION �► FACTORY SUPPLIED STANDARD TERMINATIONS POINTED DOWNWARD INTAKE AIR TERMINATION MAINTAIN 12' (30 cm) 18' (45 cm) FOR CANADA MINIMUM CLEARANCE ABOVE HIGHEST ANTICIPATED SNOW LEVEL. FIELD SUPPLIED PLUMBING ROOF BOOTS OR FLASHINGS VERTICAL TERMINATION - DIRECT VENT STANDARD TERMINATIONS Figure 20 SIDEWALL TERMINATION INSTALLATION 1. Determine the location for the termination(s). 2. If installing only vent (exhaust) piping in a Power Vent configuration through a sidewall; ensure that all exterior sidewall clearance requirements for the termination, shown in Figure 47 on page 34, are being maintained. These clearances and those cited by local and national codes must be maintained. 3. If installing both intake air and vent piping in a Direct Vent configuration through a sidewall; ensure that all exterior sidewall clearance requirements for the terminations, shown in Figure 48 on page 35, for the vent and intake air termination are being maintained. These clearances and those cited by local and national codes must be maintained. 4. If installing both an intake air and vent termination in a Direct Vent configuration through a sidewall there must be a minimum of 24 inches (61 cm) separation, measured on vertical center line, between the intake air and vent terminations, see Figure 21. NOTE: In colder climates this separation should be increased to at least 48 inches (122 cm) between the intake air and vent termination or any other appliance vent that discharges moisture -laden air such as clothes dryers. This will reduce possibility of frost over from side winds blowing exhaust vapors to the intake air termination and is recommended for Canadian installations. 5. If installing both intake air and vent terminations in a Direct Vent configuration through a sidewall the intake air and vent terminations must be installed at the same elevation measured on horizontal center line - see Figure 21. VENT (EXHAUST) TERMINATION ELEVATION INSTALL ON CENTERLINE KEEP INTAKE AND VENT TERMINATION SCREENS CLEAR OF DEBRIS INTAKE AIR TERMINATION 24 INCHES (61 cm) MINIMUM I.4 ►I 148 INCHES (122 cm) IN COLDER CLIMATES I SIDEWALL TERMINATION - DIRECT VENT STANDARD TERMINATIONS Figure 21 6. When the intake air and /or vent piping from multiple water heaters will terminate at the same location through a sidewall, the vent terminations can be grouped together in close proximity - 0 inches /touching. The intake air terminations can also be grouped together in close proximity - 0 inches/ touching. However, the distance between the closest vent and intake air terminations must be a minimum of 24 inches (61 cm). In colder climates this separation should be increased to at least 48 inches (122 cm). See Figure 21. 26 7. Cut a 5 inch (13 cm) diameter, hole for 4 inch pipe or 7 inch (18 cm) diameter hole for 6 inch pipe where the pipe(s) will pass through the wall. NOTE: Beware of concealed wiring and piping when cutting through the wall. 8. Cut a length(s) of pipe being installed 3.5 inches (8.9 cm) to 9.5 inches (24.1 cm) longer than the wall thickness at the opening. See Figure 22. NOTE: Vent Termination — exhaust gases of this water heater are less than 140 °F. In cold climates water vapor in the exhaust gases will condense into a cloud of vapor where the vent exits the building. This vapor can gradually discolor exterior building surfaces. The vent termination should be located where this vapor cloud and potential discoloration are not a concern. Extending the exposed vent piping up to a maximum of 6 inches (15.2 cm) from the wall helps vapor from being trapped along a building's face. To avoid this problem, the vent can also be terminated vertically through the roof, see Vertical Termination Installation on page 24. 9. Cement the intake air and /or vent termination to the section(s) of pipe cut to length in the above Step. 10. Slide the included metal wall plate(s) over the pipe(s) to stop against the intake air and /or vent termination. Place some silicone caulking (field supplied) on the back of the wall plate(s) to secure it to the wall. Working from outside, slide the pipe and termination(s) assembled in the above steps through the wall. Ensure the termination(s) is pointed down towards the ground. See Figure 22. 11. METAL PLATES INSTALL INSIDE AND /OR OUTSIDE FROM WATER HEATER COUPLING INTERIOR WALL INCREASE EXPOSED VENT PIPING UP TO A MAXIMUM OF 6 INCHES (15.2 cm) FROM WALL TO HELP PREVENT VAPOR FROM DISCOLORING THE WALL '' SURFACE IN COLDER CLIMATES 1111 FACTORY SUPPLIED STANDARD TERMINATION POINTED DOWN TOWARDS THE GROUND EXTERIOR WALL SIDEWALL TERMINATION INSTALLATION INTAKE AIR AND /OR VENT (EXHAUST) Figure 22 12. Place a bead of silicone caulking (field supplied) around the gap between the installed pipe(s) and the wall. Apply enough to fill the gap between the pipe(s) and wall. 13. Press the wall plate flush against the outside wall. 14. Working from the inside apply enough silicone caulking on the back of the interior wall plate(s) to hold it in place and slide the wall plate over the installed pipe(s). 15. Install a coupling to the end of the pipe(s) inside the building. Before the silicone caulking has time to completely set go outside the building and ensure the termination(s) is still pointing down towards the ground. See Figure 22. 16. Return to Power Vent Installation on page 23 or Direct Vent Installation on page 23 to complete the installation of the intake air and /or vent piping between the termination(s) and the water heater. CONCENTRIC TERMINATION INSTALLATION 1. Determine which concentric termination will be installed. BTH 300 models must use the 4 inch termination; Part Number: 9006328005. BTH 400 and BTH 500 models must use the 6 inch termination; Part Number: 9006144005. 2. Determine the location for the termination. NOTE: Roof termination is preferred since it is less susceptible to damage, has reduced chances to intake contaminants and vent vapors are less visible. 3. When installing a concentric termination vertically through the roof; ensure that all exterior vertical clearance requirements for the concentric termination, shown in Figure 26 on page 28 and Figure 29 on page 29, are being maintained. These clearances and those cited by local and national codes must be maintained. 4. When installing a concentric termination vertically through a flat roof, the termination's vent cap must be a minimum of 10 feet (3 m) away from any parapet, vertical wall or structure as shown in Figure 23 and Figure 24. NOTE: If this required distance to a parapet, vertical wall or structure cannot be maintained, standard terminations must be used. See Vertical Termination Installation on page 24 5. When installing a concentric termination through a sidewall; ensure that all exterior sidewall clearance requirements for the termination, shown in Figure 48 on page 35, are being maintained. These clearances and those cited by local and national codes must be maintained. 6. When installing multiple concentric terminations vertically through a roof or horizontally through a sidewall ensure the required clearances between terminations and groupings of multiple terminations are maintained. See pages 30 and 31 for more information. 7. Cut a 5 inch (13 cm) diameter hole for 4 inch concentric terminations or 7 inch (18 cm) diameter hole for 6 inch concentric terminations where the terminations (s) will pass through the wall or roof. NOTE: Beware of concealed wiring and piping when cutting through the wall or roof. 8. When installing multiple concentric terminations vertically through the roof in the same location the termination caps for all concentric terminations must be at the same height measured from ground. See Multiple Concentric Termination Arrangements on page 31. 9. Determine if the concentric termination will need to be shortened or lengthened to accommodate required clearances or to ensure all vent caps are at the same height when installing multiple terminations vertically through the roof in the same location. See Figure 25 on page 28 and Figure 28 on page 29 for the maximum and minimum lengths allowed for the 4 inch and 6 inch concentric terminations. When extending the length of a concentric termination DO NOT use couplings. The use of couplings will restrict flow through the termination and may cause improper combustion. The termination's intake air and vent pipes must be replaced with longer sections of the same pipe material when extending the length of the termination. Use only SDR -26 pipe to extend the 4 inch concentric termination. Use only Schedule 40 PVC to extend the 6 inch concentric termination. 27 When shortening the length of the termination carefully measure and cut the larger (intake air) pipe first. Cut the same amount of pipe off of the smaller (vent) pipe. 10. Depending on which termination(s) is being installed go to 4 Inch Concentric Termination Installation on page 28 or 6 Inch Concentric Termination Installation on page 29. } CONCENTRIC TERMINATION(S) MUST BE A MINIMUM OF 10 FEET (3 m) AWAY FROM ANY PARAPET, VERTICAL WALL OR STRUCTURE. 4 INCH CONCENTRIC TERM NATION FLAT ROOF CLEARANCE Figure 23 CONCENTRIC TERMINATION(S) MUST BE A MINIMUM OF 10 FEET (3 m) AWAY FROM ANY PARAPET, VERTICAL WALL OR STRUCTURE. 10000000 6 INCH CONCENTRIC TERMINATION FLAT ROOF CLEARANCE Figure 24 4 INCH CONCENTRIC TERMINATION INSTALLATION INTAKE AIR CONNECTION 3 INCH PVC 3 "x3 "x4° Y FITTING INTAKE AIR PIPE 1 VENT PIPE VENT CONNECTION - 3 INCH PVC VENT CAP VENT PIPE IS 2 1/2 INCH SDR -26 PIPE SUPPLIED LENGTH 37 INCHES (94 cm) MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LENGTH 73 INCHES (185 cm) MINIMUM ALLOWABLE LENGTH 25 INCHES (64 cm) INTAKE AIR PIPE IS 4 INCH SDR -26 PIPE SUPPLIED LENGTH 24 INCHES (60 cm) MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LENGTH 60 INCHES (152 cm) MINIMUM ALLOWABLE LENGTH 12 INCHES (30 cm) INTAKE AIR PIPE Y FITTING ASSEMBLY VENT CAP VENT PIPE ASSEMBLY • 4 INCH CONCENTRIC TERMINATION KIT FOUR PIECE KIT- FIELD ASSEMBLY REQUIRED Figure 25 Assemble and install the 4 inch concentric termination. Refer to Figure 25, Figure 26 and Figure 27 for these instructions: 1. Cement the Y fitting to the larger diameter intake air pipe. 2. Slide the intake air pipe and Y fitting assembly from inside the building through the hole cut for the termination in the roof or sidewall. Ensure no foreign materials such as insulation accumulate inside the assembly. 3. Secure the intake air Y fitting assembly using field supplied metal strapping or equivalent support materials. 4. On installations installed through the roof slide a field supplied plumbing boot or roof flashing over the intake air Y fitting assembly and secure it to the roof. 5. Seal around the plumbing boot or roof flashing. 6. Cement the vent cap onto the vent pipe. Alternately a field - supplied stainless steel screw may be used to secure the 2 components together when field disassembly is desired for cleaning. A pilot hole must be drilled for the screw to prevent damage /cracking of the vent cap and /or vent pipe. 7. Install the vent cap /vent pipe assembly into the intake air Y fitting assembly, Ensure small diameter vent pipe is cemented and bottomed in the Y fitting. 8. Connect the intake air and vent piping from the water heater to the 4 inch concentric termination using field supplied 4" x 3" or 6" x 3" reducer couplings as needed. 9. Return to Direct Vent Installation on page 23 to complete the installation of the intake air and vent piping between the concentric termination and the water heater. COMBUSTION AIR ROOF FLASHING (field supplied) VENT MAINTAIN 12" (30 cm) 18" (45 cm) FOR CANADA MINIMUM CLEARANCE ABOVE HIGHEST ANTICIPATED SNOW LEVEL. MAXIMUM OF 24" (60 cm)ABOVE ROOF. VENT —� PIPE STRAP (field supplied) NOTE: SECURING STRAP MUST BE FIELD INSTALLED TO PREVENT MOVEMENT OF TERMINATION KIT INTAKE AIR PIPE 4 INCH CONCENTRIC TERMINATION VERTICAL INSTALLATION Figure 26 NOTE: SECURING STRAP MUST BE FIELD INSTALLED TO PREVENT MOVEMENT OF TERMINATION KIT IN SIDEWALL. VENT PIPE STRAP (field supplied) COMBUSTION AIR INTAKE AIR PIPE VENT 1 INCH MAXIMUM 4 INCH CONCENTRIC TERMINATION - SIDEWALL INSTALLATION 28 Figure 27 • 6 INCH CONCENTRIC TERMINATION INSTALLATION 6' x 4' STANDARD i INTAKE AIR CONNECTION REDUCER BUSHING 6' or 4' PVC INTAKE AIR PIPE 6" x 6' x6" Y FITTING VENT TERMINAL WITH SCREEN VENT PIPE VENT 6' x 4' NO STOP -LIP VENT CAP CONNECTION 4' PVC REDUCER BUSHING STAINLESS STEEL VENT PIPE IS 4 INCH SCHEDULE 40 PVC SUPPLIED LENGTH 46 1/2 INCHES (118 cm) MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LENGTH 66 12 INCHES (169 cm) MINIMUM ALLOWABLE LENGTH 33 1/8 INCHES (84 cm) INTAKE AIR PIPE IS 6 INCH SCHEDULE 40 PVC SUPPLIED LENGTH 25 3/8 INCHES (64 cm) MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LENGTH 45 3/8 INCHES (115 cm) MINIMUM ALLOWABLE LENGTH 12 INCHES (30 cm) INTAKE AIR PIPE Y FITTING ASSEMBLY VENT CAP VENT PIPE ASSEMBLY 6 INCH CONCENTRIC TERMINATION KIT SEVEN PIECE KIT - FIELD ASSEMBLY REQUIRED Figure 28 Assemble and install the 6 inch concentric termination. Refer to Figure 28, Figure 29 and Figure 30 for these instructions: 1. Cement the Y fitting to the larger diameter intake air pipe. 2. Cement the 6" x 4" no stop -lip reducer bushing into the straight (vent) end of the Y fitting. 3. If the intake air piping being installed is 4 inch pipe, cement the 6" x 4" standard reducer bushing into the angle (intake air) end of the Y fitting as shown in Figure 28. 4. If the intake air piping being installed is 6 inch pipe discard the 6" x 4" standard reducer bushing. The 6 inch intake air piping will connect directly to the angle end of the Y fitting. 5. Slide the intake air Y fitting assembly from inside the building through the hole cut for the termination in the roof or sidewall. Ensure no foreign materials such as insulation accumulate inside the assembly. 6. Secure the intake air Y fitting assembly using field supplied metal strapping or equivalent support materials. 7. On installations installed through the roof slide a field supplied plumbing boot or roof flashing over the intake air Y fitting assembly and secure it to the roof. 8. Seal around the plumbing boot or roof flashing. 9. Slide the steel vent cap onto the 4 inch vent pipe and cement the vent terminal to the end of the vent pipe. 10. Slide the vent cap back up the vent pipe until it touches the vent terminal. Secure the vent cap to the vent pipe using field supplied stainless steel screws. Pilot holes must be drilled for the screws to prevent damage /cracking of the vent pipe. Apply water proof silicone sealant between the vent cap and the terminal. 29 11. Push the vent cap /vent pipe assembly into the intake air Y fitting assembly until the vent cap seats properly on the large diameter intake air pipe. Ensure the vent pipe is cemented to the no stop -lip reducer bushing previously installed in the Y fitting. Secure the vent cap to intake air pipe with field supplied stainless steel screws. Install the screws through the pre - drilled holes in the vent cap brackets. Pilot holes for the screws must be drilled in the intake air pipe to prevent damage /cracking. COMBUSTION AIR VENT t MAINTAIN 12" (30 cm) 18" (45 cm) FOR CANADA MINIMUM CLEARANCE ABOVE HIGHEST ANTICIPATED SNOW LEVEL. MAXIMUM OF 24" (60 cm) ABOVE ROOF. ROOF FLASHING (field supplied) INTAKE AIR PIPE STRAP (field supplied) NOTE: SECURING STRAP MUST BE FIELD INSTALLED TO PREVENT MOVEMENT OF TERMINATION KIT VENT PIPE 6 INCH CONCENTRIC TERMINATION VERTICAL INSTALLATION Figure 29 NOTE: SECURING STRAP MUST BE FIELD INSTALLED TO PREVENT MOVEMENT OF TERMINATION KIT IN SIDEWALL. STRAP (field supplied) VENT PIPE COMBUSTION AIR INTAKE AIR PIPE VENT 1 INCH MAXIMUM 6 INCH CONCENTRIC TERMINATION SIDEWALL INSTALLATION Figure 30 12. Connect the intake air and vent piping from the water heater to the 6 inch concentric termination. Use field supplied 4 inch couplings or 6" x 4" reducer couplings as needed. 13. Return to Direct Vent Installation on page 23 to complete the installation of the intake air and vent piping between the concentric termination and the water heater. MULTIPLE CONCENTRIC TERMINATION CLEARANCES When installing multiple concentric terminations vertically through a roof or horizontally through a sidewall ensure the required clearances (separation) between terminations are maintained. Ensure multiple terminations are arranged or grouped as required. NOTE: These clearances• must be maintained to prevent the recirculation of vent (exhaust) gases to the intake air. Clearances are measured between the edges of the concentric termination caps. When installing multiple concentric terminations through a roof or through a sidewall the clearances shown in Figure 31 must be maintained. See Multiple Concentric Termination Arrangements on page 31. Close Proximity & Standard Clearance 1. The clearance between multiple termination caps must be 0 inches (touching) to a maximum of 2 inches (5cm), dimension A- Figure 31, when installing concentric terminations in close proximity. See Figure 36 on page 31. 2. The clearance between multiple termination caps must be increased to a minimum of 24 inches (61 cm), dimension B - Figure 31, when installation in close proximity (above) is not possible. This is the standard clearance. CONCENTRIC TERMINATION CAPS AEND VIEW 00 OR CLOSE PROXIMITY A = 0 - 2 INCHES (0 - 5 cm) B STANDARD CLEARANCE B = 24 INCHES (61 cm) OR GREATER TWO CONCENTRIC TERMINATIONS (THROUGH A ROOF OR SIDEWALL) Figure 31 Three Concentric Terminations 1. When installing three concentric terminations through a roof or through a sidewall the third termination may be installed in close proximity as indicated by dimension A in Figure 32. 2. If close proximity installation of the third termination is not possible the third termination may be installed as indicated by dimension B in Figure 32. CONCENTRIC TERMINATION CAPS END VIEW y i � O A A B THIRD TERMINATION A= 0 - 2 INCHES (0 - 5cm) B = 24 INCHES (61 cm) CLOSE PROXIMITY OR GREATER THREE CONCENTRIC TERMINATIONS (THROUGH A ROOF OR SIDEWALL) Figure 32 Four Concentric Terminations 1. When installing four concentric terminations through a roof or through a sidewall in close proximity they may be arranged into stacked rows of two as shown in Figure 33 or lateral rows of two as shown in Figure 34. 2. Four is the maximum number of concentric terminations that may be installed in a group where all terminations are in close proximity as shown in Figure 33. CONCENTRIC TERMINATION CAPS END VIEW A =0 -2 INCHES (0 -5cm) CLOSE PROXIMITY FOUR CONCENTRIC TERMINATIONS (THROUGH A ROOF OR SIDEWALL) Figure 33 A B CONCENTRIC TERMINATION CAPS END VIEW A }O 0 A = 0 - 2 INCHES (0 - 5cm) B = 24 INCHES (61 cm) CLOSE PROXIMITY OR GREATER FOUR CONCENTRIC TERMINATIONS (THROUGH A ROOF OR SIDEWALL) 30 Figure 34 Groups Of Terminations 1. When installing multiple groups of concentric terminations through a roof or through a sidewall in close proximity they can be installed into stacked groups of four as shown in Figure 35. Lateral groups of four as shown in Figure 34 may be a more convenient installation arrangement for multiple groups depending on available space. B CONCENTRIC TERMINATION CAPS END VIEW A =0 -2 INCHES (0 -5cm) CLOSE PROXIMITY B = 24 INCHES (61 cm) OR GREATER BETWEEN GROUPS OF FOUR EIGHT CONCENTRIC TERMINATIONS (THROUGH A ROOF OR SIDEWALL) Figure 35 MULTIPLE CONCENTRIC TERMINATION ARRANGEMENTS The illustrations on this page show some of the installation arrangements for multiple concentric terminations that are allowed. See Multiple Concentric Termination Clearances on page 30 for detailed information on clearances and additional arrangement options. NOTE: When multiple concentric terminations are installed through a roof in the same location all termination caps must be at the same height measured from the ground. Two Concentric Terminations Two concentric terminations may be installed in close proximity as shown in Figure 36 or with standard clearances when this arrangement is not possible. See Figure 31 on page 30 for detailed information on clearances. See Figure 32 on page 30 when installing three concentric terminations. Four Concentric Terminations Four concentric terminations may be installed in close proximity as shown in Figure 37. See Figure 33 and Figure 34 on page 30 for detailed information on clearances and additional arrangement options. Figure 37 Eight Concentric Terminations Eight concentric terminations may be installed in two stacked groups of four, in close proximity, as shown in Figure 38. See Figure 35 on page 30 for detailed information on clearances. Lateral groups of four as shown in Figure 34 on page 30 may be a more convenient installation arrangement for multiple groups depending on available space. Figure 36 31 Figure 38 VENTING ARRANGEMENTS 32 VENTING ARRANGEMENTS Direct Vent Vertical Vent Horizontal Intake Figure 43 Direct Vent Vertical Concentric Figure 45 33 Direct Vent Horizontal Vent Vertical Intake Figure 44 Direct Vent Horizontal Concentric Figure 46 TERMINATION CLEARANCES SIDEWALL POWER VENT POWER VENT (using room air for combustion) EXTERIOR CLEARANCES FOR SIDEWALL VENT TERMINATION VENT TERMINAL AIR SUPPLY INLET AREA WHERE TERMINAL IS NOT PERMITTED Figure 47 Vent terminal clearances for "Power Vent" installations. Power Vent configurations use room air for combustion. CANADIAN INSTALLATIONS 1 US INSTALLATIONS 2 CANADIAN INSTALLATIONS 1 US INSTALLATIONS 2 1 In accordance with the current CSA B149.1, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code. 2 In accordance with the current ANSI Z223.1 /NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code. t A vent shall not terminate directly above a sidewalk or paved driveway that is located between two single family dwellings and serves both dwellings. $ Permitted only if veranda, porch, deck, or balcony is fully open on a minimum of two sides beneath the floor. ' Clearance in accordance with local installation codes and the requirements of the gas supplier and the manufacturer's installation instructions. 34 Clearance above grade, veranda, porch, deck or balcony 12 inches (30 cm) - - 12 inches (30 cm) IS'I' Clearance to each side of center line extended above meter /regulator assembly 3 feet (91 cm) within a height 15 feet (4.5 m) above the meter/ regulator assembly 3 feet (91 cm) within a height 15 feet (4.5 m) above the meter /regulator assembly' B Clearance to window or door that may be opened 6 inches (15 cm) for appliances up to 10,000 Btu/hr (3 kVV), 12 inches (30 cm) for appliances between 10,000 Btu/hr (3 kW) and 100,000 Btu/hr (30 kW), 36 inches (91 cm) for appliances above 100,000 Btu/hr (30 kWh 4 feet (1.2 m) below or to side of opening 1 foot (30 cm) above opening III Clearance to service regulator vent outlet 3 feet (91 cm) 3 feet (91 cm)' C Clearance to permanently closed • window 12 inches (30 cm)' . 12 inches (30 cm)' .._ . ,J , Clearance to a non mechanical air supply inlet into building or combustion air inlet to any other appliance 6 inches (15 cm) for appliances up to 10.000 Btu/hr (3 kVV). 12 inches (30 cm) for appliances between : 10,000 Btu/hr (3 kWh and 100,000 Btu/hr (30kVV), 36 inches (91 cm) for appliances above 100,000 Btu/ hr (30 kW) 4 feet (1.2 m) below or to side of opening; 1 foot (30 cm) above opening: �within . Vertical clearance to ventilated soffit located above the terminal a horizontal distance of 2 feet (61 cm) from the center line of the terminal 12 inches (30 cm ( )� 12 inches (30 cm ' ( ) _' ' K. Clearance to a supply mechanical air PP y inlet • (1.83 m) 6 feet ( ) 3 feet (91 cm) above if within 10 feet (3 m) horizontally EClearance to unventilated soffit 12 inches (30 cm)' 12 inches (30 cm)' ,Li Clearance above paved sidewalk or paved driveway located on public property 7 feet (2.13 m)1 7 feet (2.13 m) F Clearance to outside comer 2 feet (60 cm)* 2 feet (60 cm)' M' Clearance under veranda, porch, deck, or balcony 12 inches (30 cm) # 12 inches (30 cm) # . �. Clearance to inside comer 18 inches (45 cm)' 18 inches (45 cm)' 1 In accordance with the current CSA B149.1, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code. 2 In accordance with the current ANSI Z223.1 /NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code. t A vent shall not terminate directly above a sidewalk or paved driveway that is located between two single family dwellings and serves both dwellings. $ Permitted only if veranda, porch, deck, or balcony is fully open on a minimum of two sides beneath the floor. ' Clearance in accordance with local installation codes and the requirements of the gas supplier and the manufacturer's installation instructions. 34 • TERMINATION CLEARANCES SIDEWALL DIRECT VENT DIRECT VENT (using outdoor air for combustion) EXTERIOR CLEARANCES FOR SIDEWALL VENT TERMINATION VENT TERMINAL O AIR SUPPLY INLET AREA WHERE TERMINAL IS NOT PERMITTED Figure 48 Vent terminal clearances for "Direct Vent" installations. Direct Vent configurations use outdoor air for combustion. CANADIAN INSTALLATIONS 1 US INSTALLATIONS 2 1 CANADIAN INSTALLATIONS US INSTALLATIONS 2 1 In accordance with the current CSA B149.1, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code. 2 In accordance with the current ANSI Z223.1 /NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code. t A vent shall not terminate directly above a sidewalk or paved driveway that is located between two single family dwellings and serves both dwellings. $ Permitted only if veranda, porch, deck, or balcony is fully open on a minimum of two sides beneath the floor. Clearance in accordance with local installation codes and the requirements of the gas supplier and the manufacturer's installation instructions. 35 Clearance above grade. veranda, porch, deck or balcony 12 inches (30 cm) 12 inches (30 cm) H ; Clearance to each side of center line extended above meter /regulator assembly 3 feet (91 cm) within a height 15 feet (4.5 m) above the meter/ regulator assembly 3 feet (91 cm) within a height 15 feet (4.5 m) above the meter /regulator assembly' B Clearance to window or door that may be opened 6 inches (15 cm) for appliances up to 10.000 Btu/hr (3 kVV), 12 inches (30 cm) for appliances between 10.000 Btu/hr (3 kW) and 100.000 Btu/hr (30 kVV). 36 inches (91 cm) for appliances above 100.000 Btufir (30 kW( 6 inches (15 cm) for appliances up to 10.000 Btu/hr (3 for 9 inches (23 cm) or appliances between 10.000 Btu/hr (3 kW) and 50.000 Btufir (15 kW). 12 Inches (30 cm) for appliances above 50.000 Btu/hr (15 kVV) 1 Clearance to service regulator vent outlet 3 feet (91 cm) 3 feet (91 cm) '..0 Clearance to permanently closed window 6 inches (15 cm)* 6 inches (15 cm)* - J Clearance to a non mechanical air supply inlet into building or combustion air inlet to any other appliance 6 inches (15 cm) for appliances up to 10.000 Btu/hr (3 kW). 12 inches (30 cm) for appliances between 10.000 Btu/hr (3 kW) and 100.000 Btu/hr (30 kW). 36 inches (91 cm) for appliances above 100.000 Btu/ hr (30 kVV) 6 inches (15 cm) for appliances up to 10,000 Btufir (3 kW). 9 inches (23 10. for appliances between 10.000 Btu/hr (3 kW) and 50.000 Btufir (15 kW), 12 inches (30 cm) for appliances above 50.000 Btu/hr (15 kW) D, Vertical clearance to ventilated soffit located above the terminal within a honzontal distance of 2 feet (61 cm) from the center line of the terminal 12 inches (30 cm)• 12 inches (30 cm)* F( Clearance to a mechanical air supply inlet 6 feet (1 83 m) 3 feet (91 cm) above d within 10 feet (3 m) honzontally E Clearance to unventilated soffit 12 inches (30 cm ( )' 12 inches (30 cm ( )' L Clearance above paved sidewalk or paved driveway located on public property 7 feet 2 13 m (. )t 7 feet (2.13 Inn* ( F Clearance to outside comer 2 feet (60 cm)* 2 feet (60 cm)• M Clearance under veranda, porch, deck, or balcony 12 inches (30 cm)* 12 inches (30 cm) $' G - Clearance to inside comer 18 inches (45 cm)* 18 inches (45 cm)* 1 In accordance with the current CSA B149.1, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code. 2 In accordance with the current ANSI Z223.1 /NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code. t A vent shall not terminate directly above a sidewalk or paved driveway that is located between two single family dwellings and serves both dwellings. $ Permitted only if veranda, porch, deck, or balcony is fully open on a minimum of two sides beneath the floor. Clearance in accordance with local installation codes and the requirements of the gas supplier and the manufacturer's installation instructions. 35 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION ALTERNATE CONDENSATE LINE This section of the manual provides supplemental information for replacing the flexible condensate hose the water heater is equipped with from the factory with a rigid condensate line. Recommended pipe material is Schedule 40 PVC though other approved piping materials may be used. MATERIALS FOR PVC CONDENSATE LINE Materials to be field supplied. • 1/2" PVC pipe - minimum length to equal the distance between the water heater and drain. • 1/2° PVC NPT male pipe adapter. • 4 - 1/2" PVC 90° elbows minimum - more may be required to reach drain. • 1 -1/2" PVC 45° elbow. • PVC cement and PVC primer. • Soft set thread sealing compound (pipe dope). EXISTING CONDENSATE HOSE CONNECTION BLOCKED EXHAUST PRESSURE SWITCH SENSING TUBE CONNECTION CONDENSATE CONNECTION �= 1/2" PVC THREADED TEE FITTING VENT PIPE CONNECTION WATER HEATER CONNECTION BARBED HOSE ADAPTER THREADED PVC PLUG WATER HEATER EXHAUST ELBOW Figure 49 REMOVE EXISTING CONDENSATE HOSE Refer to Figure 49 for the following instructions: 1. Turn off power at the water heater's on /off switch. 2. Disconnect the existing flexible condensate hose from the barbed hose adapter. 3. Brace the 1/2" Threaded Tee Fitting on the bottom of the exhaust elbow with a pipe wrench or channel lock pliers. 4. Loosen and remove the barbed hose adapter from the 1/2" Tee fitting with a wrench. INSTALL RIGID PVC CONDENSATE LINE 1. Apply thread sealing compound to the threads of the 1/2" PVC male pipe adapter. 2. Install the 1/2" PVC male pipe adapter into the threaded opening of the 1/2" PVC Tee fitting the hose adapter was removed from. 3. Using PVC primer and cement install short section of 1/2" PVC into the other end of the 1/2" male pipe adapter. 4. Using 1/2" PVC elbows and pipe build a condensate trap as shown in Figure 50. Use PVC primer and cement on all joints. 5. Ensure the trap has the minimum height between the inlet and the bottom of the condensate trap (on center line) as shown in Figure 50. 6. Complete the construction of the PVC drain line between the water heater and a suitable drain as shown in Figure 51. Use PVC primer and cement on all joints. 7. Brace the condensate drain line with floor mounted standoffs every three feet. CONDENSATE TRAP DETAIL 36 1" MIN CONDENSATE TRAP Figure 50 •.i� ENSURE DRAIN LINE RUNS /)1 DOWNHILL AFTER THE TRAP BRACE CONDENSATE LINE' EVERY THREE FEET WITH FLOOR MOUNTED STAND OFFS Figure 51 8. Terminate the drain line with a 45° elbow at a suitable drain. 9. When the drain line is completed restore power to the water heater. 10. Ensure condensate is flowing freely through the new drain line. NOTE: Ensure drain line is not elevated above the bottom edge of the exhaust elbow. The condensate build up will block the exhaust (vent) outlet which will cause the control system to declare a "Blocked Exhaust" Fault condition and lock out. SUPPLY GAS LINE INSTALLATION Contact your local gas utility company to ensure that adequate gas service is available and to review applicable installation codes for your area. Be sure that the gas meter has sufficient capacity to supply the rated gas input of the water heater as well as the requirements of all other gas fired equipment supplied by the meter. If the gas meter is undersized, the gas company will have to install a properly sized gas meter. Fire and Explosion Hazard • Do not use water heater with any gas other than the gas shown on the rating label. • Excessive gas pressure to gas valve can cause serious injury or death. • Turn off gas lines during installation. • Contact a qualified installer or service agency for installation and service. Make sure gas supplied is same type listed on the water heater's rating label. The water heaters covered in this manual are not intended for operation at higher than 10.0" W. C. (2.49 kPa) for natural gas and 12.0" W. C. (2.98 kPa) for propane gas supply pressure, see Table 4 on page 13. The water heaters covered in this manual require supply gas regulators to maintain required supply gas pressure. Exposure to higher gas supply pressure may cause damage to the gas controls which could result in fire or explosion. If overpressure has occurred such as through improper testing of gas lines or malfunction of the supply system the water heater's gas valve must be checked for safe operation by a Qualified Service Agency. Ensure supply regulator vent lines and the safety vent valves are protected against blockage. These are components of the gas supply system, not the water heater. Vent blockage may occur during ice storms. It is important to guard against gas valve fouling from contaminants in the gas ways. Such fouling may cause improper operation, fire or explosion. If copper supply lines are used they must be internally tinned and certified for gas service. REGULATED GAS SUPPLY LINE MAIN GAS SHUTOFF VALVE TEE FITTING - SEDIMENT TRAP (DIRT LEG) PIPE CAP Figure 52 Ensure all gas pipe is clean on the inside before installation. To trap any dirt or foreign material in the gas supply line a sediment trap (dirt leg) must be installed as shown in Figure 52. The sediment trap must be readily accessible and not subject to freezing conditions. Install in accordance with the recommendations of the local gas utility company. 37 GAS LINE SIZING DO NOT use flexible gas piping. Minimum required supply gas line sizes are shown in Table 5 on page 13. Depending on the developed equivalent length and /orthe number of appliances connected to a common main, the size of supply gas lines may have to be increased. Size the supply /main gas line(s) in accordance with Table 8 or Table 9. The values given in Table 8 and Table 9 are for straight lengths of iron pipe at 0.5 in. W. C. (125 Pa) pressure drop, which is considered normal for low pressure systems. Note that fittings such as elbows and tees will add to the pipe pressure drop. SUPPLY GAS LINE SIZING U. S. UNITS TABLE 8 LENGTH IN FEET NORMAL IRON PIPE SIZES (INCHES) INPUT IN THOUSANDS BTU /HR 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" 2 1/2" 3" 4" 10 1400 2100 3960 6300 11000 23000 20 950 1460 2750 4360 7700 15800 30 770 1180 2200 3520 6250 12800 40 660 990 1900 3000 5300 10900 50 580 900 1680 2650 4750 9700 60 530 810 1520 2400 4300 8800 70 490 750 1400 2250 3900 8100 80 460 690 1300 2050 3700 7500 90 430 650 1220 1950 3450 7200 100 400 620 1150 1850 3250 6700 125 360 550 1020 1650 2950 6000 150 325 500 950 1500 2650 5500 175 300 460 850 1370 2450 5000 200 N/A 430 800 1280 2280 4600 SUPPLY GAS LINE SIZING METRIC UNITS TABLE 9 LENGTH IN METERS NORMAL IRON PIPE SIZES (INCHES) INPUT IN kW 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" 2 1/2" 3" 4" 3.0 410 615 1160 1845 3221 673'5 6.1 278 428 805 1277 2255 4626 9.1 225 346 644 1031 1830 3748 12.2 193 290 556 878 1552 3192 15.2 170 264 492 776 1391 2840 18.3 155 237 445 703 1259 2577 21.3 143 220 410 659 1142 2372 24.4 135 202 381 600 1083 2196 27.4 126 190 357 571 1010 2108 30.5 117 182 337 542 952 1962 38.1 105 161 299 483 864 1757 45.7 95 146 278 439 776 1610 53.3 88 135 249 401 717 1464 61.0 N/A 126 234 375 688 1347 GAS LINE CONNECTION 1. The water heaters covered by this manual are shipped from the factory with a 1 1/4" supply gas connection, see Table 1 on page 10. Short pipe nipples and reducer couplings are factory installed to increase the size of the water heater's 24 VAC Gas Valve inlet, see Figure 53. 2. BTH 500 natural gas models (Series 100) require a 1 1/2" minimum supply gas line. All other water heaters covered by this manual require a 1 1/4" minimum supply gas line. See Table 5 on page 13. Install a field supplied 1 1/2" x 1 1/4" reducer coupling and 1 1/4" pipe nipple to accommodate the minimum required 1 1/2" supply gas line as shown in Figure 53 on BTH 500 natural gas models (Series 100). See the rating label on the water heater to verify fuel type and Series number. FIELD SUPPLIED 1 1/2" x 1 1/4" REDUCER COUPLING AND 1 1/4" PIPE NIPPLE INSTALLED ON 500,000 BTU /HR NATURAL GAS MODELS LOW GAS PRESSURE SWITCH TO MAIN BURNER FLOW t SUPPLY GAS CONNECTION FACTORY INSTALLED 1 1/4" x 1" REDUCER COUPLING AND NIPPLE 24 VAC GAS VALVE SUPPLY GAS LINE CONNECTION (500,000 BTU /HR MODEL SHOWN) Figure 53 3. Apply thread sealing compounds (pipe dope/ Teflon tape) sparingly and only to the male threads of the pipe joints. Do not apply sealing compound to the first two threads. Use pipe dope or Teflon tape marked as being resistant to the action of liquid petroleum (LP /propane) gases. 4. When connecting the supply gas line to the water heater do not use a wrench on the water heater's 24 VAC Gas Valve body or bracket. 5. To .prevent damage, care .must be taken not to apply too much torque when connecting the supply gas line to the water heater. 6. Use a back up wrench when tightening fittings and sections of gas pipe near the water heater to prevent the 24 VAC Gas Valve on the water heater from twisting during installation. 7. Install a sediment trap (dirt leg) as shown in Figure 52 on page 37. 8. Install a Main Gas Shutoff valve in the supply gas line as shown in Figure 52 on page 37. NOTE: Should overheating occur or the gas supply fail to shut off, turn off the manual gas control valve to the water heater. GAS LINE LEAK TESTING Fire and Explosion Hazard • Use joint compound or Teflon tape compatible with propane gas. • Leak test before placing the water heater in operation. • Disconnect gas piping and main gas shutoff valve before leak testing. • Install sediment trap in accordance with NFPA 54. Any time work is done on the gas supply system perform a leak test to avoid the possibility of fire or explosion. 1. For test pressures exceeding 1/2 psi (3.45 kPa) disconnect the water heater and its Main Gas Shutoff Valve from the gas supply piping system during testing, see Figure 52 on page 37. The gas supply line must be capped when disconnected from the water heater. 2. For test pressures of 1/2 psi (3.45 kpa) or less, the appliance need not be disconnected, but must be isolated from the supply gas line by closing the Main Gas Shutoff Valve during testing. 3. Paint all supply gas line joints and connections upstream of the water heater with a rich soap and water solution to test for leaks. Bubbles indicate a gas leak. Do not use matches, candles, flame or other sources of ignition for this purpose. 4. Repair any leaks before placing the water heater in operation. SUPPLY GAS REGULATOR INSTALLATION 38 The water heaters covered in this manual must have a supply gas regulator installed in the supply gas line connected to the water heater. See the Installation Requirements on page 13. 1. A supply gas regulator shall be installed for each water heater on multiple water heater installations. 2. Supply gas regulators must be rated at or above the input Btu /hr rating of the water heater they supply. 3. Supply gas regulators shall have inlet and outlet connections not less than the minimum supply gas line size for the water heater they supply. See Table 5 on page 13. The Maxitrol 325 -7L supply gas regulator or equivalent is recommended. 4. Supply gas regulator(s) shall be installed no closer than 3 feet (1 meter) and no farther than 10 feet (3 meters) from the supply gas connection on the water heater. ELECTRICAL WIRING All electrical work must be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code, ANSI /NFPA 70 or the Canadian Electrical Code, CSA C22.1 and local requirements. When installed, the water heater must be electrically grounded in accordance with local codes or, in the absence of local codes, with the National Electrical Code, ANSI /NFPA 70 or the Canadian Electrical Code, CSA C22.1. If any of the original wire as supplied with the water heater must be replaced, it must be replaced with 105 °C rated wiring or its equivalent, except in the burner housing. In this case use 200 °C rated wire must be used. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS Read the requirements for the Power Supply on page 13 before connecting power. Correct Polarity: The water heater's control system is polarity sensitive and will lock out and disable heating operation if the polarity of the power supply is reversed. The control system will display the "AC Reversed" Fault message on the LCD. The 120 VAC hot wire from the power supply must connect to the black wire in the junction box and the 120 VAC neutral wire must connect to the white wire in the junction box for correct polarity. Power supply connections must be made as follows: 1. Ensure the power supply is turned off at the breaker or disconnect switch. 2. Remove the junction box cover. See Figure 3 on page 8 for junction box location. 3. Connect the 120 VAC hot wire from the power supply to the black wire in the junction box on top of the water heater with a properly sized wire nut. Wrap electrical tape around the wire nut and wire end. See wiring diagrams Figure 62 on page 64 and Figure 63 on page 65. 4. Connect the 120 VAC neutral wire from the power supply to the white wire in the junction box. Wrap electrical tape around the wire nut and wire end. See wiring diagrams Figure 62 on page 64 and Figure 63 on page 65. 5. Connect the ground wire from the power supply to the grounding lug inside the junction box. See wiring diagrams Figure 62 on page 64 and Figure 63 on page 65. 6. Replace the junction box cover when connections are complete. NOTE: Do not apply power to the water heater before installation is complete and the water heater is filled with water. ENABLE /DISABLE CIRCUIT The water heaters covered in this manual are equipped with an enable /disable circuit for use with field supplied external supervisory controls such as time clocks or building Building Management Systems. The enable /disable circuit may be used to disable heating operation during periods when the building is unoccupied or there is no demand for hot water. To use the enable /disable circuit it must first be activated by configuring the S1 dipswitch on the water heater's CCB (central control board), see Figure 61 on page 63. Field supplied wiring is then installed between the water heater's CCB and a set of "dry contacts" (no voltage or load) on the field supplied external control. NOTE: The water heater's enable /disable circuit is a switching circuit only: Do not apply external voltage or connect any load (IE: relay coil) to this circuit. This will damage the CCB circuit board and is not covered under the limited warranty. Connecting An External Supervisory Control The enable /disable circuit is accessed from the CCB's J6 plug inside the CCB enclosure, see Figure 3 on page 8 to locate the CCB enclosure. From the factory there is a short (black) jumper wire installed between pins 8 and 11 of the J6 plug, see Figure 61 on page 63 to locate the J6 plug. Install field wiring to the enable /disable circuit: 1. Turn off power at the water heater's on /off switch and the breaker that supplies power to the appliance. 2. Locate the CCB enclosure. 3. Remove the screws from the CCB enclosure cover and carefully open the CCB enclosure. Note how strain relief for the wiring is provided between the cover and enclosure along one edge. 4. Activate the enable /disable circuit; locate the S1 dipswitch on the CCB, see Figure 61 on page 63. • Toggle S1 dipswitch #2 to the open position. • Toggle S1 dipswitch #3 to the open position. 5. Locate the black jumper wire between pin 8 and 11 on the CCB J6 plug, see Figure 61 on page 63 and Figure 62 on page 64. 6. Cut the black jumper wire in the middle. 7. Strip approximately 1/2 inch of insulation from the two ends of the black jumper wire. 8. Using wire nuts connect two field supplied control wires to the two ends of the black jumper wire. Wrap electrical tape around the wire nut connections. 9. Thread the control wires out of the CCB enclosure with the other wiring and carefully replace the CCB enclosure cover. Ensure all wiring is routed through the indented area provided for strain relief. Ensure no wiring is being pinched. 10. Reinstall the CCB enclosure cover screws and tighten. 11. Route the control wires inside the junction box on the top of the water heater, see Figure 3 on page 8 to locate the junction box. Use an available knock -out to route the wires inside the junction box. 12. Install field supplied control wiring and conduit as required by national and local codes between the water heater's junction box and the external supervisory control. Connect the wiring from the external control to the control wires inside the junction box using wire nuts and electrical tape. 13. Connect the control wiring to a set of dry contacts on the external control. Follow the control manufacturers instructions for making connections. 14. Restore power to the water heater. NOTE: Whenever the external control opens the set of dry contacts used, heating operation will be disabled. Whenever the external control closes the set of dry contacts used, heating operation will be enabled. A diagonal line and circle appears over the thermometer icon on the control system's display when heating operation is disabled. See the Status Icons descriptions in Table 11 on page 43. NOTE: Ensure the water heater is protected from freezing temperatures when heating operation is disabled. Damage to the water heater caused by freezing temperatures is not covered under the limited warranty. 39 WATER LINE CONNECTIONS The water piping installation must conform to these instructions and to all local and national code authority having jurisdiction. Good practice requires that all heavy piping be supported. Read and observe all requirements in the following sections before installation of the water piping begins: 1. Mixing Valves on page 14. 2. Dishwashing Machines on page 14. 3. Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve on page 15. 4. Closed Systems and Thermal Expansion on page 14. 5. For multiple water heater installations see Water Piping Diagrams beginning on page 67. WATER PIPING DIAGRAMS This manual provides detailed water piping diagrams for typical methods of application for the water heaters, see Water Piping Diagrams beginning 67. The water heater may be installed by itself, or with a separate storage tank. When used with a separate storage tank, the circulation may be either by gravity or by means of circulating pump. When a circulating pump is used, it is important to note that the flow rate should be slow so that there will be a minimum of turbulence inside the water heater storage tank. Adjust flow by throttling a full port ball valve installed in the circulating line on the outlet side of the pump. Never throttle flow on the suction side of a pump. See the Water Piping Diagrams beginning on page 67. NOTE: In addition to the factory installed Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve (T &P valve) on the water heater, each remote storage tank that may be installed and piped to a water heating appliance must also have its own properly sized, rated and approved Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve installed. Call the toll free technical support phone number listed on the back cover of this manual for further assistance in sizing a T &P valve for remote storage tanks. THERMOMETERS (NOT SUPPLIED) Thermometers are installed in the water piping system as a means of detecting the temperature of the hot water supply at critical points in the system. Field supplied thermometers should be obtained and installed. See Water Piping Diagrams on page 67. 'WATER (POTABLE) HEATING AND SPACE HEATING " 1. All water piping components connected to the water heater that are for space heating applications shall be suitable for use with potable water. 2. Toxic chemicals, such as those used for boiler treatment, must NEVER be introduced into this system. 3. The water heaters covered in this manual may never be connected to any existing heating system or component(s) previously used with non - potable water heating appliance. 4. When the system requires water for space heating that exceed safe temperatures at domestic water fixtures a mixing valve must be installed, see Mixing Valves on page 14. T&P VALVE DISCHARGE PIPE WARNING Explosion Hazard • Temperature - pressure relief valve must comply with ANSI Z21.22- CSA 4.4 and ASME code. • Properly sized temperature - pressure relief valve must be installed in opening provided. • Can result in overheating and excessive tank pressure. • Can cause serious injury or death. This water heater is provided with a properly rated /sized and certified combination temperature - pressure (T &P) relief valve by the manufacturer. See Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve on page 15 for information on replacement and other requirements. 40 CAUTION Water Damage Hazard • Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve discharge pipe must terminate at adequate drain. nstall a discharge pipe between the T &P valve discharge opening and a suitable floor drain. Do not connect discharge piping directly to the drain unless a 6" (15.2 cm) air gap is provided. To prevent bodily injury, hazard to life, or property damage, the relief valve must be allowed to discharge water in adequate quantities should circumstances demand. If the discharge pipe is not connected to a drain or other suitable means, the water flow may cause property damage. T &P Valve Discharge Pipe Requirements: • Shall not be smaller in size than the outlet pipe size of the valve, or have any reducing couplings or other restrictions. • Shall not be plugged or blocked. • Shall not be exposed to freezing temperatures. • Shall be of material listed for hot water distribution. • Shall be installed so as to allow complete drainage of both the Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve and the discharge pipe. • Must terminate a maximum of six inches above a floor drain or external to the building. In cold climates, it is recommended that the discharge pipe be terminated at an adequate drain inside the building. • Shall not have any valve or other obstruction between the relief valve and the drain. TEMPERATURE REGULATION HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT CONTROL (ECO) This water heater is equipped with an ECO (energy cut off) non adjustable high temperature limit switch. The ECO is a normally closed switch that opens (activates) on a rise in temperature. The ECO is located inside the Upper Temperature Probe (two red wires), see Figure 3 on page 8 for location. The ECO switch contacts will open when the water temperature reaches approximately 202 °F (94 °C) and close at approximately 140 °F (49 °C). If the ECO activates (contacts open) due to abnormally high water temperatures in the storage tank the control system will immediately de- energize the 24 VAC Gas Valve and end the current heating cycle. The control system will "lock out" disabling further heating operation. The control system will display the "Energy Cut Out (ECO)" Fault message on the LCD screen. It is important that a Qualified Service Agent be contacted to determine the reason for the ECO activation before resetting the ECO. Once the reason has been determined and corrected the ECO can be reset as follows: Should the ECO activate, the water temperature must drop below 140 °F (49 °C) before the control system can be reset. Once the water temperature has cooled below this point the power supply to the water heater must be turned off and on again to reset the control system. THERMOSTAT CONTROL ADANGER Water temperature over 125 °F (52 °C) can cause severe burns instantly resulting in severe injury or death. Children, the elderly and the physically or mentally disabled are at highest risk for scald injury. Feel water before bathing or showering. Temperature limiting devices such as mixing valves must be installed when required by codes and to ensure safe temperatures at fixtures. Hot water temperatures required for automatic dishwasher and laundry use can cause scald burns resulting in serious personal injury and /or death. Table 10 shows the approximate time -to- burn relationship for normal adult skin. The temperature at which injury occurs varies with the person's age and duration of exposure. The slower response time of children, the elderly or disabled persons increases the hazards to them. If anyone using hot water provided by the water heater being installed fits into one of these groups or if there is a local code or state law requiring a certain water temperature at the point of use, then special precautions must be taken. In addition to using the lowest possible temperature setting that satisfies the demand of the application a mixing valve can be installed at the water heater (see Figure 8 on page 14) or at the hot water taps to further reduce system water temperature. Never allow small children to use a hot water tap or draw their own bath water. Never leave a child or disabled person unattended in a bathtub or shower. The water heater should be located in an area where the general public does not have access to set temperatures. 41 Setting the Operating Set Point at 120 °F (49 °C) will reduce the risk of scalds. Some States require settings at specific lower temperatures. TABLE 10 Water Temperature Time to Produce 2nd & 3rd Degree Burns on Adult Skin 180 °F (82 °C) Nearly instantaneous 170 °F (77 °C) Nearly instantaneous 160 °F (71 °C) About 1/2 second 150 °F (66 °C) About 1 -1/2 seconds 140 °F (60 °C) Less than 5 seconds 130 °F (54 °C) About 30 seconds 120 °F (49 °C) More than 5 minutes The water heaters covered in this manual are equipped with an electronic control system to regulate the water temperature inside the storage tank. The control system senses temperature from two factory installed temperature probes, one installed in the top of the storage tank and one installed near the bottom, See Figure 3 on page 8 and Figure 4 on page 9 for location. The "Operating Set Point" is adjusted to regulate water temperature inside the storage tank. This is an adjustable user setting in the control system's "Temperatures Menu." This and all control system menus are accessed through the UIM (user interface module) located on the front of the water heater, see Figure 54. The Operating Set Point is adjustable from 90 °F (42 °C) to 180 °F (82 °C). The factory setting is 120 °F (49 °C). See Operating Set Point And Differential Adjustment on page 45 for instructions on how to adjust the Operating Set Point and other user settings. Set the Operating Set Point at the lowest setting which produces an acceptable hot water supply. This will always provide the most energy efficient operation. HIGH TEMPERATURE APPLICATIONS Higher operating temperatures cause more wear on all water heaters and will decrease the life span of the appliance. Consider installing a small booster water heater for high temperature applications, such as commercial dishwashers, to raise the outlet temperature from the larger primary water heater to the desired point of use temperature. Contact your local distributor or call the technical support phone number listed on the back cover of this manual for further technical assistance. MANUFACTURER / MODEL INFORMATION Tank Temperature Operating Set Point Status: Heating � fo 0 F 0 N 103 °F I I 120° F MENU HELP QQQ DN Figure 54 CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION OVERVIEW The water heaters covered in this manual are equipped with an electronic control system that regulates water temperature inside the storage tank. Heating cycles and ignition are managed by the control system. The ECO (energy cut out), flame sensor, pressure switches and temperature probes are monitored by the control system. The Combustion Blower, igniter, 24 VAC Gas Valve and anode rods are all powered by the control system. The main components of the control system are a UIM (user interface module) and a CCB (central control board). The UIM is located on the top front side of the water heater. The CCB is mounted on top of the water heater inside a protective enclosure. See Features And Components on page 7 for location of these and all water heater components. CONTROL SYSTEM NAVIGATION All operational information and user settings are displayed and accessed from the UIM. The UIM houses the control system's LCD (liquid crystal display) and five snap acting (momentary) user input buttons; an up, down and three (3) multi functional operational buttons below the LCD, see Figure 55. User Input Buttons • The up and down buttons are used to navigate menus and adjust user settings. • The operational buttons are used to enter /exit menus, select menu items, activate adjustment modes and confirm or cancel new user settings. The operational buttons are multifunctional, their current function is defined by the text that appears directly above each button on the LCD screen. THE DESKTOP SCREEN During normal operation the control system will display the "Desktop" screen on the LCD which is the default screen. The control system will return to the Desktop screen when there are no active Fault or Alert conditions or when there has been no user input for several minutes. • Manufacturer and water heater model information is displayed in Title Bar at the top of the Desktop screen. Menu titles are displayed in the Title Bar when navigating the control system menus. • The first temperature shown on the Desktop screen, Tank Temperature, is the temperature of the water inside the water heater's storage tank. • The second temperature shown on the Desktop screen is the Operating Set Point. The Operating Set Point is the temperature at which the control system will maintain the water inside the storage tank. • Beneath the Operating Set Point is the "Status" line. The Status line shows the current operational state of the control system in real time, see Table 12 on page 44 for a description of the various operational states. • The Desktop screen also displays animated "Status Icons" to convey operational information, see Table 11 on page 43 for descriptions of the Status Icons. LCD Screen Information Display Status Icons UIM (user interface module) Desktop Screen Shown MANUFACTURER / MODEL INFORMATION Tank Temperature Operating Set Point Status: Heating f� O F 103 °F 120 °F MENU HELP O O O DN Operational buttons are multi functional. Their current function is defined by the text that appears directly above each button on the LCD screen. Title Bar Up & Down buttons: navigate menus, adjust user settings 3 Operational buttons: enter /exit menus, select menu items, activate adjustment modes, confirm /cancel changes. Figure 55 42 STATUS ICONS The Status Icons are displayed on the Desktop screen and convey operational and diagnostic information. The icons are described in the table below. See Figure 55 on page 42 and the Sequence Of Operation on page 54. TABLE 11 Icon Description 2 Water temperature in the tank has fallen. Shaded area of the animated thermometer icon will rise and fall in response to water temperature in the storage tank as sensed from the Upper and Lower Temperature Probes. See Figure 3 on page 8 and Figure 4 on page 9 for location of Temperature Probes. Water temperature in the tank has reached the Operating Set Point. The control system enters the Standby mode. t I :�� .0 � The control is unable to initiate a heating cycle. This will happen whenever a Fault condition is detected by the control system or when the Enable /Disable circuit is an open circuit. For more information see Enable /Disable Circuit on page 39. ellThe ••. Combustion Blower is being energized. :• •� The Blower Prover pressure switch contacts have closed. The check mark icon is visual confirmation of contact closure. See Figure 3 on page 8 for Blower Prover Switch location. The Hot Surface Igniter is being energized. See Figure 2 on page 7 for Hot Surface Igniter location. The igniter has been energized and the control system has sensed the required minimum igniter current. The check mark icon is visual confirmation of minimum igniter current. See the Sequence Of Operation on page 54 for minimum current (AC amps) information. 0 F N ® O The 24 VAC Gas Valve is being energized. 1°) The control system has sensed flame at the Main Burner from the flame sensor. See the Sequence Of Operation Flow Chart on page 55 and Figure 2 on page 7. I • The control system has declared a Fault condition and must be inspected /serviced by a Qualified Service Agent. Fault message details can be viewed in the Current Fault menu. Heating operation is disabled (lock out) until the condition that caused the Fault is corrected. Power to the water heater must be cycled off and on to reset the control system. NOTE: Cycling power will not reset the control system if the condition that caused the Fault has not been corrected. 9 • The control system has declared an Alert condition and must be inspected /serviced by a Qualified Service Agent. The water heater will continue to operate during an Alert condition. .. 43 OPERATING STATES The current operational state of the water heater is displayed on the Desktop screen as the "Status." The common operational states are described in the table below. See Figure 55 on page 42 and the Sequence Of Operation on page 54. TABLE 12 State Description Standby The water heater is not in an active heating cycle. IE: the Tank Temperature is at or above the Operating Set Point. Input Verification The control system is conducting a diagnostic check at the beginning of a heating cycle. Short Cycle Delay The control system is waiting for a pre- defined time period to expire before initiating a heating cycle. This prevents "short- cycling" which can greatly accelerate wear on components such as the Hot Surface Igniter and Combustion Blower. NOTE: If the control system is in this operational state increase the Differential setting in the Temperatures menu to lengthen heating cycles. Pre -Purge The Combustion Blower is energized to flush residual flue gases from the combustion chamber prior to ignition. Igniter Warm Up The Hot Surface Igniter is energized and is currently warming up to ensure proper ignition. See the Sequence Of Operation on page 54 for minimum current (AC amps) information. Ignition Activation The 24 VAC Gas Valve is energized and opens to allow fuel gas to flow to the Main Burner. Ignition Verification The control system is monitoring the flame sensor for the required minimum flame sensing current. See the Sequence Of Operation on page 54 for minimum flame sensing current (DC micro amps) information. Inter -Purge The Combustion Blower is energized to flush residual fuel gas from the combustion chamber after a failed ignition attempt. Heating Ignition was successful, flame sensing current has been established. The water in the storage tank is being heated. Post -Purge The Combustion Blower is energized to flush residual flue gases from the combustion chamber at the end of a heating cycle. Fault The control system has detected a Fault condition. Heating operation is disabled until the Fault condition is corrected. Power to the water heater must be cycled off and on to reset the control system. NOTE: Cycling power will not reset the control system if the condition that caused the Fault has not been corrected. CONTROL SYSTEM MENUS From the Desktop screen pressing the Operational directly below "Menu" on the LCD will display the "Main Menu" this is where all control system menus are located. The table below describes the control system menus. See TABLE 13 Menu Description Temperatures Most commonly accessed menu. Contains the Operating Set Point and Differential user settings. Heater Status This menus displays the current state of all pressure switches and the ECO (open/closed). The on /off status of the Combustion Blower, gas valve, igniter, flame sensor and other monitored water heater components are displayed in this menu. Display Settings Temperature units ( °F or °C), the LCD appearance (brightness /contrast) and backlight delay user adjustable settings are located in this menu. Heater Information Elapsed time of operation, total heating cycle time, heating cycle count, heating on time along with UIM and CCB software revisions can be viewed in this menu. Current Fault Displays any current Alert or Fault messages. Fault History This control system menu retains a list of the last nine (9) Fault and Alert messages with a time stamp. The newest event will replace the oldest. Fault Occurrence This control system menu retains a running total of how many times each Fault condition has occurred since the water heater was first installed. Restore Factory Defaults This control system feature allows the user to restore control system user settings to their factory default settings. Display Settings preferences ARE NOT changed when factory defaults are restored. Help Screens Text based operational and user information explaining how to change user settings, navigate the control system menus and icon descriptions. 44 USER SETTINGS & CONTROL SYSTEM MENUS TEMPERATURES MENU Operating Set Point And Differential Adjustment The Operating Set Point is adjustable from 90 °F (42 °C) to 180 °F (82 °C). The factory setting is 120 °F (49 °C). The Differential is adjustable from 2° to 20 °. The factory setting is 8 °. These user settings are accessed from the Temperatures menu. The following instructions will explain how to adjust these settings and navigate the control system menus. When the water temperature sensed by the control system from the two (upper and lower) Temperature Probes reaches the Operating Set Point the control system will end the heating cycle. A heating cycle will be activated again when the sensed water temperature drops below the Operating Set Point minus the Differential setting. NOTE: Lower Differential settings may cause excessive heating cycles (short- cycling) which can cause premature failure of components such as the Hot Surface Igniter. Set the Differential at the highest setting which produces an acceptable hot water supply. Set the Operating Set Point to the lowest setting which produces an acceptable hot water supply for most efficient use. DESCRIPTION /ACTION DISPLAY From the Desktop screen, press the Operational Button under MENU. The "Main Menu" screen will be displayed. MANUFACTURER / MODEL INFORMATION Tank Temperature 120 °F Operating Set Point 120 °F Status: Standby M MENU HELP The Main Menu is where all control system menus are listed, see Table 13 on page 44 for a complete list and description of control system menus. Use the Up and Down Buttons to view all control system menus from the Main Menu. With Temperatures menu selected (highlighted in black) in the Main Menu screen, press the Operational Button under "SELECT' to enter the Temperatures menu. If the Temperatures menu is not selected use the Up and Down Buttons to select this menu item. Main Menu Temperatures Heater Status Display Settings Heater Information Current Fault / SELECT BACK HELP With the Operating Set Point selected in the Temperatures menu, press the Operational Button underneath "CHANGE" to activate the adjustment mode for this menu item. If Operating Set Point is not selected use the Up and Down Buttons to select this menu item. NOTE: Higher Temperature settings increase wear and operating costs. Set the Operating Set Point to the lowest setting which produces an acceptable hot water supply. This will always provide the most energy efficient operation and longer life. Temperatures w Operating Set Point 120 °F Differential - - 8 °F Tank Temperature 120 °F Upper Temperature 122 °F Lower Temperature 118 °F (Heater Regulated to Tank) Upper Probe Offset 0 °F CHANGE BACK HELP With the adjustment mode for the Operating Set Point activated the selection bar will change from a black fill to a black outline. Use the Up and Down Buttons to change the current setting. Press the Operational Button under "UPDATE" to save the new setting. Press the Operational Button under "CANCEL" to discard changes and return to the previously saved setting. NOTE: Use this same procedure to change the Differential setting and other adjustable user settings in the control system menus. Temperatures ■ Operating Set Point 140 °F Differential 8°F Tank Temperature 120 °F Upper Temperature 122 °F Lower Temperature 118 °F (Heater Regulated to Tank) Upper Probe Offset 0 °F ■ UPDATE CANCEL 45 TEMPERATURES MENU (CONT) DESCRIPTION/ACTION DISPLAY • Tank Temperature - non adjustable - control system sensed temperature (averaged from upper and lower temperature probes). • Upper Temperature - non adjustable - control system sensed temperature from the Upper Temperature Probe. • Lower Temperature - non adjustable - control system sensed temperature from the Lower Temperature Probe. • (Heater Regulated to Tank) - non adjustable - configuration information. • Upper Probe & Lower Probe Offset - adjustable user setting, range -5° to +5° (factory setting 0 °). NOTE: These settings should only be used if the hot water supply temperature varies greatly from the Operating Set Point setting. The Upper and Lower Probe Offsets are used to calibrate control system temperature sensing. This can improve the precision of temperature control in the storage tank and at points of use. This feature can also be used to compensate for building recirculation loops (hot water returning to the storage tank) that may cause the heating cycles to terminate prematurely. Example: If the current sensed temperature from a temperature probe is 120 °F (49 °C) and the Offset setting for that probe is adjusted to a value other than 0 °, the control system would calibrate or "offset" the sensed temperature from the probe and the averaged tank temperature. Heating cycles would be activated and deactivated based on the calibrated (offset) temperature. These settings are adjusted in the same way described for the Operating Set Point And Differential Adjustment on page 45. To• of Menu Temperatures Status Standby ECO Contact Closed Low Gas PS Closed Blocked Inlet PS Closed Blocked Outlet PS Closed Blower Prover PS Open Blower On No ■ Operating Set Point 140 °F / Differential 8 °F Tank Temperature 120 °F Upper Temperature 122 °F Lower Temperature 118 °F (Heater Regulated to Tank) Upper Probe Offset 0 °F CHANGE BACK HELP Bottom of Menu Temperatures BACK HELP Differential 8 °F Tank Temperature 120 °F Upper Temperature 122 °F Lower Temperature 118 °F (Heater Regulated to Tank) ■ Upper Probe Offset 0 °F Lower Probe Offset 0 °F CHANGE BACK HELP _.. HEATER STATUS MENU DESCRIPTION /ACTION At DISPLAY Select Heater Status from the Main Menu and press the Operational Button under "SELECT" to enter this menu. This menu contains non adjustable operational information. Use the Up & Down Buttons to navigate the menu. • Status - displays the current Operating State, see Table 12 on page 44. • ECO Contact, Low Gas PS, Blocked Inlet PS, Blocked Outlet PS, Blower Prover PS - displays the current state of the switch contacts; open or closed. • Blower On, Igniter On, Gas Valve On - displays whether or not the control system is currently energizing these water heater components; yes = energized, no = de- energized. • Igniter Current - displays whether or not the control system has detected the required minimum current, see Sequence Of Operation on page 54. • Flame Detected - displays whether or not the control system has detected Main Burner flame during ignition from the flame sensor. • External Input Enable - displays whether or not the S1 dipswitches have been configured to activate the enable/ disable circuit, see Enable /Disable Circuit on page 39. • Ignition Trials - displays whether or not the S1 dipswitches have been configured to allow 1 or 3 trials for ignition before declaring an "Ignition Failure" Fault condition, see the CCB - Central Control Board Layout on page 63. To. of Menu Heater Status Status Standby ECO Contact Closed Low Gas PS Closed Blocked Inlet PS Closed Blocked Outlet PS Closed Blower Prover PS Open Blower On No BACK HELP Bottom of Menu Heater Status Blower On No Igniter On No Igniter Current No Gas Valve On No Flame Detected No External Input Enable No Ignition Trials 3 A -w. BACK HELP 46 DISPLAY SETTINGS DESCRIPTION /ACTION DISPLAY Select Display Settings from the Main Menu and press the Operational Button under "SELECT" to enter this menu. This menu contains adjustable display options for viewing information on the UIM's LCD screen. Use the Up & Down Buttons to navigate the menu. • Temperature Units - Adjustable user setting that changes temperature units display to Celsius °C or Fahrenheit °F. • Backlight Delay - Adjustable user setting that determines how long the UIM's LCD backlight remains illuminated after a key has been pressed. Available settings are; Always Off, 10, 30 or 60 seconds and Always On. • Contrast - Adjustable user setting to adjust the UIM's LCD screen contrast between text and background. NOTE: These settings are adjusted in the same way described for the Operating Set Point And Differential Adjustment on page 45. Display Settings Temperature Units °F Backlight Delay 30s o Contrast 600/0 ■ , —' = CHANGE BACK HELP HEATER INFORMATION DESCRIPTION /ACTION '` DISPLAY Select Heater Information from the Main Menu and press the Operational Button under "SELECT" to enter this menu. This menu contains non adjustable operational information. • Elapsed Time - Total accumulated time the control system (water heater) has been energized. • Burner On Time - Total accumulated time the control system has been in the heating operating state; burner run time. • Cycle Count- Total accumulated count of heating cycles. • CCB Version - Software version for central control board. • UIM Version - Software version for user interface module. NOTE: Historical data is stored in the CCB's memory. If this CCB is replaced during servicing the historical data on the CCB being replaced will be lost. The data stored in the new circuit board will no longer reflect the entire history of the water heater. The Elapsed Time, Burner On Time and Cycle Count indicate age, usage and wear. If the Cycle Count per day is high (divide cycle count by days to determine cycles per day) or the cycle duration is short (determine burner on time total minutes, divide burner on time total minutes by cycle count) consider rasing the Differential setting to avoid short cycling and excessive component wear, see Operating Set Point And Differential Adjustment on page 45. This historical data can also be used to assist facilities managers in forecasting planned replacement of equipment to help avoid lengthy and costly hot water supply interruptions. Heater Information Elapsed Time 10 day 0 hrs 0 mins Burner On Time 5 hrs 22 mins Cycle Count 00000035 CCB Version X.XX UIM Version X.XX ■ , —' BACK HELP —..., 47 CURRENT FAULT DESCRIPTION /ACTION s' DISPLAY Select Current Fault from the Main Menu and press the Operational Button under "SELECT" to enter this menu. This menu contains non adjustable operational information. Use the Up & Down Buttons to navigate the menu. This menu contains the current Fault or Alert error message. The time the Fault or Alert message occurred appears directly below. A brief description of what causes the particular Fault or Alert condition appears below that. Pressing the Operational Button under "ADVANCED" will give more detailed service information and a list of possible causes for the Fault or Alert condition. See Fault And Alert Messages on page 58 for more detailed information and diagnostic procedures. If there is no Fault or Alert condition active this menu will not contain any information, "(none)" will be shown next to Current Fault in the Main menu. Select Fault History from the Main Menu and press the Operational Button under "SELECT" to enter this menu. This menu contains non adjustable operational information. Use the Up & Down Buttons to navigate the menu. This menu contains a list of the last nine (9) Fault and Alert messages with a time stamp. The newest event will replace the oldest. Press the Operational Button under "VIEW' to view details for each Fault or Alert message stored. Fault Occurrence Blocked Exhaust Fault occurred 2 mins ago The exhaust is blocked or restricted. Ensure condensate hose is draining. Call a service professional: Your Company Name Here (press [DOWN] for more....) Ignition Failure 10 ECO 0 Low Gas Pressure 10 Blocked Intake Air 0 Blocked Exhaust 0 Thermostat Input 4 0 Blower Prover 3 ■ 1: 2: 3: 4: Blocked Air Intake (A7) 51 mins ago Blocked Exhaust (A8) 54 mins ago Low Gas Pressure (A6) 57 mins ago Blower Prover-Failure (AC) BACK HELP BACK ADVANCED FAULT HISTORY DESCRIPTION /ACTION.' DISPLAY DISPLAY Select Fault History from the Main Menu and press the Operational Button under "SELECT" to enter this menu. This menu contains non adjustable operational information. Use the Up & Down Buttons to navigate the menu. This menu contains a list of the last nine (9) Fault and Alert messages with a time stamp. The newest event will replace the oldest. Press the Operational Button under "VIEW' to view details for each Fault or Alert message stored. Fault Occurrence Fault History Ignition Failure 10 ECO 0 Low Gas Pressure 10 Blocked Intake Air 0 Blocked Exhaust 0 Thermostat Input 4 0 Blower Prover 3 ■ 1: 2: 3: 4: Blocked Air Intake (A7) 51 mins ago Blocked Exhaust (A8) 54 mins ago Low Gas Pressure (A6) 57 mins ago Blower Prover-Failure (AC) BACK HELP VIEW BACK HELP FAULT OCCURRENCE DESCRIPTION /ACTION DISPLAY Select Fault Occurrence from the Main Menu and press the Operational Button under "SELECT" to enter this menu. This menu contains non adjustable operational information. Use the Up & Down Buttons to navigate the menu. This menu contains a running total of how many times each Fault condition has occurred since the water heater was first installed. _ NOTE: Historical data is stored in the CCB's memory. If this CCB is replaced during servicing the historical data on the CCB being replaced will be lost. The data stored in the new circuit board will no longer reflect the entire history of the water heater. Fault Occurrence Restore Factory Defaults Are you sure you want to restore the system to factory defaults? Ignition Failure 10 ECO 0 Low Gas Pressure 10 Blocked Intake Air 0 Blocked Exhaust 0 Thermostat Input 4 0 Blower Prover 3 ■ �� Nur BACK HELP RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULTS DESCRIPTION /ACTION DISPLAY Select Restore Factory Defaults from the Main Menu and press the Operational Button under "SELECT" to enter this menu. To restore the adjustable user settings to their factory default settings press the Operational Button underneath "YES." The display will show text confirming the factory default settings have been restored. Press the Operational Button underneath "BACK" to exit the Restore Factory Defaults menu. Restore Factory Defaults Are you sure you want to restore the system to factory defaults? YES NO 48 SERVICE CONTACT INFORMATION The control system has a discrete menu that Installing contractors and /or service agents can access to enter contact information for their customers. This contact information will be displayed with all Fault and Alert messages. DESCRIPTION /ACTION DISPLAY From the Desktop Screen (see Figure 55 on page 42) press and hold down the middle (unmarked) Operational Button for 30 seconds and then release it. This will launch a discrete menu where personalized contact information can be entered. Using the UP and DOWN buttons select (highlighted in black) the "Show Contact Information" menu item. Press the Operational Button under "CHANGE" to activate the adjustment mode for this parameter. Service Contact Information Show Contact Information No Change Contact Name Change Contact Phone Current Contact Info: (000) 000-0000 Access Code Nor CHANGE BACK HELP With the adjustment mode for "Show Contact Information" activated the selection bar will change from a black fill to a black outline. Use the Up and Down Buttons to change the setting from "No" to "Yes" and press the Operational Button underneath "UPDATE" to save the new setting. NOTE: The Access Code at the bottom of the Service Contact Information screen is for manufacturing engineering purposes only. There are no user settings or information accessed through this menu item. Service Contact Information Show Contact Information Yes Change Contact Name Change Contact Phone Current Contact Info: (000) 000 -0000 Access Code Nur UPDATE CANCEL Using the UP and DOWN buttons select (highlighted in black) the "Change Contact Name" menu item. Press the Operational Button under "SELECT" to open the Change Contact Name menu. Service Contact Information Show Contact Information Yes — Change Contact Name Change Contact Phone Current Contact Info: (000) 000-0000 Access Code 'W SELECT BACK HELP Follow the on screen instructions to enter your name or the name of your company. There is a maximum of 20 character spaces for this purpose. When finished press the Operational Button "UPDATE" to save the new Contact Name. The control system will return to the discrete menu. Enter the service contact below: Use the -> and <- keys to move between characters. Use the UP and DOWN keys to change the character. NAME: _ <- -> UPDATE Using the UP and DOWN buttons select (highlighted in black) the "Change Contact Phone" menu item and press the Operational Button under "SELECT ". Follow the on screen instructions to enter a new Contact Phone number and press the Operational Button under "UPDATE" to save the new phone number. When the new Contact Name and Contact Phone number have both been updated, press the Operational Button under "BACK" to return to the Desktop screen. Service Contact Information Show Contact Information Yes Change Contact Name Change Contact Phone — Current Contact Info: YOUR COMPANY NAME HERE (123) 456 -7890 Access Code Nur BACK HELP 49 START UP PRIOR TO START UP Installation and start up of this water heater requires abilities and skills equivalent to that of a licensed tradesman in the field involved, see Qualifications on page 6. Do not place the water heater in operation if any part has been under water. Immediately call a qualified service technician to inspect the water heater and to replace any part of the control system and any gas control which has been under water. Light the water heater in accordance with the Lighting and Operation Instruction label on the water heater and in this manual on page 53. The water heaters covered by this manual are equipped with an electronic control system (see page 42) which automatically sequences the Combustion Blower, pre and post purging of the combustion chamber, the Hot Surface Igniter, the 24 VAC Gas Valve, Main Burner ignition, and flame sensing. The control system will lock out after three unsuccessful ignition attempts. Before attempting start up, thoroughly study and familiarize yourself with the exact Sequence Of Operation, see the written Sequence Of Operation on page 54 and the Sequence Of Operation Flow Chart on page 55. Be certain that the water heater is full of water, that air is purged from the gas and water lines and that there are no leaks in the gas and water lines. Ensure all inlet water valves are open. FILLING THE WATER HEATER Follow these steps to fill the water heater prior to start up. 1. Close the heater drain valve. 2. Open a nearby hot water faucet to permit the air in the system to escape. 3. Fully open the cold water inlet valve allowing the piping and water heater to fill with water. 4. Close the hot water faucet opened in to flow. SUPPLY GAS LINE PURGING Step 2 as water starts £WARNING 'Fire or Explosion Hazard • Gas line purging is required with new piping or systems in which air has entered. • To avoid risk of fire or explosion purge discharge must not enter into confined areas or spaces where ignition can occur. • The area must be well ventilated and all sources of ignition must be deactivated or removed. • Use only the gas shown on the water heater rating label. • Keep ignition sources away from faucets after extended periods of non -use. Read instruction manual before installing, using or servicing water heater. 1. Close the Main Gas Shutoff Valve, see Figure 52 on page 37. 2. Purge all air from the supply gas line up to the water heater's Main Gas Shutoff Valve. 3. When all air has been purged from the supply gas line, tighten all supply gas line connections. 4. Check for gas leaks, see Gas Line Leak Testing on page 38, and repair any leaks found. INITIAL START UP REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT • Two U -tube manometers, recommended ranges; 0 -14" W.C. (0 -3.5 kPa) and 0 -35" W.C. (0 -8.7 kPa) or pressure gauges. • Two digital manometers can be used in place of U -tube manometers or pressure gauges. Recommended ranges; -14.00 to +14.00" W.C. (0 -3.5 kPa) resolution 0.01" W.C. and 0 -35" W.C. (0 -8.7 kPa) resolution 0.10" W.C. NOTE: All test equipment must be acclimated to ambient temperature before calibration and use. PREPARATION 1. Using the control system menus, change the Operating Set Point to the lowest temperature setting, see Operating Set Point And Differential Adjustment on page 45. 2. Turn the water heater's on /off switch to the "off' position. 3. Close the Main Gas Shut Off Valve, see Figure 52 on page 37. 4. Push in the gas control knob slightly and turn to the "off'position, see Figure 56 and Figure 57 on pages 51 and 52 . 5. Wait five (5) minutes for any residual gas to clear. 6. Connect one manometer (higher range) to an available test port on the supply gas line at the water heater. There is a 1/8" NPT "T" fitting and pipe nipple installed for the Low Gas Pressure switch on the inlet side of the 24 VAC Gas Valve with a 1/8" NPT plug for this purpose. 7. Connect one manometer (lower range) to the manifold gas pressure tap at the outlet of the 24 VAC Gas Valve, see Figure 56 on page 51 and Figure 57 on page 52 for location. 8. Open the Main Gas Shutoff Valve. 50 9. Measure and record the supply gas pressure, this is a "static" supply gas pressure reading; while the water heater is not firing. Adjust supply gas pressure as necessary, see Supply Gas Pressure Adjustment on page 51. LIGHTING THE WATER HEATER 1. 2. Push in the gas control knob slightly and turn to the "on" position, see Figure 56 and Figure 57 on pages 51 and 52. Turn the water heater's on /off switch to the "on" position. 3. Wait for the control system to complete its boot up sequence. The Desktop screen showing the current Operating Set Point and Tank Temperature will be displayed on the control system's LCD when the boot up sequence is complete. 4. Using the control system menus and UIM (user interface module), change the Operating Set Point to a setting higher than the current tank temperature displayed on the control system LCD plus the Differential setting to activate a call for heating. See Control System Operation on page 42. 5. Record the manifold gas pressure when the 24 VAC Gas Valve is energized and the Main Burner is ignited, the animated gas valve icon will be displayed on the Desktop screen of the control system's LCD when the control system energizes the 24 VAC Gas Valve, a animated flame icon will appear when Main Burner ignition is successful, see the Status Icons descriptions in Table 11 on page 43. 6. Compare the actual manifold gas pressure reading recorded above to the required minimum /maximum values given in Table 4 on page 13.Adjustmanifold gas pressure as necessary, see the instructions that follow. 7. Record the supply gas pressure when the 24 VAC Gas Valve is energized and the Main Burner is ignited. This is a "dynamic" gas pressure reading; while the water heater is firing. 8. Compare the actual supply gas pressure reading recorded above to the required minimum /maximum values given in Table 4 on page 13. Adjust supply gas pressure as necessary, see the instructions that follow. INLET MANIFOLD GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR COVER SCREW GAS CONTROL KNOB OUTLET MANIFOLD GAS PRESSURE TAP NPT PLUG ALL 300,000 & 400,000 BTU /HR MODELS AND 500,000 BTU /HR PROPANE MODELS 24 VAC GAS VALVE TOP VIEW Figure 56 SUPPLY GAS PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT Fire and Explosion Hazard • Do not use water heater with any gas other than the gas shown on the rating label. • Excessive gas pressure to gas valve can cause serious injury or death. • Turn off gas lines during installation. • Contact a qualified installer or service agency for installation and service. Supply gas pressure shall be measured while the water heater is not firing (static pressure) AND while the water heater is firing at full capacity (dynamic pressure). If the supply gas pressure to the water heater is not between the required minimum and maximum values given in Table 4 on page 13 adjust the supply gas regulator as necessary. Adjust the supply gas regulator(s) per the regulator manufacturer's instructions to achieve the required "static" and "dynamic" supply gas pressure. Multiple Appliance Installations: In multiple water heater installations or in installations where the installed water heater(s) share a common gas supply main with other gas fired appliances; the supply gas pressures shall be measured at each water heater with all gas fired appliances connected to a common main firing at full capacity. On multiple water heater installations the supply gas line regulators shall be adjusted to provide gas pressure to each water heater within the minimum and maximum supply pressure requirements listed in Table 4 on page 13 with all gas fired appliances connected 51 to a common gas main firing at full capacity. NOTE: A pressure drop of more than 1.5" W. C. (0.37 kPa) when the Main Burner ignites is an indication of an inadequate supply of gas and can lead to ignition failure, rough starts and /or rough operation. If a drop of more than 1.5" W. C. (0.37 kPa) in supply gas pressure occurs when the Main Burner ignites, ensure the supply gas lines and regulator(s) are properly sized and installed. See the requirements for Supply Gas Regulator and Supply Gas Line on page 13. See Supply Gas Line Installation on page 37 and Supply Gas Regulator Installation on page 38. Ensure all requirements and installation instructions are maintained. MANIFOLD GAS PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT Fire and Explosion Hazard • Under no circumstances should the input exceed the rate shown on the water heater's rating label. • Overfiring could result in fire or explosion. • Gas and carbon monoxide detectors are available. £WARNING Breathing Hazard - Carbon Monoxide Gas ';it:• :::;;;f ;‘.... • Under no circumstances should the input exceed the rate shown on the water heater's rating label. • Overfiring could result in damage to the water heater and sooting. • Gas and carbon monoxide detectors are available. Breathing carbon monoxide can cause brain damage or death. Always read and understand instruction manual. Ensure the "dynamic" supply gas pressure is above the minimum requirements in Table 4 on page 13 before any adjustments are made to the manifold gas pressure. Attempts to adjust manifold gas pressure during periods of low supply gas pressure could result in overfiring when the supply gas pressure returns to normal. See Supply Gas Pressure Adjustment on this page. If necessary, adjust the manifold gas pressure as follows: 1. Follow the instructions for Initial Start Up on page 50 to connect manometers to the supply and manifold gas pressure taps and to start the water heater. 2. Remove the manifold gas pressure regulator cover screw, see Figure 56 on this page and Figure 57 on page 52. 3. Using a small flat tip screw driver turn the adjustment screw clockwise to increase manifold gas pressure and counter clockwise to decrease manifold gas pressure. NOTE: Turn the manifold gas pressure adjustment screw in small increments (no more than 1/4 turn) and allow the manifold gas pressure to stabilize for several minutes before making further adjustments. 4. Replace the gas pressure regulator cover screw. 5. Cycle the burner on and off several times to check operation. MANIFOLD GAS PRESSURE TAP NPT PLUG GAS CONTROL KNOB MANIFOLD GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR COVER SCREW 500,000 BTU /HR NATURAL GAS MODELS 24 VAC GAS VALVE TOP VIEW Figure 57 CHECKING THE FIRING RATE If firing rate adjustment is required follow these instructions to determine the actual firing rate of the water heater: 1. Ensure there are no other gas fired appliances connected to the gas meter firing during this test. 2. Contact the gas supplier to determine the heating value, in Btu per cubic foot, of the gas supply. 3. Connect a manometer to the manifold gas pressure tap. Follow the instructions for Initial Start Up on page 50. 4. Start the water heater and ensure it is firing. 5. Check the manifold gas pressure, refer to Table 4 on page 13 for correct pressure. See Manifold Gas Pressure Adjustment on page 51 if adjustment is necessary. 6. Locate the gas meter serving the water heater. 7. Time how long (in seconds) it takes for one cubic foot of gas to be used while the water heater is firing with a stop watch. 8. Use the formula below to "clock" the gas meter and determine the actual firing rate of the water heater based on the heating value (Btu per cubic foot) of the gas supply: 3600 x H = Btu /hr T Example: 3600 x 1050 = 300,000 Btu /hr (87.9 kW) 12.6 • 3600 = seconds in one hour. • T = time, in seconds, to burn one cubic foot of gas. • H = heating value of gas in Btu per cubic foot. • Btu /hr = actual firing rate of the water heater. NOTE: 1050 Btu per cubic foot is a standard value for natural gas. Standard propane gas Btu content is 2500 Btu per cubic foot. Btu values may change in certain areas and at high elevations. Check with the local gas utility company. TO TURN OFF GAS 1. Change the Operating Set Point to the lowest temperature setting, see Operating Set Point And Differential Adjustment on page 45. 2. When the water heater has completed its shut down sequence and enters the standby mode, turn the water heater's on /off switch to the "off' position. 3. Push in the gas control knob slightly and turn to the "off' position, see Figure 56 on page 51 and Figure 57 on this page. 4. Close the Main Gas Shutoff Valve, see Figure 52 on page 37. HIGH ALTITUDE INSTALLATIONS 52 Fire and Explosion Hazard • Under no circumstances should the input exceed the rate shown on the water heater's rating label. • Overfiring could result in fire or explosion. • Gas and carbon monoxide detectors are available. £WARNING Breathing Hazard - Carbon Monoxide Gas :ti.5:. :r.'••: ••: `;: • '" }' ::-43:;:.1. �?: • Under no circumstances should the input exceed the rate shown on the water heater's rating label. • Overfiring could result in damage to the water heater and sooting. • Gas and carbon monoxide detectors are available. Breathing carbon monoxide can cause brain damage or death. Always read and understand instruction manual. The water heaters covered by this manual are certified for use without modification for altitudes up to 10,000 feet. Most gas utility companies de -rate their gas for high altitudes, making it unnecessary to install high altitude orifices. For installations above 10,000 feet call the technical support phone number listed on the back cover of this manual for further technical assistance. Call the local gas or utility company to verify Btu per cubic foot content before calling for technical assistance and have that information available. NOTE: The actual firing rate of the water heater must not exceed the input rating on the water heater's rating label under any circumstances. NOTE: Due to the input rating reduction at high altitudes, the output rating of the appliance is also reduced and should be compensated for in the sizing of the equipment for applications. LIGHTING THE WATER HEATER LIGHTING & OPERATION LABEL The instruction label below is affixed to the water heater's covered by this manual at the factory and must be followed when lighting and operating the water heater. FOR YOUR SAFETY READ BEFORE OPERATING A WARNING IF YOU DO NOT FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY A FIRE OR EXPLOSION MAY RESULT CAUSING PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE. A. This appliance does not have a pilot. It is equipped with an ignition device which automatically lights the burner. Do not try to light the burner by hand. B. BEFORE OPERATING smell all around the appliance area for gas. Be sure to smell next to the floor because some gas is heavier than air and will settle on the floor. "WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS" • Do not try to light any appliance. • Do not touch any electrical switch; do not use any telephone in your building. • Immediately call your gas supplier from a neighbor's telephone. Follow the gas supplier's instructions. • If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department. r,71 C. Use only your hand to push in or turn the gas control knob. Never use tools. If the knob will not push in or turn by hand, don't try to repair it, call a qualified service technician. Force or attempted repair may result in fire or explosion. D. Do not use this appliance if any part has been under water. Immediately call a qualified service technician to inspect the appliance and to replace any part of. the control system and any gas control which has been under water. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1. *STOP! Read the safety information above on this label. 2. Set thermostat to lowest setting. 3. Turn off all electrical power to the appliance. 4. This appliance is equipped with an ignition device which automatically lights the burner. Do not try to light the burner by hand. 5. Push in gas control knob slightly and turn clockwise %'\ to "OFF ". 6. Wait five (5) minutes to clear out any gas. If you then smell gas, *STOP! Follow "B" in the safety information above on this label. If you don't smell gas, go on to the next step. 7. Turn gas control knob counterclockwise to "ON ". 8. Turn on all electrical power to the appliance. 9. Set thermostat to desired setting. 10. If the appliance will not operate, follow the instructions "To Turn Off Gas To Appliance" and call your service technician or gas supplier. GAS CONTROL KNOB TO TURN OFF GAS TO APPLIANCE 1. Set the thermostat to lowest setting. 2. Turn off all electrical power to the appliance if service is to be performed. 3. Push in gas control knob slightly and turn clockwise to "OFF ". Do not force. 53 TROUBLESHOOTING INSTALLATION CHECKLIST The list below represents some of the most critical installation requirements that, when overlooked, often result in operational problems, down time and needless parts replacement. This is not a complete list. Before performing any troubleshooting procedures use the list below to check for installation errors. Costs to correct installation errors are not covered under the limited warranty. Ensure all installation requirements and instructions in this manual have been maintained and followed. WATER HEATER LOCATION 1. Ensure proper clearances to combustibles are maintained and there is sufficient room to service the water heater. See Clearances on page 11. 2. Ensure the area is free of corrosive elements and flammable materials. See the instructions on pagel6. VENTING 3. Ensure the intake air and/or vent (exhaust) piping is the correct size for the installed length. See Venting Requirements on page 22. 4. Ensure the maximum equivalent feet of pipe has not been exceeded for the intake air and /or vent pipe. See Table 7 on page 22. 5. Ensure the maximum number of elbows has not been exceeded in the intake air and /or vent pipe. See Venting Requirements on page 22. 6. Ensure the balance plate and intake air screen are removed from the intake air connection on the water heater when installing the water heater in a Direct Vent configuration. See Figure 16 on page 24. 7. Ensure all exterior clearances for the intake air, vent and concentric terminations are maintained. See Vertical Termination Installation on page 24, Sidewall Termination Installation on page 26 and ConcentricTermination Installation on page 27. These clearances and those cited by local and national codes must be maintained. GAS SUPPLY AND PIPING 8. Ensure a supply gas regulator has been installed for each water heater. See the requirements for a Supply Gas Regulator on page 13 and Supply Gas Regulator Installation on page 38. 9. Ensure the supply gas line to each water heater meets the minimum supply gas line size requirements. See the requirements for the Supply Gas Line on page 13 and the installation instructions on page 37 and 38. CONDENSATE DRAIN 10. Ensure the condensate drain is properly connected to the exhaust elbow on the water heater with a water trap to prevent vent gases from escaping into the installed space and draining freely to a suitable floor drain. See Figure 9 on page 16 and Alternate Condensate Line on page 36. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 11. Ensure the power supply connections to the water heater are polarity correct. See the requirements for the Power Supply on page 13 and Electrical Wiring on page 39. 12. Ensure the water heater is properly grounded. Flame sensing requires an adequate earth ground. If the water heater is not properly grounded it will cause Ignition Failure. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 54 Read the Sequence of Operation below before attempting to correct any operational problems. Refer to the Features And Components section beginning on page 7 for the location of various water heater components described below. See the Sequence Of Operation Flow Chart on page 55 also. 1. When the control system is first powered, during boot up, it will display water heater model information during initialization. After a few moments the control system LCD which is part of the UIM (user interface module) will display the default screen known as the "Desktop" screen. 2. If the control system determines that the actual water temperature inside the tank is below the programmed Operating Set Point minus the Differential setting, a heating cycle is activated. 3. The control system then performs selected diagnostic system checks. This includes confirming the low gas pressure, blocked exhaust, blocked intake and ECO (energy cut out) switch contacts are closed. The Blower Prover Switch contacts are confirmed open. 4. If all diagnostic checks are successfully passed, the control system energizes the Combustion Blower for pre - purge. 5. The control system must confirm the Blower Prover Switch contacts close after the Combustion Blower is energized. 6. If the Blower Prover Switch contacts are confirmed closed the control system energizes the Hot Surface Igniter for the igniter warm -up period. 7. The control system monitors the igniter current and must sense a minimum of 2.0 AC amps for BTH 300 & 400 models and 2.7 AC amps for BTH 500 models during the igniter warm up period (12 -17 seconds). 8. If igniter amperage is confirmed at or above the required minimum the control system energizes the 24 VAC Gas Valve allowing gas to flow to the Main Burner. 9. The control system de- energizes the Hot Surface Igniter. 10. The control system monitors the flame sensor to confirm a flame is present at the Main Burner. If a flame is not verified during the ignition trial period the control system will try for ignition up to two more times. If flame can not be verified after three trials for ignition, the control system will lock out and display the "Ignition Failure" Fault message. 11. If a flame is verified, the control system will enter the heating mode where it will continue heating the water until the Operating Set Point is reached. At this point, the control system will de- energize the 24 VAC Gas Valve and enter the post -purge cycle (approximately 30 seconds). 12. The Combustion Blower will run for the duration of the post - purge cycle to purge the water heater of all combustion gases. When the post -purge cycle is complete, the blower is de- energized and will coast to a stop. 13. The control system now enters the standby mode while continuing to monitor the internal storage tank water temperature and the state of other system devices. If the tank temperature drops below the Operating Set Point minus the Differential setting, the control will automatically return to Step 2 and repeat the operating cycle. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FLOW CHART If tank temperature drops below Operating Set Point minus Differential setting a heating cycle is activated 1 Control System performs diagnostic checks Normal State of all pressure switches and ECO are checked Blower Prover pressure switch verified open All other pressure switches and ECO are verified closed 4' FNo�Control System Locks Out Displays Fault Msg Combustion Blower is energized Pre -Purge cycle 4, Blower Prover switch contacts confirmed closed by control system 4' Igniter is energized for warm up period 1 Does Control System sense minimum Igniter amps? 1 24 VAC Gas Valve is energized gas flows to Main Burner 1 Is flame sensed at the Main Burner? (control system monitors the flame sensor) YES Water is heated to set point 1 24 VAC Gas Valve de- energized 1 30 second Post -Purge cycle 1 Water heater goes into standby mode NO NO • Control System Locks Out "Blower Prover Open" Fault Msg is displayed NO • 24 VAC Gas Valve de- energized 1 30 second Inter -Purge cycle 1 Retries up to two more times 1 Control System Locks Out "Ignition Failure" Fault Msg is displayed Control System Locks Out "Low Igniter Current" Fault Msg is displayed 2.0 minimum AC amps 300,000 & 400,000 Btu /hr Models 2.7 minimum AC amps 500,000 Btu /hr Models Figure 58 55 OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS Read and understand this instruction manual and the safety messages herein before installing, operating or servicing this water heater. Failure to follow these instructions and safety messages could result in death or serious injury. This manual must remain with the water heater. This section of the manual is intended to be an aid in correcting common operational problems, it is not all inclusive. The installer may be able to observe and correct certain problems which might arise when the water heater is first put into operation or when it is re -fired after a prolonged shutdown. However, only qualified service agents, as defined in Qualifications on page 6, using appropriate test equipment,,should perform any service procedures on the water heater. NOTE: Call the technical support phone number listed on the back cover of this manual for further technical assistance or to locate a qualified service agent in your area. INSTALLATION ERRORS Operational problems on new installations are often the result of installation requirements that have been overlooked rather than failed components. IE: A "Low Gas Pressure" Fault condition is most often caused by low supply gas pressure rather than a defective Low Gas Pressure switch. Rough starting and rough operation are often caused by undersized supply gas lines and/ or the absence of a supply gas regulator at the water heater. Prior to performing any operational checks inspect the water heater installation to ensure all installation requirements and instructions have been maintained and followed. See the Installation Checklist on page 54 NOTE: Costs to correct installation errors are not covered under the limited warranty. ROUGH STARTING, ROUGH OPERATION Fire and Explosion Hazard • Do not use water heater with any gas other than the gas shown on the rating label. • Excessive gas pressure to gas valve can cause serious injury or death. • Turn off gas lines during installation. • Contact a qualified installer or service agency for installation and service. • Undersized supply gas line (low volume of supply gas) - see Supply Gas Line on page 13. • Supply gas regulator is not installed per installation requirements (erratic gas supply volume /pressures) - see Supply Gas Regulator on page 13. • Excessive supply gas pressure - see Table 4 on page 13 and Supply Gas Pressure Adjustment on page 51. 56 • Excessive manifold gas pressure - see Table 4 on page_ 13 and Manifold Gas Pressure Adjustment on page 51. • Vent (exhaust) gas recirculation at the vent and intake air pipe terminations on Direct Vent installations - see Direct Vent Installation on page 23. • Excessive equivalent lengths of intake air and /or vent (exhaust) piping installed - see Venting Requirements on page 22. • Debris clogging /blocking the intake air screen(s) - see Figure 16 on page 24 and Figure 21 on page 26. • Debris clogging /blocking the Main Burner - see Figure 2 on page 7. MOMENTARY IGNITION A CAUTION Burn Hazard • The combustion chamber and bumer sleeve and housing become very hot during operation. • Do not reach into the burner housing or combustion chamber if the water heater is still hot. • Allow the water heater to cool and always use gloves when handling the main burner. If the Main Burner ignites momentarily but does not sustain ignition allow the water heater to try to ignite up to two more times until control system locks out and the Ignition Failure Fault message is displayed on the control system's LCD. If the water heater is experiencing rough starts - see Rough Starting, Rough Operation on this page. For momentary ignition problems without rough starting check the following: • Incorrect manifold gas pressure - see Table 4 on page 13 and Manifold Gas Pressure Adjustment on page 51. • Undersized supply gas line (low volume of supply gas) - see Supply Gas Line on page 13. • Supply gas regulator is not installed per installation requirements (erratic gas supply volume /pressures) - see Supply Gas Regulator on page 13. • See the list of possible causes and things to check and repair for the Ignition Failure Fault message on page 58. • Debris clogging /blocking the intake air screen(s) = see Figure 16 on page 24 and Figure 21 on page 26. • Debris clogging /blocking the Main Burner - see Figure 2 on page 7. NOT ENOUGH OR NO HOT WATER • No power to the water heater, check breaker, fuses and the water heater on /off switch. • Hot water supply valve(s) to fixtures closed. • Operating Set Point is set too low, Differential setting is set too high. See Control System Operation on page 42. • Upper and /or Lower Probe Offset settings are causing the heating cycles to terminate prematurely - see Temperatures Menu (cont) on page 46. • Ensure there is not any external supervisory control (using the enable /disable circuit) disabling heating operation. See Enable /Disable Circuit on page 39. • The heating capacity of the water heater has been exceeded, the water heater is unable to meet demand. • Colder incoming water temperature lengthening the time required to heat water to desired temperature. • Hot water piping leaks, open faucets, water heater drain valve leaking or open. • Sediment or lime scale accumulation may be affecting water heater operation. See Maintenance on page 60 for sediment and lime scale removal procedures. • Water heater not firing at full input rating. Check manifold gas pressure, see instructions on page 51. Check actual firing rate of the water heater, see instructions on page 52. WATER IS TOO HOT • Operating Set Point is set too high. See Operating Set Point And Differential Adjustment on page 45. • Upper and /or Lower Probe Offset settings improperly set - see Temperatures Menu (cont) on page 46. • Improper water piping - see diagrams beginning on page 67. NOISY OPERATION • Sediment or lime scale accumulations can cause rumbling and pounding noises during heating cycles. See the Maintenance section of this manual beginning on page 60 for sediment and lime scale removal procedures. • Normal operating noise of electrical components; Combustion Blower, transformer hum, relay contact closure. WATER LEAKAGE IS SUSPECTED • Ensure the water heater drain valve is tightly closed. • Check cleanout opening for leaks - see Figure 4 on page 9. • Check inlet/outlet water connections and system piping. • Check the Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve. • Excessive water temperature. • Excessive water pressure. • Defective Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve. NOTE: Excessive water pressure is the most common cause of Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve leakage. Excessive water system pressure is most often caused by "thermal expansion" in a "closed system." See Thermal Expansion and Closed Water Systems on page 14. The Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve is not intended for the constant relief of thermal expansion. Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve leakage due to pressure build up in a closed system that does not have a thermal expansion tank installed is not covered under the limited warranty. Thermal expansion tanks must be installed on all closed water systems. REPLACEMENT PARTS Replacement parts may be ordered from the manufacturer, authorized service agencies or distributors. When ordering parts be sure to have the complete water heater Model Number, Serial Number and Series Number available. This information can be found on the rating label affixed to the water heater. Refer to the parts list included with the water heater from the factory for more information or call the parts department or technical support phone number listed on the back cover of this manual for further assistance. FAULT AND ALERT CONDITIONS FAULT CONDITIONS When the control system declares a Fault condition it will display a Fault message on the control system's LCD with an exclamation "!" mark. The control system will lock out and disable heating operation until the condition is corrected. The water heater must be serviced by a qualified service agent before operation can be restored. ALERT CONDITIONS _ When the control system declares an Alert condition it will display an Alert message on the control system's LCD with a question " ?" mark. The water heater will continue to operate during an Alert condition but the water heater must be serviced by a qualified service agent as soon as possible. RESETTING CONTROL SYSTEM LOCK OUTS To reset the control system from a lock out condition; turn the power supply off for approximately 20 seconds and then back on. Keep in mind; if the condition that caused the Fault has not been corrected, the control system will continue to lock out. DIAGNOSTIC CHECKS 57 £WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard • Turn off power to the water heater before performing any service. • Label all wires prior to disconnecting when performing service. Wiring errors can cause improper and dangerous operation. • Verify proper operation after servicing. • Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. The following section, Fault And Alert Messages on page 58, lists some of the messages the control system will display on the LCD when there are operational problems. This is not a complete list. Along with each of the Fault and Alert messages described there. will be a list of possible causes and things to check and repair. Only qualified service agents, as defined in Qualifications on page 6, using appropriate test equipment, should perform any service procedures on the water heater. NOTE: If you are not qualified and licensed or certified as required by the authority having jurisdiction to perform a given task do not attempt to perform any of the diagnostic or service procedures described in the following section. If you do not understand the instructions in the following section do not attempt to perform any procedures. Call the technical support phone number listed on the back cover of this manual for further technical assistance or to locate a qualified service agent in your area. £WARNING Jumping out control circuits or components can result in property damage, personal injury or death. • Service should only be performed by a qualified service agent using proper test equipment. • Altering the water heater controls and /or wiring in any way could result in permanent damage to the controls or water heater and is not covered under the limited warranty. • Altering the water heater controls and /or wiring in any way could result in altering the ignition sequence allowing gas to flow to the main burner before the hot surface igniter is at ignition temperature causing delayed ignition which can cause a fire or explosion. Any bypass or alteration of the water heater controls and /or wiring will result in voiding the appliance warranty. FAULT AND ALERT MESSAGES Call the technical support phone number listed on the back cover for further technical assistance or to locate a qualified service agent in your area. 58 POSSIBLE CAUSES - CHECK/REPAIR DISPLAYED FAULT /ALERT MESSAGE • The water heater's control system is polarity sensitive and will lock out and disable heating operation if the polarity of the power supply is reversed. The control system will display the "AC Reversed" Fault message on the LCD in this condition. See Power Supply Connections on page 39 for instructions on how to properly connect the power supply. NOTE: Electronic flame sensing requires correct power supply polarity AND a proper earth ground to the water heater and the Main Burner. The control system does not verify earth ground but this should be checked first if ignition failure occurs. See the Ignition Failure Fault message information below. ' • AC Reversed Fault°courred 2 mins ago Power supply to water heater has reversed polarity. Call a service professional: Your Company Name Here (press [DOWN] for more....) ■ BACK ADVANCED • • • • • • • • • The control system has failed to ignite the Main Burner. Water heater is not properly grounded, loose or open ground wire to the Main Burner - see Power Supply Connections on page 39. Dirt /corroded flame sensor, clean flame sensor with fine steel Y wool (replace if damaged) - see Figure 2 on page 7. Loose or open wiring to the flame sensor. Loose or open wiring to the 24 VAC Gas Valve. 24 VAC Gas Valve control knob in the "off' position - see Figure 56 on page 51 and Figure 57 on page 52. Supply gas turned off, low gas volume - see page 37. Intake air and /or vent piping is restricted or improperly installed - see Venting Installation on page 21. Low or no manifold gas pressure to the Main Burner - see Initial Start Up on page 50. ' • Ignition Failure Fault occurred 2 mire ego The water heater has failed to ignite the burner. Call a service professional: Your Company Name Here (press [DOWN] for more....) BACK ADVANCED • • • • • • The control system has detected the Low Gas Pressure Switch contacts■are open. Loose or open wiring to the Low Gas Pressure Switch - see Figure 3 on page 8 for location. Supply gas pressure is below the required minimum pressure - see Table 4 on page 13. Supply gas is turned off at the Main Shutoff Valve. Supply gas pressure is dropping when other gas fired appliances on a common supply gas line are operating. Low volume of supply gas - see Supply Gas Line Installation on page 37 and the requirements for the Supply Gas Line on page 13 and Supply Gas Regulator on page 13. • Low Gas Pressure Fault occurred 2 mire ago The supply gas pressure to the water heater is low. Call a service professional: You r Company Name Here (press [DOWN] for more....) % W BACK ADVANCED • • • The control system has detected low current (AC amps) from the Hot Surface Igniter. The control system monitors igniter current and will declare this Fault condition if the current is not at or above the programmed minimum requirement - see the Sequence Of Operation on page 54 for minimum igniter amp requirements. Loose or open wiring to the Hot Surface Igniter - see Figure 2 on page 7 for igniter location. Damaged, worn or open circuit Hot Surface Igniter. NOTE: Hot surface igniters are wearing parts. Wear is directly related to heating cycle count. Heating cycle count can be viewed in the Heater Information menu - see Heater Information on page 47. Increasing the Differential setting reduces heating cycle count - see Operating Set Point And Differential Adjustment on page 45. Low Igniter Current Fault marred 2 mina ago I Igniter current is low. • Call a service professional: Your Company Name Here (press [DOWN] for more....) ■ N ir BACK ADVANCED • • • • • • • The control system has detected the Blocked Exhaust Switch contacts are open. The condensate drain is blocked filling the exhaust elbow with water - clear the condensate drain - see Figure 9 on page 16. Loose or open wiring to the Blocked Exhaust Switch - see Figure 3 on page 8 for switch location. Restricted /blocked vent piping - condensate trapped in low point. Excessive equivalent pipe length, exceeded the maximum number of 90° elbows or wrong pipe size used in the vent piping system - Venting Requirements on page 22. Excessive wind outdoors pressurizing the vent system piping. Excessive negative air pressure in the installed space. Blocked Exhaust Fault occumrd2nuns ago The exhaust is blocked or 11 restricted. Ensure condensate hose is draining. • Call a service profes r Company Name Here ere e (pss [DOWN] for more....) (press BACK ADVANCED 58 FAULT AND ALERT MESSAGES (CONT) Call the technical support phone number listed on the back cover for further technical assistance or to locate a qualified service agent in your area. 59 POSSIBLE CAUSES - CHECK/REPAIR DISPLAYED FAULT /ALERT MESSAGE • • • • • The control system has detected the Blower Prover Switch contacts are closed when they should be open at the beginning of a heating cycle - see the Sequence Of Operation on page 54. Pinched /shorted Blower Prover Switch wiring - see Figure 3 on page 8 for switch location. Jumper wire connected to the Blower Prover Switch - remove j umper wire. Jumper wires must never be used, read all Warnings on page 57. Excessive wind outdoors pressurizing the vent system piping. Excessive negative air pressure in the installed space. Blower Prover Failure Fault occurred Y odes ago closed out of sequence. I/ The blower prover switch is • Call a service professional: Your Company Name Here (press [DOWN] for more....) ■ P. BACK ADVANCED • • • • • • The control system has detected the Blower Prover Switch contacts are remaining open after the control system has energized the Combustion Blower - see the.Sequence Of Operation on page 54. Loose or open wiring to the Blower Prover Switch - see Figure 3 on page 8 for switch location. Blower Prover Switch air sensing tube disconnected, kinked, filed with condensate, damaged or leaking - repair or replace tube. Combustion Blower is not running when energized. Loose or open wiring to Combustion Blower. Loose, open, incorrect wiring to the VFD on BTH 400 and BTH 500 models - see Figure 3 on page 8 and the wiring diagram on page 65. ' • Blower Prover Open Fault m�2m "' ego The blower prover switch remains open after the blower has been energized. Call a service professional: Your Company Name Here (press [DOWN] for more....) Npir BACK ADVANCED • • • • • The control system has detected the Blocked Intake Air Switch contacts are open. Loose or open wiring to the Blocked Intake Air Switch - see Figure 3 on page 8 for switch location. Excessive equivalent pipe length, exceeded the maximum number of 90° elbows or wrong pipe size used in the intake air piping system - see Venting Requirements on page 22. Balance plate and /or intake air screen was not removed prior to connecting the intake air piping to the water heater and is clogged/ blocked with debris - see Figure 16 on page 24. Excessive negative air pressure in the installed space. • . Blocked Air Intake Fault occurred 2m"•ago The combustion air intake is restricted. Call a service professional: Your Company Name Here (press [DOWN] for more....) ■ / //A Nor BACK ADVANCED • • • • The control system has detected the ECO (energy cut out) Switch contacts are open. The ECO switch is a normally closed switch that opens on a temperature rise to prevent excessive water temperature in the storage tank. The ECO switch is inside the Upper Temperature Probe (two red wires) - see Figure 3 on page 8 for Upper Probe location. Loose or open wiring to the ECO switch in the Upper Temperature Probe - two red wires. Improper water system piping and /or excessively high return (recirculation) loop water temperature - see the Water Piping Diagrams beginning on page 67. ' • Energy Cut Out (ECO) F ° " "°`°"°°2 rens •o° Tank temperature is excessive. The water heater has been disabled. Call a service professional: Your Company Name Here (press [DOWN] for more....) ■ BACK ADVANCED • • • • • • • The control system has not detected any voltage from the powered anode rods - see Figure 3 on page 8 for location. No water in the storage tank. Loose or open wiring connections to the powered anode rods - see Figure 3 on page 8 for location. Powered anode rod wiring shorted to ground. The water heater is not properly grounded - see Power Supply Connections on page 39. Loose or open ground wires. Top fitting (3/4 inch bushing) of the powered anode rods were saturated with water during installation - with power to the water heater turned off, carefully remove anode rods and dry out bushing(s). i • Alert: No Anode Voltage Ale" occurred 4 mina ago No voltage detected from Powered Anode(s). Call a service professional: Your Company Name Here (press [DOWN] for more....) M BACK ADVANCED 59 MAINTENANCE GENERAL Keep appliance area clear and free from combustible materials, gasoline and other flammable vapors and liquids. See Locating The Water Heater on page 11. Water heater maintenance includes periodic tank flushing and cleaning, and removal of lime scale. The water heater should be inspected and adjusted to maintain proper combustion. See Initial Start Up on page 50. A periodic inspection of the venting system should be made. Where used, water circulating pump(s) should be oiled according to the pump manufacturers recommendations. PRECAUTIONS A CAUTION Do not operate the water heater if it has been exposed to or exhibits the following: • Flooding at or above the level of the burner or controls. • External damage. • Firing without water. • Sooting. Do not operate the water heater until all corrective steps have been made by a qualified service agent. Never operate the water heater without first being certain it is filled with water and a properly sized and rated Temperature - Pressure Relief Valve is installed in the relief valve opening on the water heater. See Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve on page 15. WARNING Explosion Hazard • Overheated water can cause water tank explosion. • Properly sized temperature and pressure relief valve must be installed in the opening provided. Should overheating occur or the gas supply fail to shut off, turn of the Main Gas Shutoff valve. See Figure 52 on page 37. Water heater maintenance includes periodic tank flushing and cleaning, and removal of lime scale. The water heater should be inspected and adjusted to maintain proper combustion: Refer to the following table. A periodic inspection of the venting system should be made. Where used, the water circulating pump should be oiled according to the pump manufacturer's recommendations. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE TABLE 14 COMPONENT OPERATION INTERVAL REQUIRED Tank Sediment Removal Semi Annually Flushing Tank Lime Scale Removal Semi Annually UN -LIME® Anode Rods Inspection Cleaning Annually Clean Scale Deposits T &P Valve Test Operation Semi Annually Test Vent System Inspection Annually Termination Screens Clean Reseal /Repair DRAINING AND FLUSHING It is recommended that the water heater storage tank be drained and flushed every 6 months to reduce sediment buildup. The water heater should be drained if being shut down during freezing temperatures. See Features And Components on page 7 for the location of the water heater components described below. it DANGER H cry • Burn harzard • Hot water discharge. • Keep hands clear of drain valve discharge. To drain the water heater storage tank: 1. Turn off the electrical supply to the water heater. 2. Turn off the gas supply at the Main Gas Shutoff Valve if the water heater is going to be shut down for an extended period. 3. Ensure the cold water inlet valve is open. .4. Open a nearby hot water faucet and let the water run until the water is no longer hot. 5. Connect a hose to the water heater drain valve and terminate it to an adequate drain. 6. Close the cold water inlet valve. 7. Open the water heater drain valve and allow all the water to drain from the storage tank. 8. Close the water heater drain valve when all water in the storage tank has drained. 9. Close the hot water faucet opened in Step 4. 10. If the water heater is going to be shut down for an extended period, the drain valve should be left open. To Flush the tank perform the following steps: 1. Turn off the electrical supply to the water heater. 2. Ensure the cold water inlet valve is open. 3. Open a nearby hot water faucet and let the water run until the water is no longer hot. Then close the hot water faucet. 4. Connect a hose to the drain valve and terminate it to an adequate drain. 60 5. Ensure the drain hose is secured before and during the entire flushing procedure. Flushing is performed with system water pressure applied to the water heater. 6. Open the water heater drain valve to flush the storage tank. 7. Flush the water heater storage tank to remove sediment and allow the water to flow until it runs clean. 8. Close the water heater drain valve when flushing is completed. 9. Remove the drain hose. 10. Fill the water heater- see Filling The Water Heater on page 50. 11. Turn on the electrical supply to place the water heater back in operation. See Initial Start Up on page 50. 12. Allow the water heater to complete several heating cycles to ensure it is operating properly. FILLING THE WATER HEATER See Filling The Water Heater on page 50. SEDIMENT REMOVAL Waterborne impurities consist of the particles of soil and sand which settle out and form a layer of sediment on the bottom of the tank. For convenience, sediment removal and lime scale removal should be performed at the same time. LIME SCALE REMOVAL When water is heated dissolved minerals in the water such as calcium and magnesium carbonate (lime scale) become less soluble. As the water temperature rises these minerals will precipitate or "fall out" of solution. The amount of lime scale released from water is in direct proportion to water temperature and usage. The higher the water temperature or water usage, the more lime deposits are dropped out of the water. Water hardness also affects lime scale accumulation. With the temperature and usage being the same, hard water will release more lime scale than softer water. Lime scale reduces heating efficiency as it accumulates inside a water heater. Heating transfer surfaces become coated with lime scale deposits which increases fuel costs to operate the water heater. Lime scale deposits can also cause rumbling and pounding noises as air molecules trapped in the lime scale escape when heated. Lime scale accumulation also reduces the life span of water heaters. For these reasons a regular schedule for deliming should be set up. The depth of lime accumulation in the bottom of the water heater should be measured periodically. Inspect by removing the cleanout cover once every 6 months at first. Deliming maintenance should then be performed based on the time it takes for 1 inch (2.5 cm) of lime to accumulate in the bottom of the water heater. Sediment and lime scale removal may be accomplished manually through the cleanout opening furnished on the water heater, see Figure 59. 61 Figure 59 MANUAL LIME SCALE REMOVAL NOTE: Contact your local distributor or call the parts department phone number on the back cover of this manual to order a new cleanout gasket. Have the new gasket available before removing the cleanout cover. The cleanout opening is shown in Figure 59. To remove lime scale manually through the cleanout opening proceed as follows: 1. Turn off the electrical supply to the water heater. 2. The water heater must be drained, see Draining And Flushing on page 60, follow the instructions on how to drain the water heater. • 3. Remove outer cleanout access plate from Tower side of the water heater jacket. 4. Remove the cleanout cover from cleanout opening. 5. Remove lime, scale and /or sediment using care not to damage the glass - lining. 6. Install a new cleanout gasket if required. 7. Reinstall the cleanout cover. Be sure to draw plate up tight by tightening screws securely. 8. Close the water heater drain valve. 9. Fill the water heater - see Filling The Water Heater on page 50. 10. Turn on the electrical supply to place the water heater back in operation. See Initial Start Up on page 50. 11. Allow the water heater to complete several heating cycles to ensure it is operating properly. 12. Check for water leakage. 13. Reinstall the cleanout access plate. CHEMICAL LIME SCALE REMOVAL To dissolve and remove more stubborn lime scale deposits, UN- LIME® Professional Delimer should be used. UN -LIME® Professional Delimer is an easy to handle patented food grade acid formulated specifically for lime scale removal from all types of water using equipment. Hydrochloric base acids must not be used to delime the water heaters covered in this manual. Follow the instructions on the UN -LIME® to delime the water heater. NOTE: Call the parts department phone number on the back cover of this manual to order UN -LIME® Professional Delimer. See TABLE 15 on page 62 for part numbers.' TABLE 15 UN -LIME® PROFESSIONAL DELIMER Part Number Description 9005416105 4 -1 gallon (case) 9005417105 1 - 5 gallon POWERED ANODE RODS To insure a long, trouble -free operating life, the water heaters covered in this manual are factory equipped with a powered anode system. The anode rods (2) are of a permanent design and do not need replacing unless damaged. Inspection and cleaning should be performed once a year. NOTE: Follow the instructions to drain the water heater storage tank on page 60 first. Remove the powered anodes from the water heater by loosening the 3/4" NPT bushing that forms the top of the anodes. Do not disassemble the retaining nut and wire terminal from the top while installed in the water heater, the anode's electrode may fall inside the tank. Remove the entire anode rod from the water heater prior to inspection. Clean the anode rods with a soft cloth and reinstall. Follow the instructions for filling the water heater on page 50 when finished. DRAIN VALVE AND ACCESS PANELS The water heaters covered in this manual are equipped with a drain valve, see Features And Components on page 7 for location. The water heaters covered in this manual are also equipped with a cleanout opening for sediment and lime scale removal. See Figure 59 on page 61. TEMPERATURE- PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE TEST ADANGER • Burn hazard • Hot water discharge. • Keep clear of Temperature Pressure Relief Valve discharge outlet. It is recommended that the Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve should be checked to ensure that it is in operating condition every 6 months. When checking the Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve operation, make sure that (1) no one is in front of or around the outlet of the Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve discharge line, and (2) that the water discharge will not cause any property damage, as the water may be extremely hot. Use care when operating valve as the valve may be hot. . To check the relief valve, lift the lever at the end of the valve several times, see Figure 60. The valve should seat properly and operate freely. If after manually operating the valve, it fails to completely reset and continues to release water, immediately close the cold water inlet to the water heater and drain the water heater, see Draining And Flushing on page 60. Replace the Temperature - Pressure Relief Valve with a properly rated /sized new one, see Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve on page 15 for instructions on replacement. Figure 60 If the Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve on the water heater weeps or discharges periodically, this may be due to thermal expansion. NOTE: Excessive water pressure is the most common cause of Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve leakage. Excessive water system pressure is most often caused by "thermal expansion" in a "closed system." See Thermal Expansion and Closed Water Systems on page 14. The Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve is not intended for the constant relief of thermal expansion. Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve leakage due to pressure build up in a closed system that does not have a thermal expansion tank installed is not covered under the limited warranty. Thermal expansion tanks must be installed on all closed water systems. DO NOT PLUG THE TEMPERATURE- PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE OPENING. THIS CAN CAUSE PROPERTY DAMAGE, SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH. 62 AWARNING Explosion Hazard • Temperature - pressure relief valve must comply with ANSI Z21.22- CSA4.4 and ASME code. • Properly sized temperature - pressure relief valve must be installed in opening provided. • Can result in overheating and excessive tank pressure. • Can cause serious injury or death. VENT SYSTEM Examine the vent system once a year. Points of inspection are as follows: 1. Check for obstructions and /or deterioration of the intake air and /or vent piping and the intake air and vent terminations. Replace immediately where needed. 2. The debris screens in the intake air and vent terminations should be should be cleaned of foreign material and soot. See Figure 21 on page 26. NOTE: Do not reach inside the vent hood when the heater is in operation. 3. Check all vent system connections for leakage and repair or reseal as necessary. DIAGRAMS CCB - CENTRAL CONTROL BOARD LAYOUT CCB (CENTRAL CONTROL BOARD) D 0 0 D J1 D 0 0 J2 V1I.EJIIHII!IIHIHIIIII J10 0 El 0 D 0 D J3 J5 D D J6 a ®Elg �� _:=:o J4 10 U 0 0 0 0 0 S1 DIPSWITCH J7 J13 0 El 0 0 U 0 J15 D D 0000 J9 J11 J16 0 Ext Input S1 DIPSWITCH DETAIL 1 Retry 3 Retries Use Yes No c!M) .' I „ lW Type Tstat N' -% I '-; 0 Vent Spare O ` Spare Dipswitch Operation: Along one side of the dipswitch array there are numbers, 1-4. On the other side of the dipswitch is the word "OPEN." The dipswitches are rocker type switches, if one side of the rocker is down the other side will be up. Pressing a rocker down on the side of the array labeled "OPEN," opens the switch. Pressing a rocker down on the side of the array labeled with the numbers 1-4 closes the dipswitch. CHANGING NUMBER OF IGNITION TRIALS BEFORE LOCK OUT NOTE: Always turn off power to the water heater before changing dipswitch settings. Set dipswitch #4 to the open position for 1 trial for ignition before Ignition Failure lock out. Set dipswitch #4 to the closed position for 3 trials for ignition before Ignition Failure lock out. Figure 61 63 BTH 300 WIRING DIAGRAM • C_ 0 0 (QavOB 1OIL1NO01VEIIN30) 800 L L Ul C- 0 j CA) L 5 10 6 LOW GAS 24 VAC BLOCKED BLOCKED BLOWER PRESSURE SWITCH GAS VALVE AIR INTAKE EXHAUST PROVER war0 2 WHITE RED -.140 -44 ENABLE/DISABLE CIRCUIT JUMPER WIRE BETWEEN PINS 8 AND 11 ON J6 PLUG RED (ECG) BLACK 4 RED (ECG) 1 BLACK HOT SURFACE IGNITER 1 FLAME SENSOR UPPER TEMPERATURE PROBE 2 BLACK TLS 1 GREEN 2 BLUE 1 BLACK Ds= LOWER TEMPERATURE PROBE 12RED 2 GREEN 3 WHITE ANODE 1 ANODE 2 =IWO GREEN 1 BLACK120 VAC HOT 3 WHITE 120 VAC NEUTRAL 4 YEL 24 VAC 4 YEL 24 VAC TRANSFORMER 50VA O O I I I GROUND STRIP BLACK RED WHITE 4- INSIDE CCB ENCLOSURE 1 0 ON /OFF SWITCH BURNER GROUND (BURNER BOLT) z 0 H X Z COMBUSTION BLOWER GREEN WHITE BLACK GROUND 120 VAC NEUTRAL 120 VAC HOT Figure 62 64 .i • BTH 400, 500 WIRING DIAGRAM aD 0 CJI L LOW GAS 24 VAC BLOCKED BLOCKED BLOWER PRESSURE SWITCH GAS VALVE INTAKE AIR EXHAUST PROVER mr0 RED 1 RED (EGO) 2 BI ACK ENABLE/DISABLE CIRCUIT JUMPER WIRE BETWEEN PINS 8 AND 11 ON J6 PLUG 1111 111 FLAME SENSOR 3 BLACK 4 RED (EGO) 1 BLACK 2 BLACK GREEN 2 BLUE HOT SURFACE IGNITER UPPER TEMPERATURE PROBE LOWER TEMPERATURE PROBE WHITE/BLACK WHITE/GREEN WHITE HITE/YELLOW RED WHITE VARIABLE — FREQUENCY DRIVE GREEN 1 BLACK120 VAC HOT 3 WHITE 120 VAC NEUTRAL 4 VEL 24 VAC 4 VEL 24 VAC GREEN All OV 15V LI1 VFD BLACK WHITE a 151 BLACK WHITE Ek RED lat GREEN GROUND STRIP BLACK RED WHITE TRANSFORMER f INSIDE CCB 50VA ENCLOSURE 1.0 ANODE 1 ANODE 2 NOTE: COMBUSTION BLOWER MOTORS ON 400,000 & 500,000 Btu/hr MODELS ARE THREE PHASE (30) MOTORS. BLACK, WHITE AND RED WIRES MUST BE WIRED AS SHOWN OR THE MOTOR WILL TURN BACKWARDS. THIS MAY CAUSE THE CONTROL SYSTEM TO LOCK OUT ON 'BLOWER PROVER OPEN' FAULT. 6—I COMBUSTION BLOWER ON /OFF SWITCH BURNER GROUND (BURNER BOLT) Z 0 x 0 Z o] GREEN O� GROUND WHITE / t\ 120 VAC NEUTRAL BLACK © 120 VAC HOT Figure 63 65 CIRCULATION PUMP - WIRING DIAGRAMS CIRCULATING PUMP WIRING DIAGRAM STORAGE TANK OR BUILDING RECIRCULATION FIELD SUPPLIED TEMPERATURE CONTROL INSTALLED IN THE STORAGE TANK OR CIRCULATING LOOP RETURN LINE L1 HOT L2 NEUTRAL 120 VAC CIRC POWER PUMP MOTOR Figure 64 CIRCULATING PUMP WIRING DIAGRAM DISHWASHER LOOP WITH TOGGLE SWITCH DISHWASHER FIELD SUPPLIED TEMPERATURE TOGGLE CONTROL INSTALLED IN THE SWITCH CIRCULATING LOOP RETURN LINE L1 HOT L2 NEUTRAL oho r 120 VAC POWER CIRC PUMP MOTOR Figure 65 WATER PIPING DIAGRAMS Before installation of water piping review the following: 1. See Mixing Valves on page 14. 2. See Dishwashing Machines on page 14. 3. See Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve on page 15. 4. See Closed Systems and Thermal Expansion on page 14 5. See Water Line Connections on page 40. 6. If a pump is being installed between a water heater and storage tank or on a building recirculation loop wire according to Figure 64 on page 66. 7. If a pump is being installed in a recirculation loop between the water heater and a commercial dishwasher wire according to Figure 64 or Figure 65 on page 66. ONE WATER HEATER, SINGLE TEMPERATURE WITH BUILDING RECIRCULATION WARNING: THIS DRAWING SHOWS SUGGESTED PIPING CONFIGURATION AND OTHER DEVICES; CHECK WITH LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. HOT WATER OUTLET PIPE T &P TO OPEN DRAIN LEGEND 6 TEMPERATURE & PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE CIRCULATING PUMP 4 TANK OR LINE TEMPERATURE CONTROL DRAIN LINE TEMPERATURE CONTROL ) HOT WATER C RETURN COLD WATER SUPPLY EXPANSION TANK FINISHED FLOOR FULL PORT BALL VALVE CHECK VALVE TEMPERATURE GAGE WATER FLOW SWITCH WATER PIPING DIAGRAMS Before installation of water piping review the following: 1. See Mixing Valves on page 14. 2. See Dishwashing Machines on page 14. 3. See Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve on page 15. 4. See Closed Systems and Thermal Expansion on page 14 5. See Water Line Connections on page 40. 6. If a pump is being installed between a water heater and storage tank or on a building recirculation loop wire according to Figure 64 on page 66. 7. If a pump is being installed in a recirculation loop between the water heater and a commercial dishwasher wire according to Figure 64 or Figure 65 on page 66. ONE WATER HEATER, TWO TEMPERATURE WITH HIGH TEMPERAURE LOOP RECIRCULATION WITH BUILDING RECIRCULATION WARNING: THIS DRAWING SHOWS SUGGESTED PIPING CONFIGURATION AND OTHER DEVICES; CHECK WITH LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. TEMPERED WATER TO FIXTURES LINE TEMPERATURE CONTROL TEMPERED WATER RETURN COLD WATER SUPPLY 7 EXPANSION TANK HOT WATER RETURN HOT WATER OUTLET 12' TO 15' MINIMUM HOT 4 LEGEND 6 TEMPERATURE & PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE CIRCULATING PUMP TANK OR LINE TEMPERATURE CONTROL DRAIN FULL PORT BALL VALVE MIXING VALVE CHECK VALVE = TEMPERATURE GAGE T QWATER FLOW SWITCH PIPE T &P TO OPEN DRAIN MIXING VALVE COLD LINE TEMPERATURE ® �d� CONTTR,OL 0 WATER PIPING DIAGRAMS Before installation of water piping review the following: 1. See Mixing Valves on page 14. 2. See Dishwashing Machines on page 14. 3. See Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve on page 15. 4. See Closed Systems and Thermal Expansion on page 14 5. See Water Line Connections on page 40. 6. If a pump is being installed between a water heater and storage tank or on a building recirculation loop wire according to Figure 64 on page 66. 7. If a pump is being installed in a recirculation loop between the water heater and a commercial dishwasher wire according to Figure 64 or Figure 65 on page 66. ONE WATER HEATER, SINGLE TEMPERATURE WITH VERTICAL STORAGE TANK FORCED RECIRCULATION WITH BUILDING RECIRCULATION WARNING: THIS DRAWING SHOWS SUGGESTED PIPING CONFIGURATION AND OTHER DEVICES; CHECK WITH LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. FINISHED FLOOR PIPE T &P TO OPEN DRAIN HOT WATER OUTLET 3-4 4 LEGEND TEMPERATURE & PRESSURE I.i1 RELIEF VALVE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE CIRCULATING PUMP TANK OR LINE TEMPERATURE CONTROL DRAIN TANK TEMPERATURE CONTROL ALT. COLD WATER CONNECTION l � I T FULL PORT BALL VALVE CHECK VALVE TEMPERATURE GAGE WATER FLOW SWITCH LINE TEMPERATURE /CONTROL HOT WATER RETURN COLD WATER SUPPLY EXPANSION TANK NOTE: The water heater's Operating Set Point should be set 5° higher than the Tank Temperature Control in the auxiliary storage tank. WATER PIPING DIAGRAMS Before installation of water piping review the following: 1. See Mixing Valves on page 14. 2. See Dishwashing Machines on page 14. 3. See Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve on page 15. 4. See Closed Systems and Thermal Expansion on page 14 5. See Water Line Connections on page 40. 6. If a pump is being installed between a water heater and storage tank or on a building recirculation loop wire according to Figure 64 on page 66. 7. If a pump is being installed in a recirculation loop between the water heater and a commercial dishwasher wire according to Figure 64 or Figure 65 on page 66. ONE WATER HEATER, SINGLE TEMPERATURE WITH HORIZONTAL STORAGE TANK FORCED RECIRCULATION WITH BUILDING RECIRCULATION WARNING: THIS DRAWING SHOWS SUGGESTED PIPING CONFIGURATION AND OTHER DEVICES; CHECK WITH LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. FINISHED FLOOR HOT WATER / OUTLET EF 8. ® OPEN DRAIN GV PIPE T &P TO a AOS STORAGE TANK TANK TEMPERATURE CONTROL ALTERNATE TANK TEMPERATURE -al— CONTROL LOCATION LEGEND TEMPERATURE & PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE CIRCULATING PUMP TANK OR LINE TEMPERATURE CONTROL 6 FULL PORT BALL VALVE MIXING VALVE CHECK VALVE TEMPERATURE GAGE T DRAIN 4 WATER FLOW SWITCH c LINE TEMPERATURE CONTROL s- Z HOT WATER RETURN COLD WATER SUPPLY EXPANSION TANK NOTE: The water heater's Operating Set Point should be set 5° higher than the Tank Temperature Control in the auxiliary storage tank. g. WATER PIPING DIAGRAMS Before installation of water piping review the following: 1. See Mixing Valves on page 14. 2. See Dishwashing Machines on page 14. 3. See Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve on page 15. 4. See Closed Systems and Thermal Expansion on page 14 5. See Water Line Connections on page 40. 6. • If a pump is being installed between a water heater and storage tank or on a building recirculation loop wire according to Figure 64 on page 66. 7. If a pump is being installed in a recirculation loop between the water heater and a commercial dishwasher wire according to Figure 64 or Figure 65 on page 66. TWO WATER HEATERS, SINGLE TEMPERATURE WITH BUILDING RECIRCULATION WARNING: THIS DRAWING SHOWS SUGGESTED PIPING CONFIGURATION AND OTHER DEVICES; CHECK WITH LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. HOT WATER OUTLET FINISHED FLOOR PIPE T &P TO OPEN DRAIN PIPE T &P TO OPEN DRAIN LEGEND 6 TEMPERATURE & PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE CIRCULATING PUMP TANK OR LINE TEMPERATURE CONTROL DRAIN -T- FULL PORT BALL VALVE CHECK VALVE TEMPERATURE GAGE WATER FLOW SWITCH LINE TEMPERATURE CONTROL rV�� COLD WATER SUPPLY EXPANSION TANK HOT WATER RETURN WATER PIPING DIAGRAMS Before installation of water piping review the following: 1. See Mixing Valves on page 14. 2. See Dishwashing Machines on page 14. 3. See Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve on page 15. 4. See Closed Systems and Thermal Expansion on page 14 5. See Water Line Connections on page 40. 6. If a pump is being installed between a water heater and storage tank or on a building recirculation loop wire according to Figure 64 on page 66. 7. If a pump is being installed in a recirculation loop between the water heater and a commercial dishwasher wire according to Figure 64 or Figure 65 on page 66. THREE WATER HEATERS, SINGLE TEMPERATURE WITH BUILDING RECIRCULATION WARNING: THIS DRAWING SHOWS SUGGESTED PIPING CONFIGURATION AND OTHER DEVICES; CHECK WITH LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. HOT WATER OUTLET FINISHED FLOOR aQfi PIPE T &P TO OPEN DRAIN EL8PIPE T &P TO OPEN DRAIN er E,F,375 4 PIPE T &P TO OPEN DRAIN LEGEND TEMPERATURE & PRESSURE a FULL PORT BALL VALVE RELIEF VALVE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE CIRCULATING PUMP TANK OR LINE TEMPERATURE CONTROL DRAIN 1 l 1 T CHECK VALVE TEMPERATURE GAGE WATER FLOW SWITCH LI NE TEMPERATURE f CONTROL COLD WATER SUPPLY EXPANSION TANK HOT WATER RETURN WATER PIPING DIAGRAMS Before installation of water piping review the following: 1. See Mixing Valves on page 14. 2. See Dishwashing Machines on page 14. 3. See Temperature- Pressure Relief Valve on page 15. 4. See Closed Systems and Thermal Expansion on page 14 5. See Water Line Connections on page 40. 6. If a pump is being installed between a water heater and storage tank or on a building recirculation loop wire according to Figure 64 on page 66. 7. If a pump is being installed in a recirculation loop between the water heater and a commercial dishwasher wire according to Figure 64 or Figure 65 on page 66. FOUR WATER HEATERS, SINGLE TEMPERATURE WITH BUILDING RECIRCULATION WARNING: THIS DRAWING SHOWS SUGGESTED PIPING CONFIGURATION AND OTHER DEVICES; CHECK WITH LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. FINISHED FLOOR HOT WATER OUTLET LEGEND o TEMPERATURE & PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE CIRCULATING PUMP TANK OR LINE TEMPERATURE CONTROL DRAIN PIPE T &P TO PIPE T &P TO PIPET &P TOE J �.,u \ PIPE T &P TO OPEN DRAIN T FULL PORT BALL VALVE CHECK VALVE TEMPERATURE GAGE WATER FLOW SWITCH LINE TEMPERATURE CONTROL HOT WATER RETURN COLD WATER SUPPLY \ EXPANSION • TANK OPEN DRAIN //,1 / \IJ / /J�OPEN DRAIN ptw/� /J�''N DRAIN / 1 \ \LI //� ..,...,/ ie T FULL PORT BALL VALVE CHECK VALVE TEMPERATURE GAGE WATER FLOW SWITCH LINE TEMPERATURE CONTROL HOT WATER RETURN COLD WATER SUPPLY \ EXPANSION • TANK LIMITED WARRANTY A. 0. Smith Corporation, the warrantor, extends the following LIMITED WARRANTY to the owner of this water heater. 1. THE TANK If the glass -lined tank in this water heater shall prove upon examination by the warrantor to have leaked due to natural corrosion from potable water therein, during the first THREE years after initial installation, the warrantor will supply a replacement tank less burner and controls or a complete new A. 0. Smith water heater of equivalent size and current model at the warrantor's option. Some government agencies are requiring energy efficient standards for water heaters. In the event regulations prohibit sale of a model of equivalent size and construction, A. 0. Smith will provide a model which complies with the regulations of your area, in which case the consumer will be charged the difference in price between the like replacement and the energy efficient model required. The warranty on the replacement water heater will be limited to the unexpired term of the original warranty. 2. ALL OTHER PARTS If within ONE year after initial installation of this water heater, any part or portion shall prove upon examination by the warrantor to be defective in material or workmanship, the warrantor will repair or replace such part or portion at its option. 3. CONDITIONS AND EXCEPTIONS This warranty shall apply only when the water heater is installed in accordance with local plumbing and building codes, ordinances and regulations, the printed instructions provided with it and good industry practices. In addition, a temperature and pressure relief valve, certified by CSA and approved by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, must have been installed. a. This warranty shall apply only when the water heater is: (1) owned by the original purchaser; (2) used at temperatures not exceeding the maximum setting of its thermostat; (3) used at water pressure not exceeding the working pressure shown on the heater; (4) used when operated free of the damaging effects of uncontrolled water hammer (5) used when filled with potable water, free to circulate at all times; (6) used in a non - corrosive and non - contaminated atmosphere; (7) used with factory approved anode(s) installed; (8) in its original installation location; (9) in the United States, its territories or possessions, and Canada; (10) sized in accordance with proper sizing techniques for commercial water heaters; (11) bearing a rating plate which has not been altered, defaced or removed except as required by the warrantor; (12) fired at the factory rated input using the fuel stated on the rating plate; (13) maintained in accordance with the instructions printed in the manual included with the water heater. b. Any accident to the water heater, any misuse, abuse (including freezing) or alteration of it, any operation of it in a modified form, or any attempt to repair tank leaks will void this warranty. c. This warranty is void if a device acting as a backflow prevention device (check valves etc.) is installed in the cold water supply the heater is connected to. unless an effective method of controlling thermal expansion is also installed at the heater(s) and operational at all times The temperature and pressure relief valve installed on the heater is no/ an acceptable method. 4. SERVICE AND REPAIR EXPENSES Under the limited warranty the warrantor will provide only a replacement water heater or part thereof. The owner is responsible for all other costs. Such costs may include but are not limited to: a. Labor charges for service removal, repair or reinstallation of the water heater or any component part; b. Shipping, delivery, handling, and administrative charges for forwarding the new heater or replacement part from the nearest distributor and returning the claimed defective heater or part to such distributor. c. All cost necessary or incidental for any material and /or permits required for installation of the replacement. 5. LIMITATIONS ON IMPLIED WARRANTIES Implied warranties, including the warranty of merchantability imposed on the sale of this heater under state law are limited to one (1) year duration for the heater or any of its parts. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you. 6. CLAIM PROCEDURE Any claim under the warranty should be initiated with the dealer who sold the water heater, or with any other dealer handling the warrantor's products. If this is not practicable, the owner should contact: _ U.S. Customers Canadian Customers A. 0. Smith Corporation A. 0. Smith Enterprises Ltd. 500 Tennessee Waltz Parkway P. 0. Box, 310 - 768 Erie Street Ashland City, TN 37015 Stratford (Ontario) N5A 6T3 Telephone: 1- (800)- 323 -2636 Telephone: 1 -(800) 265 -8520 a. The warrantor will only honor replacement with identical or similar water heater or parts thereof which are manufactured or distributed by the warrantor. b. Dealer replacements are made subject to in- warranty validation by warrantor. 7. DISCLAIMERS NO OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTY HAS BEEN OR WILL BE MADE IN BEHALF OF THE WARRANTOR WITH RESPECT TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE HEATER OR THE INSTALLATION, OPERATION, REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE WATER HEATER. THE WARRANTOR SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WATER DAMAGE, LOSS OF USE OF THE UNIT, INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PERSONAL PROPERTY OR OTHER CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE. THE WARRANTOR SHALL NOT BE LIABLE BY VIRTUE OF THIS WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE FOR DAMAGE TO ANY PERSONS OR PROPERTY, WHETHER DIRECT OR INDIRECT, AND WHETHER ARISING IN CONTRACT OR TORT. a. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of the incidental or consequential damage, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. b. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. Fill in the following for your own reference. Keeo it. Registration is not a condition of warranty. The model and serial number are found on the heater's rating plate. Date Installed Model No. Serial No. Dealer's Name Phone No. Dealer's Address City and State Zip Code FILL IN WARRANTY AND KEEP FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. 75 FILE COPY Pea ! PerrrtV Leo., Installation, use and maintenance instructions RIELW Forced draught gas burners Progressive two -stage or modulating operation US REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECtivt) CITY OF TUK1fi,'P NOV 13 2012 PERMIT CENTER CORRECTION LTR# Code Model 20016861 20016862 20016863 RS 70 /E RS 100 /E RS 130/E 20017786 (7 - 05/2012 col Ally t Contents RIELLO 1 Information and general instructions 3 1.1 Information about the instruction manual 3 1.1.1 Introduction 3 1.1.2 General dangers 3 1.1.3 Safety precautions 3 1.1.4 Danger: live components 3 1.2 Guarantee and responsibility 4 1.2.1 Owner's responsibility 4 2 Safety and prevention 5 2.1 Introduction 5 2.2 Personnel training 5 3 Technical description of the burner 6 3.1 Technical data 6 3.2 Electrical data 6 3.2.1 Fan motor IE2/EPACT 7 3.3 Burner models designations 7 3.4 Packaging 8 3.5 Overall dimensions 8 3.6 Burner equipment 8 3.7 Firing rates 9 3.7.1 Minimum furnace dimensions 9 3.8 Procedure to refer burner operating condition in high altitude plants 10 3.9 Burner components 12 3.10 Control box for the air /fuel ratio (LMV37.4..) 13 3.11 Actuators (SOM33.5 .) 16 4 Installation 17 4.1 Notes on safety for the installation 17 4.2 Handling 17 4.3 Preliminary checks 17 4.4 Operation position 17 4.5 Securing the burner to the boiler 18 4.5.1 Boring the boiler plate 18 4.5.2 Length of the blast tube 18 4.6 Combustion head calibration 19 4.7 Electrode and ignition pilot adjustment 19 4.8 Combustion head setting 20 4.9 Gas train assembly 22 4.10 Gas feeding line 22 4.11 Gas pressure 23 4.12 Electrical wiring 24 4.13 Electrical connections 24 4.13.1 Supply cables and external connections passage 24 4.14 Thermal relay calibration 25 4.14.1 Electro- mechanical thermal relay 25 4.14.2 Electronic thermal relay 25 4.15 Motor connection at 208 -230 or 460V 26 1 20017786 RIELLO Contents 4.16 Motor connection at 575V 26 4.17 Reversible direction 26 5 Start -up, calibration and operation of the burner 27 5.1 Notes on safety for the first start-up 27 5.2 Notes on safety for the first start-up 27 5.3 Operations before start-up 27 5.4 Burner start-up 27 5.5 Final calibration of the pressure switches 28 5.5.1 Air pressure switch 28 5.5.2 Maximum gas pressure switch 28 5.5.3 Minimum gas pressure switch 28 5.6 Final checks (with the burner working) 29 6 Maintenance 30 6.1 Notes on safety for the maintenance 30 6.2 Maintenance programme 30 6.2.1 Maintenance frequency 30 6.2.2 Checking and cleaning 30 6.3 Opening the burner 31 6.4 Closing the burner 31 A Appendix - Spare parts 32 B Appendix - Accessories 35 C Appendix - Burner start up report 36 20017786 2 Information and general instructions RIELLO Information and general instructions 1.1 Information about the instruction manual 1.1.1 Introduction The instruction manual supplied with the burner: > is an integral and essential part of the product and must not be separated from it; it must therefore be kept carefully for any necessary consultation and must accompany the burner even if it is transferred to another owner or user, or to another sys- tem. If the manual is lost or damaged, another copy must be requested from the Technical Assistance Service of the area; > is designed for use by qualified personnel; > offers important indications and instructions relating to the installation safety, start-up, use and maintenance of the burner. Symbols used in the manual In some parts of the manual you will see triangular DANGER signs. Pay great attention to these, as they indicate a situation of potential danger. 1.1.2 General dangers The dangers can be of 3 levels, as indicated below. Maximum danger level! This symbol indicates operations which, if not car- ried out correctly, cause serious injury, death or long -term health risks. This symbol indicates operations which, if not car- ried out correctly, may cause serious injury, death or long -term health risks. DANGER WARNING CAUTION This symbol indicates operations which, if not car- ried out correctly, may cause damage to the ma- chine and /or injury to people. 1.1.3 Safety precautions Good safety practices must be used when working on burner equipment. The potential energy in the electrical supply, fuel and related equipment must be handled with extreme care to prevent equipment failures, injuries and potential death. If you smell gas, open window, extinguish any open flames, stay away from electrical switches, evacu- ate the building and immediately call the gas com- pany. If this equipment is not installed, operated, operated and maintained in accordance with the manufactur- ers intructions, this product could expose you to substances in fuel or from fuel combustion which can cause death or serious illness. Improper servicing of this equipment may create a potential hazard to equipment and operators. Servicing must be done by a fully trained and qualified personnel. WARNING 1.1.4 Danger: live components This symbol indicates operations which, if not car- ried out correctly, lead to electric shocks with lethal consequences. DANGER Other symbols ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION aig This symbol gives indications for the use of the ma- chine with respect for the environment. > This symbol indicates a list. Abbreviations used Ch. Chapter Fig. Figure Pag. Page Sec. Section Tab. Table Delivery of the system and the instruction manual When the system is delivered, it is important that: > The instruction manual is supplied to the user by the system manufacturer, with the recommendation to keep it in the room where the heat generator is to be installed. > The instruction manual shows: — the serial number of the burner; — the address and telephone number of the nearest Assis- tance Centre; > The system supplier carefully informs the user about: — the use of the system, — any further tests that may be necessary before the system is started up, — maintenance and the need to have the system checked at least once a year by the manufacturer or another specialised technician. To ensure a periodic check, the manufacturer recommends the drawing ,up of a Maintenance Contract. 3 20017786 RIELLO Information and general instructions 1.2 Guarantee and responsibility The manufacturer guarantees its new products from the installa- tion date, in accordance with the regulations in force and /or the sales contract. At the moment of the first start-up, check that the burner is integral and complete. Failure to observe the information given in this man- ual, operating negligence, incorrect installation and the carrying out of non authorised modifications will WARNING result in the annulment by the manufacturer of the guarantee that it supplies with the burner. In particular, the rights to the guarantee and the responsibility will no longer be valid, in the event of damage to things or injury to people, if such damage /injury was due to any of the following causes: > incorrect installation, start-up, use and maintenance of the burner; > improper, incorrect or unreasonable use of the burner; > intervention of unqualified personnel; > carrying out of non authorised modifications on the equipment; > use of the burner with safety devices that are faulty, incorrectly applied and /or not working; > installation of untested supplementary components on the burner; > powering of the burner with unsuitable fuels; > faults in the fuel power supply system; > use of the burner even following an error and /or an irregularity; > repairs and /or overhauls incorrectly carried out; > modification of the combustion chamber with inserts that pre- vent the regular development of the flame, as structurally established; > insufficient and inappropriate surveillance and care of those burner components most subject to wear and tear; > use of non - original components, including spare parts, kits, accessories and optionals; > force majeure. the manufacturer furthermore declines any and every re- sponsibility for the failure to observe the contents of this manual. 1.2.1 Owner's responsibility Please pay attention to the Safety Warnings contained within this instruction manual. Keep this manual for your records and provide it to your quali fi ed service agency for use in profession- ally setting up and maintaining your burner. Your burner will provide years of of fi cient operation if it is pro- fessionally installed and maintained by a qualifi ed service tech- nician. If at any time the burner does not appear to be operating properly, immediately contact your qualifi ed service agency for consultation. We recommend annual inspection /service of your gas heating system by a qualifi ed service agency. Failure to follow these instructions, misuse, or incorrect adjust- ment of the burner could lead to equipment malfunction and re- sult in asphyxiation, explosion or fire. If you smell gas: > Do not touch any electrical items. > Open all windows. > Close all gas supply valves. > Contact your local gas authority immediately. • Do not store flammable or hazardous materials in the vicinity of fuel burning appliances. • Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service or maintenance can cause property damage, personal injury or death.. • Refer to this manual for instructional or addition- al information. • Consult a certified installer, service representa- tive or the gas supplier for further assistance. Burner shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers requirements as outlined in this manual, local codes and authorities having ju- risdiction. WARNING 20017786 4 Safety and prevention RIELLO _ 2.1 Introduction Safety and prevention The burners have been designed and built in compliance with current regulations and directives, applying the known technical rules of safety and envisaging all the potential danger situations. It is necessary, however, to bear in mind that the imprudent and clumsy use of the equipment may lead to situations of death risk for the user or third parties, as well as the damaging of the burn- er or other items. Inattention, thoughtlessness and excessive confidence often cause accidents; the same applies to tiredness and sleepiness. It is a good idea to remember the following: > The burner must only be used as expressly described. Any other use should be considered improper and therefore dangerous. In particular: it can be applied to boilers operating with water, steam, diathermic oil, and to other users expressly named by the 2.2 Personnel training manufacturer; the type and pressure of the fuel, the voltage and frequency of the electrical power supply, the minimum and maximum deliv- eries for which the burner has been regulated, the pressurisa- tion of the combustion chamber, the dimensions of the combustion chamber and the room temperature must all be within the values indicated in the instruction manual. > Modification of the burner to alter its performance and destina- tions is not allowed. > The burner must be used in exemplary technical safety condi- tions. Any disturbances that could compromise safety must be quickly eliminated. > Opening or tampering with the burner components is not allowed, apart from the parts requiring maintenance. > Only those parts envisaged by the manufacturer can be replaced. The user is the person, body or company that has acquired the machine and intends to use it for the specific purpose. He is re- sponsible for the machine and for the training of the people working around it. The user: > Undertakes to entrust the machine exclusively to suitably trained and qualified personnel. > Must take all the measures necessary to prevent unauthorised people gaining access to the machine. > Undertakes to inform his personnel in a suitable way about the application and observance of the safety instructions. With that aim, he undertakes to ensure that everyone knows the use and safety instructions for his own duties. > Must inform the manufacturer if faults or malfunctioning of the accident prevention systems are noticed, along with any pre- sumed danger situation. > Personnel must always use the personal protective equipment envisaged by legislation and follow the indications given in this manual. > Personnel must follow all the danger and caution indications shown on the machine. > Personnel must not carry out, on their own initiative, opera- tions or interventions that are not within their province. > Personnel are obliged to inform their superiors of every prob- lem or dangerous situation that may arise. > The assembly of parts of other makes, or any modifications, can alter the characteristics of the machine and hence com- promise operating safety. The manufacturer therefore declines any and all responsibility for any damage that may be caused by the use of non - original parts. 5 20017786 RI ELLO Technical description of the burner 3 Technical description of the burner 3.1 Technical data Model Output (1) Fuel Max. delivery - Pressure at max. delive Operation Standard applications Ambient temperature Combustion air temperature Noise levels (3) High Low (2) MBtu /hr kW MBtu /hr kW SCFH -,.WC • °F °F max dB(A) RS 701E 1761 - 3084 516 - 904 512 150 3084 i4.06W (1) Reference conditions: Ambient temperature 68 °F (20 °C) - Barometric press (2) Pressure at test point.21)(Fig. 5), with zero pressure in the combustion chambe (3) Sound pressure measured in manufacturer's combustion laboratory, with burn RS 1001E 2644 - 4405 775 - 1291 570 167 - Natural or Propane gas 4405 - --- -3.66, Low - high or modulating ilers: water, - steam, thermal 32 - 104 (0 - 40 °C) - 140 -(60 °C) -- 77 vve 394 "WC - Altitude 329 ft with open gas ring (Fig. 13) r operating on test boiler anc 3.2 Electrical data it RS 1301E 3521 - 5545 1032 -1625 607 178 5545 78,5 Tab. A .s.l. t maximum burner output. at maximum rated output. Fan motor 1E1 Model 'Control circuit power supply_ Main electrical supply Fan motor Ignition transformer Elect c rical power onsumption _ Electrical control circuit corns. Total electrical consumption Electrical protection Model Control circuit power supply Main electrical supply Fan motor Ignition transformer V /Ph /Hz V /Ph /Hz rpm W - HP V A V1 - V2 11 - 12 W max W Electrical power consumption Electrical control circuit corns. Total electrical consumption Electrical protection W V /Ph /Hz V /Ph /Hz • rpm W -HP V A V1 - V2 I1 -12 W -Max W.__ W- . RS 70 /E 3400 1100- 1.5 208 -230 4.7 1550 2300 RS 701E 3400 1100 - 1.5 460 2.7 RS 100 /E 120/1/60 208 - 230/3/60 3360 1800 - 2.4 208 -230 7.4 120V -1 X8 kV 1.6 A- 20 mA 2350 750 * _... -3100 - NEMA 1 RS 100 /E 120/1/60 460/3/60 336T-- — 1800 - 2.4 460 _ _4.3 120 V - 1 X8kV _ 1.6A -20mA - -- 2750.._ • --- 750 — _ 3500 NEMA1 RS 130 /E 3400- _ -: 2200 - 3 208 -230 8.5 2750 -3500 Tab. B RS 1301E - - -- - 2200 - 3 460 4.9 3150 3900 . Tab. C 20017786 6 Technical description of the burner RIELLO Fan motor IE2 /EPACT Model 'Control circuit power supply V /Ph/Hz Main electrical supply V /Ph /Hz Fan motor rpm W - HP V A RS 70 /E 3475 RS 100 /E 120/1/60- 208 - 230/3/60 3500 1100 -1.5 2200 -3 208 -230 208 -230 4 7.8 Ignition transformer V1 - V2 120 V - 1 X 8 kV 11 -12 1.6A -20mA Electrical power consumption - W max —1350 2600 2600 Electrical control circuit coms. W 750 Total electrical consumption - W 2100 3350 - - -. ¶ 3350 - RS 130 /E 3500 _ -.... 2200 - 3 208 -230 7.8 Electrical protection NEMA 1 Tab. D Model RS 70 /E RS 100 /E RS 130 /E Control circuit power supply V /Ph/Hz 120/1/60 Main electrical supply V /Ph /Hz 460/3/60 `Fan motor rpm 3475 3500 - -- -3500 - W -HP 1100 -1.5 2200 -3 2200 -3 V 460 460 460 A 2 3.9 3.9 Ignition transformer V1 - V2 120 V 1 X 8 k' 11 -12 1.6A -20mA `Electrical power con §umption --- _ -W -Max "- 1350 2600 —2600- Electrical control circuit corns. W 750 Electrical protection 3.3 Burner models designations NEMA 1 3350- - Tab. E Model RS 70 /E RS 100 /E RS 130 /E Code 20016861 20016862 20016863 Voltage 208- 220/3/60 460/3/60 575/3/60 208 - 220/3/60 460/3/60 575/3/60 208 - 220/3/60 460/3/60 575/3/60 Flame safeguard Burner mounted Burner mounted Burner mounted Tab. F 7 20017786 RIELLO Technical description of the burner 3.4 Packaging > The packaging of the burner (Fig. 1) rests on a wooden plat- form that is particularly suitable for lift trucks. The overall dimensions of the packaging are shown in Tab. G. The weight of the burner complete with its packaging is shown in Tab. G. inch RS 70 /E RS 100 /E RS 130/E A(1) 46 27/32" - 52 5/32" B C lbs 291/8" 271/4" 154 46 27/32" - 52 5/32" 29 1/8" 1.27 1/4 161 ,1 46 27/32" - 52 5/32" 29 1/8" 27 1/4" 168 Tab. G (1) Blast tube: short - long (obtainable with kit). 3.5 Overall dimensions Fig. 1 The dimensions of the burner are shown in Fig. 2. Bear in mind that inspection of the combustion head requires the burner to be opened and the rear part drawn back on the guides. The dimensions of the open burner are indicated by position I. A Fig. 2 inch A B C D E F(1) G H 1(1) L M N 0 RS 70 /E 201/8" 1121/32" 815/32" 2127/32" 331/16" 927/32" - 155/32 " 71/32" 1629/32" 4511/16" - 511/32" 813/32" 59/32" 811/16" 2" 'RS 100 /E 203%4 129/32 "1 815/32 " 2127/32'. 1-331716" -627/32- 155/32 71!32" 1629732 " 4511 /116" 511 %32 " i 813/32 59/32 , [811!16 2° • , RS 130/E 2125/32" 135/16" 815/32" 2127/32" 331/16" 111/32" - 1611/32" 73/32" 1629/32 4511/16" - 511/32" 813/32" 59/32" 811/16" 2" Tab. H (1) Blast tube: short - long (obtainable with kit). 3.6 Burner equipment The burner is supplied complete with: 1 - Gas train flange 1 - Flange gasket 4 - Flange fixing screws 3'8W x 1" 1 - Burner head gasket 2 - Extensions for slide bars (for kit) 4 - Screws to secure the burner flange to the boiler: 1/2 W 1 - Instruction manual and spare parts list 20017786 8 Technical description of the burner 3.7 Firing rates RIELLO During operation, burner output varies between: • MAXIMUM OUTPUT, selected within area A (Fig. 3); • MINIMUM OUTPUT, which must not be lower than the minimum limit in the diagram. Model MBtu /hr RS 70 /E RS 100 /E RS 130/E 512 568 ........... 607 NOTE: In order to utilize also area B (RS 130/E) it is necessary to perform the calibration of the combustion head as explained on page 19. The firing rate area values have been obtained considering an ambient temperature of 68 °F (20 °C), and an atmospheric pressure of 394 "WC and with the combustion head adjusted as shown on page 20. WARNING NOTE: The firing rate areas given in Fig. .3 have been reduced by 10% with respect to the maximum range that can be reached. Consult Procedure on page 10 to refer burner operating condition in high altitude plants. 3.7.1 Minimum furnace dimensions The firing rates were set in relation to certified test boilers. Fig. 4 indicates the diameter and length of the test combustion chamber. Example: output 2579 MBtu /hr - diameter = 24 inch - length 6.6 ft C -- w 8 E _ . 7 a) C 6 u_ • 5 4 1 600 2000 2400 2800 3200 3600 4000 4400 4800 5200 5600 6000 20 Diameter (inch) 24 m .0 EU a: 0- U C 0 N E 0 U N .0 C 0 U C 0 N E 0 U a) co a1 0. 3,1 2,4 1,6 0,8 0 - 0,8 MBtu /h 500 kW 100 200 RS 70 /E NN 3,9 3,1 2.4 1.6 0,8 0 - 0,8 MBtu /hr500 1000 1500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 = RS 100/! A a, N a) 0. 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 kW 200 400 4,7 3,9 3,1 2,4 1,6 0,8 0 -0,B MBtu /h 1000 600 800 1000 1200 1400 RS 30 /E mamma imisisimemire. B �•nli■••I•111•11111•1111■111srI ..IIIII1i•i11i• ®1110 oII II ® ®i ®ice 1 2000 3000 4000 5000 r t i i i kW 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 Fig. 3 31.5 • inch 0 MEIIR IU ft ft =0,12 IMBTU /hr MBtu /hr Fig. 4 9 20017786 RIELLO Technical description of the burner 3.8 Procedure to refer burner operating condition in high altitude plants Find the corrected burner capacity for the plant's altitude in chart 1 and the corrected pressure in chart 2. Check in the firing rate graph of the burner (Fig. 3), if the working point defined by the values above is within the range limits. If not, higher burner size is needed. Note Charts are based only on altitude variation (reference tempera- ture = 68 °F , 20 °C) To get the combined correction in case of different air tempera- ture, a compensation of 1000 ft each 20 °F (305 m each 11 °C) is applicable. Example Rated capacity = 3000 MBtu /hr - Rated air pressure = 1.5 "WC. Real altitude = 5000 ft - Real temperature = 108 °F A = 108 °F - 68 °F (reference temp.) = 40 °F (equivalent 2000 ft variation) Proceeding as descripted above and considering a "virtual alti- tude" of (5000 + 2000) ft: - the corrected capacity is 3847 MBtu /hr - the corrected burner air pressure is 1.92 Reference conditions (Charts 1 -2): — Ambient temperature 68 °F (20 °C) — Barometric pressure 394" WC (1000 mbar) — Altitude 328 ft a.s.l. (100 m a.s.l.). IICORRECTED BURNER CAPACITY ACCORDING TO ALTITUDE 20017786 10 Altitude Rated Capacity m. a.s.l. 0 100 305 610 915 1220 1525 1830 2135 2440 ft a.s.1 0 328 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 500 494 500 512 530 551 571 593 616 641 669 1000 987 1000 1023 1061 1101 1142 1186 1232 1282 1337 1500 1481 1500 1535 1591 1652 1713 1778 1848 1924 2006 2000 1974 2000 2046 2121 2202 2284 2371 2464 2565 2675 2500 2468 2500 2558 2652 2753 2855 2964 3079 3206 3343 3000 2962 3000 3069 3182 3303 3425 3557 3695 3847 4012 3500 3455 3500 3581 3712 3854 3996 4149 4311 4488 4680 4000 3949 4000. 4092 4243 4404 4567 4742 4927 5130 5349 4500 4442 4500 4604 4773 4955 5138 5335 5543 5771 6018 5000 4936 5000 5116 5303 5505 5709 5928 6159 6412 6686 5500 5429 5500 5627 5834 6056 6280 6520 6775 7053 7355 6000 5923 6000 6139 6364 6606 6851 7113 7391 7694 8024 6500 6417 6500 6650 6894 7157 7422 7706 8006 8335 8692 7000 6910 7000 7162 7425 7708 7993 8299 8622 8977 9361 7500 7404 7500 7673 7955 8258 8564 8892 9238 9618 10029 8000 7897 8000 8185 8485 8809 9135 9484 9854 10259 10698 8500 8391 8500 8697 9016 9359 9705 10077 10470 10900 11367 9000 8885 9000 9208 9546 9910 10276 10670 11086 11541 12035 9500 9378 9500 9720 10076 10460 10847 11263 11702 12183 12704 10000 9872 10000 10231 10607 11011 11418 11855 12318 12824 13373 Average barometric Pressure (20xC) mbar 1013 1000 977.4 942.8 908.2 875.8 843.5 811.85 779.8 747.8 Average barometric Pressure (68xF) „w c. 399 394 385 371 358 345 332 320 307 294 20017786 10 Technical description of the burner RIELLO CORRECTED BURNER AIR PRESSURE ACCORDING TO ALTITUDE 11 20017786 Altitude Rated Pressure m. a.s.l. 0 • 100: 305 610 915 1220 1525 1830 2135 2440 ft a.s.1 0 328 1000 2000 3000 4000. 5000 6000 7000 8000 0.50 0.49 0.50 ; ' 0.51 0.53 0.55 0.57 0.59 0.62 0.64 0.67 1.00 0.99 ';, 1.00 1.02 1.06 1.10 1.14 1.19 1.23 1.28 1.34 1.50 1.48 1.50 ` • 1.53 1.59 1.65 1.71 1.78 1.85 1.92 2.01 2.00 1.97 /2.00'1' 2.05 2.12 2.20 2.28 2.37 2.46 2.56 2.67 2.50 2.47 *2.5. 0, '. 2.56 2.65 2.75 2.85 2.96 3.08 3.21 3.34 3.00 2.96 1 3,00 3.07 3.18 3.30 3.43 3.56 3.70 3.85 4.01 3.50 3.46 ' '';3.50 v 3.58 3.71 3.85 4.00 4.15 4.31 4.49 4.68 4.00 3.95 . 4.00 4.09 4.24 4.40 4.57 4.74 4.93 5.13 5.35 4.50 4.44 4.50 4.60 4.77 4.95 5.14 5.33 5.54 5.77 6.02 5.00 4.94 5.00 5.12 5.30 5.51 5.71 5.93 6.16 6.41 6.69 5.50 5.43 ^:.,5.50. , 5.63 5.83 6.06 6.28 6.52 6.77 7.05 7.35 6.00 5.92 6.00' 6.14 6.36 6.61 6.85 7.11 7.39 7.69 8.02 6.50 6.42 ''y 6.504 6.65 6.89 7.16 7.42 7.71 8.01 8.34 8.69 7.00 6.91 77006„ 7.16 7.42 7.71 7.99 8.30 8.62 8.98 9.36 7.50 7.40 j;7.500„ 7.67 7.96 8.26 8.56 8.89 9.24 9.62 10.03 8.00 7.90 x`8.00 " 8.18 8.49 8.81 9.13 9.48 9.85 10.26 10.70 8.50 8.39 "8.50 8.70 9.02 9.36 9.71 10.08 10.47 10.90 11.37 9.00 8.88 9.00 9.21 9.55 9.91 10.28 10.67 11.09 11.54 12.04 9.50 9.38 9.50 9.72 10.08 10.46 10.85 11.26 11.70 12.18 12.70 10.00 9.87 10.00 !, 10.23 10.61 11.01 11.42 11.86 12.32 12.82 13.37 Average barometric Pressure (20xC) mbar 1013 ' 1000.:,` 977.4 942.8 908.2 875.8 843.5 811.85 779.8 747.8 Average barometric Pressure(68xF) "w.c. 399 394 385 371 358 345 332 320 307 294 11 20017786 RI ELLO Technical description of the burner 3.9 Burner components 1 Combustion head 2 Burner pilot 3 Screw for combustion head adjustment 4 Maximum gas pressure switch 5 Burner pilot attachment 6 Gas actuator 7 Ignition electrode 8 Fan motor contactor and thermal relay with reset button 9 RWF40 connectors 10 Burner terminal board "X1" 11 Operator panel with LCD display 12 Control box for checking flame and air /fuel ratio 13 "K1" relay 14 High voltage lead 15 UV scanner 16 Ignition transformer 17 Holes for cable grommets for electrical wiring, accessories and power supply (to be carried out by the installer) 18 Air actuator 19 Low air pressure switch 20 Guides for opening the burner and inspecting the combustion head 21 Gas pressure test point and head fixing screw 22 Air pressure socket 23 RWF40 modulator 24 Air damper 25 Fan air inlet 26 Screws to secure fan to pipe coupling 27 Gas input pipe 28 Gas butterfly valve 29 Boiler fixing flange 30 Flame stability disc 31 Horn 32 "OFF- LOCAL - REMOTE" switch 33 "ALARM SILENCE" button 34 "K2" relay 35 "K3" relay 36 "K4" relay 37 Optional hole 38 Ground terminals Fig. 5 One type of burner failure may occur: Fan motor trip release by pressing the pushbutton on thermal overload 8)(Fig. 5). See "Thermal relay calibration" at page 25. 20017786 12 Technical description of the burner RIELLO 3.10 Control box for the air /fuel ratio (LMV37.4...) Warning notes WARNING To avoid injury to persons, damage to proper- ty or the environment, the following warning notes must be observed! The LMV37.4... is a safety device! Do not open, interfere with or modify the unit. Riello S.p.A. will not assume responsibility for any damage resulting from unauthorized in- terference! > All activities (mounting, installation and service work, etc.) must be performed by qualified staff. > Before making any wiring changes in the connection area, completely isolate the plant from mains supply (all -polar dis- connection). Ensure that the plant cannot be inadvertently switched on again and that it is indeed dead. If not observed, there is a risk of electric shock hazard. > Ensure protection against electric shock hazard by providing adequate protection for the burner control's connection termi- nals. > Each time work has been carried out (mounting, installation, service work, etc.), check to ensure that wiring and parame- ters is in an orderly state. > Fall or shock can adversely affect the safety functions. Such units must not be put into operation, even if they do not exhibit any damage. Introduction The control box for the air /fuel ratio (Fig. 6), (hereafter referred to simply as the control box), that equips the burners, carries out a se- ries of integrated functions in order to optimise burner functioning, both for single operation and together with other units (e.g. double furnace boiler or more than one generator at the same time). The basic functions carried out by the control box relate to: > flame control; > the dosage of air and fuel via the positioning (with direct ser- vocontrol) of the relative valves, excluding the possible play in the mechanical cam calibration systems; > the modulation of burner output, on the basis of the load requested by the system, maintaining the pressure or temper- ature of the boiler at the working values set; > the safety diagnostic of the air and fuel circuits, via which it is possible to easily identify any causes of malfunctioning. Mechanical design The following system components are integrated in the LMV37.4... basic unit: • Burner control with gas valve proving system • Electronic air / fuel ratio control • Control frequency converter air fan • Modbus interface Fig. 6 Installation notes • Always run high - voltage ignition cables separately while observ- ing the greatest possible distance to the unit and to other cables. • Do not mix up live and neutral conductors (fire hazard, danger- ous failures, loss of protection against electric shock hazard, etc.). • Do not lay the connecting cable from the LMV37.4... to the AZL2... together with other cables. The first start-up, like every further operation for the internal settings of the control box, re- quires access by means of a password and is only to be carried out by personnel of the Tech- nical Assistance Service who have been speci- fically trained in the internal programming of the tool. WARNING Electrical connection of the flame detectors It is important to achieve practically disturbance- and loss -free signal transmission: • Never run the detector cable together with other cables. — Line capacitance reduces the magnitude of the flame signal. — Use a separate cable. • Observe the maximum permissible detector cable lengths. • The ionization probe is not protected against electric shock haz- ard. It is mainspowered and must be protected against acciden- tal contact. • Locate the ignition electrode and the ionization probe such that the ignition spark cannot arc over to the ionization probe (risk of electrical overloads). 13 20017786 RI ELLO Technical description of the burner Technical data LMV37.4... basic unit Mains voltage AC 120 V -15 To / +10 Mains frequency 50 / 60 Hz ±6 % Power consumption < 30 W (typically) Safety class I, with parts according to II and III to DIN EN 60730 -1 Terminal loading `Inputs' Unit fuse Fl (internally) 6.3 AT Perm. mains primary fuse (externally) Max. 16 AT Undervoltage • Safety shutdown from operating position at mains voltage • Restart on rise in mains voltage Approx. AC 93 V Approx. AC 96 V Terminal loading Total contact loading: `Outputs' • Nominal voltage • Unit input current (safety loop) from: - Fan motor contactor - Ignition transformer - Valves - Oil pump / magnetic clutch AC 120 V, 50 / 60 Hz Max. 5 A Individual contact loading: Fan motor contactor • Nominal voltage • Nominal current • Power factor Alarm output • Nominal voltage • Nominal current • Power factor Ignition transformer • Nominal voltage • Nominal current • Power factor Fuel valves • Nominal voltage • Nominal current • Power factor Operation display • Nominal voltage • Nominal current • Power factor AC 120 V, 50 / 60 Hz 1.6 A pilot duty load declaration to UL372 coscp > 0.4 AC 120 V, 50 / 60 Hz 1A cosy > 0.4 AC 120 V, 50 / 60 Hz 1.6 A pilot duty load declaration to UL372 or 250 VA ignition load declaration to UL372 coscp > 0.2 AC 120 V, 50 / 60 Hz 1.6 A pilot duty load declaration to UL372 coscp > 0.4 AC 120 V, 50 / 60 Hz 0.5 A cosq > 0.4 Cable lengths Mains line Display, BCI External lockout reset button Max. 100 m (100 pF /m) For used outside the burner cover or the control panel: Max. 3 m (100 pF /m) Max. 20 m (100 pF /m) Environmental Operation DIN EN 60721 -3 -3 conditions Climatic conditions Class 3K3 Mechanical conditions Class 3M3 Temperature range - 20... +60 °C Humidity < 95 % r.h. Tab. I 20017786 14 Technical description of the burner RIELLO Operation sequence of the burner Phase number 00 02 10 12 t1 TSA1 TSA2 c sa 60 62 70 72 74 80 81 82 83 90 22 24 ....a 30 38 38 40 42 44 50 52 INPUTS J Safety limit thermostat (STB) Control thermostat or pressurestat (R) HZI a■■■■■■ • >axv,_ lEl-il t a:.•. »n- .•.- .•.- .- .- .-.- ..00u'� xxxxx:c ■a•0000a Flame signal (FS) D- _r.•.n._• - -- V.V.....! --.. • - aIN■.. 1 a■■■■.■ Air pressure switch (LP) t 1'� I' ^-- 4) t a■■■■: Pressure switch-min (Pmin) - -© Presure switchrrax (Pmax) vwrrrrrrr.- W r.- vr.- r...ar- su..0•3111` v.-.cr ro-.ws.. vc•'� a• •••••••. .• • •.- . ••r ∎• a•■A•■•• Valve proving / leakage test (P LT) --E1 .- .•r.••.'rr.:.w.w. _ .___. __. .-- .,••rrr POC (allemative to Pmax) I r.: ✓.r. .._.._..e.._...w.- r. s..y ...... :.es7 a a•••••NW 11111 OUTPUTS J Motor (M) (= Ignition transformer (Z)/-' Safety valve (SV) =-X Fuel valve 1 (Vt) 1=-X Fuel valve 2 (V2) Q -g Pilot valve (PV) �]$ Alarm (AL) I]� f t t a�■■■■ t a■■■■:: t a::■::: t a■■■■■■ 1, 3) t a■■■■■■ t to Actuators s. li 9° Nominall Postpurge position Ignition bad —: S Low-fire — /• / j %, / �� ,i� // % !/ %./ .// - / /% /: / , "" �� : ! / //, / No-load position a 0• 90 Nominal load // � "/� . / ' / ;'_; .',,2i - "% / y ' - i Postpurge position J m Ignition load —'' I —_ i i, .j ,f I— .�. i .. /.' I �'" No-load position 0' p j • • Nominal load Postpurge position _, Ignition load —./ Low -fire — No-load /. -r, 24'4;;:; j ://, �"%/ .7i:.2/%.';'.. % �'�' j 7- j '' /� ' (. . . INS ` r ' �i V,„ , ;%/� /% 4 ∎ position 0• D9288 Legend to the sequence diagrams: Valve proving takes place depending on the parameter: 2) Only with valve proving on startup 3) Parameter: with /without alarm in the event of start prevention 4) In the event of an erroneous signal on startup, followed by phase 10, otherwise phase 70 0° Position as supplied (0 °) 90° Actuator fully open (90 °) Assignment of times: t1 Prepurge time TSAI Safety time 1 gas / oil TSA2 Safety time 2 gas / oil IIIIIIIIIIIII Fig. 7 Signal ON Signal OFF Any signal is allowed In standby: after referencing, the actuator is driven to the no -load position 15 20017786 RIELLO Technical description of the burner 3.11 Actuators (SQM33.5...) Warning notes To avoid injury to persons, damage to proper- ty or the environment, the following warning notes should be observed! Do not open, interfere with or modify the actu- ators! > All activities (mounting, installation and service work, etc.) must be performed by qualified staff. > Before making any wiring changes in the connection area of the units, completely isolate the equipment from mains supply (all -polar disconnection). If not observed, there is a risk of electric shock hazard. > Ensure protection against electric shock hazard by providing adequate protection for the connection terminals and by securing the housing cover. > After any kind of activity (mounting, installation and service work, etc.), check wiring. Also ensure that the parameters are correctly set. > Fall or shock can adversely affect the safety functions. Such units must not be put into operation, even if they do not exhibit any damage. The actuator's housing must not be opened. The actuator contains an optical feedback system. WARNING WARNING Use The actuators (Fig. 8) are used to drive and position the air damper and the gas butterfly valve, without mechanical leverag- es but via the interposition of an elastic coupling. They are commanded by the control box, which constantly checks their position by means of a return signal from the optic sensor inside the actuator. The position (in degrees) of the actuators can be seen on the display of the Operator Panel. Index "0" for fuel actuator, index "1" for air actuator. Installation notes • Always run the high - voltage ignition cables separate from the unit and other cables while observing the greatest possible dis- tance. • The holding torque is reduced when the actuator is disconnect- ed from power. WARNING When servicing or replacing the actuators, take care not to invert the connectors. Tab. J Technical data Fig. 8 Operating voltage AC /DC24V±20% (load on interface) Safety class 2 to EN 60 730 part 1 and parts 2...14 Power consumption max. 10 W Degree of protection IP54 to EN 60 529 -1 Opening time 0 - 90° min: 5s, max.: 120s (depending on the type of control box) Firing rate 0 - 90° Cable connection RAST2,5 connectors Direction of rotation Clockwise /anticlockwise (can be selected from the control box) Nominal output torque 3 Nm Holding torque (when live) 3 Nm Holding torque (when dead) 2.6 Nm Weight approx. 1 kg Environmental conditions: Operation Climatic conditions Mechanical conditions Temperature range Humidity DIN EN 60 721 -3 -3 class 3K5 class 3M4 - 20... +60 xC <95 %r.h. 20017786 16 Installation RIELLO Installation 4.1 Notes on safety for the installation After carefully cleaning all around the area where the burner will be installed, and arranging the correct lighting of the environ- ment, proceed with the installation operations. All the installation, maintenance and disassembly operations must be carried out with the electricity supply disconnected. DANGER 4.2 Handling WARNING The installation of the burner must be carried out by qualified personnel, as indicated in this manu- al and in compliance with the standards and reg- ulations of the laws in force. The packaging of the burner includes a wooden platform, so it is possible to move the burner (still packaged) with a transpallet truck or fork lift truck. With regard to the transport in the obligatory passages, refer to the overall dimensions shown in Fig. 2. The handling operations for the burner can be highly dangerous if not carried out with the great- est attention: keep any unauthorised people at a distance; check the integrity and suitableness of the available means of handling. WARNING 4.3 Preliminary checks Check also that the area in which you are working is empty and that there is an adequate escape area (i.e. a free, safe area to which you can quickly move if the burner should fall). During the handling, keep the load at not more 10" from the ground. CAUTION After positioning the burner near the installation point, correctly dispose of all residual packaging, separating the various types of material. Before proceeding with the installation opera- tions, carefully clean all around the area where the burner will be installed. Checking the consignment After removing all the packaging, check the integ- rity of the contents. In the event of doubt, do not use the burner; contact the supplier. CAUTION The packaging elements (wooden cage or card- board box, nails, clips, plastic bags, etc.) must not be abandoned as they are potential sources of danger and pollution; they should be collected and disposed of in the appropriate places. 4.4 Operation position WARNING WARNING The output of the burner must be within the boil- er's firing rate; A burner label that has been tampered with, re- moved or is missing, along with anything else that prevents the definite identification of the burner makes any installation or maintenance work diffi- cult. The burner is designed to operate only in the positions 1, 2, 3 and 4 (Fig. 9). Installation 1 is preferable, as it is the only one that allows the maintenance operations as described in this manual. Installa- tions 2, 3 and 4 permit operation but make maintenance and in- spection of the combustion head more difficult. Any other position could compromise the correct operation of the appliance. Installation 5 is prohibited for safety reasons. c.4) D7739 Fig. 9 17 20017786 RI ELLO Installation 4.5 Securing the burner to the boiler 4.5.1 Boring the boiler plate Make holes in the plate shutting off the combustion chamber, as il- lustrated in Fig. 10. The position of the threaded holes can be marked using the ther- mal insulation screen supplied with the burner. Long blast tube (with kit) RS 70 /E 15 5/32" RS 100/E 15 5/32" __ RS 130 /E 161 1/32" Model Short blast tube 9 27/32" -6--27/2" 11 1/32" D455 Tab. K Fig. 10 4.5.2 Length of the blast tube The length of the blast tube must be selected according to the indications provided by the manufacturer of the boiler, and in any case it must be greater than the thickness of the boiler door complete with its refractory. The available lengths L are those in- dicated in the table below. For boilers with front flue passes 13)(Fig. 11) or flame inversion chambers, a protection in refractory material 11) must be insert- ed between the boiler refractory 12) and the blast tube 10). This protection must not compromise the extraction of the blast tube. See Fig. 11. For boilers with a water - cooled frontal, a refractory lining is not necessary 11)- 12)(Fig. 11) unless expressly requested by the boiler manufacturer. inch RS 70 /E i RS 100 /E RS 130/E A 7 9/32" ). 9/32" 7 21/32» B 10 13/16" - 12 25/32" 10 13/16" ;12 25/32 10 13/16" - 12 25/32" C 1/2 W 1/2W� 1/2 W Tab. L Fig. 11 20017786 18 Installation RIELLO 4.6 Combustion head calibration Before securing the burner to the boiler check for model RS 1301E, whether the maximum delivery of the burner at high fire operation is contained in area A or in area B of the firing rate. See Fig. 3. If it is in area A then no operation is required. If, on the other hand, it is in area B: > unscrew the screws 1)(Fig. 12) and disassemble the blast tube 2); > move the fixing of the rod 3)(Fig. 12) from position C to posi- tion D, thereby causing the shutter 4) to retract; > now refit the blast tube 2)(Fig. 12) and the screws 1). Once this operation has been carried out (if it was required), se- cure the flange 11)(Fig. 11) to the boiler plate, inserting the gas- ket 8). Use the 4 screws, also supplied with the unit, after first protect- ing the thread with an anti - locking product. The seal between burner and boiler must be airtight. 4.7 Electrode and ignition pilot adjustment D738 Fig. 12 To verify the correct position of the electrode (Fig. 13), you need to extract the internal part of the head 2)(Fig. 14). Place the electrode and the ignition pilot as shown in Fig. 13. WARNING Measures must be respected. The ignition pilot works correctly at pressures ranging from 5 - 12" WC. Proceed as follows: > loosen the 4 screws 3) (Fig. 11) and remove the hood 1); > remove the screws 2) from the two guides 5), (only for long blast tube version); > install the extensions 15) and re -screw the screws 2), (only for long blast tube version); > remove the two screws 4); > pull back the burner on the guides 5) of about 4 "; > disconnect the electrode lead, then pull back the burner to the screws 2) (Fig. 11); > remove the screw 1) (Fig. 14) and extract the inner part 2) of the head; > check the correct position of ignition electrode, as shown in Fig. 13. > Re- install the inner part of the head with reverse proce- dure. Fig. 13 19 20017786 RIELLO Installation 4.8 Combustion head setting Installation operations are now at the stage where the blast tube and sleeve are secured to the boiler as shown in Fig. 15. It is now a very simple matter to set up the combustion head, as this depends solely on the MAX output developed by the burner. It is therefore essential to establish this value before proceeding to set up the combustion head. There are two adjustments to make on the head: air and gas de- liveries. In diagram (Fig. 16) find the notch to use for adjusting the air and the gas, and then proceed as follows: Air adjustment • Turn screw 2)(Fig. 15) until the notch identified is aligned with the front surface 1)(Fig. 15) of the flange. Gas adjustment > Loosen the 3 screws 4)(Fig. 15) and turn ring 5) until the notch identified is aligned with index 6). • Tighten the 3 screws 4) fully down. Example RS 70 /E MAX output = 2200 MBtu /hr. If we consult diagram (Fig. 16) we find that for this output, air must be adjusted using notch 3) on screw 2)(Fig. 15). Diagram (Fig. 16) shows the ideal settings for the ring 5)(Fig. 15). If the gas main pressure is too low to reach the max- imum output operation pressure indicated on page 23, and if the ring 5)(Fig. 15) is not fully open, it can be opened wider by 1 or 2 notches. Continuing with the previous example, page 23 indicates that for burner RS 70 /E with output of 2200 MBtu /hr a pressure of ap- proximately 2.36 "WC is necessary at test point 3)(Fig. 15). If the pressure cannot be reached, open the ring 5)(Fig. 15) to notch 4 or 5. Make sure that the combustion characteristics are satisfactory and free of pulsations. gNotches (Air =Gas) 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 70 I I I I 100 1 130 A 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 MBtu /hr D2392 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 kW Maximum burner output Fig. 15 Fig. 16 20017786 20 Installation RIELLO Once the combustion head adjustment is completed: > slide the burner on the guides 3) at about 4 "- from the pipe coupling 4) - burner in the position shown in Fig. 11; > insert the electrode cable, then slide the burner as far as the pipe coupling - burner in the position shown in Fig. 18; > fix the burner to the pipe coupling with the screws 1). CAUTION When fitting the burner on the two guides, it is ad- visable to gently draw out the high voltage cable un- til they are slightly taut. Fig. 17 21 20017786 RIELLO Installation 4.9 Gas train assembly > The gas train is type- approved according to standard UL 795 and is supplied separately from the burner. > The gas train can enter the burner from the right or left side, depending on which is the most convenient, see Fig. 18. > The gas train must be connected to the gas attachment 1) (Fig. 18) with the flange 2), the gasket 3) and the screws 4) supplied with the burner. > The gas solenoids must be as close as possible to the burner, to ensure that the gas reaches the combustion head within the safety time of 3s. > Ensure that the maximum pressure necessary for the burner is included in the calibration field of the pressure adjuster (col- our of the spring). WARNING See the accompanying instructions for the adju- stment of the gas train. 4.10 Gas feeding line 1 3 2 4 1 r i D722 r1 -rr JJ- — — , a, Fig. 18 It must be type- approved according to required standards and is supplied separately from the burner. Key (Fig. 19) 1 Gas input pipe 2 Manual valve 3 Pressure regulator 4 Minimum gas pressure switch 5 1st safety shut off valve 6 2nd safety shut off valve 7 Standard issue burner with flange gasket 8 Gas adjustment butterfly valve ( *) 9 Burner 10 Maximum gas pressure switch ( *) ( *) On the burner 10 6 5 3 2 GAS PILOT LINE 1 MAIN GAS LINE Fig. 19 20017786 22 Installation RIELLO 4.11 Gas pressure The adjacent diagrams are used to calculate manifold pressure taking into account combustion chamber pressure. Diagrams (Fig. 20) Gas manifold pressure measured at test point 1)(Fig. 21), with: > Combustion chamber at 0 "WC > Burner operating at maximum output > Gas ring adjusted as indicated in diagram (Fig. 16). Calculate the approximate maximum output of the burner as fol- lows: Subtract the combustion chamber pressure from the gas pres- sure measured at test point 1)(Fig. 21). Find the nearest pressure value to your result in the diagram for the burner in question. Read off the corresponding output on the left. Example - RS 100 /E: • Maximum output operation • Natural gas • Gas ring adjust as indicated in diagram (Fig. 16) • Gas pressure at test point 1)(Fig. 21) = 3.15 "WC • Pressure in combustion chamber = 1.18 "WC 3.15 - 1.18 = 1.97 "WC A maximum output of 2815 MBtu /hr shown diagram RS 100 /E corresponds to 1.97 "WC pressure. This value serves as a rough guide, the effective delivery must be measured at the gas meter. 0 a 4,0 3,2 2,4 1,6 0,8 MBtu /hr 2000 kW 500 600 - RS 70 /E 4,0 3,2 2,4 1,6 0,8 MBtu /hr 2500 kW 2500 3000 700 800 900 - RS 100 /E 3,2 3000 3500 4000 4500 800 1000 1200 0,8 MBtu /hr 4000 5000 kW 1000 1200 03123 1400 1600 1400 Fig. 20 Fig. 21 23 20017786 RIELLO Installation 4.12 Electrical wiring Notes on safety for the electrical wiring > The electrical wiring must be carried out with the electrical supply disconnected. > Electrical wiring must be carried out by qualified personnel and in compliance with the regulations currently in force in the country of destination. > The manufacturer declines all responsibility for modifications or connections different from those shown in the electri- cal layouts. > Check that the electrical supply of the burner corresponds to that shown on the identification label and in this manual. > Do not invert the neutral with the phase in the electrical supply line. Any inversion would cause a lockout due to firing failure. > The electrical safety of the device is obtained only when it is correctly connected to an efficient earthing system, made according to current standards. It is necessary to check this fundamental safety requirement. In the event of doubt, have the electrical system checked by qualified personnel. Do not use the fuel tubes as an earthing system for electrical devices. > The electrical system must be suitable for the maximum input power of the device,as indicated on the label and in the manual, checking in particular that the section of the cables is suitable for the input power of the device. > For the main power supply of the device from the electricity mains: > - do not use adapters, multiple sockets or extensions; ▪ - use an omnipolar switch with an opening of at least 1/8 inch (overvoltage category) between the contacts, as indi- cated by the current safety standards. > Do not touch the device with wet or damp body parts and /or in bare feet. > Do not pull the electric cables. DANGER 4.13 Electrical connections Before carrying out any maintenance, cleaning or checking opera- tions: DANGER DANGER disconnect the electrical supply from the burner by means of the main system switch; close the fuel interception tap; avoid condensate, ice and water leaks from forming. If the cover is still present, remove it and proceed with the electrical wiring. 413.1 Supply cables and external connections passage All the cables to be connected to the burner are fed through the grommets. See figure on the right. The use of the cable grommets can take various forms. By way of example we indicate the following mode (according to UL795): 1 Three phase power supply with 3/4 inch cable grommet 2 Available: single phase power supply and other devices with 1/2 inch cable grommet 3 Fan motor cable (used in the factory) 4 Available: consents /safety, other devices with 3/8 inch cable grommet 5 UV cable (used in the factory) 6 Available for ground terminals 7 Horn 8 High gas pressure switch cable (used in the factory) 9 Gas actuactor cable (used in the factory) 10 Air actuator cable (used in the factory) 11 Available: devices with 1/4 inch grommet WARNING The control panel is in compliance with UL508A. Fig. 22 20017786 24 Installation 4.14 Thermal relay calibration RIELLO Depending on the burner type, there are two different thermal re- 4.14.2 Electronic thermal relay lays: > To reset, in the case of an intervention of the thermal relay, — Electro- mechanical termal relay (used for single phase motors) press the button `RESET" (Fig. 25). — Electronic thermal relay (used for three phase motors) 4.14.1 Electro- mechanical thermal relay The electro- mechanical termal relay (Fig. 23) is used to avoid dam- age to the motor owing to a strong increase in absorption or the lack of a phase. For the calibration, refer to the table given in electrical layout. If the minimum value of the scale of the thermal relay is greater than the rating absorption of the motor, protection is still ensured. This arises when the power supply of the motor is 400V. > To reset, in the case of an intervention of the thermal relay, press the button `RESET" (Fig. 23). > The button "STOP" (Fig. 23) opens the NC (95 -96) contact and stops the motor. f�^ Fig. 23 > To test the thermal relay, insert a screwdriver in the window "TEST" (Fig. 24) and move it in the sense of the arrow (towards right). WARNING Fig. 25 There are two different solution to test the electronic thermal relay: > Device test (Fig. 26) Push slowly the button in the window with a little screwdriver. Automatic resetting can be dangerous. This action is not provided for the burner oper- > Contact test NC (95 -96) and NO (97- 98)(Fig. 27) ation. Insert in the window a little screwdriver and move it in the sense of the arrow. Fig. 26 Fig. 27 25 20017786 RIELLO Installation 4.15 Motor connection at 208 -230 or 460V WARNING: the motors, manufactured for 208 - 230/460 IE2 /Epact voltage, have a different connection than 1E1 motors, no more star /delta but star /double star. Please, pay attention to the indications in case of modification of voltage, maintenance, or substitution. 1E1 W2 U2 V2 0 0 0 U1 V1 W1 D3686 460V 208 -230V 4.16 Motor connection at 575V IE2 /Epact S8380 460V S8379 208 -230V Fig. 28 WARNING: the motors, manufactured for 575V IE2 /Epact voltage, have the same control box base of the 1E1 motors. Please pay attention to the indications in case of maintenance or substitution. S8382 W2 U2 V2 0 0 0 U1 V1 W1 575V 4.17 Reversible direction Fig. 29 WARNING: If it is necessary to reverse the direction then reverse the two main supply phases. For example: L1 with L2, there is not difference between 1E1 and IE2 /Epact. �� L1 L2 L3 I1 L2 L1 L3 Fig. 30 20017786 26 Start-up, calibration and operation of the burner RIELLO Start-up, calibration and operation of the burner 5.1 Notes on safety for the first start-up 5.2 Notes on safety for the first start-up The first start-up of the burner must be carried out by qualified personnel, as indicated in this manual and in compliance with the standards and regula- WARNING tions of the laws in force. 5.3 Operations before start-up WARNING Check the correct working of the adjustment, com- mand and safety devices. > Ensure that the gas supply company has carried out the sup- ply line vent operations, eliminating air or inert gases from the piping. > Slowly open the manual valves situated upstream of the gas train. > Adjust the minimum gas pressure (Fig. 36) switch to the start of the scale. > Adjust the maximum gas pressure switch (Fig. 35) to the end of the scale. > Adjust the air pressure switch (Fig. 33) to the start of the scale. > Purge the air from the gas line. Fit a U -type manometer (Fig. 31) to the gas pressure test point on the sleeve. The manometer readings are used to calculate the MAX. burner power using the diagram on page 23. Before starting up the burner it is good practice to adjust the gas train so that ignition takes place in conditions of maximum safe- ty, i.e. with gas delivery at the minimum. 5.4 Burner start-up Feed electricity to the burner via the disconnecting switch on the boiler panel. Close the thermostats /pressure switches and turn the switch of Fig. 32 to position "LOCAL ". Make sure that the lamps or testers connected to the solenoids, or indicator lights on the solenoids themselves, show that no voltage is present. If volt- age is present, stop the burner immediately and check the electrical wiring. For the start-up procedure and the parame- ters calibration, refer to the specific instruc- tion manual of the LMV37... electronic cam supplied with the burner. DANGER WARNING Fig. 32 27 20017786 RIELLO Start -up, calibration and operation of the burner 5.5 Final calibration of the pressure switches 5.5.1 Air pressure switch The air pressure switch is connected in differential (Fig. 34) and is activated by both the negative pressure of the air intake and the air pressure from the fan. Adjust the air pressure switch (Fig. 33) after having performed all other burner adjustments with the air pressure switch set to the min. of the scale. With the burner operating at low fire, adjust the pressure switch by slowly turning the relative knob clockwise until the burner locks out. Then turn the knob counter - clockwise about 20% of the set point and start-up the burner again to ensure the set point is correct. If the burner locks out again, turn the knob counter - clockwise a little bit more. 5.5.2 Maximum gas pressure switch Adjust the maximum gas pressure switch after having performed all other burner adjustments with the maximum gas pressure switch set to the end of the scale (Fig. 35). With the burner operating at MAX output, reduce the adjustment pressure by slowly turning the adjustment dial anticlockwise until the burner locks out. Then turn the dial clockwise by 0.8" WC and repeat burner firing. If the burner locks out again, turn the dial again clockwise by 0.4" WC. 5.5.3 Minimum gas pressure switch Adjust the minimum gas pressure switch after having performed all the other burner adjustments with the pressure switch set at the start of the scale (Fig. 36). With the burner operating at MAX output, increase adjustment pressure by slowly turning the relative dial clockwise until the burn- er locks out. Then turn the dial anti - clockwise by 0.8" WC and repeat burner starting to ensure it is uniform. If the burner locks out again, turn the dial anti - clockwise again by 0.4" WC. Fig. 33 Fig. 34 Fig. 35 Fig. 36 20017786 28 Start-up, calibration and operation of the burner RIELLO 5.6 Final checks (with the burner working) > Open the thermostat/pressure switch TL: > Open the thermostat/pressure switch TS: The burner must stop > Rotate the maximum gas pressure switch knob to the mini- mum end -of -scale position. > Rotate the air pressure switch knob to the maximum end -of- scale position. The burner must stop in lockout > Switch off the burner and disconnect the voltage. > Disconnect the minimum gas pressure switch connector. The burner must not start > Disconnect the UV flame sensor. The burner must stop in lockout due to firing failure > Make sure that the mechanical locking systems on the differ- ent adjustment devices are fully tightened. 29 20017786 RIELLO Maintenance , 6 Maintenance 6.1 Notes on safety for the maintenance The periodic maintenance is essential for the good operation, safety, yield and duration of the burner. It allows you to reduce consumption and polluting emissions and to keep the product in a reliable state over time. The maintenance interventions and the calibra- tion of the burner must only be carried out by qualified, authorised personnel, in accordance with the contents of this manual and in compli- ance with the standards and regulations of cur- rent laws. DANGER 6.2 Maintenance programme Before carrying out any maintenance, cleaning or checking op- erations: DANGER disconnect the electricity supply from the burner by means of the main switch of the system; close the fuel interception tap. 6.2.1 Maintenance frequency The gas combustion system should be checked at least once a year by a representative of the manufacturer or another specialised technician. 6.2.2 Checking and cleaning Combustion The optimum calibration of the burner requires an analysis of the flue gases. Significant differences with respect to the previous measurements indicate the points where more care should be exercised during maintenance. Gas leaks Make sure there are no gas leaks on the conduit between the gas meter and the burner. Gas filter Replace the gas filter when it is dirty. Flame inspection window Clean the glass of the flame inspection window. Combustion head Open the burner and make sure that all the components of the combustion head are: — undamaged — not deformed due to high temperature — free of ambient dirt or dust — free of rusted materials — adequately positioned Make sure that the gas outlet holes for the start -up, on the com- bustion head distributor, are free of dirt or rust deposits. In case of doubt, disassemble the elbow 5)(Fig. 37). Combustion Adjust the burner if the combustion values found at the begin- ning of the operation do not comply with the regulations in force or, at any rate, do not produce good combustion. Use the appropriate card to record the new combustion values; they will be useful for subsequent controls. 20017786 30 Maintenance RIELLO 6.3 Opening the burner DANGER Disconnect the electrical supply from the bur- ner. In order to open the burner, proceed as follows: > loosen the 4 screws 1) (Fig. 37) and remove the hood 2); > install the 2 extensions 9) on the guides 4) and re -screw the screws 8)(only for long head version); 6.4 Closing the burner > remove the screws 3) and pull back the burner on the guides 4) of about 4 "; > disconnect the electrode lead, then unthread the burner com- pletely from the guides; > remove the screw 6) and extract the inner part 5) of the head. In order to close the burner, re- install all components with re- verse procedure: > remove the 2 extensions 9) and re -screw the screws 8) on the guides 4) ; > push the burner up to approximately 4" from the pipe cou- pling; > reinsert the electrode lead and slide the burner as far as the stop. > fix the screws 3) to secure the burner to the combustion head; > fix the 4 screws 1) to install the hood 2). Connect the electrical supply from the burner. Fig. 37 31 20017786 w 33 52 51 54 63 20 sped weds - xipueddy s sped ands - xipueddy Appendix - Spare parts N. - _ 2 • 3 4 6 , 7 8 ! 9 10 10 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 7_24_ 25 26 27 28 28 28 29 I 30 30 31 - . 32 33 33 34 35 35 35 36 36 • 37 37 CODE 20008587 3013922 3013924 3013923 3013925 3013095 20010967 20010968 - 3012956 3012973 3012974 20026312 20010972 20031413 3012948 3012841 3003949 3013929 3013930 3003952 20008601 20028310 3003763 3003891 3012013 3003481 3003396 20010963 3012939 3012403 3012940 3012012 3012941 3012943 20010962 3012393 3012960 3013128 3014081 3012033 3012024 3012025 - 361202 6- -- 3012027 - 3012028 3012029 0 U) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • u 0 0 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • S • • • • • • • • • - • • • • • • • • ■ • • • • • ^ • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • DESCRIPTION COVER INSPECTION WINDOW SEAL PUSH-BUTTON VIEWING PoRT 6641■IEcio=f-- DISPLAY ELECTRONIC CAM TRANSFORMER PILOT TUBE PILOT TUBE OVERLOAD RWF40 ASSEMBLY ALARM AIR PRESSURE SWITCH BASE GRID AIR DAMPER ASSEMBLY AIR INTAKE SOUND DAMPING StRybnidroh--- CONTACTOR INSPECTION WINDOW CONNECTOR . _ BAR SCREW - - UV PROBE SWITCH FAN FAN FAN HALF-SHELL MOTOR MOTOR BUTTON ELECTRODE CONNECTION ELECTRODE ELECTRODE BRACKET TUBE TUBE DISC DISC GAS HEAD GAS HEAD B ! - TI _41 B C C C C C A A A RI ELLO 33 20017786 RIELLO Appendix - Spare parts N. 37 38 38 38 39 39 40- 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 - 50 50 51 51 52 X52 52 53 54 `'' 55 56 57 58 59 60 1-61 62 63 63 64 65 CODE 3012030 3012031 3012033 3012035 3012967 3012968 3003409 3012042 3012014 3014080 3012969 3013055 3007891 3012049 3012735 3003974 3012051 3003979 3012053�V 3003983 3003984 3003987 3012055 3012057 3014079 _. 3003322 3005482 3012971 3013263 3013937 3013938 3013939 20010969 3003996 3003975 3003976 20010971 3006211 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • w 0 0 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • w 0 M v/ re • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ._. • • DESCRIPTION GAS HEAD INTERIOR TUBE INTERIOR TUBE INTERIOR TUBE EXTERIOR TUBE EXTERIOR TUBE SUPPORT ELBOW FERRULE BRACKET GAS PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR SEAL SCREW SEAL CONTROL DEVICE SQUARE SQUARE SQUARE SHUTTER SHUTTER END CONE END CONE END CONE SPACER CONNECTOR SEAL FLANGE AND ELBOW MANIFOLD HUB DISC INDEX RELAY PLUG FRONT FRONT ASSEMBLY CONNECTORS FUSE ADVISED PARTS A = Spare parts for minimum fittings A +B = Spare parts for basic safety fittings A +B +C = Spare parts for extended safety fittings 20017786 34 Appendix - Accessories RIELLO Appendix - Accessories Gas train according to UL Standards WARNING The installer is responsible for the supply and instal- lation of any required safety device(s) not indicated in this manual. 35 20017786 RIELLO Appendix - Burner start up report C Appendix - Burner start up report Model number: Project name: Installing contractor: Serial number: Start-up date: Phone number: Model number: Project name: Installing contractor: Serial number: Start -up date: Phone number: GAS OPERATION Gas Supply Pressure: CO2: Low Fire High Fire Main Power Supply: 02: Low Fire High Fire Control Power Supply: CO: Low Fire High Fire Burner Firing Rate: NOx: Low Fire High Fire Manifold Pressure: Net Stack Temp - Low Fire: High Fire Pilot Flame Signal: Comb. Efficiency - Low Fire: High Fire Low Fire Flame Signal: Overfire Draft: High Fire Flame Signal: CONTROL SETTINGS Operating Setpoint: Low Oil Pressure: High Limit Setpoint: High Oil Pressure: Flame Safeguard Model Number: High Gas Pressure: Modulating Signal Type: Low Gas Pressure: 20017786 36 RIELLO RIELLO S.p.A. 1 -37045 Legnago (VR) Tel.: +39.0442.630111 http: // www.riello.it httpJ/ www.rielloburners.com RIELLO RIELLO BURNERS NORTH AMERICA 35 Pond Park Road 1- 800 -4- RIELLO 2165 Meadowpine Blvd Hingham, Massachusetts, 1- 800 - 474 -3556 Mississauga, Ontario U.S.A. 02043 Canada L5N 6H6 http://www.riello-burners.com Subject to modifications PERMIT CO COPY PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: M12 -159 DATE: 11 -21 -12 PROJECT NAME: CITY OF TUKWILA - POOL SITE ADDRESS: 4414 S 144 ST Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # X Response to Correction Letter # 2 Revision # After Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: -U.- uilding Division Public Works n Fire Prevention Structural Planning Division ❑ Permit Coordinator I DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) DUE DATE: 11 -27 -12 Complete Incomplete n Not Applicable Comments: Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: a Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route Structural Review Required ❑ No further Review Required n REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 12 -25 -12 Approved n Approved with Conditions INK Not Approved (attach comments) ❑ Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: Documents/routing slip.doc 2-28-02 PERMIT COORD COPt PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: M12 -159 DATE: 11/13/12 PROJECT NAME: CITY OF TUKWILA POOL SITE ADDRESS: 4414 S 144 ST Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Response to Incomplete Letter # Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: (!te$A,S Building Division Public Works Fire Prevention Structural Planning Division ❑ Permit Coordinator ❑ DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) DUE DATE: 11/15/12 Complete Incomplete ❑ Not Applicable Comments: Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: TUESITHURS ROUTING: Please Route K, Structural Review Required ❑ No further Review Required ❑ REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 12/13/12 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions ❑ Not Approved (attach comments) �] Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only � CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: ` t'�, j -- (0).. Departments issued corrections: Bldg Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: • Mitt CO PLAN REVIE 8?J7ING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: M12 -159 DATE: 10 -10 -12 PROJECT NAME: CITY OF TUKWILA - POOL SITE ADDRESS: 4414 S 144 ST X Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued DEEPA TMENTS: VU (��/v11 a <<' ®2' 0-- Building Division Public Works kOili't° At^ Fire Preve tion Structural Planning Division ❑ Permit Coordinator DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) DUE DATE: 10-11-12 Complete Incomplete ❑ Not Applicable ❑ Comments: Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route Structural Review Required ❑ No further Review Required ❑ REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved Notation: Approved with Conditions DUE DATE: 11 -08-12 Not Approved (attach comments) El REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Documents /routing slip.doc 2 -28 -02 Bldg Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: AMn, • City of Tukwila REVISION SUBMITTAL Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Web site: http: / /www.TukwilaWA.gov Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: 11/21/2012 Plan Check/Permit Number: M12 -159 Response to Incomplete Letter # ✓ Response to Correction Letter # 2 Revision # after Permit is Issued Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: City of Tukwila - Pool Project Address: 4414 S 144 St Contact Person: Dave Robinaugh Summary of Revision: See attached letter. Phone Number: (206) 832 -8352 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA NOV 2120121 PERMIT CENTER Sheet Number(s): M2.0, M2.1, M3.0, M3.1, M5.0, M5.1, M6.0, M7.0, M7.1 "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including d evisio Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: \L IN—Entered in Permits Plus on . _ (H Z H:\Applications \Forms - Applications On Line\2010 Applications \7 -2010 - Revision Submittal.doc Revised: May 2011 • • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us REVISION SUBMITTAL Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: 1 S 0o■ 2.O1Z Plan Check/Permit Number: MI 2-159 ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # • Response to Correction Letter # 1 ❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner RECEIVED "'iv t1R ri ILIA NOV 13 2012 ''ERMIT CENTER Project Name: City of Tukwila - Pool Project Address: 4414 S 144 Street Contact Person: bye_ 0661 ykath. Phone Number: 20(0-1-14 —514 Summary of Revision: SQ e_ atAAA. -ci loci• - - f _ 04444 Sheet Number(s): t -42.c7 11-42..1 M s. c) t t-1 3. t ►�6.0 et% ,..tc,.a1,4-4.v r�a.l "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: J[IjIVV Entered in Permits Plus on \applications \forms- applications on line \revision submittal Created: 8 -13 -2004 Revised: 1 -2009 For Th instry Ile 01 Your Building 21 November 2012 • Re: Tukwila Building Division Dear Dave Larson, Senior Plan Examiner: McKinstry and its consultants have reviewed the Code Review comments issued on 16 November 2012 and offer the following responses. Please also see the revised drawings associated with the revisions mentioned below. 1. Full size stamped replacement pages have been provided. 2. Plans have been updated to show necessary revisions. • 3. Per the attached email from vendor, ducted combustion air is an acceptable installation method. The controls suggestions noted in the review memo are not required. Sincerely, David Robinaugh McKinstry Co Enclosures CORRECTION LTR #_Z._, Mi159 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA NOV 2 1 2012 PERMIT CENTER • • Tukwila Building Division Dave Larson, Senior Plan Examiner Building Division Review Memo #2 Date: November 16, 2012 Project Name: City of Tukwila Pool Permit # M12 -159 Plan Review: Dave Larson, Senior Plans Examiner The Building Division conducted a plan review on the subject permit application. Please address the following comments in an itemized format with revised plans, specifications and /or other applicable documentation. (GENERAL NOTE) PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size 11x17 to maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size). (If applicable) Structural Drawings and structural calculation sheets shall be stamped and signed. 1. The plans submitted in response to my first review memo are half size and were not stamped by the engineer of record. The original plans were full size and included the stamp. Please provide full size stamped replacement pages. 2. The installation instructions for the hot water tank require 4 inch vent and combustion air ducts when the equivalent length is 70 feet or less. See Pipe Size Requirements on page 22. The plans show 6 inch pipe and the termination method is still not clear. 3. The specs for the boiler bumer do not show how a combustion air duct is attached. Is the new bumer a direct vent appliance? If not, the exhaust fan and intake louvers may be the source for combustion air and the powered exhaust would need to be interlocked with the boiler to shut it down if the fan fails. It was stated that direct venting was required to prevent early deterioration of the equipment by corrosion resulting from the contaminated pool air. Please provide manufacturer's specs for connection of the proposed combustion air duct to the new burner. Should there be questions conceming the above information please contact the Building Division at 206 -431 -3670. • Page 1 Arliss Merrell • • From: Matt Fitzgibbons [mfitzgibbons @proctorsales.com] Sent: Wednesday, August 01, 2012 3:54 PM To: Arliss Merrell Subject: RE: Tukwila pool burner upgrade Attachments: RS 70- 100 -130_M 2915993 -3.pdf Arliss, You can directly duct the combustion air to this burner. I have attached the o &M for you as well. Let me know if you need anything else. 1 PROCTOR SALES INC www.gopsi.com Matt Fitzgibbons Principal mfitz@proctorsales.com Direct: 425 - 275 -0779 Cell: 425 - 233 -2777 Fax: 425 - 771 -2590 From: Arliss Merrell [mailto:arlissm(aMcKinstry.com] Sent: Wednesday, August 01, 2012 2:43 PM To: mfitz(@proctorsales.com Subject: Tukwila pool burner upgrade Matt, I was wondering if the burner scoped out during development can have combustion air directly ducted to it. Also, is there a cut sheet for this piece of equipment? Thanks for your time. Arliss Merrell Systems Engineer p 206.832.8380 1 f 206.658.4435 McKinstry Consulting 1 Construction 1 Energy 1 Facility Services www.mckinstry.com This email is the property of McKinstry or one of its affiliates and may contain confidential and/or privileged information. If you are not the intended recipient or have received this e -mail in error please notify the sender immediately and delete this e-mail. Any unauthorized copying, disclosure or distribution of the material in this e -mail is strictly forbidden. 1 City Tukwila • Jim Haggerton, Mayor r. = Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director .t oa November 19, 2012 Dave Robinaugh 5005 Third Ave S Seattle, WA 98134 RE: Correction Letter #2 Mechanical Permit Application Number M12 -159 City of Tukwila - Pool — 4414 S 144 St Dear Mr. Robinaugh, This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the Building Department. At this time the Fire Department has no comments. Building Department: Dave Larson at 206 431 -3678 if you have questions regarding the attached comments. Please address the attached comments in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and /or other documentation. The City requires that two (2) sets of revised plans, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections /revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, I can be reached at (206) 431 -3670. Sincerely, Bill Rambo Permit Technician File No. M12-159 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone 206 - 431 -3670 • Fax 206 - 431 -3665 • Tukwila Building Division Dave Larson, Senior Plan Examiner Building Division Review Memo #2 Date: November 16, 2012 Project Name: City of Tukwila Pool Permit # M12 -159 Plan Review: Dave Larson, Senior Plans Examiner The Building Division conducted a plan review on the subject permit application. Please address the following comments in an itemized format with revised plans, specifications and/or other applicable documentation. (GENERAL NOTE) PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size 11x17 to maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size). (If applicable) Structural Drawings and structural calculation sheets shall be stamped and signed. 1. The plans submitted in response to my first review memo are half size and were not stamped by the engineer of record. The original plans were full size and included the stamp. Please provide full size stamped replacement pages. 2. The installation instructions for the hot water tank require 4 inch vent and combustion air ducts when the equivalent length is 70 feet or less. See Pipe Size Requirements on page 22. The plans show 6 inch pipe and the termination method is still not clear. 3. The specs for the boiler bumer do not show how a combustion air duct is attached. Is the new burner a direct vent appliance? If not, the exhaust fan and intake louvers may be the source for combustion air and the powered exhaust would need to be interlocked with the boiler to shut it down if the fan fails. It was stated that direct venting was required to prevent early deterioration of the equipment by corrosion resulting from the contaminated pool air. Please provide manufacturer's specs for connection of the proposed combustion air duct to the new burner. Should there be questions concerning the above information please contact the Building Division at 206 - 431 -3670. For rb instry !Id 01 Your Bolldlog 12 November 2012 • • Re: Tukwila Building Division Dear Dave Larson, Senior Plan Examiner: McKinstry and its consultants have reviewed the Code Review comments issued on 5 November 2012 and offer the following responses. Please also see the revised drawings associated with the revisions mentioned below. 1. Details for the DHW heater and boiler burner have been updated to match manufacturer's installation requirements. See attached, revised drawings. 2. The mechanical room exhaust fan work has been added to the drawings. See attached, revised drawings. 3. L &I permits will be secured for work associated with the boiler and hot water tank. Sincerely, David Robinaugh McKinstry Co Enclosures REC 6vED CITY OF TWO/1,11_A NOV 13 2012 PERMIT CENTER November 5, 2012 Dave Robinaugh 5005 Third Ave S Seattle, WA 98134 City f Tukwila Jim Haggerton, Mayor Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director RE: Correction Letter #1 Mechanical Permit Application Number M12 -159 City of Tukwila - Pool — 4414 S 144 St Dear Mr. Robinaugh, This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the Building Department. At this time the Fire Department has no comments. Building Department: Dave Larson at 206 431 -3678 if you have questions regarding the attached comments. Please address the attached comments in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and /or other documentation. The City requires that two (2) sets of revised plans, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections /revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, I can be reached at (206) 431 -3670. Sincerely, fer Marshall it Technician File No. M12-159 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone 206 - 431 -3670 • Fax 206 - 431 -3665 Tukwila Building Division Dave Larson, Senior Plan Examiner Building Division Review Memo Date: November 2, 2012 Project Name: City of Tukwila Pool Permit # M12 -159 Plan Review: Dave Larson, Senior Plans Examiner The Building Division conducted a plan review on the subject permit application. Please address the following comrnents in an itemized format with revised plans, specifications and/or other applicable documentation. (GENERAL NOTE) PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size 11x17 to maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size). (If applicable) Structural Drawings and structural calculation sheets shall be stamped and signed. 1. The installation instructions and manufacturers specifications for the hot water tank and boiler burner that you emailed to me will need to be brought in with your response to this review memo. In the installation manual for the hot water tank it states that when a 6 inch flue or combustion air duct is required, factory terminations must be used. Detail 3 on sheet M5.1 shows a PVC vent terminating with what appears to be a listed B- vent cap. Extending a PVC vent up to a point above the roof and on the outside wall surface does not appear to be one of the manufacturers allowed installation methods. PVC pipe and listed B -Vent caps don't typically go together. The long exterior run of PVC may not weather well. Details will need to match manufacturer's installation requirements. 2. The mechanical room exhaust fan is shown as an add alternate. Per discussion with the Mechanical Engineer this exhaust fan will be replaced or repaired as it is still needed. The make -up air openings in the mechanical room may need to remain partially open to provide make -up air for the exhaust fan. The required amount of opening to remain will need to be calculated by the engineer and shown on the plans. Please remove "add alternate" notes on the plan regarding this exhaust. 3. Please note L & I permits are required for the boiler and hot water tank. Should there be questions concerning the above information please contact the Building Division at 206 -431 -3670. Contractors or Tradespeople Peter Friendly Page • General /Specialty Contractor A business registered as a construction contractor with L &I to perform construction work within the scope of its specialty. A General or Specialty construction Contractor must maintain a surety bond or assignment of account and carry general liability insurance. Business and Licensing Information Name MCKINSTRY CO LLC UBI No. 602569922 Phone 2067623311 Status Active Address Po Box 24567 License No. MCKINCL942DW Suite /Apt. License Type Construction Contractor City Seattle Effective Date 3/16/2006 State WA Expiration Date 3/16/2014 Zip 98134 Suspend Date County King Specialty 1 General Business Type Limited Liability Company Specialty 2 Unused Parent Company Other Associated Licenses License Name Type Specialty 1 Specialty 2 Effective Date Expiration Date Status LYDIGML901JLLYDIG+ MCKINSTRY LLC Construction Contractor General Unused 4/13/2010 4/13/2014 Active WESTVI.121RF WESTVENT INC Construction Contractor General Unused 12/6/1988 9/1/1994 Archived MCKIN "372ND MCKINSTRY CO Construction Contractor General Unused 8/20/1963 1/2/2008 Re Licensed Business Owner Information Name Role Effective Date Expiration Date PEDERSEN, JAMIE D Agent 03/16/2006 Bond Amount ALLEN, DEAN CHARLES Partner /Member 03/16/2006 929519469 MOORE, DOUGLAS JAMES Partner /Member 03/16/2006 ALLEN, DAVID EDWARD Partner /Member 03/16/2006 WESTERN SURETY CO TEPLICKY, JOSEPH WILLIAM Partner /Member 03/16/2006 Bond Information Page 1 of 2 Bond Bond Company Name Bond Account Number Effective Date Expiration Date Cancel Date Impaired Date Bond Amount Received Date 3 Western Surety Co 929519469 03/01/2011 Until Cancelled 01/23/2012 $12,000.00 02/24 /2011 2 WESTERN SURETY CO 929511574 09/09/2010 Until Cancelled $12,000.00 09/02 /2010 1 TRAVELERS CAS & SURETY CO 104702039 01/03/2006 Until Cancelled 03/01/2011 $12,000.0003/16 /2006 Assignment of Savings Information No records found for the previous 6 year period • Insurance Information Insurance Company Name Policy Number Effective Date Expiration Date Cancel Date Impaired Date Amount Received Date 5 Zurich American Ins Co GLA-3999903 01/31/2012 01/31/2013 $2,000,000.00 12/16/2011 4 ZURICH AMERICAN INS CO GLA3999903 01/31/2011 01/31/2012 $2,000,000.00 12 /20/2010 3 ZURICH AMERICAN INS CO CP0399990301 01/31/2009 01/31/2011 $2,000,000.00 12/07/2009 2 ZURICH AMERICAN INS CO CP03999903 01/31/2008 01/31/2009 $2,000,000.00 01/31/2008 1 DTC052D7193C0F07 01/31/2006 01/31/2009 $1,000,000.00 01/08/2008 https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/bbip/Print.aspx 12/06/2012 12x12 SL ABBREVIATIONS GENERAL AD ADJ AFF AFG Ac AMP ARCH AUTO AUX BD BHP BLDG BOP BOT es BTU BTUH ACCESS DOOR ADJUSTABLE ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR ABOVE FINISHED GRADE ABOVE GROUND AMPERE ARCHITECT; ARCHITECTURAL AUTOMATIC AUXILIARY BOARD BRAKE HORSEPOWER BUILDING BOTTOM OF PIPE BOTTOM BIRD SCREEN BRITISH THERMAL UNIT BRITISH THERMAL UNITS PER HOUR CA COMPRESSED AIR CAB CABINET COND CONDENSATE C/L CENTER UNE CLG CEILING CFM CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE CLG CEIUNG CO CARBON MONOXIDE CO2 CARBON DIOXIDE COL COLUMN CONC CONCRETE COND CONDENSER; CONDENSATE CONN CONNECT; CONNECTION CONSTR CONSTRUCTION CONTR CONTRACTOR CTL CONTROL DEF DETAIL DIA DIAMETER DIAG DIM DISCH DN DN DS DWDI DWG DWV (E) EA EL EEC ELEV EP EQUIP ESP EXH EXIST (F) FA FCO FDC FDN FIG FIN FO FLEX FLG O FP FPM FTG TURN GA GALV GC GEN GPM GWB DIAGONAL DIMENSION DISCHARGE DMSION DOWN DISCONNECT SWITCH; DOOR SWITCH DOUBLE WIDTH, DOUBLE INLET DRAWING DRAIN, WASTE, VENT EXISTING EACH ELECTRICAL CONTACTOR; END CAP ELEVATION ELECTRICAL ELEVATION ELECTRICAL PANEL; END PLUG EQUIPMENT EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE OXHAUST EXISTING FUTURE FAHRENHEIT FIRE ALARM FLOOR CLEANOUT FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION FOUNDATION FIGURE FINISH FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER FLEXIBLE RANGE FLOOR FUEL 01 FIRE PROTECTION FEET PER MINUTE FOOT; FEET FOOTING FURNISH GAGE GALVANIZED GENERAL CONTRACTOR GENERATOR GALLONS PER MINUTE GYPSUM WALL BOARD H HIGH HP HORSEPOWER; HIGH PRESSURE HR HEATING RETURN HS HEATING SUPPLY HTG HEATING HTR HEATER ID INSIDE DIAMETER /DIMENSION LAB LABORATORY LF UNEAL FOOT MAU MAX MBH MED MEZZ MFR MH MIN MISC MID NC NEG NIC NO NOM NTS OA OC OD OVHD POC PREUM PSI PSIG QTY R RAD REQD RPM SECT SF SIM SPEC SQ STD STRUC MAKE —UP AIR UNIT MAXIMUM 1000 BRITISH THERMAL UNITS PER HOUR MEDIUM MEZZANINE MANUFACTURER MANHOLE MINIMUM; MINUTE(S) MISCELLANEOUS MOUNTED NOT APPUCABLE NORMALLY CLOSED NEGATIVE NOT IN CONTRACT NORMALLY OPEN; NUMBER NOMINAL NOT TO SCALE OVERALL ON CENTER OUTSIDE DIAMETER OVERHEAD POINT OF CONNECTION PRELIMINARY POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH GAUGE QUANTITY RELOCATED RADIUS REQUIRED REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE SECTION SQUARE FOOT SIMILAR SPECIFICATION SQUARE STANDARD STRUCTURAL 113D TOC TOS TYP UG UNO VAV VD VER VFD VSD w/ W/O HVAC AC ACT AHU BDD B0D CC CRU CT CV DB DIFF DMPR EAT EF FCU FD FOP FTU GRD HC HR FNAC TO BE DETERMINED TENANT IMPROVEMENTS TOP OF CONCRETE TOP OF STEEL TYPICAL UNDERGROUND UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE VARIABLE AIR VOLUME VOLUME DAMPER VVARIIABBLE FREQUENCY DRIVE VARIABLE SPEED DRNE WITH WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE AIR HANDLING UNIT BACKDRAFT DAMPER BOTTOM OF DUCT C00UNG COIL COMPUTER ROOM UNIT COOLING TOWER CONSTANT VOLUME DRY BULB DIFFUSER DAMPER EXHAUST AIR ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE EGGCRATE GRILLE EXHAUST FAN FAN COIL UNIT FIRE DAMPER FREQUENCY MODULATION FIRE PROTECTION; FAN POWERED FAN TERMINAL UNIT GRILLE, REGISTER, DIFFUSER HEATING COIL HEATING RETURN HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING LAT LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE LD LINEAR DIFFUSER MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR MECH MECHANICAL MOD MOTOR OPERATED DAMPER; MODULATING MUA MAKE UP AIR OA OVERALL; OUTSIDE AIR OBD OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER RA RAT RCP RTU SA SAT SD SF S /FD SL SLSM SM SP TDH TG TOD TSP UH WB WC WG RETURN AIR RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE REFLECTED CEIUNG PLAN ROOF TOP UNIT SUPPLY AIR SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE SMOKE DAMPER SUPPLY FAN SMOKE FIRE DAMPER SOUND UNED SOUND UNED SHEET METAL SHEET METAL STATIC PRESSURE TOTAL DYNAMIC HEAD TRANSFER GRILLE TOP OF DUCT TOTAL STATIC PRESSURE UNIT HEATER WET BULB WATER COLUMN WATER GAUGE PLUMBING AD AREA DRAIN CO DCW DHW DHWC DSP EWC FD 1E IN WC IW NPCW ORL PD PERF PLBG PRV RPBP SD SS VTR WC WH WSP CLEAN OUT; CARBON MONOXIDE_ DOMESTIC COLD WATER DOMESTIC HOT WATER DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATION DRY STANDPIPE ELECTRICAL WATER COOLER FLOOR DRAIN INVERT ELEVATION INCHES WATER COLUMN IONIZED WATER; INDIRECT WASTE NON POTABLE COLD WATER OVERFLOW RAINWATER LEADER PLANTER DRAIN; PRESSURE DROP PERFORATED PLUMBING PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENiER STORM DRAIN SANITARY SEWER VENT THROUGH ROOF WASTE WATER CLOSET WATER HEATER WET STANDPIPE PIPING BP BACKFLOW PREVENIER CD CHW CHR CHS CT EWT FHV LWF TOP CONDENSATE DRAIN CHILLED WATER CHILLED WATER RETURN CHILLED WATER SUPPLY CONICAL TEE ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE ARE HOSE VALVE LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE TOP OF PIPE PIPING IDENTIFICATION HVAC A COND —CDR - CDS CHS —CHR - G -HR- HS RL RS PLUMBING ST GRW GAW ID LRR NP ORL PW PSD RWL —RWL- S� 5S —UD- PIPING FITTINGS t�1 IC1I III IOt I�L O ,tD IT I$t itt rr i+t VALVES tla' till A i6i —�v PIPING ACCESSORIES t► 4"" 44Av 4""" 0 .!4 - n n n n n n n�� WATTS%LF RPBP Y 0 0 0 MM HM A COND CDR CDS CHS CHR G HR HS RL RS ST CW GRW GAW HW HWC ID IRR NPCW ORL PW PSD RWL RWL SD 55 UD V W W COMPRESSED AIR PIPE CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE CONDENSER WATER RETURN PIPE CONDENSER WATER SUPPLY PIPE CHILLED WATER SUPPLY PIPE CHILLED WATER RETURN PIPE NATURAL GAS PIPE HEATING WATER RETURN PIPE HEATING WATER SUPPLY PIPE REFRIGERANT LIQUID PIPE REFRIGERANT SUCTION PIPE STEAM SUPPLY COLD WATER PIPE (POTABLE) GREASE WASTE GARAGE WASTE HOT WATER PIPE (POTABLE) HOT WATER CIRCULATING (POTABLE) INDIRECT DRAIN IRRIGATION WATER PIPE NON — POTABLE CW PIPE OVERFLOW RAINWATER LEADER PUMPED WASTE PUMPED STORM DRAIN RAINWATER LEADER BELOW GRADE RAINWATER LEADER STORM DRAIN PIPE SANITARY SEWER ,PIPE (SITE) UNDERDRAIN PIPE VENT PIPE (SANITARY) WASTE PIPE WASTE PIPE BELOW GROUND TEE W /PIPE UP TEE DOWN W/E BOW TEE UP W/ ELBOW TEE UP TEE DOWN 90' ELBOW UP 90' ELBOW DN CAP UNION FLANGE FLEX HOSE CONNECTION DOUBLE BELLOWS FLEX CONNECTION SINGLE BELLOWS FLEX CONNECTION FLOW ARROW CONCENTRIC REDUCER ECCENTRIC REDUCER SLOPE SYMBOL BREAK OR CONTNUATION SYMBOL DOWN SPOUT NOZZLE CLEANOUT 45 ELBOW 45 ELBOW 90' ELBOW 90' ELBOW CROSS TEE WYE TAP HOSE CONNECTION MOTORIZED 2 —WAY VALVE MOTORIZED 3 —WAY VALVE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE CONTROL VALVE RELIEF VALVE BALL VALVE 3 —WAY GATE VALVE BUTTERFLY VALVE DIAPHRAGM VAVLE CHECK VALVE NEEDLE VALVE GLOBE VALVE GLOBE VALVE ANGLE GLOBE VALVE 3 —WAY GATE VALVE PLUG VALVE BALANCING VALVE HOSE BIBB PUMP MANUAL AIR VENT AUTOMATIC AIR VENT HIGH CAPACITY AIR VENT SHOCK ARRESTOR FLOW SWITCH VACUUM BREAKER PRESSURE GAUGE TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEMPERATURE INDICATOR AUTO FLOW VALVE FLOW METER Y STRAINER Y STRAINER W/ BALI. VALVE PIPE SLEEVE STEAM TRAP PETES PLUG HEAT TRACING SUCTION DIFFUSER W/ STRAINER REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTOR FUNNEL DRAIN FLOOR DRAIN ROOF DRAIN ROOF OVERFLOW DRAIN FLOOR SINK DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES Cam! = 1I41v- EEJ=1. T >c� 141 rAI LJ AD 12x12 2 "SL D --s .LF DUCTWORK RECTANGULAR DUCT RECTANGULAR DUCT RECTANGULAR DUCT RECTANGULAR DUCT BIRDSCREEN OR SCREENED OPENING SUPPLY GRILLE RETURN OR EXHAUST GRILLE VOLUME DAMPER MOTOR OPERATED DAMPER AIRFLOW MONITOR REMOTELY OPERATED VOLUME DAMPER (YOUNG REGULATOR OR APPROVED) BACK DRAFT DAMPER COORDINATE WITH CEILING APPURTENANCES. FLEX CONNECTION FIRE DAMPER THROUGH WALL FIRE DAMPER THROUGH FLOOR FIRE /SMOKE DAMPER THROUGH WALL FIRE /SMOKE DAMPER THROUGH FLOOR ACCESS DOORS 1" ACOUSTICALLY UNED DUCT 2" ACOUSTICALLY LINED DUCT CHANGE OF ELEVATION RISE(R) DROP(D) TRANSITION TURNING VANES SMOKE DETECTOR RETURN / EXHAUST / OUTSIDE AIR SUPPLY / TRANSFER AIR TERMINAL UNITS — SEE SCHEDULE FOR TYPE SUPPLY AIR DUCT TURNING UP OR TOWARD SUPPLY AIR DUCT TURNING DOWN OR AWAY EXHAUST OR RETURN AIR DUCT TURNING UP OR TOWARD EXHAUST OR RETURN AIR DUCT TURNING DOWN OR AWAY ROUND DUCT TURNING UP OR TOWARD e"-----72) ROUND DUCT TURNING DOWN OR AWAY LED P MOM OVAL DUCT TURNING UP OR T0W . Eft a40. Phet r''v",S w approval is subs to errors and on isSIvrs.PA OVAL DUCT • � ( of CGf Structi0f documents dOQS not aUthO 2' 'F TURNING DO , c aw�ro11 .3 c ly adopted code or ordinance. Receipts ai q3prov d Field Copy and is acknowledged: FLEXIBLE DUCT 1110) Imibume y QPY GRILLE/REGISTER /DIFFUSER DOUBLE LINE 1 V CEILING SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER CEILING SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER (SHOWN WITH THROW ARROWS) CEIUNG RETURN, EXHAUST OR TRANSFER AIR GRILLE UNEAR DIFFUSER (CEILING) UNEAR DIFFUSER (WALL) LOUVER PLAN VIEW LOUVER (ELEVATION VIEW) CONTROLS LEGEND DEVICE /POINT NUMBER A ALARM ADS . AIR DIRT SEPARATOR AMS AIR FLOW MEASURING STATION ATB AIR TERMINAL BOX CO CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR CO2 CARBON DIOXIDE CO CARBON MONOXIDE CPA .CONTROL POINT ADJUSTMENT CS CURRENT SENSING RELAY ® DDC CONTROL RELAY DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR DPS DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR DS DOOR SENSOR 5D DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR DSD DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR EC ELECTRIC HEATING COIL EA EXHAUST AIR EAV EXHAUST AIR VALVE EF EXHAUST FAN E/P ELECTRONIC TO PNEUMATIC SIGNAL CONVERSION. C51 FAN OR PUMP FINAL FILTER FREEZE STAT FUME HOOD VALVE HUMIDITY SENSOR HUMIDITY SENSOR HIGH LIMIT LOW UMIT MIXED AIR MODULATING SIGNAL MOTOR OPERATED DAMPER MOTOR OPERATED CONTROL VALVE MOTOR STARTER NORMALLY CLOSED NORMALLY OPEN OCCUPANCY SENSOR . OA OUTSIDE AIR Q/\/t PNEUMATIC OPERATED DAMPER VICINITY MAP FZ FHN H HL LL MA MOD OR o/\7� r- D�4 NC NO OS �9 . 0�4 HVAC - ANNOTATION VAV BOX TAG 1 -23 S-C8-09-A 000 000 S -C8 -09 A 1 12-1 to' ILL RA Date: S SA SAV S5 SP City Of 'flskwila BUILDING DIVISION FLOOR # - DISCRETE BOX 1 SEE BELOW PRIMARY CFM FAN CFM ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES OF REQD) KW OF AUX. HEAT. VAV BOX SIZE; SEE SCHED. PARALLEL FAN PPOWERED BOXS)(P) (D TS VA) VFD PNEUMATIC OPERATED CONTROL VALVE PRIMARY AIR PRE ALTER PRESSURE SENSOR PUMP RETURN AIR STATUS SUPPLY AIR SUPPLY AIR VALVE START /STOP SASH POSMON SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENOR VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE S PARA'E ! REOUIRED a ❑MQ umbi0 P1n City of Tut 3$ EPEE BUILDING DlVI LEGAL DESCRIPTION W 190 FT OF E 565 FT OF S 320 FT OF SW 1/4 OF SE 1/4 LESS CO 'RD DRAWING INDEX SHEET NUMBER SHEET TITLE MO.0 MECHANICAL LEGEND MO.1 GENERAL NOTES AND BASIS OF DESIGN MD2.0 FLOOR PLAN - MECHANICAL DEMO M2.0 FLOOR PLAN - MECHANICAL M2.1 ROOF PLAN - MECHANICAL • M3.0 ENLARGED BOILER ROOM MECHANICAL PLANS M3.1 • ENLARGED FILTER ROOM MECHANICAL PLANS M3.2 ENLARGED AIR HANDLER ROOM MECHANICAL PLANS M5.0 MECHANICAL DETAILS M5.1 MECHANICAL DETAILS M5.2 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION DETAILS M6.0 HEATING WATER PIPING AND CONTROLS DIAGRAMS 0 • MD6.1 PLUMBING ONE -LINE DIAGRAM -DEMO M6.1 PLUMBING ONE -LINE DIAGRAM M7.0 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES M7.1 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES M7.2 EQUIPMENT SCHEDU)..ES GENERAL INFORMATION SYMBOLS EQUIPMENT TAG EF-2 -1 REVISIONS No changes shall be made to the scope Of work without prior approval of Tukwila Building Division. My :alone will require a new plan submittal Ci �ti mwy include additional plan review fees. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 L NEW MECHANICAL WORK City of Tukwila EXISTING MECHANICAL W3UILDING DIVISION DEMO MECHANICAL WORK DETAIL OR DIAGRAM NUMBER . SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL/DIAGRAM SHOWN PLAN NUMBER SHEET NUMBER WHERE, PLAN SHOWN REVISION NUMBER — DENOTES NUMBER AND DATE WHEN REVISION OR ISSUE OCCURED REVISION CLOUD — DENOTES AREA OF CHANGE DETAIL REFERENCE OUTLINE WITH NUMBER AND SHEET LOCATION DRAWING N01E REFERENCE POINT OF CONNECTION POINT OF DEMOLITION CONSECUTIVE EQUIP. 1 FLOOR OF EQUIP. LOCATION EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION EQUIPMENT TAG RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 10 2012 PERMIT CENTER Mi q SEATTLE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1 -800- 669 -6223 PROJECT: instry ife Of Your Building PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503- 331 -0234 www.mckinstry.com TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 TENNIS COURT PARKING POOL REGISTRATION: REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% D0 9/4/12 75% CD'S 9/26/12 90% CD'S 10/8/12 PERMIT DRAWINGS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: SHEET TITLE: ENGINEERING ARUSS MERRELL TIM WHITE SETH DAVIS C10256 7/31/12 AS SHOWN MECHANICAL LEGEND SHEET NUMBER: M0.0 GENERAL NOTES: 1. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE. TO VISIT THE SITE AND DETERMINE THE EXACT EXTENT OF WORK, COORDINATION, DEMOUf1ON, TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION, TEMPORARY FACILITIES, ETC., NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE PROJECT AS INDICATED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 2. INTERRUPTIONS OF SERVICES (POWER, WATER, HVAC, ETC.) AND WORK IN OCCUPIED TENANT SPACES MUST BE SCHEDULED THRU THE BUILDING MANAGER A MINIMUM OF 24 HOURS IN ADVANCE. ANY INTERRUPTIONS OR CONSTRUCTION WHICH WILL AFFECT NORMAL OPERATION OF THE BUILDING OR TENANTS MUST BE SCHEDULED, WITH THE BUILDING MANAGER'S APPROVAL ON AN AFTER -HOURS BASIS. 3. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR TEMPORARY HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION. PERMANENT MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT BE USED FOR TEMPORARY HEAT WITHOUT PROTECTION` FROM DUST ACCUMULATION, WRITTEN ACCEPTANCE OF DUST RELATED WARRANT( COSTS, AND PRIOR APPROVAL BY THE MECHANICAL ENGINEER. 4. FURNISH LABOR, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, APPARATUS AND APPURTENANCES REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE WORKING AND COORDINATED SYSTEM. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, APPARATUS, AND APPURTENANCES SHALL MATCH EXISTING BUILDING STANDARDS IN QUALITY, TYPE AND FINISH, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5. VERIFY PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS OF EQUIPMENT. COORDINATE THE EXACT LOCATIONS OF NEW MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING EQUIPMENT WITH THE LOCATIONS OF LIGHTING FIXTURES, PIPING, AND OTHER CONSTRUCTION, TO ALLOW FOR PROPER ACCESS TO SERVICE AND MAINTAIN EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION. 6. COORDINATE THE LOCATION OF DUCTWORK AND PIPING WITH .OTHER TRADES. PROVIDE OFFSETS IN DUCTWORK AND PIPING AS REQUIRED AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO OWNER. 7. TRADES TO LEAVE 36" CLEARANCE IN FRONT OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ACCESS PANELS FOR SERVICING. 8. INSTALL DUCTWORK AND PIPING TO ALLOW MINIMUM ACCESS OF 6" ABOVE AND TO THE SIDE OF THE ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAYS. 9. SUPPORT CONDUIT, PIPING, AND DUCTWORK INDEPENDENTLY. SUPPORTS ARE INDEPENDENT OF PARTITION AND CEILING SYSTEM SUPPORTS. 10. IN NO INSTANCE SHALL OTHER TRADES HANG OR SUPPORT EQUIPMENT, CEILING WIRES, UGHT FIXTURE HANGERS, ETC., FROM HVAC EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, OR PIPING. . 11. CUTTING, FRAMING, PATCHING, AND PAINTING OF WALL, CEIUNG, AND FLOOR OPENINGS . SHALL BE BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. THIS INCLUDES OPENINGS THROUGH AREA SEPARATION WALLS 12. OBTAIN WRITTEN APPROVAL OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF PENETRATIONS IF NOT SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. 13. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS. REFER TO THE SPECIFICATIONS MATRIX FOR ADDITIONAL SEISMIC INFORMATION. 14. UNIT WEIGHTS AND LOCATIONS HAVE BEEN _ COORDINATED TO DETERMINE BUILDING STRUCTURAL ADEQUACY. IF IT IS NECESSARY TO RELOCATE A UNIT, NOTIFY MCKINSTRY ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT FOR RE- COORDINATION. 15. PROVIDE SEISMIC RESTRAINTS AND ANCHORAGE PER SMACNA AND THE INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE FOR DUCTWORK, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT. 16. CONCRETE EQUIPMENT CURBS, FLASHINGS, SLEEPERS, CONCRETE STATIONS, EMBED PLATES, PIPING RAT SLABS, SUMP BASINS, AND HOUSEKEEPING PADS ARE SHOWN FOR APPROXIMATE LOCATION AND SIZE AND WILL BE PROVIDED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 17. CUTTING AND PATCHING OF ROOF OPENINGS SHALL BE BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. . 18. SLEEPERS, HOUSEKEEPING PADS, EMBED PLATES, AND CANT STRIPS SHALL BE BUILT AND FASTENED TO THE ROOF BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. TOP OF THE CURB MUST BE FLAT TO PROVIDE AN ACCEPTABLE SEALING SURFACE. MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE DEVIATION FROM LEVEL SHALL BE %? IN 10'. ROOF CURBS AND SLEEPERS MUST BE SECURELY FASTENED TO STRUCTURAL SUPPORT MEMBERS. 19. LOUVERS, BOTH DUCTED AND NON- DUCTED, ARE TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. LOUVERS ARE SHOWN ON THESE PLANS BOTH FOR • COORDINATION, AND TO INDICATE THE REQUIRED LEVEL OF PERFORMANCE. LOUVERS OF ALTERNATE MAKE AND /OR TYPE MAY BE SUBSTITUTED ONLY IF THEY HAVE BOTH PRESSURE DROP AND WATER CARRY -OVER PERFORMANCE EQUAL TO OR BETTER THAN THE LOUVERS SPECIFIED. LOUVERS MUST CONTAIN THE FREE AREA REQUIREMENT INDICATED ON THE MECHANICAL PLANS. OTHER LOUVER MODELS WITH EQUAL OR BETTER FREE AREA, . WATER CARRY -OVER, AND PRESSURE DROP MAY BE SUBSTITUTED IF APPROVED BY THE MECHANICAL ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT. 20. ALL CRANE UFTING AND SETTING OF EQUIPMENT, PIPING, DUCTWORK, ETC. IS TO BE PERFORMED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. EQUIPMENT REQUIRES SPECIFIC RIGGING TO PREVENT DAMAGE. SEE EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS FOR UFTING INSTRUCTIONS. 21. BEFORE MAKING CONNECTIONS TO THE EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY THE OWNER OR OTHERS, VERIFY THAT EXACT INFORMATION IS PROVIDED. 22. PROVIDE PIPE, EQUIPMENT, AND VALVE LABELING FOR IDENTIFICATION. MATCH OWNERS EXISTING LABELING SCHEME IF' APPLICABLE. 23. LIGHT FIXTURE CLEARANCE: COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF MECHANICAL WORK TO PROVIDE CLEARANCES OVER UGHTING FIXTURES FOR REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT. 24. PROVIDE MODIFICATIONS TO THE EXISTING SPRINKLER SYSTEM FOR ALL REMODEL AREAS. 25. PROVIDE FIRE SAFE PENETRATIONS OF FIRE RATED CONSTRUCTION. 26. MINIMUM VENTILATION QUANTITIES SHALL COMPLY WITH OR EXCEED THE 2009 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE WITH THE WASHINGTON STATE AMENDMENTS. SUBMITTAL NOTES; 1. PROVIDE A HVAC /PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENT SUBMITTAL PACKAGE. INCLUDE IN THE PACKAGE SUBMITTALS FOR ITEMS INCLUDED ON THE SCHEDULE AND /OR SPECIFICATION SHEETS. ALSO INCLUDE SUBMITTALS FOR VALVES, GAUGES, DAMPERS, COILS AND INSTRUMENTATION. PIECEMEAL SUBMITTALS ARE PIECEMEAL SUBMITTALS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. 2, PROVIDE CONTROLS SUBMITTAL PACKAGE. INCLUDE IN THE PACKAGE SUBMITTALS FOR SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS, SYSTEM DIAGRAMS, ARCHITECTURE DIAGRAMS, PLANS, PLUS EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS. 3. THE PIPING CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE FULL SUBMITTALS OF PIPING AND DEVICES FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO PURCHASE AND INSTALLATION. 4. PROVIDE CONTRACTOR PREPARED SHOP DRAWINGS OF' CONTRACTOR FABRICATED SHEET METAL SYSTEMS. DRAWINGS SHALL BE PREPARED AT 1/4" SCALE USING COMPUTER < AIDED `DESIGN (CAD) SOFTWARE UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE. • DRAWINGS SHALL SHOW EXACT LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND DUCTWORK, EACH SECTION OF SHOP FABRICATED DUCT-AND LOCATION OF FIELD JOINTS, SUPPORTS, AND BUILDING ATTACHMENTS, AND SEISMIC RESTRAINT LOCATIONS. ELECTRICAL COORDINATION NOTES; 1. WHERE INDICATED ON THE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES, THE EQUIPMENT COMES COMPLETE FROM THE FACTORY WITH MOTOR CONTROLS AS REQUIRED. ELECTRICIAN SHALL PROVIDE SERVICE AND A DISCONNECT PER CODE, AND POWER WIRING, INCLUDING CONNECTING TO EQUIPMENT. 2. WHERE INDICATED ON EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES, THE EQUIPMENT REQUIRES • FIELD INSTALLED MOTOR STARTERS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL MOTOR STARTERS (OR CONTACTORS WHERE INDICATED). PROVIDE SERVICE AND DISCONNECT PER CODE, AND POWER WIRING, INCLUDING CONNECTING TO EQUIPMENT. HOLDING COIL CIRCUIT SHALL BE POWERED BY ELECTRICAL CONTACTOR (120V UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE). STARTERS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH H-O-A SWITCH, EXCEPT SMOKE CONTROL FANS SHALL NOT HAVE HAND OFF POSITIONS ON THE STARTERS AS NOTED ABOVE. 3. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. DEMOLITION NOTES; 1. DEMOLITION DRAWINGS ARE INCLUDED TO GIVE A COMMON BASIS FOR BIDDING AND MAY NOT SHOW EVERY ITEM TO BE DEMOLISHED. VISIT SIZE TO DETERMINE AND COORDINATE THE EXACT EXTENT' OF DEMOLITION TO FACEPLATE WORK INDICATED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. REWORK EXISTING TERMINATIONS, CONNECTIONS, ETC., TO ACCEPT NEW WORK. PRIOR TO START OF ANY DEMO WORK, VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES FOR RESOLUTION. 2. REMOVE EXISTING HVAC EQUIPMENT AS INDICATED, INCLUDING ASSOCIATED PIPING, CONTROL SYSTEMS, AND APPURTENANCES. 3. REMOVE EXISTING DUCTWORK AS INDICATED. CAP EXISTING OPENINGS NOT BEING REUSED. 5. . REMOVE EXISTING PIPING SERVING ITEMS TO BE REMOVED. CAP OR PLUG BRANCH LINES NOT BEING REUSED. 6. GIVE OWNER THE OPPORTUNITY TO RETAIN ANY REMOVED ITEMS THAT ARE NOT BEING REUSED. DISPOSE OF OTHER ITEMS LEGALLY. 7. CLEAN AND REFURBISH ITEMS INDICATED TO BE REMOVED AND REUSED PRIOR TO REUSE. PIPING NOTES; 1. BACKFLOW DEVICES, CROSS CONTROL DEVICES, VACUUM BREAKER AND DOUBLE CHECK VALVES TO BE A TYPE APPROVED BY THE STATE OF WASHINGTON HEALTH SERVICES DIVISION. 2. INSTALL AIR VENTS AT HIGH POINTS IN HYDRONIC PIPING. INSTALL DRAIN VALVES IN LOW POINTS IN HYDRONIC PIPING. 3. PROVIDE FLANGES OR UNIONS AT PIPING CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT, COILS, TRAPS, CONTROL VALVES, AND OTHER COMPONENTS TO ALLOW FOR MAINTENANCE. 4. PROVIDE REDUCERS AS REQUIRED FROM UNE PIPE SIZE TO EQUIPMENT, TRAP, COIL, AND CONTROL VALVE CONNECTION SIZES. 5. PROVIDE OFFSETS FOR BRANCH LINES TO EQUIPMENT TO ALLOW FOR SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT. 6. PROVIDE DIELECTRIC UNIONS AT CONNECTIONS OF DISSIMILAR PIPE MATERIALS. 7. PIPE SUPPLY WATER LINES TO BOTTOM OF COILS LEAVING AIR SIDE TO OBTAIN COUNTERFLOW ARRANGEMENT: 8. PROVIDE PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST PORTS AT SUPPLY AND RETURN PIPING CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT. 9. SIZE BALANCING /MEASURING VALVES IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. DO NOT PROVIDE VALVES LARGER THAN UNE SIZE. 10. SYSTEM FLIT: o. AFTER COMPLETION OF PIPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND PRESSURE TESTING, AND BEFORE MAKING CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT, REMOVE TRACES OF DIRT, OIL PIPE JOINT COMPOUND, ETC. BY FLUSHING PIPE SYSTEM WITH MCKINSTRY APPROVED CLEANER AND RUNNING CIRCULATION PUMPS. DRAIN, RE -FILL, AND RE-FLUSH SYSTEM IN ORDER TO REMOVE ALL TRACES OF CHEMICAL CLEANER. b. AFTER SYSTEM HAS BEEN THOROUGHLY CLEANED AND PRESSURE TESTED, FILL WITH A MIXTURE OF WATER AND THE APPROPRIATE CORROSION INHIBITORS. SUBMIT MIXTURE AND SEND TO MANUFACTURER'S LABORATORY FOR ANALYSIS. ADD WATER AND /OR INHIBITOR AS DIRECTED BY LAB REPORT. SUBMIT FINAL LAB REPORT TO MCKINSTRY ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT. c. RUN PUMPS TO CIRCULATE UNTIL THOROUGHLY MIXED AND AIR HAS BEEN PURGED FROM SYSTEM. THEN, DRAW A SAMPLE OF MIXTURE AND SEND TO MANUFACTURER'S LABORATORY FOR ANALYSIS. ADD WATER AND /OR INHIBITOR AS DIRECTED BY LAB REPORT. SUBMIT FINAL LAB REPORT TO MCKINSTRY ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT. d. PRESSURIZE SYSTEM ACCORDING TO THE FOLLOWING SCHEDULE AND LEAVE FILL VALVE CLOSED: HEATING WATER SYSTEM FILL PRESSURE: 25 PSIG HEALING WATER SYSTEM RELIEF VALVE SETTING: 50 PSIG PLUMBING NOTES; 1. INSTALL PIPED UTILITIES ON WARM SIDE OF BUILDING INSULATION WHERE THE SERVICE IS SUBJECT TO FREEING TEMPERATURES. 2. PROVIDE INDIRECT DRAIN PIPING FROM REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER (RPBP) TO NEAREST DRAIN. INSTALL FUNNEL AT RPBP IF REQUIRED. 3. PROVIDE CLEANOUTS AS REQUIRED BY PLUMBING CODE. INSTALL CLEANOUTS IN THE FLOOR OR WALL OF THE FLOOR ABOVE FOR PIPES THAT ARE DIFFICULT TO ACCESS. LOCATE FLOOR CLEANOUTS IN CORRIDORS, TOILET OR JANITOR ROOMS WHEREVER POSSIBLE. SHEET METAL NOTES:. 1. PROVIDE DUCTWORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH SMACNA HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, METAL AND FLEXIBLE, SECOND EDITION, 2005 (SMACNA HVACDCS). 2. DUCT SIZES INDICATED ARE INSIDE CLEAR DIMENSIONS. 3. PROVIDE A MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER FOR EACH SUPPLY, RETURN, AND EXHAUST OPENING EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY CODE. INSTALL AS FAR FROM INLET OR OUTLET AS POSSIBLE. 4. PROVIDE FLEXIBLE CONNECTION AT EACH DUCT CONNECTION TO FANS, AIR HANDLING UNITS, AND SIMILAR EQUIPMENT. DO NOT INSTALL ON EQUIPMENT LOCATED IN FIRE RATED CORRIDOR CEILING. 5. DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS: LOCATE DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. COORDINATE LOCATION REQUIREMENTS WITH ELECTRICAL WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE NOTES; 1. PROVIDE COMMISSIONING PLAN IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2009 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE SECTION 1416.3.1. 2. PROVIDE SYSTEMS TESTING AND BALANCING IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2009 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE SECTION 1416.3.2. 3. PROVIDE SYSTEMS, EQUIPMENT, AND CONTROLS FUNCTIONAL TESTING IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2009 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE SECTION 1416.3.3. 4. PROVIDE SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2009 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE 1416.3.4 INCLUDING OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS, HVAC CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION INFORMATION, HVAC CONTROL SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS, COMMISSIONING REPORT, AND RECORD DRAWINGS. 5. PROVIDE OWNER SYSTEMS OPERATION TRAINING IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2009 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE SECTION 1416.3.4.3. 6. PROVIDE COMMISSIONING COMPLIANCE FORM IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2009 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE SECTION 1416.4. 7. MOTORS SHALL COMPLY W1TN CHAPTER 15 OF THE 2009 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE. FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS, SEE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES CONTAINED WITHIN THIS DRAWING SET. 8. SYSTEMS SHALL BE INSULATED AS PRESCRIBED IN CHAPTER 14, TABLE 14 -5 OF THE 2009 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE. FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS, SEE DUCTWORK AND PIPING SPECIFICATION MATRICES CONTAINED WITHIN THIS DRAWING SET. RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX EQUIPMENT FURNISH RECEIVE INSTALL WIRE START -UP DEMO OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT - - MC /EC - - WATER HEATER, PUMPS, SUPPLY FAN, MOTORS McK McK MC EC MC /CCN BOILER BURNER V V V EC V /CC GAS REGULATORS MC MC MC - MCN PIPING, VALVES, SENSOR WELLS, APPURTENANCES MC MC MC - MC DAMPERS, ACTUATORS CC CC CC /MC CC CC /MC COMBUSTION AIR DUCTING, FLUE DUCTING MC MC MC - MC MOTOR STARTERS MC • MC EC EC EC CONTROL VALVES CC CC MC CC MC /CC INSULATION MC MC MC - - SENSORS CC CC CC CC CC FLOW METERS CC CC MC CC MC /CC WALL MODIFICATIONS GC GC GC - - LINE VOLTAGE WIRING EC EC • EC ~ EC - - - - EC LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CC CC CC CC CC INTEGRATION WITH BAS CC CC CC CC CC COMMISSIONING/TES•ING /BALANCING CA NOTES: GC - GENERAL CONTRACTOR CA - COMMISSIONING AGENT MC - MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR CC - CONTROLS CONTRACTOR McK - MCKINSTRY V - VENDOR EC - ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MECHANICAL BASIS OF DESIGN ITEM # SYSTEM CRITERIA CRITERIA SOURCE CODE BASIS FOR PROJECT , 1 -1 CODE 2009 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE WITH WA STATE AMENDMENTS ' CITY OF TUKWILA 1 -2 CODE 2009 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE CITY OF TUKWILA 1 -3 CODE 2009 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE WITH WASHINGTON STATE AMENDMENTS CITY OF TUKWILA 1-4 CODE 2009 INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE WITH WASHINGTON STATE AMENDMENTS CITY OF TUKWILA 1-5 CODE 2009 INTERNATIONAL FUEL GAS CODE WITH WASHINGTON STATE AMENDMENTS CITY OF TUKWILA 1-6 CODE 2009 INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE WITH WASHINGTON STATE AMENDMENTS CITY OF TUKWILA 1 -7 CODE 2010 WASHINGTON STATE BOILER AND UNFIRED PRESSURE VESSLE CODE CITY OF TUKWILA LOAD BASIS FOR PROJECT 2 -1 OSA TEMP WINTER OSA DESIGN TEMP = 21 °F DB 2009 WSEC 2-2 INDOOR TEMP INDOOR HEATING DESIGN TEMP = 86 °F DESIGN APPROACH 2-3 OSA TEMP SUMMER OSA DESIGN TEMP = 79 °F DB 2009 WSEC BASIS FOR BUILDING ENVELOPE 3 -1 ROOF 1 MANUFACTURED CONCRETE PANELS (U VALUE -0.1) CONFIRMED ON SITE 3-2 WALL 1 8 "CONCRETE BLOCK W/ 4" FACE BLOCK (U VALUE =0.07) CONFIRMED ON SITE 3-3 WINDOW 1 INSULATED GLASS (U-VALUE-1.04, SC -0.5) CONFIRMED ON SITE 3-4 FLOOR 1 POURED CONCRETE (U VALUE -0.1) CONFIRMED ON SITE BASIS FOR LOAD CALCULATIONS 4 -1 VENTILATION QUANTITIES MINIMUM OUTSIDE AIR VALUES BASED ON ASHRAE 62.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR POOLS AND SPECTATOR AREAS DESIGN APPROACH 4-2 INFILTRATION INFILTRATION RATE OF 0.5 ACH USED IN BUILDING LOAD CALCULATIONS DESIGN APPROACH BASIS FOR GAS PIPING DESIGN 5 -1 GAS FIRED EQUIPMENT BOILER BURNER IS DEBATED FROM 4405 CFH TO 4200 CFH TO MEET CONNECTED LOAD, BUILDING LOAD CALCULATIONS AND GAS METER CAPACITY. DESIGN APPROACH 5-2 GAS METER GAS METER CAPACITY IS.4700 CFH AT 2 PSI. DESIGN APPROACH BASIS FOR MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 6 -1 NATATORIUM SPACE PRESSURE NATATORIUM SPACE IS POSITIVELY PRESSURIZED WITH NO SOURCE OF POWERED RELIEF, RESULTING IN CONTAMINATION OF SURROUNDING SPACES WITH CHLORINATED AIR. RELIEF PATH IS VIA (4) LOUVERS IN EXTERIOR WALL ADDITION OF A RELIEF FAN IS NOT INCLUDED IN THE SCOPE OF THIS PROJECT. CONFIRMED ON SITE 6-2 LOCKER ROOM HEATING WATER COIL LOCKER ROOM HEATING COIL LEAKS FROM PREVIOUS DAMAGE CONFIRMED ON SITE 6-3 ADA REQUIREMENTS ADA COMPLIANT PLUMBING FIXTURES ARE BEING INSTALLED. EXISTING ADA SPACES ARE NOT BEING UPGRADED TO FULL COMPLIANCE UNDER THIS SCOPE. DESIGN APPROACH 6-4 AIR HANDLER AIR HANDLER SUPPLY FAN IS BEING REPLACED. FAN IS SIZED TO MATCH AIRFLOW MEASUREMENTS OF 20,800 CFM TAKEN ON SITE AND MAINTAIN A MINIMUM OF 6 ACH. SPACE VOLUME OF 200,000 SO FT REQUIRES A MINIMUM AIRFLOW OF 20,000 CFM TO MAINTAIN 6 ACH. DESIGN APPROACH 6-5 DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE AIR HANDLER CONTROLS SPECIFIED TO ACHIEVE 100F DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE. DESIGN APPROACH 6-6 SEISMIC CONNECTION DETAILS ARE BASED ON A SEISMIC IMPORTANCE FACTOR OF 1.5 DESIGN APPROACH 6 -7 MECHANICAL ROOM EXHAUST THE MECHANICAL ROOM EXHAUST FAN IS DISABLED. MECHANICAL ROOM IS NOT BEING EXHAUSTED TO REMOVE CHLORINATED AIR. EQUIPMENT IN MECHANICAL SPACE .EXHIBITS SIGNS OF EXTENSIVE CORROSION. REPLACEMENT OF THE EXHAUST FAN IS NOT WITHIN THE BASE SCOPE OF THIS PROJECT. CONFIRMED ON SITE 6-8 FUEL SYSTEM BOILER WILL OPERATE ON NATURAL GAS. CONFIRMED ON SITE 6 -9 DOMESTIC WATER HEATER DOMESTIC WATER HEATER SIZING IS BASED ON FIXTURE COUNT AND FLOW RATES WITH A 640 GALLON PER HOUR RECOVERY RATE AT A WATER TEMPERATURE RISE OF 90F. DESIGN APPROACH 6 -10 LOCKER ROOM FANS THE SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FANS ARE CONSTANT VOLUME AND THE SYSTEM SUPPLIES 100% OUTSIDE AIR TO THE LOCKER ROOMS, LOBBY, FIRST AID, JANITOR AND MANAGERS OFFICE. DESIGN APPROACH 6 -11 POOL FILL WATER METER WATER METER INSTALLATION DETAIL IS SHOWN WITH BY -PASS PIPING FOR MAINTENANCE OF THE METER. DESIGN APPROACH BASIS FOR HEATING SYSTEM DESIGN 7 -1 HEATING WATER PUMP PUMP SIZED TO MATCH EXISTING PUMP FLOW. EXISTING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE MEASURED AT 39.6 FT H20. PUMP HEAD CALCULATION PERFORMED TO VERIFY PUMP HEAD REQUIREMENTS. AVAILABLE PUMP HEAD HAS BEEN INCREASED FROM EXISTING EQUIPMENT. DESIGN APPROACH 7 -2 SYSTEM VOLUME BASED ON INFORMATION PROVIDED ON THE MECHANICAL PLANS DATED 6/29/1990. HEATING COIL VOLUMES NOT LISTED, VOLUMES CALCULATED USING 3RD PARTY SOFTWARE AND USED IN SIZING OF EXPANSION TANK DESIGN APPROACH 7 -3 BOILER BURNER SIZING CRITERIA HEATING WATER PLANT SIZE IS BASED ON SPECIFIED HEATING WATER PUMP CAPACITIES AT20° AT. (180 °F SUPPLY AND 160 °F RETURN) DESIGN APPROACH 7-4 HEATING WATER SYSTEM HEATING WATER SYSTEM IS A VARIABLE FLOW CONFIGURATION WITH CONSTANT VOLUME PUMPS. PUMPS WILL RIDE THE PUMP CURVE TO MEET CHANGES IN DEMAND. DESIGN APPROACH 7-5 FREEZE PROTECTION THE HEATING WATER LOOP CONSISTS OF 100% WATER WITH NO ADDITIVES FOR FREEZE PROTECTION. SEE CONTROLS SEQUENCE FOR FREEZE PROTECTION STRATEGY. PER OWNER 7-6 BOILER MINIMUM FLOW MINIMUM FLOW OF 57 GPM FOR THE BOILER IS BASED ON THE BURNER MINIMUM OUTPUT OF 570 MBH•AT 20*AT PER OWNER 7 7 BOILER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE THE BOILER DESIGN SUPPLY WATER TEMPERATURE IS 180 °F. PER OWNER BASIS FOR ADDITIONAL ALTERNATE ITEMS 8-1 "ADD GENERAL ALTERNATE" ITEMS LISTED IN DRAWING SET ARE IDENTIFIED FOR BUDGETARY PRICING PURPOSES. MINIMAL ENGINEERING HAS BEEN DONE TO VERIFY FEASABLITY, ADDITIONAL DESIGN WILL BE REQUIRED IF THE MEASURES ARE ADOPTED AS PART OF THIS PROJECT PHASE. DESIGN APPROACH 8-2 GENERAL SUPPLY FAN IS SIZED FOR AN ADDITIONAL 1" W.C. EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE FOR FLEXIBILITY IN THE INSTALLATION OF FUTURE HEAT RECOVERY. ADDITIONAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE AIR HANDLING SYSTEM WILL BE REQUIRED IF HEAT RECOVERY IS TO BE IMPLEMENTED IN THE FUTURE. DESIGN APPROACH 8-3 GENERAL REFERENCE CONSULTANTS DRAWINGS FOR POOL RELATED CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT. THESE ITEMS ARE NOT ADDRESSED IN THE MECHANICAL SCOPE. DESIGN APPROACH 8-4 GENERAL POTENTIAL LEAK IN HEATING WATER SYSTEM UNDER POOL DECK IS NOT BEING ADDRESSED IN THE SCOPE OF THIS PROJECT. DESIGN APPROACH REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 1 0 2012 PERMIT CENTER Mt.7,15-9 For Th instry Ile Of Your Building SEATTLE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1 -800 -669 -6223 PROJECT: PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503 - 331 -0234 www.mckinstry.cam TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 TENNIS COURT PARKING REGISTRATION: POOL REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% OD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 9/26/12 90% CD'S 10/8/12 PERMIT DRAWINGS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: SHEET TITLE: ENGINEERING ARLISS MERRELL TIM WHITE SETH DAVIS C10256 7/31/12 AS SHOWN GENERAL NOTES AND BASIS OF DESIGN SHEET NUMBER: M0.1 • N 12'—O" 1T I� L SUPPLY DIFFUSER 6„ __: • AT END OF BLEACHERS Li PIPES BELOW BLEACHERS BACK TO MECHANICAL ROOM L STAINLESS STEEL PIPING CHASE EXISTING SUPPLY DIFFUSER ALONG WALL ABOVE BLEACHERS WOMEN'S LOCKER ROOM 0 oC 7 A 3 0 nc-) 0 Yi nor EN STAFF 17" ATTENDANT 0 LS *1 - 0 MEN'S LOCKER ROOM 0 0 Mt,NAGER 1 1 iW 1 0 0 0 CONTROL FIRST 11 � HC -3 0 • • _ UU SUPPLY DUCT 1l RETURN GRILLE MECHANICAL ROOM II LJ DORAGE JANITOR ■ VC—F-- 0 ELEC. ROOM LOCKER ROOM .° SUPPLY FAN OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE HC -1 LOCKER ROOM® EXHAUST FAN 60'-8") 1 RETURN GRILLE LOW IN WALL RELIEF LOUVERS (TYP. OF 4) FLOOR PLAN DEMO - MECHANICAL SCALE: 1 /8" = 1' -0" 0 4' 8' 16' KEY NOTES Li O DEMOLISH SHOWER HEADS, VALVES AND APPURTENANCES. 0, DEMOLISH LOCKER ROOM SUPPLY AND RETURN FAN MOTORS. 3® DEMOLISH WATER CLOSETS, LAVATORIES, CARRIERS, LAVATORY TRAPS, STOP VALVES, P— TRAPS, CARRIERS AND ASSOCIATED APPURTENANCES. ® DEMOUSH URINAL FLUSHOMErERS. O DEMOLISH SF(OWERHEADS, VALVES AND TOWER ASSEMBLIES. 0 DEMOLISH THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES, RETAIN CABINET. 0 DEMOLISH FAUCET. ` 80 ADD ALTERNATE DEMOUSH ISOLATION VALVES. CONFIRM QUANTITY AND IDENTIFY ADDITIONAL VALVES NOT SHOWN ON PLANS. K DEMOLISH THERMOSTAT. i0 DEMOUSH SHOWER PAN AND SURROUND. 11 ADD ALTERNATE: DEMOLISH HEATING COIL AND ASSOCIATED THERMOSTAT. 12 DEMOUSH HEATING COIL CONTROL VALVE. REVIEWED FOR BODE COMPLIANCE = APPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 City of TultvAls BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 1 0 2012 PERMIT CENTER MIS -1s9 For Th• insby fe Of Your Building SEATTLE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1- 800 - 669 -6223 PROJECT: PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503 - 331 -0234 www.mckinstry.com TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 TENNIS COURT PARKING REGISTRATION: POOL TRACK REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD _ 9/4/12 75% CD'S 9/26/12 90% CD'S 10/8/12 PERMIT DRAWINGS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: SHEET TITLE: ENGINEERING ARLISS MERRELL TIM WHITE SETH DAVIS C10256 7/31/12 AS SHOWN FLOOR PLAN - MECHANICAL DEMO SHEET NUMBER: MD2.0 NATATORIUM M3.0 ®® ilirmirmir . . II LJ DORAGE JANITOR ■ VC—F-- 0 ELEC. ROOM LOCKER ROOM .° SUPPLY FAN OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE HC -1 LOCKER ROOM® EXHAUST FAN 60'-8") 1 RETURN GRILLE LOW IN WALL RELIEF LOUVERS (TYP. OF 4) FLOOR PLAN DEMO - MECHANICAL SCALE: 1 /8" = 1' -0" 0 4' 8' 16' KEY NOTES Li O DEMOLISH SHOWER HEADS, VALVES AND APPURTENANCES. 0, DEMOLISH LOCKER ROOM SUPPLY AND RETURN FAN MOTORS. 3® DEMOLISH WATER CLOSETS, LAVATORIES, CARRIERS, LAVATORY TRAPS, STOP VALVES, P— TRAPS, CARRIERS AND ASSOCIATED APPURTENANCES. ® DEMOUSH URINAL FLUSHOMErERS. O DEMOLISH SF(OWERHEADS, VALVES AND TOWER ASSEMBLIES. 0 DEMOLISH THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES, RETAIN CABINET. 0 DEMOLISH FAUCET. ` 80 ADD ALTERNATE DEMOUSH ISOLATION VALVES. CONFIRM QUANTITY AND IDENTIFY ADDITIONAL VALVES NOT SHOWN ON PLANS. K DEMOLISH THERMOSTAT. i0 DEMOUSH SHOWER PAN AND SURROUND. 11 ADD ALTERNATE: DEMOLISH HEATING COIL AND ASSOCIATED THERMOSTAT. 12 DEMOUSH HEATING COIL CONTROL VALVE. REVIEWED FOR BODE COMPLIANCE = APPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 City of TultvAls BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 1 0 2012 PERMIT CENTER MIS -1s9 For Th• insby fe Of Your Building SEATTLE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1- 800 - 669 -6223 PROJECT: PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503 - 331 -0234 www.mckinstry.com TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 TENNIS COURT PARKING REGISTRATION: POOL TRACK REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD _ 9/4/12 75% CD'S 9/26/12 90% CD'S 10/8/12 PERMIT DRAWINGS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: SHEET TITLE: ENGINEERING ARLISS MERRELL TIM WHITE SETH DAVIS C10256 7/31/12 AS SHOWN FLOOR PLAN - MECHANICAL DEMO SHEET NUMBER: MD2.0 ( N W-O (1: 2' -0" N 44'_..0" f�w SUPPLY DIFFUSERL.,. AT ,END OF BLEACHERS STAINLESS STEEL PIPING CHASE PIPES BELOW BLEACHERS SACK TO MECHANICAL ROOM SUPPLY DIFFUSER ALONG WALL ABOVE BLEACHERS Wia N15..LOCKER ROOM SH -3 4 -- et—WC-1 ' EN'S STn{® 0 ENTRY A TEND MANAGE CONTROL ®.[ F HC -2 1® .IEN'S HC -3 M -1 LOCKER ROOM SUPPLY FAN MOTOR U3 SH -3 f ORAGE & JANITOR NEN?S LOCKER ROOM ::1 N OSH -2 ELEC. ROOM LOCKER ROOM ® RETURN FAN MOTOR M -2 N 60'-8" - SUPPLY DUCT �. RETURN GRILLE HIGH IN WALL — LL- I EUHA.i:ISAL ROOM NATATORIUM RELIEF LOUVERS (TYP OF 4) FLOOR PLAN - MECHANICAL SCALE: 1 /8" = 1' -0" 0 4' 8' 16' KEY NOTES RETURN GRILLE Low IN WALL O PROVIDE CONTROL VALVES FOR HEATING COILS. REFERENCE M7.2 FOR ETIPMENT SCHEDULES. 0 PROVIDE WATER CLOSETS, FLUSHOMETERS, LAVATORIES, STOP VALVES, CARRIERS, P -TRAPS AND FIXTURES. REFERENCE M7.0 FOR EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES. O PROVIDE SHOWER HEADS, VALVES AND RISER FIXTURES. CLEAN OUT DRAIN LINES BACK TO THE NEXT ACCESSIBLE CLEAN OUT POINT. REFERENCE M7.0 FOR EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES. ® CONFIGURE MOTOR INSTALLATION TO ALLOW FOR SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE WITHOUT REMOVING SURROUNDING EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE ACCESS HATCH IN EXHAUST DUCT FOR BELT REPLACEMENT. PROVIDE MOTORS FOR SUPPLY AND RETURN FANS. REFERENCE M7.0 FOR EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES ®5 PROVIDE FLUSHOMETERS. ® PROVIDE SPOOL PIECE AS REQUIRED TO CONNECT HOT WATER INLET TO HOT WATER OUTLET. CAP COLD WATER LINE. 0, PROVIDE SHOWER HEADS AND VALVES. REFERENCE M7.0 FOR EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES. 0 0 PROVIDE SHOWER PAN AND SURROUND. COORDINATE REQUIREMENTS WITH OWNER. PROVIDE HEATING WATER COIL AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR. REFERENCE 5/M5.1 FOR COIL INSTALLATION DETAIL. 10 PROVIDE F.'I ET. REFERENCE EQUIPMENT SCH ' 1 .1. i 0 ET I LS. 11 PROVIDE ISOLATION VALVES. CONFIRM QUANTITY AND SIZE. IDENTIFY ADDITIONAL VALVES NOT SHOWN ON PLANS. 12 PROVIDE ADDITIONAL HOLE IN SINK BASIN FOR MOUNTING FIXTURE. REVIEWED FOR kat qODECOMPUANCE APPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION CORRECTION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA NOV 2 1 2012 PERMIT CENTER 111.1?--- is9 instry le Of Your Building SEATTLE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1- 800 -669 -6223 PROJECT: PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503 -331 -0234 www.mckinstry.com TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 TENNIS COURT PARKING REGISTRATION: 1 TRACK REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 9/26/12 90% CD'S 10/8/12 PERMIT DRAWINGS 11/19/12 REVISION 1 NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN 8Y: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: ENGINEERING ARLISS MERRELL TIM WHITE SETH DAVIS C10256 7/31/12 AS SHOWN SHEET TITLE: FLOOR PLAN - MECHANICAL SHEET NUMBER: M2.0 N 44' —O" ROOF PLAN - MECHANICAL SCALE: 1/8" = 1' -0" 4' 8' 16' KEY NOTES Q REPLACE MECHANICAL ROOM EXHAUST FAN. REFERENCE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE ON M7.1. REVIEWED FOR DE COMPLIANCE APPROVED NOV 282012 City &f Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA NOV 2 1 2012 PERMIT CENTER M1IS 1 For Th instry Ife Of Your Buil/ing SEATTLE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1- 800 - 669 -6223 PROJECT: PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503 -331 -0234 www.mckinstry.com TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 TENNIS COURT PARKING REGISTRATION: POOL TRACK REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 9/26/12 90% CD'S 10/8/12 PERMIT DRAWINGS 11/19/12 REVISION 1 NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: SHEET TITLE: ENGINEERING ARLISS MERRELL TIM WHITE SETH DAVIS C10256 7/31/12 AS SHOWN ROOF PLAN - MECHANICAL SHEET NUMBER: M2.1 DEMOLITION KEY NOTES ®1 DEMOUSH DOMES11C WATER HEATER, GAS PRV. PRV VENT LINES AND ASSOCIATED APPURTENANCES. ✓ DEMOLISH BOILER BURNER, GAS PRV AND ASSOCIATED APPURTENANCES. O DEMOLISH DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATING PUMP. • DEMOLISH PIPE SECTION FOR METER INSTALLATION. ® DEMOUSH PIPE SECTION FOR AIR SEPARATOR INSTALLATION. DEMOUSH PUMP, TRIPLE DUTY VALVE AND APPURTENANCES. r- CI 3AOJV 013SV3I1V!S 13OILER ----.9.* O —0 ' CHEMICAL "P QT FEEDER P -2 FLOOR DRAIN EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANELS 1 (4) 24X30 WPL -1 -' (2) HIGH & LOW `. MOUNTED IN DOOR FLOOR DRAIN 1/2" DIAMETER PVC CONDENSATE — DRAIN GAS LINE FROM METER BOILER ROOM MECHANICAL DEMO PLAN 40 l r BUCKET FILTER ©'WM -2) KEY NOTES ® PROVIDE COMBUSTION AIR DUCT TO BURNER. PROVIDE BIRD SCREEN AND 90' TURN DOWN AT TE IA ® MAINTAIN 7' MINIMUM BETWEEN TERMINATION AND DRNEWAY. USE EXISTING PENETRATION IN WALL, SEAL AND WEATHERPROOF PENETRATION. PROVIDE MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDED TERMINATION. REFERENCE 3/M5.1 FOR DETAILS. OVI'E • 0 C MIXING VALVE. REFERENCE 2/M5.1 FOR DETAILS. CORE WALL FOR COMBUSTION AI 'UCT PENETRATION. BLANK OFF (2) UPPER LOUVERS IN DOOR. PAINT TO MATCH DOOR. PROVIDE WATER METER ON D 07 REFERENCE 6/M5.0 FOR DETAILS. ® REFERENCE 7/M5.0 FOR PUMP INSTALLATION DETAILS. ® REFERENCE 3/M5.0 FOR GAS PIPING DIAGRAM. 10 PROVIDE BOILER BURNER AND PRV. REFERENCE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES ON M7.0 AND M7.1. " ©• ERENCE 2/M5.0 F NSTALLATION DETAILS. ROUTE PRV VENT TO EXTERIOR, SIZE PIP PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. REFERENC 4/M5.0 FOR DETAILS. MAINTAIN 3' SEPARATION BETWEEN FLUE TERMINATION AND PRV VENT TERMINATION. WH 0-03N 3AO9V 01 3SVO8IV1S -_ iL BOILER - --•''! 3/4" FLOOR DRAIN TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR MECHANICAL ROOM EXHAUST FAN 11 2 -1 WATER HEATER FLUE VENT EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANELS 24X30 LOUVERS LOW MOUNTED IN DOOR 0 2" GAS FLOOR DRAIN 1/2" DIAMETER PVC CONDENSATE DRAIN CL Tr 'n SINK BOILER ROOM MECHANICAL PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" PVC .COMBUSTION R DUCT 1 GAS LINE FROM METER REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE APPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 City of Tukwila BUDDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA NOV 2 1 2012 PERMIT CENTER M s9 instry 01 Tour suilriag SEATTLE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1 -800- 669 -6223 PROJECT: PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503 -331 -0234 www.mckinstry.com TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 TENNIS COURT PARKING REGISTRATION: POOL TRACK REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 9126/12 90% CD'S 10/8/12 PERMIT DRAWINGS 11/19/12 REVISIO.N 1 NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: SHEET TITLE: ENGINEERING ARLISS MERRELL TIM WHITE SETH DAVIS C10256 7/31/12 AS SHOWN ENLARGED BOILER ROOM MECHANICAL PLANS SHEET NUMBER: M3.0 2 -1/2" HS HR UP 2" HW UP 3/4" HWC DN. 3 "CWUP - - --- 3"- l CONK. __._.__ter TO EXISTING CW /' \ / \ /' \, 4" HWF �& N / HWR UP x / \ HRH\ 3" CW POOL FILL 3" CW ON ()WATER METER 1 4 ",k1R DN. HS \ 2" CW DN. TO 2 -1/2" CW DN. POOL MAKE -UP 3/4" HWC. DN.- 2 "HWDN. 4" HS DN. FILTER ROOM DEMO PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = V -0" KEY NOTES DEMOLITION O DEMOLISH WATER METER. 2> DEMOLISH EXPANSION TANK. �3 DEMOLISH CONTROL VALVES. EXPANSION TANI .2 N i69' -4„ 2 -1/2" HS & HR UP -" 1 2" HW UP I 3/4" HWC DN I CW UP _' 3" CW POOL FIL 3" CW DN. - CV -6 3" CW CONN. TO EXISTING CW /. 4" HS \\ �/ HR UP X / N. HR\ 2 -WAY CONTROL VALVE 3 -WAY ' CONTROL VALVE [CV -7j 4 \HR DN. HS d11 -3)IVw 100d 2 -1/2" CW DN. 01 'NO MO „Z 3/4" HWC DN. 2" HW DN. 4" HS ON. WM -1(O FILTER ROOM PLAN 1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" KEY NOTES Q PROVIDE POOL MAKE-UP WATER METER. PROVIDE INLET AND OUTLET STRAIGHT PIPE LENGTHS PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. REFERENCE 1/M5.0 FOR DETAILS. K PROVIDE EXPANSION TANK. REFERENCE 5/M5.0 FOR DETAILS. ® PROVIDE CONTROL VALVES. t :. 189' -4"' E -Cr ;'.• REVIEWED FOR ;ODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED •1s • NOV 2 8 2012 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA NOV 2 1 2012 PERMIT CENTER tit a-- 1 59 For Th instry Ye Of Your Building SEATTLE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1-800-669-6223 PROJECT: PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503-331-0234 www.mckinstry.com TUKWILAPOOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 TENNIS COURT PARKING REGISTRATION: POOL (-* TRACK MINNIMMEMMEMINI REVISIQNS: ' 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 9/26/12 • 90% CD'S 10/8/12 PERMIT DRAWINGS 11/19/12 REVISION 1 NO. DATE DESCRIPTION MINNEMMEMMEMENSEMOMMENI McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: SHEET TITLE: ENGINEERING ARLISS MERRELL TIM WHITE SETH DAVIS C10256 7/31/12 AS SHOWN ENLARGED FILTER ROOM MECHANICAL PLANS SHEET NUMBER: M3.1 SUPPLY FAN LADDER —1 RETURN D ABOVE -- 1 • AIR HANDLER MECHANICAL ROOM PLAN ELEVATION - DEMO ONO SCALE: 1/4' = r 3 • FAN MECHANICAL ROOM ELEVATION - DEMO • SCALE: 1/4" = DEMOLITION KEY NOTES O DEMOLISH SUPPLY FAN WITH INERTIA BASE, MOTOR AND SPRING ISOLATION. ® ADD ALTERNATE: DEMOUSH HEATING COIL AND ASSOCIATED BRANCH PIPING. ®3 DEMOLISH RETURN AIR CONTROL DAMPER IN DUCT BELOW. ® REMOVE PLENUM WALL AND ASSOCIATED ACCESS DOOR. RETAIN FOR REINSTALLATION. ® DEMOUSH OUTSIDE AIR CONTROL DAMPER, ACTUATORS AND ASSOCIATED PNEUMATICS. FLOOR GRID. TO BE REINSTALLED AFTER CONTROL DAMPER IS INSTALLED. ® DEMOUSH RETURN AIR CONTROL DAMPER AND ACTUATOR IN RETURN MR DUCT ABOVE PNEUMATICS. REMOVE 36W'X2211 AND ASSOCIATED OUTSIDE AIR LOUVER 48'Wx50"H DUCT CONNECTT LADDER L SF-1 ® HC -6 RETURN ABOVE v RETURN DUCT 861W x 6611 BELOW DUCT CONNECTION TO COIL I-1 LJ 2 • • AIR HANDLER MECHANICAL ROOM PLAN SCALE: 1/4* = 1' -0" EO -0 • FAN MECHANICAL ROOM ELEVATION • SCALE: 1/4' = 1' -0' KEY NOTES 0 MOUNT SUPPLY FAN AND MOTOR ON INERTIA BASE WITH SPRING ISOLATION (FURNISHED WIM SUPPLY FAN). CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM POSITIVE CONNECTION AND NOTIFY STRUCTURAL ENGINEER.L ® FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION. ® NOT USED. ® BASE SCOPE CLEAN AND FLUSH AIR/WATER SIDES OF EXISTING HEATING COIL ADD ALTERNATE PROVIDE HEATING COIL. CONNECT TO EXISTING BRANCH PIPING. ®5 PROVEDE TWO 46"WX82"H HI -PRO POLYESTER COATED CONTROL DAMPERS. ® REINSTALL ACCESS DOOR. ® PROVIDE 38"WX26'H HI -PRO POLYESTER COATED CONTROL DAMPER. ® REINSTALL PLENUM WALL ® PROVIDE 72"LX22"H HI -PRO POLYESTER COATED CONTROL DAMPER ABOVE. OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER SHEET NOTES 1. REFERENCE CONTROLS DIAGRAMS ON M6.0 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2. REMOVE HEATING COIL, FILTER FLANK, AIR HANDLER CABINET AND OUTSIDE AIR LOUVER AS NECESSARY TO REMOVE AND REPLACE SUPPLY FAN THROUGH OUTSIDE AIR OPENING. RETAIN PARIS FOR REINSTALLATION, REPLACE ITEMS DAMAGED DURING REMOVAL 3. DEMOLISH ABANDONED PNEUMATIC LINES. 4. INSTAULED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS TO BE CORROSION RESISTANT, SUITABLE FOR USE WTM A CHLORINATED ENVIRONMENT. M REVIEWED FOR ODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 • City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 1 0 2012 PERMIT CENTER For Th instry ife Of TIM Building SEATTLE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1-800-669-6223 PROJECT: PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON Si PORTLAND, OR 97230 503 -331 -0234 www.mckinstry.com TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 TENNIS COURT PARKING REGISTRATION: POOL REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 9/26/12 90% CD'S 10/8/12 PERMIT DRAWINGS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: ENGINEERING ARLISS MERRELL TIM WHITE SETH DAVIS C10256 7/31/12 AS SHOWN SHEET TITLE: ENLARGED AIR HANDLER MECHANICAL ROOM PLANS SHEET NUMBER: M3.2 1 -1/2" BY -PASS —� UPSTREAM ---- ISOLATION VALVE (NORMALLY OPEN) ISOLATION VALVE 6/-- (NORMALLY CLOSED) MINIMUM OF FIVE DIAMETERS OF STRAIGHT PIPE 1 t ADE REGISTER / 1 CONNECT TO BAS �-- MINIMUM TWO PIPE DIAMETERS DOWNSTREAM OF TURBO METER TEST TEE GAS METER BY PSE 4700 CFH @ 2 PSI BADGER PLATE STRAINER TURBO SERIES METERS [CHANICAL ROOM r 2" (50 LF) L 1 -1/2" (10 LE) COUPLING ADAPTOR POOL FILL METER NOT TO SCALE [ PRV -1 DOMESTIC WATER HEATER 500 MBH 2" (40 LF) 01 PRV -2 KEY NOTES 0 REFERENCE 4/M5.0 FOR GAS PRV INSTALLATION DETAIL. (3\\ GAS PIPING DIAGRAM NOT TO SCALE FROM BACKFLOW PREVENTER SERVICE '--- ISOLATION VALVE SADDLE (NORMALLY OPEN) PIPE OFF TOP OF MAKE -UP WATER LINE —ow- TO FILTER TANK ISOLATION VALVE (NORMALLY OPEN) FUEL GAS PIPING, REFERENCE GAS PIPING DIAGRAM FOR PIPE SIZES SHUTOFF COCK OR BALL VALVE WITHIN 6' -O" OF EQUIPMENT DIRT LEG MOTES (PER IFGC 410.2): 1. THE MP REGULATOR SHALL BE APPROVED AND SHALL BE SUITABLE FOR THE INLET AND OUTLET GAS PRESSURES FOR THE APPLICATION. 2. THE MP REGULATOR SHALL MAINTAIN A REDUCED OUTLET PRESSURE UNDER LOCKUP (NO -FLOW) CONDITIONS. 3. THE CAPACITY OF THE MP REGULATOR, DETERMINED BY PUBLISHED RATINGS OF ITS MANUFACTURER, SHALL BE ADEQUATE TO SUPPLY THE APPLIANCES SERVED. 4. THE MP PRESSURE REGULATOR SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH ACCESS. WHERE LOCATED INDOORS, THE REGULATOR SHALL BE VENTED TO THE OUTDOORS OR BE EQUIPPED WITH A LEAK- LIMITING DEVICE, IN EITHER CASE COMPLYING WITH SECTION 410.3. 5. A TEE FITTING WITH ONE OPENING CAPPED OR PLUGGED SHALL BE INSTALLED BETWEEN THE MP REGULATOR AND ITS UPSTREAM SHUTOFF VALVE. SUCH TEE FITTING SHALL BE POSITIONED TO ALLOW CONNECTION OF A PRESSURE - MEASURING INSTRUMENT AND TO SERVE AS A SEDIMENT TRAP. 6. A TEE FITTING WITH ONE OPENING CAPPED OR PLUGGED SHALL BE INSTALLED NOT LESS THAN 10 PIPE DIAMETERS DOWNSTREAM OF THE MP REGULATOR , OUTLET. SUCH A TEE FITTING SHALL BE POSITIONED TO ALLOW CONNECTION OF A PRESSURE - MEASURING DEVICE. DRAIN PIPE FROM BOTTOM OF FILTER TANK WITH VALVE FOR FLOW CONTROL DRAIN PIPE FOR FILTER TANK OVER FLOW 6" STEEL PIPE FLANGED CONNECTION AT BASKET FILTER (TYP) PROVIDE LOW POINT IN WIRING TO PREVENT MOISTURE FROM TRAVELING DOWN WIRE AND INTO UNIT ALIGN PIPE TO SLOPE @ 1/4" / FT ALONG ENTIRE LENGTH CONTROL WIRING FLOW METER 7.1" "" �--- -� 4 "0 SCH80 PVC PIPE BASKET FILTER BOD: HAYWARD 6" SB PVC SIMPLEX STRAINER FLG EPDM. OFFSET BASKET FILTER FROM END CAP TO ALLOW ACCESS FOR MAINTENANCE 01 (WM -2 THRU BOLT FROM FLANGE TO FLANGE 4 "o SCH80 PVC PIPE CONCRETE SLAB �- REMOVABLE END CAP FOR MAINTENANCE GAS REGULATOR VENT PIPED TO EXTERIOR (VENTS TO BE PIPED SEPARATELY) PIPE SIZE PER MANUFACTURER AND APPLICABLE CODES. MINIMUM VENT PIPE SIZE TO BE THE SAME AS VENT OUTLET ON REGULATOR. INCREASER AS REQUIRED TO EQUIPMENT GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR W/VENT, PER EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER, REGULATOR TO BE INSTALLED AT LEAST 10 PIPE DIAMETERS FROM BOILER MAIN GAS VALVE REDUCER AS REQUIRED REMOVABLE END CAP FOR MAINTENANCE ALIGN END CAPS TO ALLOW FOR CLEAN OUT OF PIPE 4 HVAC SYSTEM MAKE UP WATER ASSEMBLY PRESSURE GAUGE 0 -100 PSI P/T PORT ISOLATION VALVE NOTES: 1. BASIS OF DESIGN: WESSELS 2. REFERENCE HEATING WATER PIPING DIAGRAM M6.2 FOR PIPE SIZES. 3. REFERENCE 4/M5.2 & 5/M5.2 FOR CONNECTION DETAILS. IS TO TIE IN WITH HYDRONIC SYSTEM UPSTREAM OF AIR SEPARATOR NG VALVE EXPANSION TANK C-5- EXPANSION TANK DETAIL NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE NOTES: 1. BASIS OF DESIGN: SPIROVENT SUPPORT FROM CEILING 2. REFERENCE 2/M5.2 FOR BRACING DETAIL. Cs1 AIR/ DIRT SEPARATOR DETAIL NOT TO SCALE TO ELBOW, TEE, FULLY OPEN GATE VALVE MINIMUM STRAIGHT PIPE FLANGED CONNECTION FOR METER INSTALLATION KEY NOTES 0 INSTALL METER PER MANUFACTURES RECOMMENDATIONS. GROUNDING RINGS 2XD TO ANY VALVE, TEE OR ELBOW HORIZONTAL ELECTRODE PLANE ONO 04.0 CORRECT • (\\ POOL DRAIN METER INSTALLATION DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 3/4" DRAIN VALVE WITH HOSE ADAPTER AND CAP WELD NECK FLANGE (1YP) PROVIDE CHAIN OPERATOR IF VALVE IS 84" AFF AND PIPE IS 6" OR LARGER (TYP) 0 J L CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVE FLANGED CHECK VALVE SILENT NON- SLAMMING MINIMUM 24" SPOOL PIECE 5 PIPE DIA IF POSSIBLE SINGLE SPHERE FLEX CONNECTION (TYP) 1/2" INSTRUMENT PIPING (TYP) 1/2" BALL VALVE (1YP) PUMP FLANGE TAP (1YP) PROVIDE SPOOL PIECE IF NEEDED FOR CLEARANCE ALIGNMENT REQUIRED PRIOR TO STARTUP REFERENCE 3/M5.2 FOR CONNECTION DETAILS UNI -STRUT AND STRAP WITH EXPANSION ANCHORS INTO SLAB FOR PIPE BRACING. LOCATE STRAP AGAINST INSIDE CORNER OF PIPE TO RESTRICT MOVEMENT ALONG LINE OF PIPE VERTICAL ELECTRODE PLANE] INCORRECT SEE FLOOR PLANS FOR PIPE SIZES ALL VALVES ARE FULL SIZE OF PIPE STRAINER LIQUID FILLED PRESSURE GAUGE WITH NEEDLE ISOLATION VALVE SUBMITTAL TO SPECIFY PRESSURE RANGE LOCATE 5' -0" AFF MAX 1/2" P/T PORT (TYP 2) LUG STYLE BUTTERFLY ISOLATION VALVE (1YP) REDUCER SPOOL (TYP) SUCTION DIFFUSER, MATCH INLET TO PIPE SIZE MAINTAIN CLEAR ACCESS FOR STRAINER REMOVAL SPACE PROVIDE FINE MESH CONSTRUCTION STRAINER DURING STARTUP REMOVE BEFORE BALANCING 3/4" DRAIN WITH BALL VALVE HOSE ADAPTER AND CAP SUPPORT LEG ----- --- HOUSEKEEPING PAD NOTES: 1. GAUGE TAPS IN PUMP AND SUCTION DIFFUSER MAY BE USED INSTEAD OF PROVIDING THREAD -O -LETS FOR PRESSURE GAUGE. 2. PROVIDE MINIMAL DISTANCE BETWEEN HOUSEKEEPING PAD AND INERTIA BASE, I -1/2" MINIMUM, OR PER ACOUSTICAL ENGINEER. 3. PRE - EXTEND FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS ON PUMP DISCHARGE PER MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. 4. USE FLAT FACE FLANGE AND FULL FACE GASKET AT CLASS 125 OR 250 FLANGE FACES, USE RAISED FACE FLANGE AT CLASS 150 OR 300 FLANGE FACES. END SUCTION PUMP DETAIL WITH INERTIA BASE CONSTANT VOLUME PUMP ( NO VFD) NOT TO SCALE REVIEVVED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION DRAIN TO SUMP PIT RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA NOV 2 1 2012 PERMIT CENTER For Th instry fe Of Your Building SEATTLE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1- 800 - 669 -6223 PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503 - 331 -0234 www.mckinstry.com alliMilEMMIMMOMMIMMIN PROJECT: TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 TENNIS COURT PARKING REGISTRATION: TRACK POOL REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 9/26/12 90% CD'S 10/8/12 PERMIT DRAWINGS 11/19/12 REVISION 1 NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: ENGINEERING ARLISS MERRELL TIM WHITE SETH DAVIS C10256 7/31 /12 AS SHOWN SHEET TITLE: MECHANICAL DETAILS SHEET NUMBER: M5.0 GAS SUPPLY FLUE SEE HVAC PLANS FOR SIZE AND ROUTING 1-T & P RELIEF VALVE (TYP) DWH -1 GAS WATER HEATER (140f) GAS SHUT—OFF VALVE DIRT LEG V.2" 2" THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE BOD: LEONARD TM- 830 —RF /TC SHUT —OFF VALVE (TYP.) S COLD WATER " —_ 2 qS HOT WATER �— 2" HOT WATER RECIRC. 3/4" ST -1 STORAGE TANK (140'F) HOSE END DRAIN VALVE (TYP) FLOOR CONDENSATE DRAIN, ROUTE TO NEAREST FLOOR DRAIN NOTES: 1. SEE PLANS OR RISER FOR PIPE SIZES. 2. T &P VALVES FURNISHED WITH TANKS. 3. REFERENCE 1/M5.2 FOR CONNECTION DETAILS. ROUTE T &P RELIEF DRAINS TO NEAREST FLOOR DRAIN GAS WATER HEATER STORAGE TANK CONNECTION DETAIL SCALE: NOT TO SCALE DRAIN PAN MANUFACTURER SUPPLIED VENT TERMINATION VENT CAP HEIGHT PVC VENT PIPE SEE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE FOR VENT DIAMETER SLOPE VENT PIPE ®Y" PER FOOT BACK TO WATER HEATER NOTES: 1. VENT TERMINATION HEIGHT TO BE A MINIMUM OF 7-0" ABOVE PAVED DRIVEWAY AND AT LEAST 3' AWAY FROM GAS REGULATOR VENT OUTLET. 2. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS .INSTRUCTIONS AND IFGC 503.6.4 "GAS VENT TERMINATION" FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. VENT TERMINATION HEIGHT TO BE A MINIMUM OF 4' —O" ABOVE COMBUSTION AIR WATER HEATER FLUE TERMINATION DETAIL EXPANSION TANK EXTERIOR WALL WEATHERPROOF GAP BETWEEN DUCT AND. WALL, PROVIDE 90' TURNDOWN WITH BIRD SCREEN AT TERMINATION OF COMBUSTION AIR DUCT SEE M3.0 FOR LOCATION AND SIZE. COLD SUPPLY 1 1 HOT WATER TO FIXTURES 2" BALL VALVE FOR SETUP HOT WATER RECIRC I I TEMPERED CIRCULATOR KEY NOTES 01 FURNISH WITH TEST CONNECTION FOR SETUP. Q REFERENCE MANUFACTURERS LITERATURE FOR BALANCING AND SETUP REQUIREMENTS. INITIAL SUPPLY WATER SET POINT TO BE 120'F. AQUASTAT HEAT TRAP BALANCING VALVE CHECK VALVE " 1-3/4" ISOLATION VALVE TEMPERED RETURN THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE INSTALLATION DETAIL SCALE: NOT TO SCALE TYPICAL COMBUSTION AIR DETAIL NOT TO SCALE CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVE WITH POSITIVE SHUT —OFF AND MEMORY STOP SEE NOTE 2 MODULATING CONTROL VALVE W /SPRING RETURN REDUCER AS REQUIRED (TYP) MANUAL AIR VENT ONLY REQUIRED AT HIGH POINT (TYP -2 WHERE REQUIRED) Y— STRAINER W/ 3/4" HOSE END DRAIN VALVE IN CRITICAL ENVIRONMENT ABOVE CEILING PIPE TO FD RISER SIZES ARE FULL SIZE OF COIL CONNECTIONS (TYP) RISER FOOT UNION (TYP) 1/2" PETE'S PLUG (TYP) LINE SIZE FLEX CONNECTION (TYP -2) NOTES: 1. REFERENCE PIPING DIAGRAM LINE SIZES. 2. PROVIDE UPSTREAM /DOWNSTREAM PIPE DIAMETERS AS REQUIRED BY BALANCE VALVE MANF. IEVVED FOR COMPLIANCE PPROVED OV 2 8 2812 AHU SINGLE HYDRONIC COIL - 2 WAY VALVE 2 IN & SMALLER PIPING DETAIL RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA NOV 2 1 2012 PERMIT CENTER For Th instry fe 01 Your Buila'ing SEATTLE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PQ BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1 -800- 669 -6223 PROJECT: PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503-331-0234 www.mckinstry.com TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 TENNIS COURT PARKING REGISTRATION: TRACK POOL REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 9/26/12 90% CD'S 10/8/12 PERMIT DRAWINGS 11/19/12 REVISION 1 NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED ,BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: ENGINEERING ARLISS MERRELL TIM WHITE SETH DAVIS C10256 7/31/12 AS SHOWN SHEET TITLE: MECHANICAL DETAILS SHEET NUMBER: M5.1 EDGE OF HOUSEKEEPING PAD PLAN (11 1 HSS 5x3x3/16 TYP UNO 4 3 x 3 x 3/16 x 01-3" HSS TO HSS (TYP) 1 -1/2" WIDE x 16 ga BENT STRAP (TYP) HSS 5x3 AT TOP OF FRAME CAP R WITH SEAL WELD TOP AND BOTTOM. (TYP.) 2" MIN. <TYP SHARP TO HSS 2" MIN. HORIZONTAL HSS PER PLAN (TYP) (ALIGN W /STRAPS) STRAP PER PLAN (TYP) HOT WATER HEATER BY OTHERS VERT HSS PER PLAN 2" MIN.fl2" MIN. 4 PER PLAN (TYP) HOUSEKEEPING PAD r- R<IM.,&&:&\\/./\/‘\\&',6/.: ELEVATION NOTES: 1. SPECIAL INSPECTION REQUIRED PER IBC CHAPTER 17. 2. t =GAUGE OF MATERIAL. WATER HEATER ATTACHMENT DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 1 PROVIDE (4) 1/2" 0 HILTI TZ EXPANSION ANCHORS W/3 -1/4" EMBEDMENT ANCHORAGE SCHEDULE TAG HIL11 TZ ANCHOR EMBEDMENT NEOPRENE PAD & HG BUSHING COMMENTS PUMPS: P -1 CS 1/2" 0 3-1/4" • MASON SUPER W HG-50 40 FT EQUIPMENT LEG BASE RAIL OR FACTORY CURB HOUSEKEEPING PAD NEOPRENE ISOLATION PER SCHEDULE 3/16 V 6* MIN TOC -^ B J) CONCRETE SLAB J(EY NOTES: O PROVIDE MASON TYPE HGV-50 BUSHING MASON SUPER W PADS V PROVIDE CONNECTION AT EA CORNER IYP, LINO CONCRETE ANCHOR PER SCHEDULE SEISMIC ATTACHMENT DETAIL NOT TO SCALE TOLCO FIG 909 1" PIPE ONLY TOLCO FIG 980 1" THRU 2" IPPE. OR 12 GA CHANNEL EA END LONGITUDINAL BRACE AND CONNECTION TO STRUCTURE ARE SIMILAR TO TRANSVERSE BRACES BRACE PER TABLE 1 STRUCTURE - PROVIDE HILTI X" DIA 17 ANCHOR W/ 3 -1/4" EMBED (MIN.) ±15" 45' ALTERNATE BRACE UTIUZE FIG 216, TOLCO FIG 4A IF TRANSVERSE BRACE IS NOT LOCATED AT GRAVITY HANGER SINGLE PIPE TRANSVERSE USING PIPE BRACING ELEVATION DETAIL STRUCTURE - PROVIDE HILTI )" DIA TZ ANCHOR W/ 3 -1/4" EMBED (MIN.) 4 TYPICAL PIPE TO HANGER ATTACHMENT. UTILIZE STRUT MANF CLAMP OR BENT ROD LAW MSS SP -58 -2009 SINGLE PIPE LINGITUDINAL USING PIPE BRACING SECTION DETAIL LONGITUDINAL BRACE AND CONNECTION TO STRUCTURE ARE SIMILAR TO TRANSVERSE BRACES. LONGITUDINAL BRACE SHALL UTILIZE TOLCO FIG 4L OR TOLCO FIG 4A WITH RG 980. FOR COPPER TUBE UTILIZE COOPER B -LINE B3373CT AS LONGITUDINAL BRACE. PIPE OD CONDUIT RIGID BRACING SEISMIC DETAIL PANSION TANK CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PAD KEY NOTE: 0 SEE 4/M5.2 FOR ADDED INFO. PROVIDE (1) CONCRETE ANCHOR AT EA ANGLE (3) LOCATIONS MIN TYP. Ci TYPICAL EXPANSION TANK PARTIAL PLAN NOT TO SCALE ALLOWABLE BRACE LOADS MCKINSTRY BRACE TYPE RIGID 11R14CE MAX BRACE LENGTH WEIGHT PER FT AT BRACE SPACING (1B/F0 MINIMUM GRAWY A HANGER LOCATION „„ SESMIC ROD CLAMP SPACING 10 FT 20 FT 30 FT 40 FT MPRB -1" P SCH 40 1" 7 FT , 46.5 23.2 15.4 11.6 1/2" 12" MPRB 1.5" P SCH 40 1.5" • 10 FT 74.8 37.4 24.9 18.7 1/2" 12" 1. USE 12 GA GALVANIED OR CADNIUM•PLATED STRUT 2. THE LB /FT VALUES INDICATED IN TABLE ARE DERIVED USING FPH =1.0. THE LB /FT VALUE MAY BE MODIFIED UTIUZING THE TRUE ACCELERATION VALUE OBTAINED FROM THE MECHANICAL SEISMIC DESIGN SHEET. VALUES ARE MODIFIED AS FOLLOWS: (1 /FPH, ACTUAL) *(LB /FT)= ALLOWABLE BRACE LB /Ff. 3. COMPONENT SIZES CALCULATED USING ALLOWABLE STREET DESIGN (ASD). 4. LOADS MUST BE PRESENTED TO SER FOR REVIEW. GENERAL NOTES: 1. DO NOT MIX RIGID 'BRACING WITH CABLE BRACING IN THE SAME DIRECTION ON ANY PIPE RUN UNTIL AFTER A CHANGE IN DIRECTION AT AN ELBOW. 2. PIPING SHALL BE HUNG AT MAXIMUM GRAVITY HANGER INTERVALS AS OUTLINED IN 2009 IMC, 2009 IFGC, OR MSS SP-69. 3. BRACE SPACING AND TRAPEZE SUPPORT ANGLE SHALL BE SELECTED UIIUZING THE "MCKINSTRY PIPE HANGING AND BRACING" CALCULATOR. 4. BRACE DESIGN SHALL BE CONSISTENT WITH THE METHODS OUTLINED IN THE 'MCKINSTRY PIPE BRACING LAYOUT PROCEDURE'. 5. DO NOT USE RIGID BRACING FOR VIBRATION ISOLATED PIPING. SEE CABLE BRACE DETAIL IF VIBRATION ISOLATION IS REQUIRED. 6. DESIGN IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2009 IBC AND ASCE '7 -05 CRITERIA. 7. DETAIL IS DESIGNED TO ACCOMMODATE PIPING, PLUMBING, OR ELECTRICAL CONDUIT. 8. WHEN LARGE PIPE REQUIRES BRACING, PLEASE SEE MCKINSTRY ENGINEERING FOR APPUCABLE DETAILS. 9. ATTACH TO EXISTING UNISTRUT, CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE. 10. SEE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER IF CONNECTION DEVIATES FROM DETAIL 1/2 "0 HILTI TZ ANCHOR HOUSEKEEPING PAD r`ll�� 159 L_ CONCRETE SLAB REVIEWED FOR _,,ODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED It nt NOV 2 8 2012 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION L3X3X3/16 X 0' -3 ", FIT FLUSH AGAINST WALL OF TANK RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 10 2012 PERMIT CENTER EXPANSION TANK ANCHORAGE & SEISMIC DETAIL NOT TO SCALE For Th instry Me Of Your Building SEATTLE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1 -800 -669 -6223 PROJECT: PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503 -331 -0234 www.mckinstry.cam TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 TENNIS COURT PARKING REGISTRATION: TRACK POOL \.-„, EXPIRES 9 -23 -2014 REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 9/26/12 90% CD'S 10/8/12 PERMIT DRAWINGS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: ENGINEERING ARLISS MERRELL TIM WHITE SETH DAVIS C10256 7/31/12 AS SHOWN SHEET TITLE: . EQUIPMENT CONNECTION DETAILS SHEET NUMBER: M5.2 EXPANSION TANK '1 P -9 BOILER. 4" 1 POT 1 FEEDER I TO POOL FROM 1 POOL P -5 9 PNEUMATIC VALVE 0 4" P -21 1 L 4" POOL HEAT EXCHANGER PRV ASSEMBLY I 4" HC -6 POOL AHU COIL r ,4- 3/4" 1 HC-5 1 T--I 1 WOMEN'S ®1 I .BATHROOM LOBBY LOBBY REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER NPCW < J 3/4» HC-4 II _ 3/4" HC -2 3/4" of 1 I HC -3 1 -- -1 I - -7�--1 I -7-1 I ® FIRST ® MEN'S ®I LOCKER I LAID 1 LTHROOM J I ROOMS HEATING WATER PIPING DIAGRAM - DEMO NOT TO SCALE TUKWILA POOL SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS LNATATORIUM SPACE THE PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS TO DESCRIBE THE SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR THE CONTROL SYSTEM. THE CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CONTROL DEVICES, WIRING, PROGRAMMING AND APPURTENANCES NECESSARY TO PROVIDE A CONTROL SYSTEM TO EXECUTE THE INTENT DESCRIBED. THE SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS IS NOT A PROGRAMMING GUIDE. THE CONTROLS CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE FUNCTION OF THE SYSTEMS AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRED IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE FULLY FUNCTIONAL OPTIMIZED SYSTEMS. THE FRONT END CONTROLS TERMINAL SHALL BE PROGRAMMED TO SHOW MONITORED CONTROL POINTS ASSOCIATED WITH THE HEATING WATER AND AIRSIDE SYSTEMS. 1. GENERAL 1.1. THE BURNER CONTROL PANEL ASSOCIATED WITH THE BOILER SHALL CONTROL AND MONITOR THE BOILER OPERATION. REFERENCE MANUFACTURER LITERATURE FOR DETAILS OF OPERATION AND INSTALLATION. 1.2. THE BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS) ENABLES AND MONITORS THE BURNER CONTROL PANEL, AIR HANDLER SUPPLY FAN AND HEATING WATER PUMPS. 1.3. SET POINTS AND VALUES INDICATED SHALL BE GRAPHICALLY ADJUSTABLE VIA THE OPERATOR WORKSTATION. 1.4. THE SPACE TEMPERATURE SET POINT SHALL BE 86 °F. 1.5. THE INITIAL LOCKER ROOM OUTSIDE AIR PRE -HEAT COIL DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE SET POINT SHALL BE 90 °F. 1.5.1.ADDITIONAL COIL INITIAL DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE SET POINTS SHALL BE 90 °F. 1.6. PROVIDE TUNING AS REQUIRED TO OPTIMIZE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE. 1.7. THE CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE FOLLOWING: 1.7.1. GENERATING THE SEQUENCE OF OPERATION. 1.7.2. GENERATING THE CONTROL DIAGRAM COMPLETE WITH SYSTEM CONTROLS COMPONENTS. 1.7.3. TESTING AND VERIFICATION OF THE SEQUENCE OF OPERATION BEFORE FUNCTIONAL TESTING WITH THE COMMISSIONING AGENT. 1.7.4. PERFORMING FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING WITH THE COMMISSIONING AGENT. 1.8. THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE INITIAL BOILER SETUP. 1.9. THE CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE BAS CONNECTION TO BOILER BURNER. 1.10. CONTROLS CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT DRAWINGS AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION TO COMMISSIONING AGENT AND MCKINSTRY FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION AND PROGRAMMING. 1.11. CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL REFERENCE MCKINSTRY CONTROL PROVIDER PERFORMANCE STANDARD FOR PROJECT EXPECTATIONS AND WORK WITH COMMISSIONING AGENT FOR ADHERENCE. 1.12. OPERATE HEATING WATER SYSTEM PER EXISTING SEQUENCE FOR ITEMS NOT SPECIFICALLY ADDRESSED BELOW. 2. SET POINT ADJUSTMENT 2.1. A WARNING SCREEN SHALL BE GENERATED EACH TIME AN ADJUSTABLE SET POINT IS MODIFIED. THE WARNING SHALL READ "MODIFICATIONS OF THIS VALUE MAY ALTER SYSTEM ENERGY PERFORMANCE." 2.2. THE SYSTEM SHALL OFFER THE USER THE OPTION OF "PERMANENT VALUE ADJUSTMENT" OR "TEMPORARY VALUE ADJUSTMENT." 2.2.1.AT THE END OF EACH DAY, ALL "TEMPORARY VALUE ADJUSTMENT" INPUTS SHALL REVERT TO LAST "PERMANENT VALUE" INPUT. IF THERE ARE NO "PERMANENT VALUE" INPUTS, THEN REFERENCE DEFAULT VALUE USED IN INITIAL PROGRAMMING. 2.3. A LOG SHALL BE MAINTAINEDTHAT CATALOGS ANY SET POINT VALUE THAT HAS BEEN ADJUSTED. AT A MINIMUM, THE LOG SHALL CAPTURE: 2.3.1.USER ID, TIME OF DAY, AND DATE. 2.3.2.SET POINT THAT WAS MODIFIED. 2.3.3.SELECTION OF "PERMANENT" OR "TEMPORARY" VALUE ADJUSTMENT. 2.3.4.LAST "PERMANENT INPUT" VALUE OF SET POINT PRIOR TO CHANGE. 2.4. SET POINT ADJUSTED VALUE. 3. BOILER BURNER CONTROL PANEL 3.1. ENABLE AND DISABLE BURNER CONTROL PANEL THROUGH THE BAS SYSTEM. THIS COMMAND SHALL BE HARDWIRED TO THE BURNER. 3.2. THE BOILER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SET POINT SHALL REMAIN AS EXISTING. 3.3. PROVIDE OFFSETS, DEAD BANDS, TIME DELAYS AND SAFETIES FOR FULLY FUNCTIONAL AND OPTIMIZED SYSTEM THAT LIMITS SHORT CYCLING. 3.4. WHEN THE HEATING WATER SYSTEM IS ENABLED THE BURNER SHALL OPERATE TO MAINTAIN THE BOILER LEAVING WATER SUPPLY SET POINT. A.: HEATING WATER SYSTEM .41. THE HEATING WATER SYSTEM COMPONENTS SHALL BE ENABLED IF THERE IS A CALL FOR SPACE HEATING OR L -E e PNEUMATIC VALVE OSA HC-1 o I OSA J DEMOLITION KEY NOTES O ADD ALTERNATE DEMOLISH HEATING COIL. ® DEMOLISH PIPE SECTION FOR AIR SEPARATOR INSTALLATION. Q3 ADD ALTERNATE: DEMOLISH POOL AHU COIL ® DEMOLISH PNEUMATIC VALVES. H EXPANSION TANK I -7;7.4 BAS i P -9 BOILER OUTSIDE OUTSIDE Mwra `HC -6( I POT 1 FEEDER ITO ' 0 II POOL Q FROM i !POOL J P -5 " ID 4" PRV ASSEMBLY POOL HEAT EXCHANGER 4» N. HC -6 POOL AMU OCOIL T I - 3/4" „r--- 3/4" 01 � NE 1 N.. L I WOMEN'S �t®. BATHROOM .'I; LOBBY .61 F Il HC-4 ,r-- -- 3/4" rag 3/4., r 61 r 11 ® I 1 I1� I I -x--11 -.-, .-1 1 MEN'S ® BATHROOM . L'iT9C(IT SPACE SPACE NCI f <SA< SPACE SPACE 1 <osA< 1 BAS �. HWR AIR HANDLER ROOM HWS LFILTER ROOM L BOILER Room 3\ NATAORIUM AIR HANDLING UNIT SYSTEM DIAGRAM -} NOT TO SCALE 1 NO -t THE POOL IS CALLING FOR HEAT. 4.1.1: POOL TEMPERATURE SENSOR TO PROVIDE SIGNAL TO BAS. 4.2. THE BAS SHALL ENABLE/DISABLE THE HEATING WATER PUMP ON A CALL FOR HEATING FROM ANY ZONE. 4.3. RESET THE SUPPLY WATER TEMPERATURE TO THE HEATING COILS BASED ON DEMAND. 4.3.1. MODULATE THE 3 -WAY MIXING VALVE FOR THE HEATING WATER LOOP (CV -7) TO MAINTAIN THE SUPPLY - WATER TEMPERATURE SET POINT. 4.4. ON A CALL FOR HEATING, MODULATE THE HEATING WATER VALVE FOR THE RESPECTIVE ZONE TO MAINTAIN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE. 4.5. A SUMMARY OF THE HEATING WATER VALVE POSITIONS ASSOCIATED WITH THE HEATING COILS SHALL BE GENERATED BY THE BAS EVERY 5 MINUTES. UPON DAILY START THE VALVE POSITION WILL NOT BE POLLED UNTIL THE FIRST 15 MINUTES OF OPERATION HAS BEEN COMPLETED. 4.6. WHEN THE MOST OPEN VALVE IS GREATER THAN 90% OPEN, RAISE THE SUPPLY HEATING WATER SET POINT BY TWO DEGREES. 4.7. WHEN THE MOST OPEN VALVE IS LESS THAN 75% OPEN LOWER THE SUPPLY HEATING WATER SET POINT TWO DEGREES. 4.7.1.PROVIDE THE ABILITY TO INCLUDE /EXCLUDE ZONES USED IN POLLING AT THE OPERATOR WORKSTATION, 4.8. THE MAXIMUM VALUE OF THE HEATING WATER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE RESET SHALL BE 180 DEGREES F. 4.9. THE MINIMUM VALUE OF THE HEATING WATER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE RESET SHALL BE 160 DEGREES F. 4.10. CONTINUE TO OPERATE THE HEATING WATER PUMP FOR 5 MINUTES AFTER THE BOILER HAS BEEN DISABLED. 4.11. IF THE BOILER RETURN WATER TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW 140 °F OPERATE THE BOILER PUMP (P -9) TO MAINTAIN A MINIMUM RETURN WATER TEMPERATURE TO THE BOILER OF 150 °F. 5. PRIMARY SUPPLY FAN 5.1. THE AIR HANDLER SUPPLY FAN SHALL BE ENABLED AND DISABLED VIA THE OPERATOR WORKSTATION. 5.1.1.THE SUPPLY FAN VFD SHALL BE USED TO BALANCE THE SYSTEM. 5.1.2.THE SUPPLY FAN OPERATES CONTINUOUSLY. 5.2. ON A CALL FOR SPACE HEATING THE HEATING WATER COIL ASSOCIATED WITH THE PRIMARY AIR HANDLER SHALL MODULATE TO MAINTAIN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE. 5.2.1.THE SPACE TEMPERATURE SHALL BE THE AVERAGE OF THE TWO SENSORS IN THE SPACE. 5.3. THE OUTSIDE AIR DAMPERS AND RETURN AIR DAMPERS SHALL MODULATE TO MAINTAIN AN AVERAGE RELATIVE HUMIDITY BETWEEN 40% AND 60% IN THE NATATORIUM. 5.3.1. NATATORIUM HUMIDITY VALUE SHALL BE THE AVERAGE OF THE TWO SENSORS IN THE SPACE. 5.3.2. MAINTAIN A MINIMUM OUTSIDE AIR REQUIREMENT OF 5,600 CFM DURING OCCUPIED HOURS. 5.3.3. MAINTAIN A MINIMUM OUTSIDE AIR REQUIREMENT OF 0 CFM DURING UNOCCUPIED HOURS. 5.4 ON A CALL FOR COOLING, ENABLE ECONOMIZER COOLING IF THE OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE IS LESS THAN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE IS GREATER THAN 86 °F. 5.4.1 MODULATE THE OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER AND RETURN AIR DAMPERS IN SEQUENCE TO PROVIDE ECONOMIZER COOLING WHILE MAINTAINING THE SPACE HUMIDITY REQUIREMENTS. 5.5 THE OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER POSITIONS SHALL BE FIELD DETERMINED BY THE TAB AGENT BASED ON MAINTAINING THE MINIMUM OUTSIDE AIRFLOWS. 6. LOCKER ROOM SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FAN SYSTEM 6.1. THE SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FANS SHALL BE ENABLED AND DISABLED VIA THE BAS. 6.2: OPERATE THE FANS DURING OCCUPIED HOURS. 6.2.1.ON A CALL FOR HEATING DURING UNOCCUPIED HOURS, ENABLE THE FANS AND MODULATE THE E • W • R COIL VALVE TO MAINTAIN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE. 6.2.2.CLOSE HE OU IDE • ' DA 7. MECHANICAL ROOM EXHAUST FAN 7.1. OPERATE THE FAN CONTINUOUSLY. 7.1.1.SHUT DOWN FAN IF THE TEMPERATURE SENSOR IN THE LOWER LEVEL MECHANICAL ROOM READS 40 °F OR BELOW. 8.1. IF THE FREEZE STAT FOR -1 IS RIGGERED, SHUT DOWN THE SUPPLY FAN AND CLO H • SI DAMPER. 8.2. IF THE FREEZE STAT FOR THE LOCKER ROOM FAN IS TRIGGERED, SHUT DOWN THE SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FANS AND CLOSE THE OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER. 8. DOMESTIC HOT WATER SYSTEM 8.1 THE DOMESTIC WATER HEATER SHALL BE ENABLED AND DISABLED VIA THE BAS. 8.2 OPERATE THE SHUTTLE PUMP (P -4) TO MAINTAIN A WATER TEMPERATURE OF 140 °F IN THE STORAGE TANK (ST- 1). REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER C NPCW �%=1 BAS is- 11 ` HEATING WATER PIPING DIAGRAM NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE / CV -3 KEY NOTES \` 1 1 1 j 91- 1 __ 1 CV -1 O ADD ALTERNATE: PROVIDE HOT WATER COIL FOR LOCKER ROOMS. O PROVIDE AIR SEPARATOR. REFERENCE 6/M5.0 FOR CONNECTION DETAILS. ® ADD ALTERNATE: PROVIDE HOT WATER COIL FOR AIR HANDLER. ® FURNISH CONTROL VALVES (BY C.C.). INSTALLED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. ® PTO ROVIDE BAS. EXPANSION TANK. REFERENCE 5 /M5.0 FOR DETAILS. PROVIDE MECHANICAL ROOM EXHAUST FAN AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR. CONNECT J REFERENCE POOL SCOPE DOCUMENTS FOR PUMP INFORMATION. ® ADD ALTERNATE: PROVIDE HOT WATER COIL. ® PROVIDE HUMIDITY SENSORS WITH A RELATIVE HUMIDITY RANGE OF 20Z -95 %. 10 LOCATE VALVES FOR SYSTEM PRESSURE TESTING JUST INSIDE MECHANICAL ROOM. 11 RAND EFERENCE FIRE DETECTION S ELECTRICAL YS DRAWINGS TEM. FOR SUPPLY FAN INTEGRATION WITH THE SMOKE 12 HARD WIRE FREEZE STAT TO SHUT DOWN SUPPLY FAN. 13 USE AVERAGE OF BOTH SENSORS FOR TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY CONTROL 14 HARD WIRE FREEZE STAT TO SHUT DOWN SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FANS. 8.3 OPERATE THE DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATION PUMP (P -3) VIA THE INTERNAL CONTROLS TO MAINTAIN A TEMPERATURE AT THE PUMP OF 100 °F DURING OCCUPIED HOURS. 9. BAS INTERFACE WITH THE HEATING WATER SYSTEM 9.1 PROVIDE HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIRED TO ALLOW THE BAS SYSTEM TO INTERFACE WITH THE CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT. COORDINATE REQUIREMENTS WITH THE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER FOR THE INTERFACE. THE BAS SYSTEM SHALL SPECIFICALLY MONITOR OR PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING: 9.1.1 BOILER ENTERING AND LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURES 9.1.2 PRIMARY LOOP SUPPLY WATER TEMPERATURE 9.1.3 PRIMARY LOOP RETURN WATER TEMPERATURE 9.1.4 SECONDARY LOOP SUPPLY WATER TEMPERATURE 9.1.5 BOILER START /STOP COMMAND 9.1.6 BOILER BURNER FIRING RATE 9.1.7 HEATING WATER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SET POINT 9.1.8 BOILER BURNER STATUS 9.1.9 BOILER BURNER ALARM STATUS 9.1.10 BOILER BURNER ENABLE/DISABLE 9.1.11 HEATING WATER PUMP COMMAND 9.1.12 HEATING WATER PUMP STATUS 9.1.13 SUPPLY FAN MOTOR STATUS 10 ALARMING 10.1 ALARMS SHALL BE MONITORED AND CONTROLLED PER THE OWNERS STANDARDS. ADDITIONAL ALARMS ADDED PER OWNER REQUIREMENTS, 10.2 ALARMS SHALL BE ADDED TO THE ALARMS GRAPHICS SUMMARY PAGE(S) IN THE BAS. 10.3 "BOILER SHORT CYCLING ": GENERATE AN ALARM WHEN ANY BOILER 1S COMMANDED TO STOP AND START MORE THAN FIVE TIMES OVER A TIME PERIOD OF ONE HOUR. 10.4 "BOILER FAILURE ": GENERATE AN ALARM WHEN THE BOILER BURNER COMMAND DOES NOT MATCH THE BOILER BURNER STATUS. A TIME DELAY SHALL BE OBSERVED AFTER A CHANGE IN COMMAND TO ALLOW EQUIPMENT START -UP OR SHUT DOWN. 10.5 "DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE OUT OF RANGE ": GENERATE AN ALARM WHEN THE DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW THE FREEZE PROTECTION LOW LIMIT ABOVE. 10.6 "VALVE FAILURE ": GENERATE AN ALARM IF THE STATUS OF A CONTROL VALVE POSITION DOES NOT MATCH THE COMMANDED POSITION. 10.7 "DAMPER FAILURE ": GENERATE AN ALARM IF THE STATUS OF A DAMPER POSITION DOES NOT MATCH THE COMMANDED POSITION. 10.8 "LOW RETURN WATER TEMPERATURE ": GENERATE AN ALARM IF THE RETURN WATER TEMPERATURE TO THE BOILER FALLS BELOW 140 °F, 11 TRENDS 11.1 CONTROL POINTS MONITORED BY THE BAS ARE CAPABLE OF BEING TRENDED. 11.2 THE BAS SYSTEM SHALL PRODUCE TRENDS FOR THE FOLLOWING CONTROL POINTS: 11.2.1 BOILER ENTERING AND LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURES 11.2.2 BOILER FIRING RATE 11.2.3 OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE 11.2.4 SUPPLY FAN MOTOR STATUS 11.2.5 SPACE TEMPERATURE . 11.2.6 INDOOR AND OUTDOOR RELATIVE HUMIDITY 11.3 TREND DATA SHALL BE RECORDED OVER 15 MINUTE TIME INTERVALS AND SHALL BE COMPILED IN A SINGLE TREND STUDY. 11A THE MOST RECENT THREE MONTHS OF TRENDS SHALL BE REMOTELY ACCESSIBLE. OLDER DATA SHALL BE MADE AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST. 12 SAFETY PROTOCOL 12.1 BOILER BURNER SAFETY OPERATIONS SHALL BE.INTEGRAL TO THE OPERATION OF THE BOILER. THERE SHALL BE NO BAS SAFETY INTERACTION REQUIRED. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 • City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA NOV 2 1 2012 PERMIT CENTER For Th mstry le Of Your BuiIa'ing SEATTLE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1-800-669-6223 PROJECT: PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503-331-0234 www.mckinstry.com TUKWILA POOL POOL. MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 TENNIS COURT PARKING REGISTRATION: TRACK PO& REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 9/26/12 90% CD'S 10/8/12 PERMIT DRAWINGS 11/19/12 REVISION 1 NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: SHEET TITLE: ENGINEERING ARLISS MERRELL TIM WHITE SETH DAVIS C10256 7/31/12 AS SHOWN HEATING WATER PIPING AND CONTROLS DIAGRAMS SHEET NUMBER: I 5-c7 M6.0 2" 2-1/2" WATER HEATER EXPANSION TANK 314" TO POOL FILL MEN'S SINGLE USE ' MEN'S LOCKER ROOM WATER CLOSET WOMEN'S LOCKER ROOM HOSE BIB 3/4" DRINKING FOUNTAIN WOMEN'S STAFF .�t WOMEN'S SINGLE USE CI) PLUMBING ONE -LINE DIAGRAM DEMO SCALE: NOT TO SCALE J HOSE BIB 3/4" r I r.,.... — I t ® t t t FIRSTAID FROM CITY WATER DRINKING FOUNTAIN KEY NOTES 1/2" 314" 314" 'MEN'S STAFF SERVICE SINK JANITOR CLOSET O DEMOLISH FLUSHOMETERS. C2 ADD ALTERNATE DEMOLISH ISOLATION VALVES. INCLUDE ISOLATION VALVES NOT IDENTIFIED ON MECHANICAL PLANS AND NOTE ON AS —BUILT DRAWINGS. 314" SHOWER (ADA) WASHER REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE 1 APPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 10 2012 PERMIT CENTER MIS- -ism instry le Of Your Building • SEATTLE: 5005 3R0 AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1- 800 - 669 -6223 PROJECT: PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503 -331 -0234 www.mckinstry.com TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 TENNIS COURT PARKING REGISTRATION: POOL TRACK REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 9/26/12 90% CD'S 10/8/12 PERMIT DRAWINGS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: ENGINEERING ARLISS MERRELL TIM WHITE SETH DAVIS C10256 7/31/12 AS SHOWN SHEET TITLE: PLUMBING ONE -LINE DIAGRAM -DEMO SHEET NUMBER: MD6.1 2 -1121 P -4 DHW -1 EXPANSION TANK ST -1 1 r TO POOL FILL 17-- 1" r° WC-1 w.1 r..- S -1 -J U -1 d FROM CITY WATER SHEET NOTES 1. PIPE SIZES SHOWN ARE BASED ON INFORMATION FROM THE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS DATED 6 -29 -1990 AND ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. DOCUMENT DISCREPANCIES ON AS —BUILT DRAWINGS. 3/4" 1 MEN'S LOCKER ROOM 314" 314" L WOMEN'S SINGLE USE HOSE BIB 3/4" DRINKING FOUNTAIN WOMEN'S STAFF PLUMBING ONE -LINE DIAGRAM SCALE: NOT TO SCALE J HOSE BIB DRINKING FOUNTAIN KEY NOTES SERVICE SINK JAN- ITOR CLOSET ..,. O PROVIDE FLUSHOMETERS. O PROVIDE ISOLATION VALVES. INCLUDE ISOLATION VALVES NOT IDENTIFIED ON MECHANICAL DRAWINGS. ® PROVIDE FIXTURE. O PROVIDE FIXTURE, SHOWER PAN AND SURROUND. ® PROVIDE SPOOL PIECE FOR HOT WATER LINE AND CAP. ® REPAIR LEAK IN SUPPLY PIPING, COORDINATE ISSUE WITH OWNER FOR DETAILS. ..c REVIEWED FOR BODE COMPLIANCE L< APPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 • City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 10 2012 PERMIT CENTER 1 s For Th instry le Of Your Building SEATTLE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1- 800 - 669 -6223 PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503-331-0234 www.mckinstry.com MONIMINMENIONEMEMMINIMMINIIII PROJECT: TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 immommimmummilmmou TENNIS COURT PARKING REGISTRATION: POOL TRACK REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 9/26/12 90% CD'S 10/8/12 PERMIT DRAWINGS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: ENGINEERING ARLISS MERRELL TIM WHITE SETH DAVIS C10256 7/31/12 AS SHOWN SHEET TITLE: PLUMBING ONE -LINE DIAGRAM SHEET NUMBER: M6.1 FAN SCHEDULE DESCRIPTION UNIQUE TAG # SF -1 LOCATION OF FAN (ROOFTOP / ROOM NAME / PLAN GRID COORDINATES) FAN MECH ROOM BLADE TYPE (PROP / BI 1 FC / PLUG / MD ED / DIAMETER) MIXED. DRIVE TYPE AND HOUSING (BELT / DIRECT ; CABINET/ SWSI / INLINE ; CW / CCW ) BELT, INLINE CONTROL OF FAN (VARIABLE SPEED /CONSTANT / STAGED ARRAY) CONSTANT' AREA OF BUILDING /SYSTEM SERVED NATATORIUM MANUFACTURER DATA MANUFACTURER GREENHECK MODEL NUMBER (INCL. CLASS, ARRANGEMENT, ROTATION WHERE APPLICABLE) QEI -33 -II -200 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION (UL 762 GREASE / SPARK RESISTANT / ENAMEL PAINT) HI -PRO POLLYESTER COAT MOTOR DESCRIPTION (ODP 1 TEFC / ECM) TEFC FAN MOTOR EFFICIENCY (BY NEMA STANDARD MG -1, %) 91 AGENCY LISTING (UL / ETL) UL PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS LENGTH x WIDTH x HEIGHT (IN.) 65x50x77 INLET/ OUTLET DIMENSIONS (IN.) 46 /46 ACCESS & SERVICE CLEARANCE (FRONT / REAR 1 LEFT / RIGHT / TOP, IN) 42/6/010/6 OPERATING WEIGHT (LBS) 1644 PERFORMANCE DESIGN AIRFLOW (CFM) 21,000 CFM DESIGN TOTAL STATIC PRESSURE ( "W.C.) 3.5 DESIGN FAN SPEED (RPM) 1177 DESIGN FAN BRAKE HORSEPOWER (BHP) 16.8 ELECTRICAL DATA VOLTAGE / PHASE (V/10 OR Vl,30) 208/3 POWER RATING OF MOTOR PROVIDED (MHP) 20 MOTOR EFFICIENCY 93% ALTERNATE POWER SOURCE REQUIRED N/A VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE REQUIRED YES VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PROVIDED BY ELECT DISCONNECT PROVIDED BY ELECT CODE REQUIRED ELECTRICAL OUTLET PROVIDED BY ELECT ACOUSTICAL & SEISMIC FAN SPRING ISOLATION REQUIRED? YES SEISMIC ATTACHMENT METHOD (BOLT TO SLAB 1 WAFFLE PAD / SPRINGS & SNUBBERS) SPRINGS & SNUBBERS DUCT CONNECTION ISOLATION REQUIREMENTS FLEX DUCT MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF SEISMIC COMPLIANCE INCLUDED PER IBC 1708.4 YES SOUND POWER AT DESIGN CONDITION (RE 10 -12W) PER ARI 370-2001: 20 "x18" FOR 63 Hz BAND (INLET/ DISCHARGE, dB): 79 /87 FOR 125 Hz BAND (INLET/ DISCHARGE, dB): 88/89 FOR 250 Hz BAND (INLET/ DISCHARGE, dB): 93 /92 FOR 500 Hz BAND (INLET/ DISCHARGE, dB): 90 /96 FOR 1000 Hz BAND (INLET/ DISCHARGE, dB): 86/90 FOR 2000 Hz BAND (INLET/ DISCHARGE, dB): 82/86 FOR 4000 Hz BAND (INLET/ DISCHARGE, dB): 78181 FOR 8000 Hz BAND (INLET / DISCHARGE, dB): 69 /72 NOTES 1. VFD.REQUIRED PER WSEC, USE FOR SYSTEM BALANCING. 1. FURNISH WITH INERTIA BASE AND 1" SPRING ISOLATION. GAS BURNER DESCRIPTION . UNIQUE TAG# B -1 LOCATION OF BURNER (FLOOR #, ROOM NAME) MECHANICAL ROOM QUANTITY MODEL NUMBER SYSTEM SERVED HEATING WATER FUEL (NATURAL GAS / DIGESTOR GAS / PROPANE / OTHER) NATURAL GAS VENT METHOD (DIRECT/ SIDEWALL / VERTICAL POSITIVE / VERTICAL NEGATIVE) DIRECT WILL COMBUSTION AIR BE DUCTED TO BURNER? (YES / NO) YES MANUFACTURER DATA MANUFACTURER RIELLO MODEL NUMBER RS 100 /E COMBUSTION AIR APPROVED MATERIAL PVC BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERFACE PROVIDED? YES ARE ALARM CONTACTS PROVIDED FOR BULDING SYSTEM MONITORING? YES PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS OVERALL LENGTH x WIDTH x HEIGHT WITHOUT HOUSEKEEPING PAD (IN.) 33 "x22 "x22" OPERATING WEIGHT, INCLUDE FLUID (LBS.) 150 GAS CONN. SIZE, TYPE (IN.) 3" NPT PERFORMANCE . NATURAL GAS MINIMUM INPUT PRESSURE (IN. W.G.) 8,, NATURAL GAS MAXIMUM INPUT PRESSURE (IN. W.G.) 14" NATURAL GAS MAXIMUM INPUT FLOW (MBH) 4,405 ELECTRICAL QUANTITY OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS (INCLUDING PUMP IF REQUIRED) 1 VOLTAGE /PHASE (FOR EACH CONNECTION) 208/3 STANDBY ELECTRICAL POWER REQUIRED (YES /NO) ? NO DISCONNECT PROVIDED BY: ELECTRICAL NOTES: 1. GAS REGULATOR TO BE FURNISHED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR 2. PROVIDE BURNER WITH 1E2 MOTOR 3. DERATE BURNER FROM 4405 MBH TO 4200 MBH MAXIMUM INPUT FLOW MOTOR SCHEDULE TAG # M -1 M -2 MANUFACTURER LEESON LEESON MODEL NUMBER C184T17WB8A C145T17WB22A QUANTITY 1 1 SERVICE LOCKER ROOM SUPPLY FAN LOCKER ROOM EXHAUST FAN MOTOR HORSEPOWER 5 2 BRAKE HORSEPOWER 2.81 1.25 RPM 1800 1800 VOLTAGE /PHASE 208V /3PH 208V /3PH FRAME 184T 145T QUANTITY OF ELECTRICAL CONNETIONS 1 1 WIDTH x DEPTH x HEIGHT 8.5 "x10 "x17" 7.4 "x14 "x7.3" WEIGHT 90 48 LB NOTES 1,3 2,3 NOTE: 1. PROVIDE MOTOR AND FAN SHEAVE TO BALANCE SUPPLY FAN TO 3180 CFM 2. PROVIDE MOTOR AND FAN SHEAVE TO BALANCE EXHAUST FAN TO 3980 CFM 3. MOTORS TO BE SUITABLE FOR USE IN A HUMID CHLORINATED ENVIRONMENT. NOTES 1. TOILETS AND WATER CLOSETS ARE TO BE MANUAL FLUSH 2. DISCHARGE HEIGHT OF ACORN SHOWERS TO BE 6' -0" 3. PROVIDE FOUR - SHOWER STATIONS. 4. PROVIDE COLUMN EXTENSION FOR WATER CONNECTIONS FROM ABOVE. 5.4" ON CENTER FAUCETAND HOLES 6. PROVIDE DRAIN BASE WITH DOME GRATE PUMP SCHEDULE PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE P -1 P -3 P-4 AREA TAG WC -1 WC -2 L -1 L-2 L -3 L-4 SH -1 SH-2 SH -3 U -1 SERVICE WATER CLOSET ADA WATER CLOSET LAVATORY ADA LAVATORY LAVATORY FAUCET LAVATORY FAUCET SHOWER ADA. SHOWER SHOWER N/A DESCRIPTION LOCATION LOCKERS /BATHROOMS LOCKER ROOMS LOCKERS /BATHROOMS/ STAFF LOCKER ROOMS FIRST AID JANITOR ROOM MEN'S STAFF LOCKER ROOMS LOCKER ROOMS MEN'S LOCKERS /BATHROOM MANUFACTURER ZURN ZURN ZURN ZURN N/A N/A ZURN ACCESS _ Z7000 -HW13 -1.75 ACORN SHOWER -WARE 700 SERIES N/A N/A Z5615 Z5314 Z5314 N/A N/A Z-7101-LH-SS MODEL Z5615 TYPE WALL HUNG WALL HUNG WALL HUNG WALL HUNG N/A NIA PRESSURE BALANCE CARTRIDGE, BLADE HANDLE, INTEGRAL STOPS HAND HELD WITH METAL HOSE AND MOUNTING BAR CAPITAL COLUMN N/A NIA 20 "x18" 20 "x18" N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A NIA DIMENSIONS N/A OLSONITE 10CC OR ZURN 5955SS -EL, ELONGATED, OPEN FRONT, SOLID PLASTIC SEAT OLSONITE 10CC OR ZURN 5955SS -EL, ELONGATED, OPEN FRONT, SOLID PLASTIC SEAT N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A SEAT FLUSH VALVE ZURN Z6000- AV -WS1, BRASS WITH CHROME FINISH, MANUAL FLUSH ZURN Z6000- AV -WS1, BRASS WITH CHROME FINISH, MANUAL FLUSH N/A N/A NIA NIA N/A N/A N/A ZURN 26003 -AV WS1, BRASS WITH CHROME FINISH, MANUAL FLUSH FLOW RATE 1.6 GALLONS PER FLUSH • 1.6 GALLONS PER FLUSH 0.5 GPM 0.5 GPM 0.5 GPM N/A 1.75 GPM 1.75 GPM 1.6 GPM 1 GALLON PER FLUSH CARRIER ZURN 1200 SERIES ZURN 1200 SERIES ZURN 1200 SERIES ZURN 1200 SERIES NIA N/A N/A . N/A NIA N/A FAUCET MANUFACTURER N/A N/A ZURN ZURN ZURN ZURN N/A ZURN N/A N/A N/A N/A WA Z86500-3M SELF CLOSING METERING FAUCETS, 4" SPOUT Z86500 -3M SELF CLOSING METERING FAUCETS, 4" SPOUT Z871C4 POLISHED CHROME PLATED 8" BRASS DECK FAUCET Z841 N1 POLISHED CHROME- PLATED CAST BRASS SERVICE SINK FAUCET N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A FAUCET MODEL FAUCET DESCRIPTION N/A PRESSURE BALANCE CARTRIDGE, BLADE HANDLE, INTEGRAL STOPS N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ZURN ZURN • ACORN SHOWER HEAD MANUFACTURER SHOWER HEAD MODEL N/A N/A WA N/A N/A N/A Z-7000-88 N/A N/A SHOWER HEAD DESCRIPTION N/A NIA TWA N/A N/A N/A CHROME PLATED SHOWER HEAD NON-ADJUSTABLE SPRAY PATTERN SOLID BRASS, TRIPLE CHROME PLATED N/A N/A ZURN Z8743 GRID STRAINER OR APPROVED ZURN Z8743 GRID STRAINER OR APPROVED N/A NIA N/A N/A NIA N/A - DRAIN -RAP N/A N/A 1 -1/2" 17 GAUGE, CHROME PLATED 1 -1/2" 17 GAUGE, CHROME PLATED 1 -1/2" 17 GAUGE, CHROME PLATED N/A N/A N/A , N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ) NIA TRAP PRIMER SUPPLIES WA N/A 20" CHROME SUPPLIES W/ 3/8" COMP. FITTINGS, ANGLE STOPS AND ESCUTCHEON PLT, KEYLESS (COMMERCIAL) 20" CHROME SUPPLIES W/ 318" COMP. FITTINGS, ANGLE STOPS AND ESCUTCHEON PLT, KEYLESS (COMMERCIAL) W/ 318° COMP. FITTINGS, ANGLE STOPS AND ESCUTCHEON PLT, KEYLESS (COMMERCIAL) N/A N/A N/A NIA ? N/A NOTES 1 1 1,5 1,5 2,3'4,6 1 NOTES 1. TOILETS AND WATER CLOSETS ARE TO BE MANUAL FLUSH 2. DISCHARGE HEIGHT OF ACORN SHOWERS TO BE 6' -0" 3. PROVIDE FOUR - SHOWER STATIONS. 4. PROVIDE COLUMN EXTENSION FOR WATER CONNECTIONS FROM ABOVE. 5.4" ON CENTER FAUCETAND HOLES 6. PROVIDE DRAIN BASE WITH DOME GRATE PUMP SCHEDULE TAG # P -1 P -3 P-4 AREA MECHANICAL ROOM MECHANICAL ROOM MECHANICAL ROOM BASIS OF DESIGN B &G B &G B &G MODEL NUMBER 1510 SERIES 2BC e - 6 /BUXRC e3-6 /BUXRC SERVICE BUILDING HEATING WATER LOOP DHW CIRCULATION DHW CIRCULATION LOCATION MECHANICAL ROOM BOILER ROOM BOILER ROOM GPM 130 3 3 FT. TOTAL HEAD 62 5 5 FT. NPSH 6 - - MAX FLUID PRESSURE PSIG 175 150 150 MOTOR HP 5 28W 28W BRAKE HP 4.25 N/A N/A VOLTAGE /PHASE 208V /3PH 115 1 1 115 / 1 MOTOR EFFICIENCY PER WSEC PER WSEC PER WSEC RPM 1,750 - - VFD NO NO NO VFD BYPASS NO NO NO EMERGENCY POWER NO NO NO ELECTRICAL CONNECTION BY ELECT BY ELECT BY ELECT WEIGHT (LBS.) 250 LBS <10LBS <10LBS REMARKS 3,5 1,2,4,5 1,2,4,5 NOTES: 1. FURNISH WITH TIMER 2. FURNISH WITH INTERNAL ADJUSTABLE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 3. FURNISH SUCTION DIFFUSER 4. FURNISH WITH ISOLATION VALVES FOR SERVICE 5. REFERENCE POOL CONSULTANT DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL PUMPS BEING INSTALLED. GAS WATER HEATER SCHEDULE TAG # DWH -1 ST-1 MANUFACTURER A.O.SMITH A.O.SMITH MODEL NUMBER CYCLONE XI BTH 500 TJV-200-M QUANTITY 1 1 SERVICE DOMESTIC HOT WATER DOMESTIC HOT A CAPACITY (GALLONS) 130 POOL DRAIN METER ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE 40 °F BOILER MECHANICAL ROOM LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE 130 °F N/A WATER CONNECTION SIZE (NPT) 1 1/2" 2" GALLONS PER HOUR RECOVERY @ 100 DEGREE TEMPERATURE RISE 640 NIA GAS INPUT CAPACITY 499,900 BTUH N/A MINIMUM GAS PRESSURE 5" W.G. N/A MAXIMUM GAS PRESSURE 10" W.G. N/A GAS CONNECTION SIZE (NPT) 1 -1/2" N/A CONCENTRIC VENT NO • WA FLUE PIPE MATERIAL PVCA N/A FLUE PIPE DIAMETER N/A PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE SETTING (PSI) 0 150 ELECTRIC REQUIREMENTS 120/1/60 N/A QUANTITY OF ELECTRICAL CONNETIONS 1 N/A BLOWER ELECTRIC REQUIREMENTS 2.2 AMPS N/A IGNITER ELECTRIC REQUIREMENTS 4.0 AMPS N/A WIDTH x DEPTH x HEIGHT 33x76 32x77 WEIGHT WITH WATER 1934 LBS 2220 LBS ASME TANK YES YES NOTES 1 N/A NOTE: 1. PROVIDE CONDENSATE NEUTRALIZATION KIT METER SCHEDULE . . TAG # WM -1 WM -2 AREA MECHANICAL ROOM MECHANICAL ROOM BASIS OF DESIGN BADGER ONICON MODEL NUMBER TSM 450 F3200 METER TYPE RECORDALL TURBO SERIES FLOW METER IN -LINE WAFER STYLE ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOW METER SERVICE POOL FILL METER POOL DRAIN METER LOCATION POOL FILTER ROOM BOILER MECHANICAL ROOM CONNECTION SIZE 3" 4" DIMENSIONS (LxWxH) 12 "x7.5 "x9" 6 "Lx6 "W OPERATIONAL RANGE 5 -550 GPM 4-812 GPM REMARKS 1,2,3 3,4 NOTES: 1. FURNISH WITH RECORDALL TRANSMITTER REGISTER 2. FURNISH WITH INTEGRAL STRAINER 3. CONNECT TO BAS 4. FURNISH WITH 316SS GROUNDING RINGS AND INTERNAL TEFLON COATING REVIEWED E COMPLIANCE APPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA NOV 2 1 2012 PERMIT CENTER For Th instry fe Of Your Building SEATTLE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1 -800- 669 -6223 PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503 -331 -0234 www.mckinstry.com INMMMMIMMMMIMMNMIMIMNIMIINMMMMIMN . PROJECT: TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 TENNIS COURT PARKING REGISTRATION: POOL TRACK REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 9/26/12 90% CD'S 10/8/12 PERMIT DRAWINGS 11/19/12 REVISION 1 NO. DATE DESCRIPTION MENNENEMENIMMEMIENINIMMENIN McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: ENGINEERING ARLISS MERRELL TIM WHITE SETH DAVIS C10256 7/31/12 AS SHOWN SHEET TITLE: EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES SHEET NUMBER: M7.0 HVAC PIPING SPECIFICATION (WSEC); LATEST REVISION: 9- 29:2011 ID CATEGORY SERVICE DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER, PRODUCT OR EQUAL PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE SEISMIC INSUL. MEDIA TEST PRESSURE DURATION CODE IMPORTANCE IP INSULATION HANGERS DOMESTIC COLD WATER ALL 0.23 -0.27 75 FIBERGLASS 0.50 in 0.50 in 0.50 in 1.00 in HS &R HEATING HOT WATER HVAC HEATING DOMESTIC HOT WATER WATER 1.5 TIMES MAX OPERATING PRESSURE, BUT NOT LESS THAN 100 PSI 15 MINUTES 2009 IMG SECTION 1208 1.0 PER W.S.E.0 SEE INSULATION SCHEDULE INSERTS AT HANGERS AS APPLICABLE NORMAL OPERATING PRESS & TEMP: UP TO 100 PSI; 140 F TO 200 F; RELIEF TO REMAIN AS EXISTING 1.50 in 1.50 in NOTES 1, 2, & 4 HEATING WATER PIPE MATERIAL SIZES THRU 2" COPPER TUBE TYPE L ASTM B88 PER SUBMITTAL JOINTS SWT; THREADED AT SPECIALTIES AS APPLICABLE PER SUBMITTAL FITTINGS WROT COPPER/BRONZE SWT JOINT PER SUBMITTAL FLANGES, UNIONS, & COUPLINGS CAST BRASS / WROT COPPER; CLASS 150 PER SUBMITTAL WYE STRAINERS BRONZE BODY KECKLEY E150 (SINT) / F150 (FPT) EXPANSION JOINTS COMPENSATION FITTING AND /OR PIPING LOOP METRALOOP; DME; GLOBAL CM / CMS VALVES - ISOLATION 2 -PC BALL - FPT MILWAUKEE BA -400, NIBCO T-585-70 VALVES - ISOLATION 2 -PC BALL - SWT MILWAUKEE BA- 450, NIBCO S- 585 -70 VALVES - CHECK HORIZONTAL SWING, BRONZE BODY - THREADED MILWAUKEE -5101- 1510 -T, NIBCO-433Y VALVES - BALANCE CIRCUIT SETTER WITH TEST PORTS ARMSTRONG CBV; B &G CB VALVES - AUTO - BALANCE AUTO -FLOW CONTROL GRISWOLD / BELL & GOSSETT VALVES - DRAINING 2 -PC BALL - HOSE END WITH CAP & CHAIN MILWAUKEE BA- 100HTA / BA- 150HTH FLEX CONNECTIONS - PUMPS / AHUs BRAIDED FLEX PER SUBMITTAL FLEX CONNECTIONS - TERMINAL UNITS HOSE KIT- BRAIDED FLEX STRAINER, VALVES, PT PLUGS PER SUBMITTAL PRESSURE GAUGES SYSTEM PRESSURES STD 0 -150 PSI (OIL - FILLED AT ROTATING EQUIP) TRERICE 600 CB, 4.5" THERMOMETERS SYSTEM TEMPERATURE STD 0 -100 F TRERICE BX1 WITH THERMO WELL PIPE MATERIAL 21 12" AND UP CARBON STEEL PIPE ASTM A53B ERW SCH STD ASME 16.5 PER SUBMITTAL JOINTS GROOVED PER SUBMITTAL JOINTS BUTT WELD ASME B16.3 - STATE ON PLANS TO WELD INSIDE CONCEALED SHAFTS AND ABOVE NON - ACCESSIBLE CEILINGS? PER SUBMITTAL FITTINGS CARBON STEEL STD WT BUTT WELD / GROOVED PER SUBMITTAL FLANGES CARBON STEEL; CLASS 150 PER SUBMITTAL COUPLINGS ZERO -FLEX GROOVED PER SUBMITTAL WYE STRAINER CAST IRON; CLASS 125 KECKLEY STYLE A 'EXPANSION JOINTS COMPENSATION FITTING AND /OR PIPING LOOP METRALOOP; DME GLOBAL CM / CMS VALVES - ISOLATION BUTTERFLY CLASS 150 LUG BODY MILWAUKEE CL-223E /`CL -323E VALVES - ISOLATION BUTTERFLY - GROOVED ANVIL AN -7721 / AN -7722 VALVES - CHECK SWING 1 SPRING MILWAUKEE F- 2974(M), SILENT CHECK 1800 VALVES - PLUG CAST IRON; CLASS 125 (AT PUMP DISCHARGE WHEN NO VFD) RESUN 1431 VALVES - BALANCE CIRCUIT SETTER WITH TEST PORTS ARMSTRONG CBV; B &G CB VALVES - AUTO- BALANCE AUTO -FLOW CONTROL GRISWOLD / BELL & GOSSETT . COND • CONDENSATE PIPING TO DRAIN HVAC CONDENSATE DRAIN SLOPE TO INDIRECT WASTE N/A WATER PLUGS & FILL MIN15 MINUTES; VISUAL CHECKS FOR LEAKS 2009 UPC, SECTION 723.0 1.0 VARIES NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE ATMOSPHERIC MATERIAL SIZES THRU 3" COPPER TUBE TYPE L ASTM B88 PER SUBMITTAL JOINTS SWT; THREADED AT SPECIALTIES AS APPLICABLE PER SUBMITTAL FITTINGS WROT COPPER/BRONZE SWT JOINT PER SUBMITTAL FLANGES, UNIONS, & COUPLINGS CLASS 150 CAST BRASS / WROT COPPER PER SUBMITTAL LPG, MPG . LOW PRESSURE NATURAL GAS MEDIUM PRESSURE NATURAL GAS FUEL. GAS DISTRIBUTION NA AIR 150% OF WORKING PRESSURE BUT NOT LESS THAN 3 PSIG 1/2 HOUR PER 500 CUBIC FEET OF PIPE VOLUME, NOT MORE THAN 24 HOURS 2009 IFGC, SECTION 406 1.5 NA NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURE: 0 TO 5 PSI PIPE MATERIAL SIZES THRU 2" CARBON STEEL PIPE A53B ERW SCH STD ASME 16.5 PER SUBMITTAL JOINTS THREADED AND COUPLED, PIPE SEALANT PER SUBMITTAL FITTINGS, UNIONS, & COUPLINGS MALLEABLE IRON, UNION CLASS 150 ASME B16.3 PER SUBMITTAL FLEX CONNECTIONS AGA APPROVED GLOBAL FLEX UN SERIES VALVES - ISOLATION BALL MILWAUKEE BB2 -100 OR NIBCO T-585-70-UL VALVES - ISOLATION PLUG RESUN R -1430; NORDSTROM EQUAL ALTERNATE SIZES THRU 2" PIPE MATERIAL ASTM A240 TYPE 300 CORRUGATED SS TUBING GASTITE JOINTS ALTERNATE PROPRIETARY FLARED FITTINGS GASTITE FITTINGS ALTERNATE PROPRIETARY FLARED FITTINGS GASTITE ALTERNATE SIZES 2 -1/2" AND UP PIPE MATERIAL CARBON STEEL PIPE A53B ERW SCH STD ASME 16.5 PER SUBMITTAL JOINTS BUTT WELD PER SUBMITTAL FITTINGS BUTT WELD ASME B16.9 PER SUBMITTAL FLANGES, UNIONS, & COUPLINGS CLASS 150; FORGED STEEL PER SUBMITTAL FLEX CONNECTIONS AGA APPROVED GLOBAL FLEX UN SERIES VALVES - ISOLATION PLUG RESUN R- 1431; NORDSTROM EQUAL PIPE & EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE PIPING SYSTEM TEMP RANGE THERMAL CONDUCTANCE MEAN RATING TEMPERATURE INSULATION MATERIAL INSULATION THICKNESS BY PIPE SIZE INSUL. Runouts to 2" 314" or Less 1" to <1 -1/2" 1 -112" to <4" 4" to <8" 8" or Larger HANGERS DOMESTIC COLD WATER ALL 0.23 -0.27 75 FIBERGLASS 0.50 in 0.50 in 0.50 in 1.00 in 1.00 in 1.00 in NOTES 1, 2, & 4 DOMESTIC HOT WATER > 105 0.24 -0.28 100 FIBERGLASS 1.00 in 1.00 in 1.00 in 1.50 in 1.50 in 1.50 in NOTES 1, 2, & 4 HEATING WATER 141 -200 0.25 -0.29 125 FIBERGLASS 1.50 in 1.50 in 1.50 in 1.50 in 2.00 in 2.00 in NOTES 3 & 4 CONDENSATE DRAINS ALL 0.23 -0.27 75 FIBERGLASS 0.50 in 0.50 in 0.50 in _ 0.50 in 1.00 in . 1.00 in NOTES 1, 2, & 4 NOTES 1 FOR PIPING CLAMPED TO UNISTRUT SUPPORTS, UTILIZE RIGID INSERTS WITH SHEETMETAL SHIELDS CONTINUOUS THROUGH THE HANGER; UTILIZE CALCIUM SILICATE INSERTS OR STYRENE INSERTS 2 FOR PIPING SUPPORTED FROM CLEVIS HANGERS, IF RIGID INSERTS ARE NOT UTILIZED THE INSULATION SHALL FULLY ENCLOSE THE HANGER AND BE SEALED AT THE TOP AROUND THE SUPPORT ROD; IF RIGID INSERTS ARE UTILIZED THE INSULATION SHALL BE CONINUOUS THROUGH THE HANGER; INSERT MATERIAL TO BE CALCIUM SILICATE INSERTS OR STYRENE INSERTS 3 UTILIZE RIGID INSERTS AND SHEETMETAL SHIELDS; INSULATION TO BE CONTINUOUS THROUGH THE HANGER; UTILIZE CALCIUM SILICATE INSERTS OR STYRENE INSERTS 4 JACKETING: METAL JACKETING (SEALED WEATHER TIGHT) WILL BE APPLIED ON ALL EXTERIOR INSULATION EXPOSED TO WEATHER (I.E. ROOFTOP PIPING). PVC JACKET WITH RIGID INSULATION WILL BE USED INDOORS ON HORIZONTAL PIPING AT OR NEAR THE FLOOR WHEN SUBJECT TO POTENTIAL FOOT TRAFFIC. PVC JACKETING WILL BE UTILIZED ON ALL EXPOSED INSULATION WITHIN 6 FEET OF THE FLOOR ELEVATION (I.E. MECHANICAL ROOMS AND GARAGE HOSE BIBBS), PVC IS RECOMMENDED INSTEAD OF METAL IN EXPOSED AREAS DO TO ITS RESILIENCY - METAL JACKETING WILL DENT AND REMAIN DEFORMED WHEREAS PVC WILL POP BACK TO ORIGINAL CONDITION GAS PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE DESCRIPTION BASIS OF DESIGN ET-2 MAX INDIVIDUAL LOAD (BTU /HR) OPERATING TEMP RANGE ° (F) PIPE SIZE (NPT) VENT CONNECTION SIZE (NPT) INLET GAS PRESSURE STANDARD SPRING ORIFICE SIZE NOTES TAG # MAKE MODEL QTY PRV -1 ITRON B31 R • 1 500,000 LO -20 HIGH 150 1 -1/2" 1" 2 PSI 5.5 - 8 IN. WC 5/16" 1 PRV-2 ITRON B34R 1 4,200,000. LO -20 HIGH 150 2" 1" 2 PSI 8 -14 IN. WC 7/8" 1 NOTES: 1. VALVE PROVIDED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR EXPANSION TANK SCHEDULE DESCRIPTION TAG ET-2 LOCATION MECHANICAL ROOM QUANTITY 1 TYPE AND ARRANGEMENT (CLOSED / BLADDER 1 DIAPHRAGM) BLADDER SYSTEM SERVED HEATING WATER BASIS OF DESIGN - AS APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION OR AS PROPOSED? PROPOSED MANUFACTURER ITT MODEL NUMBER D -100V MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION STEEL ASME RATING YES PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS DIAMETER x HEIGHT (IN) 16x69 SERVICE CLEARANCE (FRONT / REAR / LEFT / RIGHT / TOP) (IN) 18 OPERATING WEIGHT, TANK AND WATER (LBS) 632 CONNECTION SIZE 112" PERFORMANCE . SYSTEM VOLUME (GAL) 500 SYSTEM LOWER TEMPERATURE ( °F) 50 SYSTEM HIGHER TEMPERATURE ( °F) 200 SYSTEM PRESSURE AT LOWER TEMPERATURE (PSIG) 25 SYSTEM PRESSURE AT HIGHER TEMPERATURE (PSIG) 45 EXPANSION TANK VOLUME REQUIRED (GAL) 52 EXPANSION TANK VOLUME SELECTED (GAL) 55 TANK ACCEPTANCE VOLUME REQUIRED / MAXIMUM (GAL) 19/22.6 RELIEF VALVE SETTING (PSIG) 50 SEISMIC SEISMIC ATTACHMENTS: YES QUANTITY OF MOUNTING POINTS PER MFG FACTORY CERTIFIED STAMPED CALCULATIONS INCLUDED PER IBC -1621 PER STRUCTURAL EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE DESCRIPTION UNIQUE TAG # EF -1 LOCATION OF FAN (ROOFTOP 1 ROOM NAME / PLAN GRID COORDINATES) ROOF BLADE TYPE (PROP / BI / FC / PLUG / MIXED / DIAMETER) BI DRIVE TYPE AND HOUSING (BELT/ DIRECT ; CABINET/ SWSI / INLINE ; CW / CCW ) BELT, INLINE CONTROL OF FAN (VARIABLE SPEED / CONSTANT/ STAGED ARRAY) CONSTANT AREA OF BUILDING/ SYSTEM SERVED MECHANICAL ROOM MANUFACTURER DATA MANUFACTURER GREENHECK MODEL NUMBER (INCL. CLASS, ARRANGEMENT, ROTATION WHERE APPLICABLE) GB-141-4 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION (UL 762 GREASE / SPARK RESISTANT/ ENAMEL PAINT) HI -PRO POLLYESTER COAT MOTOR DESCRIPTION (ODP / TEFC / ECM) ODP FAN MOTOR EFFICIENCY (BY NEMA STANDARD MG -1, %) $4 AGENCY LISTING (UL / ETL UL PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS LENGTH x WIDTH x HEIGHT (IN.) 28.4x28.4114 EXISTING ROOF CURB DIMENSIONS (IN.) 2646 • OPERATING WEIGHT (LBS) 73 PERFORMANCE DESIGN AIRFLOW (CFM) 1,500 CFM DESIGN TOTAL STATIC PRESSURE ("W.C.) 0.25 DESIGN FAN SPEED (RPM) - 1725 DESIGN FAN BRAKE HORSEPOWER (BHP) 0.21 ELECTRICAL DATA _ VOLTAGE 1 PHASE (V /1e OR V/3s) 115/1 POWER RATING OF MOTOR PROVIDED (MHP) 0.25 ALTERNATE POWER SOURCE REQUIRED N/A DISCONNECT PROVIDED BY ELECT CODE REQUIRED ELECTRICAL OUTLET PROVIDED BY . ELECT ACOUSTICAL & SEISMIC FAN SPRING ISOLATION REQUIRED? NO SOUND POWER AT DESIGN CONDITION (RE 10 -12W) PER ARI 370 -2001: 0.21 FOR 63 Hz BAND (INLET/ DISCHARGE, dB): 71 FOR 125 Hz BAND (INLET/ DISCHARGE, dB): 75 FOR 250 Hz BAND (INLET/ DISCHARGE, dB): 70 FOR 500 Hz BAND (INLET/ DISCHARGE, dB): 63 FOR 1000 Hz BAND (INLET/ DISCHARGE, dB): 58 FOR 2000 Hz BAND (INLET 1 DISCHARGE, dB): ' 58 FOR 4000 Hz BAND (INLET/ DISCHARGE, dB): 49 FOR 8000 Hz BAND (INLET/ DISCHARGE, dB): 42 , NOTES 1. FURNISH WITH TRANSITION CURB HOT WATER COIL SCHEDULE TAG # . HC-1 HC-2 HC-3 HC-4 HC-5 BASIS OF DESIGN COLMAC COLMAC COLMAC COLMAC COLMAC LOCATION STORAGE & JAN ITOR FIRST AID MENS STAFF ENTRY WOMENS STAFF H EAT IN G COIL EWT (MAX H EAT IN G) 180 °F 180 °F 180 °F 180 °F 180 °F H EATING COIL LINT (MAX HEAT IN G) 160 °F 160 °F 160 °F 160 °F 160 °F H EATING COIL CAPACITY (M BH) 242 47.6 93.6 58.4 88.6 HEATINGWATERPROPOLYNEGLYCOL% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% HEATINGCOILGPM 17. GPM 6.6 GPM 10.GPM 6.6 GPM 7.4 GPM FLUID PRESSURE DROP (FT H20) 3.54 6.96 3.85 6.66 1.84 AIR PRESSURE DROP (IN W.C.) 0.13 0.13 0.21 0.13 0.32 TUBE SIZE (CU /AL) 5/8" 5/8" 6J8" 5/8" 5/8" COILWIDTH (IN) 60 24 80 30 30 COIL HEIGHT (IN) 18 12 16 12 12 COILWEIGHT (DRY) 49 30 _ 42 35 36 REVIEVVED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 City 01 Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION AIR / DIRT SEPARATOR SCHEDULE TAG # AS -1 LOCATION _ BOILER ROOM SERVES HEATING WATER SYSTEM BASIS OF DESIGN MANUFACTURER ' SPIROTHERM MODEL NUMBER VDN 500 PHYSCIAL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT DIAMETER/HIGHT 12.8" 141.7" INLET SIZE - INCHES ' 5 OUTLET SIZE - INCHES 5 TYPE OF INLET CONNECTION FLANGED TYPE OF OUTLET CONNECTION FLANGED BLOWDOWN DRAIN CONNECTION - INCHES 1 OPERATING WEIGHT - POUNDS 326 PERFORMANCE FLUID TYPE WATER CAPACITY- GALLONS PER MINUTE 263 ACTUAL PRESSURE DROP - FEET OF HEAD 0.8 VERTICAL STRAINER YES BRACKETS FOR SEISMIC BRACING YES CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS SHELL CARBON STEEL ASME SECTION VIII, DIVISON 1 YES MAXIMUM WORKING PRESSURE- PSIG 150 MAXIMUM OPERATING TEMPERATURE - F 270 1. PROVIDE MBV -1 MANUAL BLOW DOWN VALVE 2. PROVIDE PIPE TRANSITIONS AT FLANGED CONNECTIONS RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA NOV 2 1 2012 PERMIT CEN.TER ;1 M7.1 For Th Autry ife Of Your Building SEATTLE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEA-171.E, WA 98124 1- 800 -669 -6223 PROJECT: PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503- 331 -0234 www.mckinsiry.com TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 TENNIS COURT PARKING REGISTRATION: POOL (Th TRACK REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 9/26/12 90% CD'S 10/8/12 PERMIT DRAWINGS 11/19/12 REVISION 1 NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: ENGINEERING ARLISS MERRELL TIM WHITE SETH DAVIS C10256 7/31/12 AS SHOWN SHEET TITLE: EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES SHEET NUMBER: PLUMBING SPECIFICATION (WSEC); LATEST REVISION: 8 -31 -11 ID CATEGORY SERVICE DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER, PRODUCT OR EQUAL PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE SEISMIC VALVE MEDIA TEST PRESSURE DURATION CODE IMPORTANCE Ip INSULATION CV VALVE MODULATING / POSITION +1" SMACNA SEAL CLASS LEVEL C +1/2" NO SEAL SEAL CLASS LEVEL C TAG SERVED SIZE SIZE TYPE cw & HW HWC (POTABLE) COLD WATER (DOMESTIC) HOT WATER (DOMESTIC) 140T WATER CIRCULATION DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER SERVICE RATING (PSI) AIR OR WATER 100% OF OPERATING. PRESSURE 15 MINUTES OR MFG SPEC UPC CHAPTER 6 NSF 61 UPC APPENDIXA IAPMO INSTALLATION STANDARDS 1.0 PER W.S.E.0 SEE INSULATION SCHEDULE NO INSERTS AT HANGERS USE INSERTS AT CLAMPS INSERTS TO BE STYRENE OPERATING PRESSURE UP TO 100 PSI; SET RELIEF TO 100 PSI CV-1 HC -1 1 1 -1/2" PIPE MATERIAL SIZES THRU 2" COPPER TUBE TYPE 1 ASTM B88 PER SUBMITTAL JOINTS SWT; THREADED AT SPECIALTIES WHERE APPLICABLE PER SUBMITTAL FITTINGS • WROT COPPER / CAST BRONZE SWT JOINT PER SUBMITTAL VALVES - ISOLATION BALL TYPE - SWT MILWAUKEE BA -4868; NIBCO S- 585 -70 SPECIALTIES MISC. PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS HC-2 1 1" PIPE MATERIAL SIZES 2 -1/2" THRU 4" COPPER TUBE TYPE L ASTM B88 PER SUBMITTAL JOINTS GROOVED PER SUBMITTAL FITTINGS WROT COPPER / CAST BRONZE SWT JOINT PER SUBMITTAL VALVES - ISOLATION BUTTERFLY VICTAULIC SERIES 608 SPECIALTIES . MISC. PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS HC-3 1 1 -1/2" 1" CCV HEATING COIL ALTERNATE SIZES THRU 2" B223 200 PIPE MATERIAL COPPER TUBE TYPE L ASTM B88 PER SUBMITTAL 10 1.05 MODULATING ALTERNATE SIZES 2 -1/2" THRU 4" 1,2,3,4 CV-4 PIPE MATERIAL COPPER TUBE TYPE L ASTM B88 PER SUBMITTAL 1/2" CCV HEATING COIL ALTERNATE (DCW ONLY TO COMPLY WITH NSF 61) - SIZES 2-1/2" AND UP B214 200 PIPE MATERIAL STAINLESS STEEL PIPE TYPE 304L SCH 10S A312 SEAMLESS PER SUBMITTAL JOINTS ALTERNATE GROOVED PER SUBMITTAL FITTINGS ALTERNATE GROOVED TYPE 304 STAINLESS STEEL ` PER SUBMITTAL VALVES - ISOLATION GROOVED -END; BUTTERFLY; UPC - APPROVED ANVIL AN- 7721 -3; VICTAULIC SERIES 300 3/4" CCV HEATING COIL . ALTERNATE (PLASTIC) SIZES THRU 2" B218 200 PIPE MATERIAL PEXASTM F876 /ASTM F877 PER SUBMITTAL JOINTS INSERT TYPE (BRASS) W/ EXPANSION COLLAR PER SUBMITTAL FITTINGS PIPE INSERT + EXPANSION COLLAR ASTM F1807 /ASTM F1960 PER SUBMITTAL VALVES - ISOLATION BALL MILWAUKEE BA -4845; NIBCO 8- 585 -70 SPECIALTIES MISC. PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS BELIMO B261 100 W SANITARY WASTE - ABOVE GROUND . CAST IRON SANITARY WASTE 60 WATER OR AIR WATER 10 FT HEAD FILL SYSTEM FROM LOWEST TO HIGHEST POINT OF TEST SECTION DO NOT USE AIR FOR PLASTIC PIPE TESTING VISUAL INSPECTION WITH NO LEAKS UPC CHAPTER 7 1.0 N/A OPERATING PRESSURE UP TO 5 PSI 4" GLOBE MIXING BELIMO PIPE MATERIAL ALL SIZES CAST IRON NO -HUB ASTM D2665 PER SUBMITTAL JOINTS NHCI COUPLINGS - STANDARD PER SUBMITTAL FITTINGS CAST IRON DRAIN PATTERNS PER SUBMITTAL SPECIALTIES CLEAN -OUT FITTINGS PER PLUMBING SCHEDULE ALTERNATE ALL SIZES PIPE MATERIAL PVC SCH DWV OR ABS SCH DWV PER SUBMITTAL JOINTS SOLVENT WELD PER SUBMITTAL FITTINGS SOLVENT WELD DWV FITTINGS PER SUBMITTAL SPECIALTIES MISC. PER PLUMBING SCHEDULE CONTROL VALVE SCHEDULE VALVE UNIT Q.LY PIPE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE CLOSE -OFF MIN. BODY SPRING RETURN FLOW CV VALVE MODULATING / POSITION +1" SMACNA SEAL CLASS LEVEL C +1/2" NO SEAL SEAL CLASS LEVEL C TAG SERVED SIZE SIZE TYPE FUNCTION DESIGN MODEL RATING (PSI) RATING (PSI) TYPE GPM ACTUAL DP(PSI) OPEN -CLOSE FEEDBACK NOTES CV-1 HC -1 1 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" CCV HEATING COIL BELIMO B338 200 400 SPRING RETURN 21.7 19 1.30 MODULATING YES 1,2;3,4 CV-2 HC-2 1 1" 1/2" CCV HEATING COIL BELIMO B214 • 200 600 SPRING RETURN 5.6 . 5 1 1.05 MODULATING YES 1,2,3,4 CV-3 HC-3 1 1 -1/2" 1" CCV HEATING COIL BELIMO B223 200 600 SPRING RETURN 14.0 10 1.05 MODULATING YES 1,2,3,4 CV-4 HC-4 1 1" 1/2" CCV HEATING COIL BELIMO B214 200 600 SPRING RETURN 5.6 5 1.05 MODULATING YES 1,2,3,4 CV-5 • HC-5 1 1 -1/4" 3/4" CCV HEATING COIL . BELIMO B218 200 600 SPRING RETURN • 7,4 7 1.12 MODULATING YES 1,2,3,4 CV-6 HC-6 1 3" 2 -1/2" CCV HEATING COIL BELIMO B261 100 400 SPRING RETURN 70.0 60 1.38 MODULATING YES 1,2,3,4 CV-7 SPACE HEATING LOOP 1 4" 4" GLOBE MIXING BELIMO G7100 150 250 SPRING RETURN 130.0 190 0.47 MODULATING YES 1,2,3 NOTES: 1. VALVE FURNISHED BY CONTROL CONTRACTOR. 2. VALVE INSTALLED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. . 3. VALVE WIRED BY CONTROLS CONTRACTOR. 4. PIPE SIZES ARE ESTIMATED BASED ON FLOW, MECHANICAL AS -BUILT DRAWINGS NOT AVAILABLE. PROVIDE ACTUAL PIPE SIZES DURING CONSTRUCTION FOR AS -BUILT DRAWINGS. HVAC DUCT SPECIFICATION (WSEC) PRESSURE CLASS LATEST REVISION: 8 -31 DUCT MATERIALS -11 FITTINGS FLEX CONNECTION! FLEX DUCT SEAL CLASS CLEANLINESS DURING . CONSTRUCTION INSULATION (INDOOR, OUTDOOR) LINING MATERIALS SEISMIC CRITERIA SEISMIC IMPORTANCE FACTOR IP NOTES DUCT SYSTEM HVAC SUPPLY LOW PRESSURE TERMINALS TO DIFFUSERS FAN COIL UNITS TO DIFFUSERS HEAT PUMPS TO DIFFUSERS SMACNA +1/2" OR +1" PRESSURE NOTE: MCKINSTRY BUILDS ALL LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH +1" SMACNA GUIDELINES TO MAXIMIZE PRODUCTION EFFICIENCY GALVANIZED DUCT; GAUGE AND REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE SMACNA OR BETTER RECTANGULAR MAY BE S +DRIVE ROUND MAY BE SNAPLOCK. GALVANIZED DUCT; GAUGE AND REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE SMACNA OR BETTER RECTANGULAR TO HAVE TDF CONNECTIONS ROUND MAY BE SNAPLOCK ELBOWS: PURCHASED ADJUSTABLE ELBOWS IN ACCORDANCE WITH SMACNA +1" STANDARDS CL RADIUS OF 1.0 DIA ON DUCTS LARGER THAN 24" SPIN -IN / ATTO BRANCHES OK ELBOWS: CENTERLINE RADIUS OF 1.5 DIA OR MITERED 90S WITH VANES OR PURCHASED ADJUSTABLE ELBOWS IN ACCORDANCE WITH SMACNA +1" CL RADIUS OF 1.0 DIA ON DUCTS LARGER THAN 24" DIA TAPS: CONICAL OR BOOT -STYLE 12 -FOOT MAX LENGTH WITH NO OFFSETS; USE THERMAFLEX, GKM, OR EQUAL FLEXAT EQUIP CONNECTIONS �SMACNA TO COMPLY WM-I SMACNA APPLICABLE PRESSURE CLASS +1" SMACNA SEAL CLASS LEVEL C +1/2" NO SEAL SEAL CLASS LEVEL C FOLLOW BASIC "LEVEL A" SMACNA FOLLOW BASIC "LEVEL B" SMACNA FOLLOW BASIC "LEVEL C" SMACNA ENGINEER TO SPECIFY FOLLOW BASIC "LEVEL A" SMACNA FOLLOW BASIC "LEVEL B" SMACNA FOLLOW BASIC "LEVEL C" SMACNA ENGINEER TO SPECIFY VWIT HIN CONDITIONED SPACE: R- 3.3 WHEN NOT IN A CONDITIONED SPACE, USE R -7 WITH APPROVED VAPOR/WEATHER BARRIER IN CONCRETE OR GROUND: R- 5.3 WITHIN CONDITIONED SPACE: R--LINING 7 NOT WITHIN CONDITIONED SPACE: R -5.3 OSA DUCT W/ GREATER THAN 2800 CFM UPSTREAM OF MOTORIZED DAMPER SHALL BE INSULATED TO BUILDING ENVELOPE R- VALUES LINING WHERE INDICATED ON THE PLANS ENGINEER TO CONSIDER LINING WHEN VELOCITY IS 1,400 FPM OR GREATER WHERE INDICATED ON THE PLANS ENGINEER TO CONSIDER LINING WHEN VELOCITY IS 1,400 FPM OR GREATER SEISMIC SUPPORT PER APPLICABLE CODE / LOCAL JURISDICTION. SEE MECHANICAL SEISMIC SHEET WHEN APPLICABLE. SEISMIC SUPPORT PER APPLICABLE CODE / LOCAL JURISDICTION. SEE MECHANICAL SEISMIC SHEET WHEN APPLICABLE. IP = 1.0 IP = 1.5 (LAB PRESSURIZATION) IP = 1.0 IP = 1.5 (LAB PRESSURIZATION) NOTES 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 NOTES 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 HVAC OA INTAKE LOUVER CAN / PLENUMS UPSTREAM OF MOTORIZED DAMPER SMACNA *2" HVAC RETURN LOW PRESSURE SMACNA -1/2" OR -1" • PRESSURE NOTE: MCKINSTRY BUILDS ALL LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH +1" SMACNA GUIDELINES TO MAXIMIZE PRODUCTION EFFICIENCY GALVANIZED DUCT; GAUGE AND REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE SMACNA OR BETTER RECTANGULAR TO HAVE S&D CONNECTIONS, ROUND MAY BE SPIRAL ELBOWS:. CENTERLINE RADIUS OF 1.5 DIA OR MITERED 90S WITH VANES OR PURCHASED ADJUSTABLE ELBOWS IN ACCORDANCE WITH SMACNA +1" CL RADIUS OF 1.0 DIA ON DUCTS LARGER • THAN 24" DIA TAPS: CONICAL OR BOOT -STYLE SPIN -IN / ATTO BRANCHES OK 3 -FOOT MAX LENGTH WITH NO OFFSETS; USE THERMAFLEX GKM, OR EQUAL; FLEX AT EQUIP CONNECTIONS TO COMPLY WITH SMACNA • APPLICABLE PRESSURE CLASS SMACNA SEAL CLASS LEVEL C FOLLOW BASIC "LEVEL A" SMACNA FOLLOW BASIC "LEVEL B" SMACNA FOLLOW BASIC "LEVEL C" SMACNA ENGINEER TO SPECIFY WITHIN CONDITIONED SPACE: NO INSULATION REQUIRED NOT WITHIN CONDITIONED SPACE: R-7 WITH APPROVED VAPOR/WEATHER BARRIER IN CONCRETE OR GROUND: R- 5.3 1" LINING ONLY WHERE INDICATED ON PLANS SEISMIC SUPPORT PER APPLICABLE CODE / LOCAL JURISDICTION. SEE MECHANICAL SEISMIC SHEET WHEN APPLICABLE. IP = 1.0 IP = 1.5 (LAB PRESSURIZATION) NOTES 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 CONDENSING BOILER FLUE PRESSURE STACK PER BOILER MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS HEAT FAB SAFE T VENT, PVC HEAT FAB SAFE T VENT (BY SELKIRK), PVC N/A PER MANUFACTURER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOLLOW BASIC "LEVEL B" SMACNA N/A , INTEGRAL TO HEAT FAB SAFE -T VENT 'SEISMIC SUPPORT PER APPLICABLE CODE / LOCAL JURISDICTION. SEE MECHANICAL SEISMIC SHEET WHEN APPLICABLE. IP = 1.5 NOTES 1, 2, 3 NOTES: 1. ALL DUCTWORK TO BE FABRICATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH McKINSTRY DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS / SUBMITTALS WHICH MEET OR EXCEED SMACNA GUIDELINES 2. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON PLANS ARE INSIDE CLEAR DIMENSIONS. 3. THE MECHANICAL ENGINEER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO AUTHORIZE DEVIATIONS TO THESE STANDARDS TO ACCOMMODATE UNIQUE SITUATIONS AS APPLICABLE REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 1 0 2012 PERMIT CENTER For Th instry Ile Of Your Building SEATTLE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, . WA 98124 1- 800 -669 -6223 PROJECT: PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503-331-0234 www.mckinstry.com TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 milommamimmm TENNIS COURT PARKING REGISTRATION: POOL n TRACK REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 9/26/12 90% CD'S 10/8/12 PERMIT DRAWINGS NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: SHEET TITLE: ENGINEERING ARLISS MERRELL TIM WHITE. SETH DAVIS C10256 7/31 /12 AS SHOWN EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES SHEET NUMBER: M7.2 SYMBOL MI ON DESCRIPTION COLD WATER PIPING HOT WATER PIPING HOT WATER CIRCULATION PIPING WASTE PIPING — VENT PIPING --0 -- GAS PIPING —F FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING HWS HEATING WATER SUPPLY PIPING —HWR HEATING WATER RETURN PIPING —PWR POOL WATER RETURN PIPING —PWS POOL WATER SUPPLY PIPING PIPE DOWN PIPE UP BRANCH - TOP CONNECTION BRANCH - BOTTOM CONNECTION BRANCH - SIDE CONNECTION CAP END OF PIPE PIPE OR DUCT BREAK (GRAPHIC ONLY - CONTINUOUS PIPE/DUCT) FLOW DIRECTION s PIPE SLOPE (DOWNWARD IN DIRECTION OF ARROW) 2e- SYMBOL LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION J i L VENT THROUGH ROOF Ya GATE VALVE - BUTTERFLY VALVE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE -N CHECK VALVE FOOT VALVE — FLOW CONTROL VALVE TEMPERATURE & PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE BALL VALVE FLOAT VALVE PETE'S PLUG - - - -/ HOSE BIBB GAS COCK CIRCULATION PUMP CIRCULATION PUMP PUMP SUCTION DIFFUSER CIRCUIT SETTER — BALANCING VALVE --- A4 .........._..___.__. TRIPLE DUTY VALVE BACKFLOW PREVENTER ASSEMBLY FLOOR DRAIN FLOOR & FUNNEL DRAIN PIPE ANCHOR --- .._._....... PIPE GUIDE - FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTION 0 AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL AIR VENT - — REDUCER ECCENTRIC REDUCER ,_._..._..._....:.._. STRAINER IS— STRAINER W/ BLOWDOWN VALVE & 3/4" HOSE CONNECTION UNION VACUUM BREAKER 2 -WAY SOLENOID VALVE 2 -WAY MODULATING VALVE 1 BFP 0 0 r 3 -WAY SOLENOID VALVE 3 -WAY MODULATING VALVE 4 -WAY MODULATING VALVE 4 -WAY SOLENOID VALVE MULTI -PORT FILTER VALVE (WITH MOTOR ACTUATOR) MULTI -PORT FILTER VALVE (WITH MANUAL ACTUATOR) DRAIN/BLOWDOWN VALVE W/ 3/4" HOSE CONNECTION METER 0 FUNNEL DRAIN SYMBOL C2 FM TF 0 DP SC ST LV VFD DESCRIPTION AQUASTAT CARBON DIOXIDE (CO2) SENSOR CARBON MONOXIDE (CO) SENSOR DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR LOCATION (DETECTOR PROVIDED BY DIVISION 16) THERMOSTAT TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEMPERATURE GAUGE PRESSURE SENSOR PRESSURE GAUGE FLOW SWITCH FLOW INDICATOR FLOW SENSOR FLOW METER LOW LIMIT STAT MOTOR CONNECTION DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR SPA EMERGENCY SHUTOFF SWITCH SPA TIMER LEVEL SENSOR VACUUM SENSOR VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE EMERGENCY SWITCH RETURN/EXHAUST/TRANSFER AIRFLOW SUPPLY AIRFLOW POINT OF CONNECTION TO EXISTING / DEMOLITION SCOPE OF WORK r I I SUPPLY AIR DUCT UP ( EXHAUST/RETURN AIR DUCT UP OUTSIDE AIR DUCT UP SUPPLY AIR DUCT DOWN EXHAUST/RETURN MR DUCT DOWN j 4- OUTSIDE AIR DUCT DOWN SOUNDLINED DUCT 0 1- DUCT UP (ROUND) 111111111111 ED-t±E DUCT DOWN (ROUND) CEILING AIR TERMINAL (ROUND) CEILING AIR TERMINAL (SQUARE) FLEXIBLE DUCT VOLUME DAMPER MOTORIZED DAMPER FIRE DAMPER IN VERTICAL POSITION FIRE DAMPER IN HORIZONTAL POSITION COMBINATION FIRE /SMOKE DAMPER WITH INTEGRATED DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR SMOKE DAMPER BACKDRAFT DAMPER FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION TURNING VANES °F (E) ABS ADJ. AFF AGA AMP ASME ASTM BTU CFM CSA DDC DE EC EPACT ETC FM FPS FT GPD GPM HP HR IBC ICC IFGC IMC IN KW KWH LBS MAX MCA MFG MICA MIN MOCP MSS N/A NEC NEMA NFPA NO NPSHR NREC NSF OSHA PSI PSIG PVC PWR PWS RH RPM ABBREVIATION LIST DEGREES FAHRENHEIT EXISTING ACRYLONITRILE- BUTADEINE- STYRENE ADJUSTMENT ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AMERICAN GAS ASSOCIATION AMPERES AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING & MATERIALS BRITISH THERMAL UNIT CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE CANADIAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL DIATOMACIOUS EARTH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR ENERGY POLICY ACT ET CETERA FACTORY MUTUAL FEET PER SECOND FEET GALLONS PER DAY GALLONS PER MINUTE HORSEPOWER HOUR INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL INTERNATIONAL FUEL GAS CODE. INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE INCH KILOWATT KILOWATT HOUR POUNDS MAXIMUM MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPACITY MANUFACTURER MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTOR'S ASSOCIATION MINIMUM MAXIMUM OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MANUFACTURER'S STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY NOT APPLICABLE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NUMBER NOMINAL PUMP SUCTION HEAD REQUIRED NON - RESIDENTIAL ENERGY CODE NATIONAL SAFETY FOUNDATION OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY & HEALTH ASSOCIATION POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH GAUGE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE POOL WATER RETURN POOL WATER SUPPLY RELATIVE HUMIDITY REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE SMACNA SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION SQ IN TYP UL UPC VFD W WAC WSEC SQUARE INCHES TYPICAL UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE WATT WASHINGTON ADMINISTRATIVE CODE WASHINGTON STATE ENERY CODE GENERAL NOTES 1. SYSTEMS PROVIDED UNDER THIS CONTRACT ARE CLASSIFIED AS SIMPLE SYSTEMS PER THE WASHINGTON STATE NON - RESIDENTIAL ENERGY CODE. PROVIDE COMMISSIONING PER SECTION 1416 OF THAT CODE. LOCATE ALL VALVES, TRAPS, TEST PORTS, DAMPERS, CONTROLS, CLEANOUTS, ETC. TO BE ACCESSIBLE FOR MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENT, & TESTING. PROVIDE ACCESS PANELS FOR ALL CONCEALED DEVICES. 3. ALL ELECTRICAL WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE STANDARDS AND LOCAL REQUIREMENTS. 4. ALL FIELD WIRING SHALL REQUIRE AN ELECTRICAL PERMIT AND SHALL BE PERFORMED BY A LICENSED ELECTRICIAN. 5. ALL PRESSURES LISTED ARE GAGE PRESSURES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 6. A SHORT DASH IN A SCHEDULE TABLE CELL INDICATES THAT THE COLUMN HEADING IS NOT USED OR NOT APPLICABLE TO THAT SCHEDULED ITEM. 7. COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF ALL CEILING - MOUNTED EQUIPMENT, AIR TERMINALS, ETC. WITH LOCATIONS OF LIGHT FIXTURES, EXISTING PIPING & COMPONENTS, ETC. MAINTAIN AND RESTORE (IF INTERRUPTED) ALL CONDUITS & CONDUCTORS, PIPING, & DUCTWORK PASSING THROUGH RENOVATED AREAS AND SERVICING UNDISTURBED AREAS. 9. REMOVE ALL ABANDONED DUCTWORK, PIPING, CONTROLS, WIRING, ETC., WHERE ACCESSIBLE IN RENOVATED AREAS. 10. WHERE CONTROLS ARE DEMOLISHED, REMOVE WIRING BACK TO NEAREST CONTROL PANEL OR JUNCTION BOX. REMOVE ACCESSIBLE CONDUIT, JUNCTION BOXES, ETC. 11. OWNER SHALL HAVE FIRST RIGHT OF REFUSAL FOR ALL EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS REMOVED DURING DEMOLITION. 12. PROVIDE GALVANIZED PIPE SHIELDS AT ALL LOCATIONS WHERE PLASTIC PIPING IS SUPPORTED BY METAL HANGERS, CLAMPS, OR OTHER PIPE SUPPORTS. PIPE SHIELDS SHALL PROTECT ENTIRE CIRCUMFERENCE OF PIPE. AT SUPPORT LOCATIONS WHERE MOVEMENT IS EXPECTED, SUCH AS ROLLERS, PIPE SHIELD SHALL EXTEND BEYOND FULL TRAVEL DISTANCE OF PIPE AT THAT LOCATION. 13: VALVE OPERATORS (GEAR, LEVER, ETC.) SHALL BE POSITIONED FOR EASE OF ACCESS & OPERATION. M REVIEWED FOR ACA APPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 • City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 1 0 2012 PERMIT CENTER 215 q For Th instry ife Of Your Building SEA I I LE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1- 800 - 669 -6223 NOKILANU: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503 - 331 -0234 www.mckinstry.com enginuity systems« 732 BROADWAY PH (253) 292 -0357 SUITE 102 FX (253) 292 -0358 TACOMA, WA 98402 -3702 www.enginuitysys.com PROJECT: TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 REGISTRATION: REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 10/5/1290% CD'S NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: ENGINEERING JB JB BG C10256 10/5/12 AS SHOWN SHEET TITLE: LEGEND, ABBREVIATIONS LIST, & GENERAL NOTES SHEET NUMBER: PM0.1 PUMP SCHEDULE SYMBOL MANUFACTURER MODEL SERVICE TYPE FLOW HEAD (FT) NPSHR (FT) RPM ELECTRICAL STARTER MOUNTING WEIGHT (LBS) NOTES GPM (DESIGN) GPM (MIN) GPD HP W AMP VOLT PHASE VFD MFG EC N/A P -2 BELL & GOSSETT 1510 -2.5AB POOL HEATING BASE MOUNT END SUCTION 160 - - 30 3.8 1750 2.00 - - 208 3 - - X - BASE 200 2 P -5 BELL & GOSSETT 1510 -4E POOL CIRCULATION BASE MOUNT END SUCTION 650 - - 100 8.9 1750 25.00 - - 208 3 X - - - BASE 585 1,4 P -6 STENNER 45M5 CHLORINE FEED METERING - - 50 57 - - 0.03 - - 120 1 - - - X WALL 8 3,5 P -7 STENNER 45M5 ACID FEED METERING - - 50 57 - - 0.03 - - 120 1 - - - X WALL 8 3,5 P -8 STENNER 45M5 SENSOR CLEANING METERING - - 50 57 - - 0.03 - - 120 1 - - - X WALL 8 3,5 NOTES: 1. PROVIDE PUMP WITH EPDXY COATING ON ALL INTERNAL WETTED COMPONENTS. 2. BRONZE - FITTED PUMP. 3. PROVIDE WITH WALL MOUNTING BRACKET. 4. CONTROLLED & POWERED BY VFD -1. 5. PLUG -IN ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTION. POOL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE SYMBOL MANUFACTURER MODEL DESCRIPTION SERVICE PERFORMANCE DATA ELECTRICAL STARTER NOTES KW AMP MCA MOCP VOLT PHASE VFD MFG EC N/A CCP -1 BECS BECSYS 5 CHEMISTRY CONTROLLER CHEMISTRY CONTROL - - 12.25 - - 120 1 - - - - 1,2 FM -1 SIGNET 2536 PADDLEWHEEL FLOW SENSOR POOL CIRCULATION 0.3 -20 FPS SENSING RANGE - - - - - - TIME SCHEDULING 'DEMAND LIMITING OPTIMAL START /STOP 'RESET PI -1 LAWSON MLD -F2 -02 ADJUSTABLE FLOOR INLET POOL CIRCULATION 50 GPM MAX @ 0.14 PSI, 4.6 FPS VELOCITY, 1 -1/2" INLET - - - - - - - - - - MD -1 LAWSON MLD -SG -1818 MAIN DRAIN SUMP & GRATE POOL CIRCULATION 183.06 SQ IN OPEN AREA, 816 GPM MAX FLOW @ 1.5 FPS - 1 - - - - NOTES: 1. PROVIDE 2. CHEMISTRY 3. PROVIDE WITH TEMPERATURE, PH & ORP CONTROLLER CCP -1 SHALL WITH (2) INTERNAL HYDROSTATIC SENSORS, WALL -MOUNT FLOW CELL KIT, & SENSOR WASH KIT. SERVE AS DISPLAY FOR FLOWMETER FM -1. RELIEF VALVES PER DRAIN BODY. SYSTEM POINTS LIST - POOL MECHANICAL SYSTEM POINT DESCRIPTION ANALOG BINARY SYSTEM FEATURES NOTES INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT ALARMS PROGRAMS H2FLOW PRESSURE POOL CIRC PUMP P -5 208 3 BTUIBZ GPM PERCENT CFM LI DDC SET POINT ADJ. STATUS ON /OFF FILTER STATUS STATUS OPEN /CLOSED STATUS NO. OF STARTS TIMED OVERRIDE ON /OFF OPEN /CLOSE LOCK OUT ENABLE /DISABLE HIGH ANALOG 'LOW ANALOG HIGH BINARY LOW BINARY I PROOF SENSOR FAIL FLOW FAIL COMMUNICATIONS FAIL I DL4GNOSTICS TIME SCHEDULING 'DEMAND LIMITING OPTIMAL START /STOP 'RESET EVENT PROGRAM DDC ALARM INSTRUCT MA1NT WORK ORDER EXP MESSAGE SET BACK/SET UP 1NIGHT PURGE TENANT BILLING POOL TEMPERATURE X X X X X POOL CIRCULATION PUMP P- 5/VFD -1 X X X GENERAL NOTES: NOTES: 12017pm02.dwg 1 0/5j i'2 08.34 PM GUTTER —\ MAIN POOL MAIN DRAIN FLOOR INLET PWS PWR It VFD SCHEDULE SYMBOL MANUFACTURER MODEL SERVICE ELECTRICAL WEIGHT (LBS) NOTES VOLT PHASE HP VFD -1 H2FLOW EF- C- 73 -12 -2 POOL CIRC PUMP P -5 208 3 25.0 - 1 NOTES: 1. PROVIDE WITH H2FLOW PS -100 PRESSURE SENSOR KIT. 2 "—N., 3/4" FILTER/BALANCE TANK VACUUM DE FILTER POOL HEATER IN TANK rl PWR PWR PWS r 4" 8 "7 6" CHEMISTRY CONTROLLER 3/8" - CHEMICAL SUPPLY LINES FROM CHEMICAL STORAGE ROOM 6" \-- 6" TO DRAIN PWR PWS PWR PWR 8" POOL SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM SCALE: NONE PWR v[u 1 s� PWR PWR i R VIEWI ��OR {ODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED NOV 28 2012 CIty of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 10 2012 PERMIT CENTER For Th instry ife Of Your Building S&AIILE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1- 800 - 669 -6223 I'Oltl LAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503 -331 -0234 www.mckinstry.com enginuity systems. 732 BROADWAY PH (253) 292 -0357 SUITE 102 FX (253) 292 -0358 TACOMA, WA 98402 -3702 www.enginuitysys.com PROJECT: TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 REGISTRATION: REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 10/5/12 90% CD'S NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: SHEET TITLE: ENGINEERING JB JB BG C10256 10/5/12 AS SHOWN SCHEDULES & FLOW DIAGRAM SHEET NUMBER: PM0.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.1 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS. A. THE DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC. COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH THE BUILDING, PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY OFFSETS, CHANGES IN DIRECTION, EXTENSIONS AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS FOR A COMPLETE AND FUNCTIONAL INSTALLATION. B. MAINTAIN A SET OF PLANS ON SITE. RECORD ALL CHANGES TO ACTUAL ARRANGEMENTS ON THESE PLANS. PROVIDE THIS SET OF PLANS TO THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE WHEN WORK IS COMPLETE. C. PERFORM THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CODES AND STANDARDS IN FORCE IN THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. THESE CODES AND STANDARDS INCLUCE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO: 1. IBC - THE ICC INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE. 2. IMC - THE ICC INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE. 3. IFGC - THE INTERNATIONAL FUEL GAS CODE. 4. UPC - THE IAPMO /ANSI UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE. 5: IFC - THE ICC INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE. 6. NEC - NFPA 70, THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE. 7. NFPA STANDARDS, ESPECIALLY NFPA 13 FOR SPRINKLER SYSTEMS. 8. WSEC - THE WASHINGTON STATE NON - RESIDENTIAL ENERGY CODE (CHAPTER 51 -11 WASHINGTON ADMINISTRATIVE CODE 9. WAC 246 -260 - THE WASHINGTON STATE WATER RECREATION FACILITIES CODE. D. OBTAIN AND PAY FOR ALL PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION FEES. FURNISH FINAL CERTIFICATE TO OWNER SHOWING COMPLIANCE WITH CODE REQUIREMENTS. E. PROJECT SCHEDULING: COMPLY WITH OWNER'S REQUIREMENTS. F. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL: PROVIDE COMPLETE OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL IN HARD COVER. PROVIDE OPERATIONS, MAINTENANCE AND PARTS DATA ON ANY ITEM OF EQUIPMENT THAT HAS MOVING PARTS. G. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS PRIOR TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT. FINAL PAYMENT OF THE CONTRACT WILL BE CONTINGENT UPON RECEIVING THESE DOCUMENTS: 1. RECORD (AS- BUILT) DRAWINGS. 2. MAINTENANCE AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (3 SETS). 3. EXTENDED WARRANTIES (OTHER THAN THE ONE - YEAR). 4. BALANCING LOGS (AIR AND HYDRONIC SYSTEMS) (3 SETS). 5. FINAL CERTIFICATES OF INSPECTION AND CODE COMPLIANCE. 6. COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION H. WARRANTY PROVISIONS: THE CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE ALL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS FOR A PERIOD OF ONE YEAR AFTER FINAL ACCEPTANCE. REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT, OR POOR WORKMANSHIP, WHICH MAY SHOW ITSELF DURING THIS WARRANTY PERIOD. I. TRAINING: PROVIDE 8 HOURS OF TRAINING TIME FOR OWNER'S PERSONNEL ON POOL MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PROVIDED UNDER THIS WORK SCOPE. TRAINING SHALL BE PERFORMED BY FACTORY REPRESENTATIVES. 1.2 DEMOLITION A. GENERAL: PROVIDE ALL WORK REQUIRED TO PERFORM DEMOLITION SCOPE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES & OWNER. B. WORK REMOVED BY OWNER. C. ALL MATERIALS REMOVED SHALL BE DISPOSED OF LEGALLY. D. OWNER SHALL HAVE FIRST RIGHT OF REFUSAL FOR ALL EQUIPMENT & COMPONENTS REMOVED DURING DEMOLITION. E. PROVIDE DUST CONTROL AND BUILDING PROTECTION. 1.3 SEISMIC AND VIBRATION REQUIREMENTS A. SEISMIC SUPPORT 1. PROVIDE ALL SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIRED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION AND THE APPLICABLE CODES. 2. EMPLOY A LICENSED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER, IF NECESSARY, TO ACHIEVE COMPLIANCE. 3. THE SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, INC. (SMACNA) SEISMIC RESTRAINT MANUAL GUIDELINES MAY BE USED FOR PIPING AND DUCTWORK. INSURE THE PROPER HAZARD LEVEL IS EMPLOYED FOR THE AREA OF INSTALLATION. B. VIBRATION CRITERIA: PROVIDE VIBRATION ISOLATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE): APPLICATIONS HANDBOOK. C. VIBRATION ISOLATION AT PUMPS 1. PROVIDE INERTIA BASES FOR PUMP INSTALLATIONS. INERTIA BASES SHALL BE REINFORCED CONCRETE, WITH PRELOCATED ANCHOR BOLTS. CONCRETE SHALL BE LEVEL FOR EQUIPMENT MOUNTING. CHANNEL DEPTH SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 1/12 THE LENGTH OF THE BASE BUT NOT LESS THAN 6 ". FORM SHALL INCLUDE 'A" REINFORCING BARS WELDED IN PLACE ON A MINIMUM OF 8" CENTERS. USE HEIGHT- SAVING BRACKETS IN ALL LOCATIONS. WEIGHT OF INTERTIA BASE SHALL BE EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN WEIGHT OF SUPPORTED EQUIPMENT TO PROVIDE A MAXIMUM PEAK -TO -PEAK DISPLACEMENT OF 1/16 ". 2. PUMPS WITH 1 -3 HP SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH SPRING ISOLATORS HAVING 1.7" DEFLECTION. PUMPS WITH 5 -40 HP SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH SPRING ISOLATORS HAVING 1.0" DEFLECTION. SPRING ISOLATORS SHALL BE FREE - STANDING, LATERALLY STABLE, AND INCLUDE ACOUSTIC FRICTION PADS & LEVELLING BOLTS. ISOLATORS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM RATIO OF SPRING DIAMETER -TO- OPERATING HEIGHT OF 1.0 AND AN ADDITIONAL TRAVEL TO SOLID EQUAL TO 50% OF RATED DEFLECTION. 1.4 BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS A. ALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LISTED OR LABELED BY A RECOGNIZED AGENCY. UL, AGA, FM, CSA, ARI, ETC. B. EQUIPMENT SHALL BE AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWING SCHEDULES. THE DRAWING SCHEDULES ESTABLISH THE LEVEL OF QUALITY. SUBSTITUTIONS WILL BE CONSIDERED, SUBMIT TECHNICAL DATA (PERFORMANCE AND CONSTRUCTION) TO THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE FOR APPROVAL. ALLOW TWO WEEKS FOR TURN- AROUND. C. ALL MECHANICAL SYSTEM PENETRATIONS OF FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE PROTECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE BUILDING CODE IN FORCE IN THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION FOR THIS PROJECT. THIS INCLUDES PIPING, DUCTWORK, SUPPORTS, CONDUIT, AND ANY OTHER SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCE PROVIDED AS PART OF THE MECHANICAL WORK OF THIS CONTRACT. IN ADDITION, ALL. THROUGH - PENETRATION SEALING METHODOLOGIES SHALL BE LISTED IN THE UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES (UL) FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY, ISSUE CURRENT AT TIME OF BID. D. MOTORS SHALL COMPLY WITH THE WSEC. MOTORS FOR USE WITH VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES SHALL BE PREMIUM - EFFICIENCY TYPE, INVERTER -READY RATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEMA MG -1 PART 31.4.4.2. E. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE NEC. F. PROTECT ALL STORED MATERIALS. REPLACE DAMAGED MATERIALS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. G. PROVIDE WATER -TIGHT SEAL FOR OPENINGS TO THE BUILDING THROUGH WHICH PIPE PASSES. H. PROVIDE AND INSTALL PIPE SUPPORTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTING INDUSTRY (MSS) STANDARDS, SPECIFICALLY STANDARD SP -69, "PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS - SELECTION AND APPLICATION" AND STANDARD SP -58, "PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS - MATERIALS, DESIGN AND MANUFACTURE ". PROVIDE PIPE SUPPORT SPACING IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE UPC OR IMC. I. TESTING: ALL WORK UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE THOROUGHLY AND SYSTEMATICALLY TESTED, BOTH DURING CONSTRUCTION AND AFTER COMPLETION. PIPE TESTING SHALL BE EITHER AS SPECIFIED IN THE APPROPRIATE SPECIFICATION SECTION, OR AS SPECIFIED IN THE APPLICABLE PLUMBING OR MECHANICAL CODE. DUCTWORK SHALL BE TESTED AS PART OF THE AIR BALANCING PROCESS. NOTIFY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE 48 -HOURS IN ADVANCE OF ALL TESTS. TESTS SHALL BE MAINTAINED UNTIL APPROVED. J. START -UP, BALANCING AND COMMISSIONING. 1. EQUIPMENT STARTUP SHALL BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION SECTIONS WILL DETAIL OTHER SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS, IF ANY. PROVIDE A STATEMENT OF THE STARTUP TECHNICIAN'S QUALIFICATIONS IF REQUESTED BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE OR ELSEWHERE SPECIFIED. 2. BALANCE ALL AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS. BALANCE IN ACCORDANCE WITH EITHER NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB) OR AMERICAN AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC) CRITERIA. 3. PROVIDE COMMISSIONING IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE WSEC, UNLESS ENHANCED COMMISSIONING IS REQUIRED. PROVIDE DOCUMENTATION OF COMMISSIONING. 1.5 PUMPS A. INSTALL PUMPS SO THAT MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS FOR MAINTENANCE & SERVICE ACCESS ARE MET. B. PROVIDE PUMPS WITH MOUNTING BASES. C. LUBRICATE PUMPS PRIOR TO STARTUP. D. PRIME THE PUMP, VENT ALL AIR FROM CASING, & VERIFY THAT ROTATION IS CORRECT. TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO SEALS, NEVER OR RUN PUMPS DRY. E. FIELD MODIFICATIONS SUCH AS IMPELLER TRIMMING ARE NOT PERMITTED. ALL SUCH MODIFICATIONS SHALL BE PERFORMED AT FACTORY. F. ALL ROTATING PARTS SHALL BE DYNAMICALLY & STATICALLY BALANCED. 1.6 POOL PUMPS A. BASE - MOUNTED, LONG - COUPLED, SINGLE STAGE, END SUCTION, VERTICAL SPLIT -CASE CENTRIFUGAL TYPE. PROVIDE WITH BRONZE FITTED CAST IRON CONSTRUCTION, RATED FOR UP TO 225 °F & 175 PSIG WORKING CONDITIONS. PROVIDE WITH INTERNALLY FLUSHED MECHANICAL SEAL ASSEMBLY, BRONZE IMPELLER, STAINLESS STEEL & BRASS INTERNAL HARDWARE, CENTER DROP -OUT TYPE COUPLING, OSHA -RATED COUPLING GUARD, INTEGRAL GAUGE TAPS AT INLET & OUTLET, VENT & DRAIN PORTS. MOTOR SHALL BE PREMIUM - EFFICIENCY TYPE, INVERTER -READY RATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEMA MG -1 PART 31.4.4.2., COMPLY WITH EPACT 92 AND NEMA SPECIFICATIONS, AND MEET WASHINGTON NREC REQUIREMENTS. PUMP SHALL BE NON - OVERLOADING AT ANY POINT ON THE PUMP CURVE. PUMP SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH EPDXY COATING ON ALL INTERNAL WETTED COMPONENTS. 1.7 HYDRONIC PUMPS A. BASE- MOUNTED, LONG - COUPLED, SINGLE STAGE, END SUCTION, VERTICAL SPLIT -CASE CENTRIFUGAL TYPE. PROVIDE WITH BRONZE FITTED CAST IRON CONSTRUCTION, RATED FOR UP TO 225 °F & 175 PSIG WORKING CONDITIONS. PROVIDE WITH INTERNALLY FLUSHED MECHANICAL SEAL ASSEMBLY, BRONZE IMPELLER, STAINLESS STEEL & BRASS INTERNAL HARDWARE, CENTER DROP -OUT TYPE COUPLING, OSHA -RATED COUPLING GUARD, INTEGRAL GAUGE TAPS AT INLET & OUTLET, VENT & DRAIN PORTS. MOTOR SHALL BE PREMIUM - EFFICIENCY TYPE, COMPLY WITH EPACT 92 AND NEMA SPECIFICATIONS, AND MEET WASHINGTON NREC REQUIREMENTS. PUMP SHALL BE NON - OVERLOADING AT ANY POINT ON THE PUMP CURVE. 1.8 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. NEMA 12 CONSTRUCTION, FULLY SEALED INTERNAL CONSTRUCTION, MODBUS COMMUNICATION, SET UP FOR CONSTANT FLOW BASED ON PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT, PROGRAMMABLE BACKWASH SETTV, INTEGRAL DRY PUMP, CAVITATION PREVENTION, CLOSED SUCTION/DISCHARGE VALVE DETECTION, LOSS OF PRIME, & WORN PUMP IMPELLER DETECTION FUNCTIONS, SOFT START & STOP, POWER LOSS PROTECTION, BUILT -IN DC BUS FILTER, DETACHABLE KEYPAD WITH MULTI - FUNCTION READOUT. 1.9 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. ASTM A53, GRADE B, SCHEDULE 40 STEEL PIPING, WITH THREADED, WELDED, OR GROOVED FITTINGS. B. STRAINERS: WYE- PATTERN, BRONZE BODY WITH MONEL METAL OR STAINLESS STEEL MESH SCREEN ELEMENTS. FREE AREA OF SCREEN SHALL BE 2 -1 /2X PIPE AREA (MINIMUM). C. SUCTION DIFFUSERS: CAST IRON BODY, ANGLE PATTERN CONFIGURATION, WITH FLANGED PUMP & SYSTEM CONNECTIONS. STAINLESS STEEL INLET VANES, LENGTH NO LESS THAN 2 -1/2X THE PUMP CONNECTION DIAMETER. STRAINER ELEMENT SHALL HAVE PERMANENT 3/16" OPENINGS, AND BE PROVIDED WITH DISPOSABLE FINE -MESH STRAINER TO BE REMOVED AFTER SYSTEM STARTUP. BODY SHALL HAVE ''A" GAUGE PORT(S) AS WELL AS 3/4" BLOW -DOWN PORT. PROVIDE WITH ADJUSTABLE SUPPORT FOOT TO CARRY WEIGHT OF SUCTION PIPING. D. FLEX CONNECTIONS: CAST IRON FLANGE CONNECTIONS, WITH MOLDED REINFORCED PTFE FLEXIBLE JOINT, & INTEGRAL STEEL LIMIT BOLTS. 1.10 POOL WATER SYSTEMS A. PVC, TYPE 1, GRADE 1, ASTM D -1785; SCHEDULE 80 PIPING WITH GLUED SOCKET FITTINGS. B. FLEX CONNECTIONS: CAST IRON FLANGE CONNECTIONS, WITH MOLDED REINFORCED PTFE FLEXIBLE JOINT, & INTEGRAL STEEL LIMIT BOLTS. C. FLOW METERS: INSERTION - MOUNTED PADDLEWHEEL TYPE SENSOR, WITH OPEN COLLECTOR SIGNAL. FLOW RANGE OF 0.3 -20 FEET PER SECOND. PROVIDE WITH MOUTING HARDWARE INCLUDING TEE OR SADDLE FITTINGS. PROVIDE WITH CONNECTOR CABLE BETWEEN SENSOR & CHEMISTRY CONTROL PANEL. CHEMISTRY CONTROL PANEL SHALL SERVE AS FLOWMETER READOUT. SENSOR SHALL BE SELECTED FOR PIPE SIZE & FLOW RANGE. D. MAIN DRAINS: INJECTION- MOLDED PVC SUMP SYSTEM WITH MATCHING PVC GRATING, MINIMUM OPEN AREA OF 54 %, 316 STAINLESS STEEL GRATE MOUNTING HARDWARE, AND INTERNAL PIPE CONNECTIONS. PROVIDE WITH INTERNAL HYDROSTATIC RELIEF VALVE. DRAIN ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION SHALL COMPLY WITH ASME A112.19.8 REQUIREMENTS. E. INLETS: MOLDED UV- STABILIZED PVC OR ABS CONSTRUCTION, NOMINAL 5" SQUARE WITH REMOVABLE GRATING THAT CAN BE ROTATED FOR DIRECTIONAL WATER FLOW ADJUSTMENT & VARIABLE FLOW RATE, NSF LISTED, 316 STAINLESS STEEL HARDWARE. 1.11 VALVES FOR HYDRONIC PIPING SYSTEMS A. GENERAL: PROVIDE HANDLE EXTENSIONS FOR ALL VALVES INSTALLED IN INSULATED SYSTEMS. B. VALVES SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF MATERIALS THAT ARE COMPATIBLE WITH THE TYPE OF PIPING MATERIAL AND FLUIDS IN THE SYSTEM. VALVES SHALL BE RATED FOR THE TEMPERATURES AND PRESSURES OF THE SYSTEMS IN WHICH THE VALVES ARE INSTALLED. C. BALL VALVES, 'A" - 2 -1/2 ": MSS SP -110, FULL PORT TYPE, TRUE -UNION CONSTRUCTION, BRONZE BODY & INTERNALS. D. BUTTERFLY VALVES, 2" & UP: MSS SP -67, FLANGE LUG OR GROOVED TYPE, 175 PSIG RATED AT 200 °F, CAST IRON BODY WITH BRONZE OR STAINLESS TRIM, FIELD REPLACEABLE SEAT. VALVES LARGER THAN 6" SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH GEAR - DRIVEN OPERATORS. E. CHECK VALVES, 'A" - 2 -1/2 ": NON SLAM TYPE, BRONZE OR IRON BODY WITH BRONZE TRIM, WITH SPRING LOADED DOUBLE DISC OR INTERNALLY GUIDED FLAT DISC, BUBBLE TIGHT CLOSURE. F. CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVES, 'A" - 2 -1/2 ": WYE- PATTERN, EQUAL- PERCENTAGE GLOBE STYLE VALVE. DUAL - PURPOSE FLOW BALANCING VALVE & ADJUSTABLE FLOW METER, WITH BRONZE OR CAST IRON BODY, CALIBRATED POSITION POINTER, VALVE PRESSURE TAPS OR QUICK DISCONNECTS WITH INTEGRAL CHECK VALVES AND PREFORMED POLYURETHANE INSULATING ENCLOSURE. PROVIDE A READOUT KIT INCLUDING FLOW METER, PROBES, HOSES, FLOW CHARTS OR CALCULATOR, AND CARRYING CASE. 1.12 VALVES FOR POOL WATER PIPING SYSTEMS A. VALVES SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF MATERIALS THAT ARE COMPATIBLE WITH THE TYPE OF PIPING MATERIAL AND FLUIDS IN THE SYSTEM. VALVES SHALL BE RATED FOR THE TEMPERATURES AND PRESSURES OF THE SYSTEMS IN WHICH THE VALVES ARE INSTALLED. B. BALL VALVES, 'A" - 2 -1/2 ": PVC BODY, TRUE -UNION TYPE, FULL PORT BALL OPENING, WITH TEFLON SEAT & REMOVABLE ABS HANDLE, SOCKET OR FLANGED CONNECTIONS. C. BUTTERFLY VALVES, 3" & UP: PVC WAFER TYPE, WITH COMPLETE FLANGE MOUNTING KITS, PVC DISC, VITON SEATS, LEVER OR GEAR - DRIVEN OPERATOR TYPE. 1.13 WATER PIPE INSULATION, 40 TO 250 A. PRE -FORMED FIBERGLASS INSULATION FOR PIPE, VALVES, FITTINGS, EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES. B. PROVIDE PER THE WSEC AND THE MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA) "NATIONAL COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL. INSULATION STANDARDS" HANDBOOK. C. PROVIDE COMPLETE INSULATION FOR HYDRONIC PIPING SYSTEM(S) PROVIDED UNDER THIS CONTRACT. 1.14 POOL WATER CHEMISTRY CONTROL SYSTEM A. PROVIDE ALL COMPONENTS & WORK NECESSARY FOR COMPLETE LIQUID CHLORINE & LIQUID MURIATIC ACID POOL CHEMISTRY SYSTEM, INCLUDING PIPING & WIRING CONNECTIONS. B. EXISTING CHEMICAL STORAGE UNIT(S) IN CHEMICAL STORAGE ROOM SHALL BE RE -USED. C. POOL CHEMICALS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY OWNER. D. PROVIDE POOL WATER CHEMISTRY CONTROLLER WITH ACCESSORIES AS INDICATED ON DRAWING SCHEDULES. E PROVIDE COMPLETE SENSOR WASH SYSTEM FOR CHEMISTRY CONTROLLER SENSORS. SENSOR WASH SYSTEM SHALL BE CONTROLLED BY CHEMISTRY CONTROLLER. F. FIRMLY SUPPORT ALL PIPING TO MAINTAIN A CLEAN & WORKMANLIKE APPEARANCE, AS WELL AS TO PREVENT TRIPPING HAZARDS OR MAINTENANCE DIFFICULTIES. 1.15 REQUIREMENTS FOR STARTUP A. HYDRONIC SYSTEM: REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR STARTUP REQUIREMENTS. B. SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS: EQUIPMENT STARTUP & CONFIGURATION SHALL BE PERFORMED BY FACTORY REPRESENTATIVES. 1.16 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. HYDRONIC SYSTEM: REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR TESTI& ADJUSTMENT REQUIREMENTS. B. SWIMMING POOL SYSTEMS: PROVIDE BASIC FLOW ADJUSTMENTS TO BALANCE SYSTEM TO BE WITHIN OPERATING PARAMETERS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS AS WELL AS OPERATE IN ACCORDANCE WITH PRODUCT MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS & RECOMMENDATIONS. 1.17 INTEROPERABLE DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS A. GENERAL: REFER TO MECHANICAL PLANS FOR DDC (DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL) SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS & ,REQUIREMENTS. B. COORDINATE WITH CONTROLS CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE THERMOWELLS OR OTHER COMPONENTS REQUIRED IN THE POOL MECHANICAL SYSTEM PIPING. C. REFER TO DDC POINTS LIST FOR POINTS TO BE MONITORED AND /OR CONTROLLED BY DDC. REVIEWED FOR E CAPPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 102012 PERMIT CENTER For Th instry ife Of Your Building SEAIILE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1- 800 - 669 -6223 PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503- 331 -0234 www.mckinstry.com enginuity systems « 732 BROADWAY PH (253) 292 -0357 SUITE 102 FX (253) 292 -0358 TACOMA, WA 98402 -3702 www.enginuitysys.com PROJECT: TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 REGISTRATION: REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 10/5/12 90% CD'S NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: ENGINEERING JB JB BG C10256 10/5/12 AS SHOWN SHEET TITLE: SPECIFICATIONS SHEET NUMBER: PM0.3 1201 7pm10.dwg 11/5/1 08:.i 5 PM 1:1 FOUNDATION PIPING DEMOLITION PLAN E SCALE: 1 /8" =1' -0" irz 0 4' 8' 16' MD -1 PI -1 FOUNDATION PIPING PLAN 0 SCALE: 1/8"=1'-0" 4' 8' 16' GENERAL NOTES 1. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXTENT OF CONCRETE DEMOLITION IN POOL TANK. PLAN NOTES 0 REMOVE EXISTING POOL INLET AND STEEL PIPE RISER. ALL METALLIC PIPING COMPONENTS SHALL BE REMOVED AND REPLACED. 0 REMOVE EXISTING MAIN DRAIN, SUMP, & MAIN DRAIN PIPING. 0 REMOVE EXISTING HYDROSTATIC RELIEF VALVES, GRATES, & PIPING. REVIEWED FOR ;ODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 1 0 2012 PERMIT CENTER For Th instry ife Of Your Building 5EA1 I LE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1- 800 - 669 -6223 El4 PORTLAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503 - 331 -0234 www.mckinstry.com enginuity LLC 732 BROADWAY PH (253) 292 -0357 SUITE 102 FX (253) 292 -0358 TACOMA, WA 98402 -3702 www.enginuitysys.com PROJECT: TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 REGISTRATION: REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 10/5/12 90% CD'S NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: ENGINEERING JB JB BG C10256 10/5/12 AS SHOWN SHEET TITLE: MAIN POOL PIPING PLANS SHEET NUMBER: PM1.0 (i_aJ 12017pm11.dwg 10/.5/1208:15 PM 1:1 FILTER TANK POOL HEATER 10" 8" MEWS EEEEEER' 10" CHEMICAL FEED PUMP CHEMICAL FEED PUMP CHEMICAL FEED PUMP SAMPLE CELL ASSEMBLY SAMPLE CELL ASSEMBLY ,.1 POOL HEATING WATER PUMP WATER HEATER EXPANSION TANK \/ BOILER MECHANICAL ROOM PIPING DEMOLITION PLAN SCALE: 1/4':=1'-0" 0 4' 8' Co) PLAN NOTES 01 APPROXIMATE LOCATION FOR FLOWMETER SENSOR. VFD -1 ROUTE PIPING AS CLOSE TO CEILING AS POSSIBLE. FLOW CELL PANEL ASSEMBLY FOR CHEMISTRY CONTROL PANEL. REMOVE EXISTING GAUGE PANEL FROM FILTER TANK. COMPLETELY REMOVE ALL ATTACHED PRESSURE & TEMPERATURE SENSORS, GAUGE PIPING, WIRING, ETC. REMOVE EXISTING FLOAT VALVE IN FILTER TANK. PROVIDE NEW 8" FLOAT VALVE IN FILTER TANK. PROVIDE FIELD - FABRICATED SPLASH COVER ABOVE PUMP TO PROTECT MOTOR FROM WATER SPLASHING FROM FILTER TANK. SPLASH COVER SHALL BE PERMANENTLY ATTACHED TO FILTER TANK WALL. POSITION SPLASH COVER NEAR CEILING OF LOWER MECHANICAL ROOM LEVEL. (1) 3/4" FROM CHEMISTRY SAMPLE CELL ASSEMBLY TO SUCTION SIDE OF POOL RECIRCULATION PUMP, & (1) 3/4" FROM CHEMISTRY INJECTOR ASSEMBLY TO FILTER TANK. (1) 1" FROM POOL RETURN PIPING TO POOL CHEMISTRY SAMPLE CELL ASSEMBLY & INJECTOR ASSEMBLY. 8" CCP -1 E MECHANICAL ROOM PIPING PLAN SCALE: 1/4"=1'-0" 0 2' 4' 8' (S) C-5.) O (B) M(4017- REVIEWED FOR DAPP'ROVED COMPLIANCE NOV 282012 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 1 0 2012 PERMIT CENTER For Th instry ife Of Your Building SEATTLE: 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1- 800 - 669 -6223 HUH I LAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503 - 331 -0234 www.mckinstry.com enginuity systems. 732 BROADWAY PH (253) 292 -0357 SUITE 102 FX (253) 292 -0358 TACOMA, WA 98402 -3702 www.enginuitysys.com PROJECT: TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 REGISTRATION: REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 10/5/12 90% CD'S NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: SHEET TITLE: ENGINEERING JB JB BG C10256 10/5/12 AS SHOWN MECHANICAL ROOM PLANS SHEET NUMBER: PM1.1 GRATING II 1, II ",° ; 1 111 1 41:1 =_1:42:1':: GRATING MOUNTING RING W/ THREADED INSERTS; PLASTIC SUMP BODY HYDROSTATIC RELIEF 2" PVC HYDROSTATIC RELIEF PIPE PIPE HANGER CONCRETE POOL TANK PATCH 8" MAIN DRAIN PIPING COMPACTED NATIVE SOIL BACKFILL PEA GRAVEL BACKFILL MAIN DRAIN INSTALLATION SCALE: NONE THREADED ROD; ATTACH TO STRUCTURE PIPE GALVANIZED PIPE SHIELD TO PROTECT PLASTIC PIPING TYPICAL SUSPENDED PIPE SUPPORT DETAIL FOR PLASTIC PIPING SCALE: NONE PROVIDE INSULATION SHIELDS (TYP) DE GALVANIZED PIPE SHIELD TO PROTECT PLASTIC PIPING (TYP) PIPING (TYP) UNISTRUT 1 OR 2 -PIECE PIPE STRAP (TYP) UNISTRUT CHANNEL UNISTRUT POST BASE FLOOR SECURE POST BASES TO FLOOR TYPICAL FLOOR -MOUNT PIPE SUPPORT INSTALLATION FOR PLASTIC PIPING SCALE: NONE PIPE HANGER GALVANIZED METAL SHIELD BETWEEN HANGER & INSULATION UP TO CENTERLINE OF PIPE PIPE INSULATION 3/4" DRAIN VALVE WITH HOSE ADAPTER AND CAP WELD -NECK FLANGE (TYP) CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVE FLANGED CHECK VALVE (SILENT, NON-SLAMMING TYPE) w PIPE SPOOL (MINIMUM 24 ", 5X PIPE DIAMETER IF POSSIBLE) METRAFLEX SINGLE- SPHERE FLEX CONNECTION (TYP) 1/2" PUMP BASE — °; "I 1 I, 1/2" NOTES: STRAINER LIQUID FILLED PRESSURE GAUGE WITH NEEDLE ISOLATION VALVE SUBMITTAL TO SPECIFY PRESSURE RANGE LOCATE 5' -0" AFF MAX 1/2" P/T PORT (TYP 2) LUG STYLE BUTTERFLY ISOLATION VALVE (TYP) REDUCER SPOOL (TYP) SUCTION DIFFUSER, MATCH INLET TO PIPE SIZE MAINTAIN CLEAR ACCESS FOR STRAINER REMOVAL SPACE PROVIDE FINE MESH CONSTRUCTION STRAINER DURING STARTUP REMOVE BEFORE BALANCING 3/4" DRAIN WITH BALL VALVE HOSE ADAPTER AND CAP SUPPORT LEG HOUSEKEEPING PAD PROVIDE SPOOL PIECE IF NEEDED FOR CLEARANCE 1. GAUGE TAPS IN PUMP AND SUCTION DIFFUSER MAY BE USED INSTEAD OF PROVIDING THREAD -O -LETS FOR PRESSURE GAUGE. 2. PROVIDE MINIMAL DISTANCE BETWEEN HOUSEKEEPING PAD AND INERTIA BASE, 1 -1/2" MINIMUM. 3. PRE - EXTEND FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS ON PUMP DISCHARGE PER MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. 4. USE FLAT FACE FLANGE AND FULL FACE GASKET AT CLASS 125 OR 250 FLANGE FACES, USE RAISED FACE FLANGE AT CLASS 150 OR 300 FLANGE FACES. 5. PROVIDE CHAIN OPERATOR FOR VALVES HIGHER THAN 84" AFF ON 6" OR LARGER PIPING. 6. REFER TO FLOOR PLANS FOR PIPE SIZES. 7. ALL VALVES & STRAINERS ARE FULL SIZE OF PIPE. 8. PROVIDE INERTIA BASES FOR ALL PUMP INSTALLATIONS. THREADED ROD; ATTACH TO STRUCTURE RIGID INSULATION PIPE INSULATION PIPE ,k6 " MIN 71' 10" MIN TYPICAL SUSPENDED PIPE SUPPORT [INSTALLATION FOR INSULATED PIPING SCALE: NONE SENSOR WIRING TO CHEMISTRY CONTROLLER OR FLOW METER DISPLAY INSERTION -TYPE FLOW METER SENSOR TEE OR SADDLE FITTING r PIPE FLOW DIRECTION APPROXIMATELY 25X PIPE 0 STRAIGHT PIPING DOWNSTREAM OF FLOW METER 4 1 HYDRONIC PUMP INSTALLATION SCALE: NONE PIPE MOUNTING STRAP (TYP) fHANGER ROD UP TO ATTACHMENT TO CEILING STRUCTURE (TYP) 0i r" GALVANIZED PIPE SHIELD TO PROTECT PLASTIC PIPING (TYP) PIPING (TYP) tr. Er cril; Lai PIPE SADDLE (TYP) APPROXIMATELY 5X PIPE 0 STRAIGHT PIPING DOWNSTREAM OF FLOW METER FLOWMETER SENSOR INSTALLATION SCALE: NONE METAL CHANNEL STRUT TYPIGAidaiLTMLERIP SUPPORT IFIkira[ 1r SCALE: NONE 3/4" DRAIN VALVE WITH HOSE ADAPTER AND CAP WELD -NECK FLANGE (TYP) C�- PIPE SPOOL (MINIMUM 24 ", 5X. PIPE DIAMETER IF POSSIBLE) METRAFLEX SINGLE - SPHERE FLEX CONNECTION (TYP) PUMP BASE NOTES: 1/2" O LIQUID FILLED PRESSURE GAUGE WITH NEEDLE ISOLATION VALVE SUBMITTAL TO SPECIFY PRESSURE RANGE LOCATE 5' -0" AFF MAX 1/2" P/T PORT (TYP 2) LUG STYLE BUTTERFLY ISOLATION VALVE (TYP) REDUCER FITTING (TYP) 3/4" DRAIN WITH BALL VALVE HOSE ADAPTER AND CAP SUPPORT LEG HOUSEKEEPING PAD PROVIDE SPOOL PIECE IF NEEDED FOR CLEARANCE 1. GAUGE TAPS IN PUMP AND SUCTION DIFFUSER MAY BE USED INSTEAD OF PROVIDING THREAD -O -LETS FOR PRESSURE GAUGE. 2. PROVIDE MINIMAL DISTANCE BETWEEN HOUSEKEEPING PAD AND INERTIA BASE, 1 -1/2" MINIMUM. 3. PRE - EXTEND FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS ON PUMP DISCHARGE PER MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. 4. USE FLAT FACE FLANGE AND FULL FACE GASKET AT CLASS 125 OR 250 FLANGE FACES, USE RAISED FACE FLANGE AT CLASS 150 OR 300 FLANGE FACES. 5. GLUED PIPING CONNECTIONS MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF FLANGES SHOWN. PROVIDE FLANGES FOR CONNECTIONS TO FLANGED EQUIPMENT, FLEX CONNECTIONS, & VALVES. 6. PROVIDE CHAIN OPERATOR FOR VALVES HIGHER THAN 84" AFF ON 6" OR LARGER PIPING. 7. REFER TO FLOOR PLANS FOR PIPE SIZES. 8. ALL VALVES & STRAINERS ARE FULL SIZE OF PIPE. 9. PROVIDE INERTIA BASE FOR ALL PUMP INSTALLATIONS. POOL FLOOR POOL WATER PUMP INSTALLATION SCALE: NONE ADJUSTABLE INLET FITTING TYPICAL POOL INLET C a, INSTALLATION SCALE: NONE SCH 80 PVC RISER PIPE, APPROXIMATELY 3' LONG PER INLET PROVIDE NEW TEE OR SADDLE FITTING FOR CONNECTION TO EXISTING RETURN PIPING REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED NOV 2 8 2012 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA OCT 10 2012 PERMIT CENTER For Th instry ife Of Your Building SEA I 5005 3RD AVENUE S PO BOX 24567 SEATTLE, WA 98124 1 -800- 669 -6223 FUR I LAND: 16790 NE MASON ST PORTLAND, OR 97230 503 - 331 -0234 www.mckinstry.com enginuity systemsLLC 732 BROADWAY PH (253) 292 -0357 SUITE 102 FX (253) 292 -0358 TACOMA, WA 98402 -3702 www.enginuitysys.com PROJECT: TUKWILA POOL POOL MODIFICATIONS 4414 SOUTH 144TH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98168 REGISTRATION: REVISIONS: 8/7/12 50% DD 9/4/12 75% CD'S 10/5/12 90% CD'S NO. DATE DESCRIPTION McKINSTRY DIVISION: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: JOB NUMBER: DATE: SCALE: SHEET TITLE: DETAILS SHEET NUMBER: ENGINEERING JB JB BG C10256 10/5/12 AS SHOWN PM2.0